AutoCAD 2013 Command Reference Guide January 2012
© 2012 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc.
Contents Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . Using AutoCAD Documentation . . Using This Reference . . . . . . . . Executing Commands . . . . References to Other Sections . Chapter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 .1 .1 .2 .5 Commands . . . . .
3DORBIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 3D Orbit Shortcut Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 3DORBITCTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 3DOSNAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 -3DOSNAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 3DPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 3DPOLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 3DROTATE . . . . . . . .
ARRAYRECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Create Array Visor - Rectangular Array . . . . . . . . . . . 110 ARX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 ATTACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 ATTDEF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Attribute Definition Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 -ATTDEF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 ATTDISP . . . . . . . . . . .
Save Block Definition As Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 C Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 CAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Understand Syntax of Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Format Feet and Inches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Format Angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Use Points and Vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Use AutoLISP Variables . . . . . . . .
+CONSTRAINTSETTINGS . . . . . . . CONTENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Content Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . Manage Content Libraries Dialog Box . CONTENTCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONVERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONVTOMESH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONVTONURBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONVTOSOLID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONVTOSURFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPYBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COPYCLIP . .
DIMANGULAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 DIMARC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 DIMBASELINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 DIMBREAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 DIMCENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 DIMCONSTRAINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 DIMCONTINUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 DIMDIAMETER . . . . . . .
DXBIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 E Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 EATTEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Enhanced Attribute Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 EDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 EDGESURF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 Edit PGP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 ELEV . .
-GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GROUPEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box . . Hatch Visor . . . . . . . . . . . . Hatch Library . . . . . . . . . . . -HATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HATCHEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hatch Edit Dialog Box . . . . . . . -HATCHEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . HATCHGENERATEBOUNDARY . . . . . HATCHSETBOUNDARY . . . . . . . . . HATCHSETORIGIN . . . . . . . .
LAYER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539 Layers Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540 Select Linetype Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552 -LAYER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553 LAYERCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 LAYERP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 LAYERPMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558 LAYFRZ . . . . . . . . . . .
MATCHCELL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608 MATCHPROP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608 Match Properties Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 609 MATERIALASSIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612 MATERIALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613 MATERIALSCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613 MEASURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614 MEASUREGEOM . . . . . . . . .
Background Mask Dialog Box . . . . . . Find and Replace Dialog Box - MTEXT . Stack Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . AutoStack Properties Dialog Box . . . . Symbols and Special Characters . . . . . -MTEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MULTIPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MVSETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MVSETUP on the Model Layout . . . . . MVSETUP on a Named Layout . . . . . N Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PALETTEICONON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766 PAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767 Panning in Real Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767 Pan Shortcut Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768 -PAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769 PARAMETERS (-PARAMETERS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770 PASTECLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770 PDFADJUST . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lighting Properties . . . . . . . . Sun & Sky Properties . . . . . . . PROPERTIESCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . PSETUPIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -PSETUPIN . . . . . . . . . . . . PSPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PUBLISH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Batch Publish Dialog Box . . . . PURGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -PURGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PYRAMID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QDIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QLEADER . . . . . .
RENDERENVIRONMENT . . . . . . . . . . . Render Environment Dialog Box . . . . RENDEROUTPUTSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Size Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . -RENDEROUTPUTSIZE . . . . . . . . . . RENDERWIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RESETBLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RESETPALETTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RESUME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REVCLOUD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REVERSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REVOLVE . . . . . . . . . . . . .
New Project Layout Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 974 Add Custom Property Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975 Callout Blocks Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 976 Label Block for Views Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977 Repair Broken Layouts Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 978 SHEETSETHIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 979 SHOWPALETTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 979 SKETCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional Format Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1068 -TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1070 TABLEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1072 TABLEEXPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1072 TABSURF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1073 TARGETPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1075 TEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1078 Text Shortcut Menu . . . . .
Drawing Units Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1131 -UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1134 UPDATEFIELD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1135 UPDATETHUMBSNOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1135 UPLOADTOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1136 Login to AutoCAD WS Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1137 Upload Complete Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1138 V Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Z Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1188 ZOOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1188 Zoom Shortcut Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1192 Chapter 3 Command Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1195 Overview of Command Modifiers . . . . . . Coordinate Filters (Command Modifier) . . . Direct Distance Entry (Command Modifier) . FROM (Command Modifier) . . . . . . . . . MTP (Command Modifier) . . . . . . . . . .
AUPREC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1215 AUTOCOMPLETEDELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1216 AUTOCOMPLETEMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1216 AUTOSNAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1217 B System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1218 BACKZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1218 BINDTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1218 BLIPMODE . . . . . . .
COMPASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1235 CONSTRAINTBARDISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1235 CONSTRAINTBARMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1236 CONSTRAINTINFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1237 CONSTRAINTNAMEFORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1238 CONSTRAINTRELAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1238 CONSTRAINTSOLVEMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1239 CONTENTSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMAUNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1261 DIMAZIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1262 DIMBLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1263 DIMBLK1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1264 DIMBLK2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1265 DIMCEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1265 DIMCLRD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1266 DIMCLRE . . . .
DIMTIH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1283 DIMTIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1284 DIMTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1284 DIMTMOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1285 DIMTOFL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1285 DIMTOH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1286 DIMTOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1286 DIMTOLJ . . . .
DRAGP2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1310 DRAGVS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1311 DRAWORDERCTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1311 DRSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1312 DTEXTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1312 DWGCHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1313 DWGCODEPAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1313 DWGNAME . . . . . . . . . .
FILEDIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1334 FILLETRAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1335 FILLETRAD3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1335 FILLMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1336 FONTALT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1336 FONTMAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1337 FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1337 FRAMESELECTION . .
HIDEPRECISION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1356 HIDETEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1356 HIGHLIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1357 HPANG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1357 HPANNOTATIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1357 HPASSOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1358 HPBACKGROUNDCOLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1358 HPBOUND . . . . . . . . . . . .
INTERFEREVPVS . . . . . . . INTERSECTIONCOLOR . . . . INTERSECTIONDISPLAY . . . ISAVEBAK . . . . . . . . . . . ISAVEPERCENT . . . . . . . . ISOLINES . . . . . . . . . . . L System Variables . . . . . . . . . LARGEOBJECTSUPPORT . . . LASTANGLE . . . . . . . . . . LASTPOINT . . . . . . . . . . LASTPROMPT . . . . . . . . . LATITUDE . . . . . . . . . . . LAYEREVAL . . . . . . . . . . LAYEREVALCTL . . . . . . . . LAYERFILTERALERT . . . . . LAYERMANAGERSTATE . . . LAYERNOTIFY . . . . . . . . LAYLOCKFADECTL . . .
LOGINNAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1401 LONGITUDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1402 LTSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1402 LUNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1403 LUPREC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1403 LWDEFAULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1404 LWDISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1404 LWUNITS . . . . . .
OSOPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1424 P System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1425 PALETTEICONSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1425 PAPERSPACEVISOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1425 PAPERUPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1426 PARAMETERCOPYMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1426 PDFFRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1427 PDFOSNAP . . . . . . .
PROJMODE . . . . . . . . . PROPOBJLIMIT . . . . . . . PROXYGRAPHICS . . . . . PROXYNOTICE . . . . . . . PROXYSHOW . . . . . . . . PROXYWEBSEARCH . . . . PSLTSCALE . . . . . . . . . PSOLHEIGHT . . . . . . . . PSOLWIDTH . . . . . . . . PSTYLEMODE . . . . . . . . PSTYLEPOLICY . . . . . . . PSVPSCALE . . . . . . . . . PUCSBASE . . . . . . . . . Q System Variables . . . . . . . . QTEXTMODE . . . . . . . . R System Variables . . . . . . . . RASTERDPI . . . . . . . . . RASTERPERCENT . . . . . . RASTERPREVIEW . . .
SELECTIONAREAOPACITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1467 SELECTIONCYCLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1467 SELECTIONPREVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1467 SELECTIONPREVIEWLIMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1468 SELECTSIMILARMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1468 SHADEDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1469 SHADEDIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1470 SHADOWPLANELOCATION . . . . . . . . . .
SPLINETYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1489 SPLKNOTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1489 SPLMETHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1490 SPLPERIODIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1490 SSFOUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1491 SSLOCATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1491 SSMAUTOOPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1492 SSMPOLLTIME . . . . .
TILEMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1511 TIMEZONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1512 TOOLSETSSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1516 TOOLTIPMERGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1517 TOOLTIPSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1517 TOOLTIPTRANSPARENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1518 TRACKPATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1518 TRANSPARENCYDISPLAY . . . . .
VISRETAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1537 VPCONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1537 VPCOORDDISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1538 VPLAYEROVERRIDES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1538 VPLAYEROVERRIDESMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1539 VPMAXIMIZEDSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1539 VPROTATEASSOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1540 VSACURVATUREHIGH . . . . . . . . . .
VSSILHEDGES . . . . . VSSILHWIDTH . . . . . VTDURATION . . . . . VTENABLE . . . . . . . VTFPS . . . . . . . . . . W System Variables . . . . . . WHIPARC . . . . . . . . WINDOWAREACOLOR . WIPEOUTFRAME . . . . WORLDUCS . . . . . . WORLDVIEW . . . . . . WRITESTAT . . . . . . . X System Variables . . . . . . XCLIPFRAME . . . . . . XDWGFADECTL . . . . XEDIT . . . . . . . . . . XFADECTL . . . . . . . XLOADCTL . . . . . . . XLOADPATH . . . . . . XREFCTL . . . . . . . . XREFNOTIFY . . . . . . XREFSTATE . . . . . .
Introduction 1 Introduction The Command Reference, a comprehensive guide to AutoCAD® commands, lists all AutoCAD commands in alphabetical order. In addition to the command listings, the Command Reference covers several topics in the appendixes: command aliases, system variables, dimension variables, utilities, standard libraries, graphical database objects, and Unicode fonts.
variable governs whether you work in a dialog box or at the command prompt when you use certain commands. See appendix B, “System Variables”. Executing Commands The process of executing a command begins by starting the command, using one of several methods. For some commands, such as REGEN (page 889) , no further action is required. For other commands, you must respond by providing additional information or actions in order to complete the command.
Using Transparent Commands In many cases, you can start a command while using another command. The command you start is called a transparent command. For example, to turn on the grid while drawing a line, you can start the GRID (page 469) command transparently by preceding the command with an apostrophe. Two right angle brackets (>>) precede prompts for transparent commands.
and values based on the option or value that you last specified, or based on the settings of certain system variables. Typically, the first word of a prompt indicates the type of action you can take. Most command prompts begin with the wordenter, select, or specify. These words indicate how you can respond to the prompt. Terminology in command prompts If the prompt starts with... You can... Select Select objects on the screen using your pointing device. Enter Enter text at the command prompt.
example, the POLYGON (page 832) command displays the following prompt, suggesting 4 as the number of sides for your polygon: Command: polygon Enter number of sides <4>: To accept the default value, press Enter or Spacebar. Using Wild-Card Characters at the Command Prompt When the prompt directions ask for a name list, such as a block name, variable name, named view, and so on, you can use wild-card characters to specify names. See the table in “Group and Sort the List of Layers” in the User's Guide.
6
Commands 2 Overview of Commands You can start a command by using one of the following methods: ■ Click the command name on a menu, status bar, tool set, or shortcut menu. ■ Enter the command name or command alias at the Command prompt and press Enter or Spacebar. The acad.pgp file lists the command aliases. To access the acad.pgp, on the Tools menu, click Customize ➤ Edit Command Aliases (PGP).
Enter an option [Box (page 8)/Cone (page 10)/DIsh (page 12)/DOme (page 12)/Mesh (page 13)/Pyramid (page 14)/Sphere (page 15)/Torus (page 16)/Wedge (page 18)]: Box Creates a 3D box polyface mesh. Corner of Box Sets the first corner of the box. Length of Box Sets the first corner of the box. Width Specifies the width of the box. Enter a distance or specify a point relative to the corner point of the box. Height of Box Specifies the height of the box.
Reference Aligns the box with other objects in the drawing or relative to an angle you specify. The base point for the rotation is the first corner of the box. ■ Reference Angle:Defines a reference angle by specifying two points or an angle from the X axis on the XY plane. For example, you can rotate the box to align two specified points on the box with a point on another object. After defining a reference angle, specify a point for the reference angle to align with.
Specify the reference angle <0>: Specify a point, enter an angle, or press Enter You can define a reference angle by specifying two points or an angle from the X axis on the XY plane. For example, you can rotate the box to align two specified points on the box with a point on another object. After defining a reference angle, specify a point for the reference angle to align with. The box then rotates around the first corner relative to the angle of rotation specified for the reference angle.
Radius for Top Defines the top of the cone by its radius. A value of 0 produces a cone. A value greater than 0 produces a truncated cone. Specify height of cone: Specify a distance Enter number of segments for surface of cone <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press Enter Diameter for Top Defines the top of the cone by its diameter. A value of 0 produces a cone. A value greater than 0 produces a truncated cone.
Enter number of segments for surface of cone <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press Enter Diameter for Top Defines the top of the cone by its diameter. A value of 0 produces a cone. A value greater than 0 produces a truncated cone. Specify diameter for top of cone <0>: Specify a distance Specify height of cone: Specify a distance Enter number of segments for surface of cone <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press Enter Dish Creates the lower half of a spherical polygon mesh.
Enter number of longitudinal segments for surface of dome: Enter a value greater than 1 or press Enter Enter number of latitudinal segments for surface of dome <8>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press Enter Diameter Defines the dome by its diameter.
Pyramid Creates a pyramid or a tetrahedron. Specify first corner point for base of pyramid: Specify a point (1) Specify second corner point for base of pyramid: Specify a point (2) Specify third corner point for base of pyramid: Specify a point (3) Specify fourth corner point for base of pyramid or [Tetrahedron]: Specify a point (4) or enter t Fourth Corner Point Defines the fourth corner point of the base of a pyramid.
Top Defines the top of the pyramid as a rectangle. If the top points cross, they create a self-intersecting polygon mesh. Specify first corner point for top of pyramid: Specify a point Specify second corner point for top of pyramid: Specify a point Specify third corner point for top of pyramid: Specify a point Specify fourth corner point for top of pyramid: Specify a point Tetrahedron Creates a tetrahedral polygon mesh.
Enter number of latitudinal segments for surface of sphere <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press Enter Diameter Defines the sphere by its diameter. Specify diameter of sphere: Specify a distance Enter number of longitudinal segments for surface of sphere <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press Enter Enter number of latitudinal segments for surface of sphere <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press Enter Torus Creates a toroidal polygon mesh that is parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS.
Specify radius of tube or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d Diameter of Torus Defines the torus by its diameter. Specify diameter of torus: Specify a distance Specify radius of tube or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d Radius of Tube Defines the tube by its radius.
Enter number of segments around torus circumference <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press Enter Wedge Creates a right-angle, wedge-shaped polygon mesh with a sloped face tapering along the X axis.
Summary You can specify one, two, or three points for the source object. Then, you can specify one, two, or three points for the destination. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select objects: Select the objects to align and press Enter Specify source plane and orientation . . . The selected object is moved and rotated so that the base points, and the X and Y axes of the source and destination align in 3D space.
Specify second source point or [eXit] : Specify a point for the X axis of the destination or press Enter The second point specifies a new X axis direction for the destination within a plane parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS. If you press Enter instead of specifying a second point, the X and Y axes of the destination are assumed to be parallel with the X and Y axes of the current UCS.
The entire selection set is treated as a single element in the array. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter type of array [Rectangular (page 21)/Polar (page 21)] : Enter an option or press Enter Rectangular Array Copies objects in a matrix of rows (X axis), columns (Y axis), and levels (Z axis). An array must have at least two rows or two columns or two levels. Specifying one row requires that more than one column be specified, and vice versa.
The specified angle determines how far the objects are arrayed about the axis of rotation. A positive number produces a counterclockwise array rotation. A negative number produces a clockwise array rotation. Entering y or pressing Enter rotates each array element. See also: Array Objects 3DCONFIG (-3DCONFIG) Sets options that affect 3D display performance. Summary Enter -3dconfig at the Command prompt to use this command. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Curve Tessellation Determines the amount of detail for curves in your drawing. A higher setting provides more detail but uses more tessellation lines and more memory. Number of Tessellations to Cache Configures your system according to memory and performance requirements. The 3D cache always stores at least one tessellation. When this option is set to 1, the tessellation for all viewports is the same; some objects in the drawing may be regenerated as you zoom in and out.
■ ■ Enhanced 3D Performance. Enables a more efficient use of the graphic card when working with 3D objects. NOTE If you experience problems with precision, turn this option off. ■ Smooth display. Controls the status of the full screen anti-aliasing effect. This option removes the jagged effect on the display of diagonal line and curved edges. ■ Advanced material effects. Controls the status of the advanced materials effect on screen. ■ Gooch hardware shader. Enables the use of Gooch shading.
3DDISTANCE Starts the interactive 3D view and makes objects appear closer or farther away. Access Methods Menu: View ➤ Camera ➤ Adjust Distance Shortcut menu: Start any 3D navigation command, right-click in the drawing area, and click Other Navigation Modes ➤ Adjust Distance (4). Summary 3DDISTANCE changes the cursor to a line with one arrow pointing up and one pointing down.
The Grips on the Gizmo The 3D Edit Bar gizmo includes three grips: ■ Triangle grip. Specifies the method for reshaping the selected object. ■ Square grip. Reshapes the selected object by moving the base point or changing the tangent direction at the base point. Use the three axes to restrict the movement option to a specified axis. Similarly, the three squares that touch the square grip restrict the movement option to the specified planes.
■ Tangent arrow grip. Changes the magnitude of the tangent at the base point. For example, lengthening the tangent arrow grip flattens the curvature of the surface at the point of tangency. The tangent arrow points in the direction of one of the surface’s U, V, or W axes, depending on the tangent direction specified in 3D Edit Bar Shortcut Menu (page 29).
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select a NURBS surface or curve to edit Specifies the object to be modified. Valid objects include lines, arcs, circles, ellipses and elliptical arcs, polylines, helixes, splines, and NURBS surfaces. Objects other than surfaces can be converted to splines. Select point on curve or Select point on NURBS surface Specifies a base point on the selected curve or NURBS surface. Changes to the selected object are relative to this point.
See also: Modify Splines Edit NURBS Surfaces 3D Edit Bar Shortcut Menu Displays options to set the location of the base point, constraints, and tangency. Access Methods Shortcut menu: Right-click on the 3D Edit Bar gizmo. Summary The 3D Edit Bar shortcut menu displays several options depending on whether a spline or a NURBS surface is selected, where you click, and which editing method, move or tangent, is current.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Move Point Location Reshapes the selected object by moving the base point. Move Tangent Direction Reshapes the selected object by changing the slope of the tangent at the base point. U Tangent Direction Locates the tangent arrow grip on the U axis. Changes to the tangency are constrained to the UW plane. V Tangent Direction Locates the tangent arrow grip on the V axis. Changes to the tangency are constrained to the VW plane.
Summary After entering the last two points for a 3D face, the command repeats automatically using the these two points as the first two points of the next 3D face. For example: List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify first point (page 31) or [Invisible (page 31)]: Specify a point (1) or enter i First Point Defines the start point for the 3D surface. After entering the first point, enter the remaining points in a natural clockwise or counterclockwise order to create a normal 3D face.
Specify second point or [Invisible]: Specify a point (2) or enter i Specify third point or [Invisible] : Specify a point (3), enter i, or press Enter Specify fourth point or [Invisible] : Specify a point (4), enter i, or press Enter The Third Point and Fourth Point prompts are repeated until you press Enter. Specify points 5 and 6 at these repeating prompts. When you finish entering points, press Enter.
Shortcut menu: Start any 3D navigation command, right-click in the drawing area, and click Other Navigation Modes ➤ Free Orbit (2). Summary Selecting one of more objects before starting this command limits the display to those objects only. While the command is active, right-click to display additional options from a shortcut menu. 3DFORBIT activates a 3D Free Orbit view in the current viewport.
3D Free Orbit Cursor Icons While using 3D Free Orbit, the cursor changes as it is moved to indicate how the model will be orbited when clicking and dragging. View rotation is determined by the placement and appearance of the cursor as follows: Sphere Encircled by Two Lines When you move the cursor inside the arcball, it changes to a small sphere encircled by two lines. If you click and drag in the drawing area you can move freely around the objects.
See also: 3D Navigation Tools 3DMESH Creates a free-form polygon mesh. Summary The mesh density controls the number of facets, and is defined in terms of a matrix of M and N vertices, similar to a grid consisting of columns and rows. 3DMESH is a legacy method for creating mesh, designed primarily for operation under program control rather than by manual entry. To take advantage of smoothing, creasing, and refinement capabilities, use the MESH (page 620) command.
The location of each vertex in the mesh is defined by m and n, the row and column indices of the vertex. Defining vertices begins with vertex (0,0). You must supply the coordinate locations for each vertex in row m before specifying vertices in row m + 1. Vertices may be any distance from each other. The M and N orientation of a mesh depends on the position of its vertices. 3DMESH polygon meshes are always open in both M and N directions. You can close a mesh with PEDIT (page 779).
If the default gizmo (DEFAULTGIZMO (page 1247)) is 3D Move, the 3D Move gizmo is displayed whenever you select an object in a view with a 3D visual style. If you are working in a viewport with 2D Wireframe set as the visual style, 3DMOVE temporarily changes the visual style to 3D Wireframe for the duration of the command. The 3D Move gizmo is displayed at the center of the selected 3D object or objects by default. You can use the shortcut menu to change its location.
When you have selected an object, the gizmo is displayed. You can constrain the movement by clicking one of the following locations on the gizmo: ■ Move along an axis. Click an axis to constrain the movement to that axis. ■ Move along a plane. Click the area between the axes to constrain the movement to that plane. Stretch point When you are specifying the move using the gizmo, sets the new location of the selected objects. Drag and click to move the objects dynamically.
3D Move Gizmo Shortcut Menu Displays options to set the constraint of a 3D object, switch gizmos, and move or align the gizmo. Access Methods Shortcut menu: Right-click the 3D Move gizmo List of Options The following options are displayed. Move Activates the 3D Move gizmo. Rotate Activates the 3D Rotate gizmo. Scale Activates the 3D Scale gizmo. Set Constraint Sets whether the change is constrained to a specific axis. ■ X, Y or Z. Restricts the change to the designated axis. ■ XY, YX, or ZX.
Respect Dynamic UCS When relocating the gizmo, as you move the cursor, temporarily aligns the XY plane of the UCS with the faces or edges. See also: Move 3D Objects 3DORBIT Rotates the view in 3D space, but constrained to horizontal and vertical orbit only. Access Methods Button Menu: View ➤ Orbit ➤ Constrained Orbit Pointing device: Press Shift and click the mouse wheel to temporarily enter 3D Orbit mode.
NOTE You cannot edit objects while the 3DORBIT command is active. While the command is active, you can access additional 3DORBIT options from a shortcut menu by right-clicking in the drawing area. See 3D Orbit Shortcut Menu (page 41). See also: Use 3D Navigation Tools 3D Orbit Shortcut Menu When the 3DORBIT command (or any 3D navigation command or mode) is active, you can access the options on the 3D Orbit shortcut menu. To access the 3D Orbit shortcut menu, right-click in the 3D Orbit view.
Enable Orbit Auto Target Keeps the target point on the objects you are viewing rather than on the center of the viewport. This feature is turned on by default. Zoom Window Changes the cursor to a window icon so that you can select a specific area to zoom in on. When the cursor changes, click a starting point and end point to define the zoom window. The drawing is zoomed in and focused on the area you selected. Zoom Extents Centers the view and sizes it to display all objects.
Named Views Displays a list of named views in the drawing. Choose a named view from the list to change the current view of your model. Visual Styles Provides methods for shading objects. For more information about visual styles, see Use a Visual Style to Display Your Model. The options are the same as the options in VSCURRENT (page 1158). Visual Aids Provides aids to visualizing the objects. ■ Compass. Draws a 3D sphere composed of three lines representing the X, Y, and Z axes. ■ Grid.
3DORBITCTR overrides the AutoTarget option in the 3DORBIT (page 40) command. See also: Use 3D Navigation Tools 3DOSNAP Sets the object snap modes for 3D objects. Access Methods Menu: Tools ➤ Drafting Settings Shortcut menu: Press Shift while right-clicking in the drawing area and choose 3D Osnap ➤ Osnap Settings. Toolbar: Status bar (expanded) ➤ 3D Object Snap Summary Displays the 3D Object Snap tab of the Drafting Settings dialog box (page 369).
-3DOSNAP Uses command prompts to set running object snap modes for 3D objects. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter List of Object Snap Modes Specify one or more object snap modes by entering the first four characters of the name. If you enter more than one, separate the names with commas. ■ ZVERtex. Snaps to a vertex or a control vertex. ■ ZMIDpoint. Snaps to the midpoint on a face edge. ■ ZCENter. Snaps to the center of a face. ■ ZKNOt. Snaps to a spline knot.
You can view your entire drawing or select objects before entering 3DPAN. See also: Use 3D Navigation Tools 3DPOLY Creates a 3D polyline. Access Methods Button Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Polyline Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Open Shapes tool group (expanded) ➤ 3D Polyline Summary A 3D polyline is a connected sequence of straight line segments created as a single object. 3D polylines can be non-coplanar; however, they cannot include arc segments. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Specify endpoint of line or [Undo]: Specify a point or enter an option Specify endpoint of line or [Close (page 47)/Undo]: Specify a point or enter an option Endpoint of Line Draws a straight line from the previous point to the specified new point. The prompt is repeated until you press Enter to end the command. Undo Deletes the last line created. You can continue drawing from the previous point. Close Draws a closing line from the endpoint back to the first point, and then ends the command.
Access Methods Menu: Modify ➤ 3D Operations ➤ 3D Rotate Summary With the 3D Rotate gizmo, you can rotate selected objects and subobjects freely or constrain the rotation to an axis. If you are working in a viewport with 2D Wireframe set as the visual style, 3DROTATE temporarily changes the visual style to 3D Wireframe for the duration of the command. The 3D Rotate gizmo is displayed at the center of the selected object or objects by default.
Base point Sets the center point of the rotation. Pick a rotation axis On the 3D Scale gizmo, specifies the axis of rotation. Move the mouse until the axis path you want to select turns yellow, then click to select it. Specify angle start point or type an angle Sets the relative start point of the rotation. You can also enter an angle value. Specify angle end point Rotates the object about the specified axis. Click to end the rotation.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Move Activates the 3D Move gizmo. Rotate Activates the 3D Rotate gizmo. Scale Activates the 3D Scale gizmo. Set Constraint Sets whether the change is constrained to a specific axis. ■ X, Y or Z. Restricts the change to the designated axis. Relocate Gizmo Moves the gizmo to the point you specify. Align Gizmo With Sets the alignment for the change.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select objects Specifies the objects to be scaled. Specify base point Specifies the base point for the scaling. Pick a scale axis or plane Specifies whether the object is scaled uniformly or only along a specific axis or plane. You have the following choices: ■ Scale uniformly. Click the area closest to the vertex of the 3D Scale gizmo. The interior region of all axes of the gizmo is highlighted. ■ Constrain the scale to a plane.
Specify scale factor Specifies the amount of change. Drag to dynamically modify the size of the selected objects or enter a scale value. For example, enter 2 to double the size of the selection. Copy Creates and scales a copy of the selected objects. Reference Sets a scale based on a ratio. ■ Reference length. Sets the relative amount that represents the current size in the scale ratio. ■ New Length. Sets the relative value used to calculate the new size.
Rotate Activates the 3D Rotate gizmo. Scale Activates the 3D Scale gizmo. Set Constraint Sets whether the change is constrained to a specific axis. ■ X, Y or Z. Restricts the change to the designated axis. ■ XY, YX, or ZX. Restricts the change to a plane that is defined by the selected axes. ■ XYZ. Applies the scaling uniformly to all axes. NOTE Unlike most other objects, mesh objects support non-uniform scale. Relocate Gizmo Moves the gizmo to the point you specify.
Summary Simulates panning with a camera in the direction that you drag. The target of the view changes. You can swivel the view along the XY plane or along the Z axis. See also: Use 3D Navigation Tools 3DZOOM Zooms in and out in a perspective view. Access Methods Menu: View ➤ Zoom Pointing device: Scroll the mouse wheel to zoom in and out. Shortcut menu: Start any 3D navigation command, right-click in the drawing area, and click Other Navigation Modes ➤ Zoom (8).
Window Zooms to display an area specified by two points of a rectangular window. Previous Zooms to display the previous view. Object Zooms to display one or more selected objects as large as possible and in the center of the view. Real Time Using the pointing device, zooms interactively. See also: Specify 3D Views A Commands ABOUT Displays information about AutoCAD.
Access Methods Menu: Insert ➤ ACIS File Summary The Select ACIS File box is displayed. Select the file to import in the File Name list. The SAT (ASCII) ACIS file is imported into the drawing. NOTE ACISIN imports SAT files up to ACIS version 7.0. See also: Import ACIS SAT Files ACISOUT Exports a body object, solid, or region to an ACIS file. Summary Selected objects that are not solids or regions are ignored, and the Create ACIS File dialog box is displayed. Enter the name of the file you want to create.
Summary Differs from COPY by duplicating only the general properties (page 845) of an object. For example, creating an object based on a selected circle adopts the general properties of the circle, such as its color and layer, but prompts you for the new circle’s center point and radius. With the ADDSELECTED command, you can create a new object with the same object type as a selected object.
List of Prompts The following prompt is displayed. Select object: Use an object selection method The prompts vary by object type. See also: Copy, Array, Offset, or Mirror Objects ALIGN Aligns objects with other objects in 2D and 3D.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select objects: Select the objects to align and press Enter Specify either one (page 59), two (page 59), or three pairs (page 60) of source points and definition points to align the selected objects. ALIGN Using One Pair of Points When you select only one source point and destination point pair, the selected objects move in 2D or 3D from the source point (1) to the destination point (2).
ALIGN Using Three Pairs of Points When you select three point pairs, you can move and rotate the selected objects in 3D to align with other objects. The selected objects move from the source point (1) to the destination point (2). The selected object is rotated (1 and 3) so that it aligns with the destination object (2 and 4). The selected object is then rotated again (3 and 5) so that it aligns with the destination object (4 and 6).
modeler's finer tolerance may interpret these surfaces as being slightly offset. This phenomenon is most apparent with aligned features such as fillets, chamfers, and through-holes. Holes might become blind holes when the new modeler, with its much finer approximation capability, interprets what was once a through-hole as being slightly less wide than the solid. Typically, the length of the remaining solid material is the difference between the tolerance of the previous modeler and that of the new modeler.
Positive Gaussian curvature means that the surface is shaped like a bowl. Negative Gaussian curvature means the surface is shaped like a saddle (as shown below). Mean curvature and a zero Gaussian value means that the surface is flat in at least one direction (planes, cylinders, and cones have zero Gaussian curvature). To change the curvature analysis display settings, use the Curvature tab (page 65) of the Analysis Options dialog box (page 64).
If the surface is parallel to the construction plane with surface normals facing in the same direction as the current UCS, the draft angle is 90.0. When perpendicular, it is 0. If the surface is parallel to the current UCS with surface normals facing in the opposite direction than the current UCS, the draft angle is -90.0. To change the draft analysis display settings, use the Draft Angle tab (page 66) of the Analysis Options dialog box (page 64).
Analysis Options Dialog Box Sets the display options for zebra, curvature, and draft analysis. List of Tabs The Analysis Options dialog box contains the following tabs: ■ Zebra (page 64) ■ Curvature (page 65) ■ Draft Angle (page 66) See also: Analyze Surfaces Zebra Tab (Analysis Options Dialog Box) Changes the display settings for the ANALYSISZEBRA command. List of Options The following options are displayed. Select Objects to Analyze Prompts you to select the surface objects to analyze.
Sets the first color for zebra stripes. (VSAZEBRACOLOR1 (page 1543)) Color 2 Sets the second color for zebra stripes. (VSAZEBRACOLOR2 (page 1543)) Clear Zebra Analysis Removes the zebra display from all objects in the current drawing. See also: Analyze Surfaces Curvature Tab (Analysis Options Dialog Box) Changes the display settings for the ANALYSISCURVATURE command. List of Options The following options are displayed. Select objects to analyze Prompts you to select the surface objects to analyze.
Calculates the maximum and minimum ranges of all objects selected for curvature analysis (VSACURVATUREHIGH (page 1540) and VSACURVATURELOW (page 1541) system variables). Clear Curvature Analysis Removes the curvature analysis display from all objects in the current drawing. See also: Analyze Surfaces Draft Angle Tab (Analysis Options Dialog Box) Changes the display settings for the ANALYSISDRAFT command. List of Options The following options are available.
ANALYSISZEBRA Projects stripes onto a 3D model to analyze surface continuity. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Analysis tool group ➤ Surface Analysis flyout ➤ Zebra Analysis Summary The way the stripes line up where two surfaces meet, helps analyze the tangency and curvature of the intersection. In this example, the surface continuity is G0 because the surface edges are coincident, but they are not tangent and they have different curvatures.
ANNORESET Resets the locations of all alternate scale representations of the selected annotative objects. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Annotation Scaling tool group ➤ Sync Scale Positions Menu: Modify ➤ Annotative Object Scale ➤ Synchronize Multiple-Scale Positions Shortcut menu: Select an annotative object. Right-click and choose Annotative Object Scale ➤ Synchronize Multiple-Scale Positions.
If an annotative object is updated to a non-annotative style, the object becomes non-annotative and any alternate are removed. See also: Work with Annotative Styles APERTURE Controls the size of the object snap target box. Access Methods Command entry: aperture (or 'aperture for transparent use) Summary Object snap applies only to objects inside or crossing the object snap target box. The APBOX (page 1208) system variable controls whether the object snap target box is displayed.
Access Methods Menu: Tools ➤ Load Application Summary The Startup Suite option loads the specified applications each time the product first starts. Application files can be dragged from the files list, or from any application with dragging capabilities. The Load/Unload Applications dialog box (page 70) is displayed. See also: Overview of AutoLISP Automatic Loading Load/Unload Applications Dialog Box Loads and unloads applications and defines which applications to load at startup.
Summary Loads and unloads applications and specifies applications to be loaded at startup. List of Options The following options are displayed. The options at the top of this dialog box are derived from the standard file selection dialog box (page 723). Following are descriptions of the additional options provided by the Load/Unload Applications dialog box: Load Loads or reloads the applications that are currently selected either in the files list or on the History List tab.
If you select a file that is already loaded, Load reloads the application when applicable. You cannot reload ObjectARX applications. In this case, you must first unload the ObjectARX application and then load it again. The Load option is also available from a shortcut menu by right-clicking a file on the History List tab. Loaded Applications Displays an alphabetical list (by file name) of currently loaded applications.
You can drag application files from the files list, or from any application with dragging capabilities such as Finder, into the Startup Suite area to add them to the Startup Suite. You cannot add applications that you load with the AutoCAD web browser to the Startup Suite. Contents Displays the Startup Suite dialog box (page 73).
Displays an alphabetical list (by file name) of the application files to load at startup. Add Displays the Add File to Startup Suite dialog box. You can use this dialog box to select files to add to the startup suite. Remove Removes selected files from the Startup Suite. See also: Overview of AutoLISP Automatic Loading ARC Creates an arc.
NOTE If you press Enter without specifying a point, the endpoint of the last drawn line or arc is used and you are immediately prompted to specify the endpoint of the new arc. This creates an arc tangent to the last drawn line, arc, or polyline. Specify second point of arc or [Center/End]: Second Point Draws an arc using three specified points on the arc's circumference. The first point is the start point (1). The third point is the endpoint (3).
Chord Length Draws either a minor or a major arc based on the distance of a straight line between the start point and endpoint. If the chord length is positive, the minor arc is drawn counterclockwise from the start point. If the chord length is negative, the major arc is drawn counterclockwise. Specify length of chord: Specify a length End Specifies the endpoint of the arc.
Direction Begins the arc tangent to a specified direction. It creates any arc, major or minor, clockwise or counterclockwise, beginning with the start point (1), and ending at an endpoint (2). The direction is determined from the start point. Specify tangent direction for the start point of arc: Radius Draws the minor arc counterclockwise from the start point (1) to the endpoint (2). If the radius is negative, the major arc is drawn.
Angle Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (2) using a center point (1) with a specified included angle. If the angle is negative, a clockwise arc is drawn. Specify included angle: Chord Length Draws either a minor or a major arc based on the distance of a straight line between the start point and endpoint. If the chord length is positive, the minor arc is drawn counterclockwise from the start point. If the chord length is negative, the major arc is drawn counterclockwise.
Summary Several commands are available to provide area information including AREA, MEASUREGEOM (page 616), and MASSPROP (page 600). Alternatively, use BOUNDARY (page 154) to create a closed polyline or region. Then use LIST (page 583) or the Properties Inspector (page 844) to find the area. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Object Calculates the area and perimeter of a selected object. You can calculate the area of circles, ellipses, splines, polylines, polygons, regions, and 3D solids. NOTE 2D solids (created with the SOLID (page 989) command) do not have an area reported. Select object: If you select an open polyline, the area is calculated as if a line were drawn from the last point entered to the first. When the perimeter is calculated that line length is ignored.
Specify points to define a polygon (3). The area to be added is highlighted in green. Press Enter. AREA calculates the area and perimeter and returns the total area of all the areas defined by selecting points or objects since Add mode was turned on. If you do not close the polygon, the area is calculated as if a line were drawn from the last point entered to the first. When the perimeter is calculated, that line length is added.
Access Methods Button Menu: Modify ➤ Array Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Copy tool group ➤ Array flyout Summary You can create copies of objects in a regularly spaced rectangular, polar, or path array. The DELOBJ (page 1251) system variable controls whether the source objects of the array are deleted or retained after the array is created. If you enter -array at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page 83). List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
See also: Array Objects -ARRAY Maintains legacy command line behavior for creating nonassociative, 2D rectangular or polar arrays. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select objects: Use an object selection method Enter the type of array [Rectangular (page 83)/Polar (page 84)] : Enter an option or press Enter Rectangular Creates an array of rows and columns of copies of the selected objects.
To add columns to the left, specify a negative value for the distance between columns. Rectangular arrays are constructed along a baseline defined by the current snap rotation. This angle is normally 0, so the rows and columns are orthogonal with respect to the X and Y drawing axes. The Rotate option of the SNAP (page 986) command changes the angle and creates a rotated array. The SNAPANG (page 1481) system variable stores the snap rotation angle.
Specify the angle to fill (+=ccw, -=cw) <360>: Enter a positive number for a counterclockwise rotation or a negative number for a clockwise rotation You can enter 0 for the angle to fill only if you specify the number of items.
NOTE This legacy dialog box does not support array associativity or path arrays. To use these features, use the ARRAY command. See also: Array Objects Array Dialog Box Creates multiple copies of objects in a pattern.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Select Objects Specifies the objects used to construct the array. You can select objects before or after the Array dialog box is displayed. To select objects when the Array dialog box is displayed, choose Select Objects. The dialog box temporarily closes. When you finish selecting objects, press Enter. The Array dialog box is redisplayed, and the number of objects selected is shown below the Select Objects button.
you can generate in one command is 100,000. The limit is set by the MAXARRAY setting in the registry. To reset the limit to 200,000, for example, enter (setenv "MaxArray" "200000") at the Command prompt. Offset Distance and Angle Provides a space for you to specify the distance and direction of the array's offset. Row Offset Specifies the distance (in units) between rows. To add rows downward, specify a negative value.
Pick Both Offsets Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can use the pointing device to set the row and column spacing by specifying two diagonal corners of a rectangle. Polar Array Creates an array by copying the selected objects around a specified center point. Center Point Specifies the center point of the polar array. Enter coordinate values for X and Y, or choose Pick Center Point to use the pointing device to specify the location.
counterclockwise rotation. A negative value specifies clockwise rotation. The default value is 360. A value of 0 is not permitted. Pick Angle to Fill Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can define the included angle between the base points of the first and last elements in the array. ARRAY prompts you to select a point relative to another point in the drawing area. Angle Between Items Sets the included angle between the base points of the arrayed objects and the center of the array.
Base point settings by object Object type Default base point Region Grip point Base Point NOTE To avoid unexpected results, set the base point manually if you are constructing a polar array and do not want to rotate the objects. Preview Closes the Array dialog box and displays the array in the current drawing. See also: Array Objects ARRAYCLOSE Saves or discards changes made to an array’s source objects and exits the array editing state.
Discard Changes Discards any changes made; the source object or replacement item in the array is returned to its original state. Save Changes Saves all changes made to the source object or to a replacement item of the array. See also: Array Objects ARRAYEDIT Edits associative array objects and their source objects. Access Methods Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Array Toolbar: Array visor ➤ Edit Source Shortcut menu: Select an associative array. Right-click and choose Array ➤ Edit Array.
For rectangular arrays: Enter an option [Source (page 93)/REPlace (page 93)/Base point (page 93)/Rows (page 94)/Columns (page 94)/Levels (page 94)/RESet (page 95)/eXit (page 95)] : For path arrays: Enter an option [Source/REPlace/Method (page 94)/Base point/Items (page 95)/Rows/Levels/Align items (page 95)/Z direction (page 95)/RESet/eXit] : For polar arrays: Enter an option [Source/REPlace/Base point/Items/Angle between (page 95)/Fill angle (page 95)/Rows/Levels/ROTate items (page 95)/RESet/eXi
Base Point Specifies a base point for positioning the objects in the array. Key Point For associative arrays, specifies a valid constraint (or key point) on the source objects to use as the base point. If you edit the source objects of the resulting array, the base point of the array remains coincident with the key point of the source objects. Rows Specifies the number and spacing of rows, and the incrementing elevation between them. Number of Rows Specifies the number of rows in the array.
Items (Path and Polar Arrays) Specifies the number of items in the array. Number of Items Specifies the number of items in the array using a value or expression. Fill Entire Path (Path Arrays) Uses the distance between items value to determine how the path is filled. Use this option if you expect the size of the path to change and want to maintain a specific spacing between array items.
See also: Edit Associative Arrays Path Array Visor Modifies the properties of an associative path array, such as base point, array method, and Z direction. Summary The Path Array visor is displayed when you select an associative array created with the Path option. The options on this visor can also be accessed using the ARRAYEDIT (page 92) command from the Command prompt. List of Options The following options are displayed. Base Point Redefines the base point of the array.
Align Items Specifies whether to align each item to be tangent to the path direction. Alignment is relative to the orientation of the first item. Z Direction Specifies whether to maintain the original Z direction or to naturally bank the items along a 3D path. See also: Edit Associative Arrays Polar Array Visor Modifies the properties of an associative polar array, such as base point and item rotation.
Rotate Items Specifies whether items are rotated as they are arrayed. See also: Edit Associative Arrays Rectangular Array Visor Modifies the properties of an associative rectangular array, such as base point and source item. Summary The Rectangular Array visor is displayed when you select an associative array created with the Rectangular option. The options on this visor can also be accessed using the ARRAYEDIT (page 92) command from the Command prompt.
ARRAYPATH Evenly distributes object copies along a path or a portion of a path. Access Methods Button Menu: Modify ➤ Array ➤ Path Array Command entry: Drafting tool set ➤ Copy tool group ➤ Array flyout ➤ Path Array Summary The path can be a line, polyline, 3D polyline, spline, helix, arc, circle, or ellipse. NOTE The 3D objects used in the example cannot be created in AutoCAD LT. This command is equivalent to the Path option in ARRAY (page 81) command.
100)/Rows (page 101)/Levels (page 101)/Align items (page 101)/Z direction (page 102)/eXit (page 102)]: Select a grip or an option Path Curve Specifies the object to use for the path of the array. Select a line, polyline, 3D polyline, spline, helix, arc, circle, or ellipse. Associative Specifies whether the arrayed objects are associative or independent. ■ Yes. Contains array items in a single array object, similar to a block.
Number of Items Along Path (Available when Method equals Divide) Using a value or expression, specifies how many items are in the array. Distance Between Items Along Path (Available when Method equals Measure) Using a value or expression, specifies the distance between arrayed items. By default, the array is populated with the maximum number of items that fill the path using the distance entered. You can specify a smaller number of items if desired.
Z Direction Controls whether to maintain the items’ original Z direction or to naturally bank the items along a 3D path. Exit Exits the command. See also: Create Path Arrays Create Array Visor - Path Array Modifies the properties of the path array as it is being created. Summary The Create Array visor is displayed after selecting the objects to array and the path in which the objects to follow while using the Path option of the ARRAY command or the ARRAYPATH command.
Method Controls how to distribute items along the path. Items Depending on the Method setting, specifies the number of items or the distance between items. Fill Entire Path Toggles the distribution of the select objects equally along the entire path. Item Count Specifies how many items are in the array. Available only when Method equals Divide and Fill Entire Path is not enabled. Spacing Specifies the distance between arrayed items. Available only when Method equals Measure.
This command is equivalent to the Polar option in ARRAY (page 81). After selecting objects to array and a center point for the array, the Create Array visor for polar arrays (page 106) is displayed. You can also use the Properties Inspector to set the properties of the new array while it is being created. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Associative Specifies whether the arrayed objects are associative or independent. ■ Yes. Contains array items in a single array object, similar to a block. With an associative array, you can quickly propagate changes throughout the array by editing the properties and source objects. ■ No. Creates array items as independent objects. Changes to one item do not affect the other items. Items Specifies the number of items in the array using a value or expression.
Rotate Items Controls whether items are rotated as they are arrayed. Exit Exits the command. See also: Create Polar Arrays Create Array Visor - Polar Array Modifies the properties of the polar array as it is being created. Summary The Create Array visor is displayed after selecting the objects to array and the center point or axis of rotation in which the objects are arrayed around while using the Polar option of the ARRAY command or the ARRAYPOLAR command.
ARRAYRECT Distributes object copies into any combination of rows, columns, and levels. Access Methods Button Menu: Modify ➤ Array ➤ Rectangular Array Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Copy tool group ➤ Array flyout ➤ Rectangular Array Summary Creates an array of rows and columns of copies of the selected object.
This command is equivalent to the Rectangular option in 3D rectangular array with three levels (page 81). After selecting objects to array, the Create Array visor for rectangular arrays (page 110) is displayed. You can also use the Properties Inspector to set the properties of the new array while it is being created. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Rows Specifies the number of rows in the array, the distance between them, and the incremental elevation between row. Number of Rows Sets the number of rows. Distance Between Rows Specifies the distance between each row, measured from equivalent locations on each object. Total Specifies the total distance between the start and end row, measured from equivalent locations on the start and end objects. Incrementing Elevation Sets the increasing or decreasing elevation for each subsequent row.
Distance Between Rows Specifies the distance between each row, measured from equivalent locations on each object. Distance Between Columns Specifies the distance between each column, measured from equivalent locations on each object. Unit Cell Specifies the distance between rows and columns simultaneously by setting the each corner of a rectangular area that is equivalent to the spacing. Expression Derives the value based on a mathematical formula or equation. Exit Exits the command.
Save Changes Saves the changes to the array and exits the command. See also: Create Rectangular Arrays ARX Loads, unloads, and provides information about ObjectARX applications. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter an option [Files (page 111)/Groups (page 111)/Commands (page 111)/CLasses (page 111)/Services (page 111)/Load (page 111)/Unload (page 111)]: Files Lists the currently loaded ObjectARX applications, which can be third-party programs or internal applications such as Render.
See also: Overview of ObjectARX ATTACH Inserts an external reference, raster image, or underlay (PDF files) in the current drawing. Access Methods Menu: File ➤ Attach Summary The Select Reference File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box (page 723)) is displayed. To select multiple DWG files for attach, set the Files of Type to Drawing. You can select one file only for all other file formats.
If you enter -attdef at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page 117). An attribute is an object that is created and included with a block definition. Attributes can store data such as part numbers, product names, and so on. See also: Define Block Attributes Attribute Definition Dialog Box Defines the mode; attribute tag, prompt, and value; insertion point; and text settings for an attribute.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Attribute Sets attribute data. Tag Identifies each occurrence of an attribute in the drawing. Enter the attribute tag using any combination of characters except spaces. Lowercase letters are automatically changed to uppercase. Prompt Specifies the prompt that is displayed when you insert a block containing this attribute definition. If you do not enter a prompt, the attribute tag is used as a prompt.
Justification Specifies the justification of the attribute text. See TEXT (page 1078) for a description of the justification options. Annotative Specifies that the attribute is annotative. If the block is annotative, the attribute will match the orientation of the block. Click the information icon to learn more about annotative objects. Text Height Specifies the height of the attribute text. Enter a value, or choose Height to specify a height with your pointing device.
Constant Gives attributes a fixed value for block insertions. Verify Prompts you to verify that the attribute value is correct when you insert the block. Preset Sets the attribute to its default value when you insert a block containing a preset attribute. Lock Location Locks the location of the attribute within the block reference. When unlocked, the attribute can be moved relative to the rest of the block using grip editing, and multiline attributes can be resized.
Specifies the Z coordinate of the attribute's insertion point. See also: Define Block Attributes -ATTDEF List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Verify Prompts for verification that the attribute value is correct when you insert the block. Preset Sets the attribute to its default value when you insert a block containing a preset attribute. Lock Position Locks the location of the attribute within the block reference. When unlocked, the attribute can be moved relative to the rest of the block using grip editing, and multiline attributes can be resized.
For a description of each option, see TEXT (page 1078). NOTE For single-line attributes, you can enter up to 256 characters. If you need leading blanks in the prompt or the default value, start the string with a backslash (\). To make the first character a backslash, start the string with two backslashes. When Multiple Line mode is on, -ATTDEF then displays several of the prompts used by the MTEXT command. For a description of each option, see MTEXT (page 677).
Summary The drawing is regenerated after you change the visibility settings unless REGENAUTO (page 890), which controls automatic regeneration, is off. The current visibility of attributes is stored in the ATTMODE (page 1213) system variable. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter attribute visibility setting [Normal (page 120)/ON (page 120)/OFF (page 120)] : Normal Restores the visibility settings of each attribute. Visible attributes are displayed.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Block tool group ➤ Edit Attributes flyout ➤ Single Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Attribute ➤ Single Summary The Edit Attributes dialog box (page 121) is displayed to edit attribute values for a specific block. If you enter -attedit at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page 123) to edit attribute values and properties independent of a block.
Summary To change attribute properties such as position, height, and style, use -ATTEDIT. List of Options The following options are displayed. Block Name Indicates the name of the selected block. The value of each attribute contained in the block is displayed in this dialog box. List of Attributes Displays the first eight attributes contained in the block. Edit the attribute values. If the block contains additional attributes, click Prev or Next to navigate through the list.
-ATTEDIT List of Prompts If you enter -attedit at the Command prompt, the following prompts are displayed. Edit attributes one at a time? [Yes (page 123)/No (page 125)] : Enter y or press Enter to edit attributes one at a time, or enter n to edit attributes globally The following prompts filter the attributes to be changed based on attribute tag, current value, or object selection. Yes Edits attributes one at a time. Attributes to be edited one at a time must be visible and parallel to the current UCS.
Value Changes or replaces an attribute value. Enter type of value modification [Change/Replace]: Enter c or r or press Enter Change Modifies a few characters of the attribute value. Either string can be null. The ? and * characters are interpreted literally, not as wild-card characters. Replace Substitutes a new attribute value for the entire attribute value. If you press Enter, the attribute value is empty (null). Position Changes the text insertion point.
Style Changes the style setting. Layer Changes the layer. Color Changes the color. You can enter a color from the AutoCAD Color Index (a color name or number), a true color, or a color from a color book. You can enter a color name, a color number between 1 and 255, or bylayer or byblock. True Color Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object. Color Book Specifies a color from a loaded color book to be used for the selected object.
No Edits attributes whether they are visible or not. Changes to attributes are not reflected immediately. The drawing is regenerated at the end of the command unless REGENAUTO (page 890), which controls automatic regeneration, is off. Attribute values are case sensitive. To select empty (null) attributes, which normally are not visible, enter a backslash (\). The attributes that match the specified block name, attribute tag, and attribute value are selected. Either string can be empty (null).
DXF: Drawing Interchange File Produces a subset of the AutoCAD Drawing Interchange File format containing only block reference, attribute, and end-of-sequence objects. DXF-format extraction requires no template. The file name extension .dxx distinguishes the output file from normal DXF files. In the Create Extract File dialog box, enter the name for the output file. The extract file's file name extension is .dxx for DXF format. Objects Selects objects whose attributes you want to extract.
See also: Modify a Block Attribute Definition ATTREDEF Redefines a block and updates associated attributes. Summary New attributes assigned to existing block references use their default values. Old attributes in the new block definition retain their old values. Any old attributes that are not included in the new block definition are deleted. WARNING ATTREDEF removes any format or property changes made with the ATTEDIT or EATTEDIT commands.
Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Block tool group (expanded) ➤ Synchronize Attributes Summary You are prompted for the names of blocks you want to update with the current attributes defined for the blocks. Use this command to update all instances of a block containing attributes that was redefined using the BLOCK or BEDIT commands. ATTSYNC does not change any values assigned to attributes in existing blocks. NOTE Use the ATTREDEF command to redefine and update blocks in one command.
If you set the AUDITCTL (page 1214) system variable to 1, AUDIT creates a text file describing problems and the action taken and places this report in the same folder as the current drawing, with the file extension .adt. If a drawing contains errors that AUDIT cannot fix, use RECOVER (page 877) to retrieve the drawing and correct its errors. See also: Repair a Damaged Drawing File AUTOCOMPLETE Controls what types of automated keyboard features are available at the Command prompt.
On Enables the operation of the AutoComplete features that are currently turned on. Off Suppresses the operation of the AutoComplete features without changing their settings. See also: The Command Line Enter Commands on the Command Line AUTOCONSTRAIN Applies geometric constraints to a selection set of objects based on orientation of the objects relative to one another.
B Commands BASE Sets the insertion base point for the current drawing. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Block tool group (expanded) ➤ Set Base Point Menu: Draw ➤ Block ➤ Base Command entry: base (or 'base for transparent use) Summary The base point is expressed as coordinates in the current UCS. When you insert or externally reference the current drawing into other drawings, this base point is used as the insertion base point.
Summary The Block Attribute Manager (page 133) is displayed. If the current drawing does not contain any blocks with attributes, a message is displayed. This command controls all attribute properties and settings of a selected block definition. Any changes to the attributes in a block definition are reflected in the block references. See also: Modify a Block Attribute Definition Block Attribute Manager Manages the attribute definitions for blocks in the current drawing.
Attributes of the selected block are displayed in the attribute list. By default, Tag, Prompt, Default, Mode, and Annotative attribute properties are displayed in the attribute list. For each selected block, a description below the attribute list identifies the number of its instances in the current drawing and in the current layout. You can specify which attribute properties you want displayed in the list by right-clicking over the attribute headers and choosing the ones to display.
Synchronize Blocks Updates all instances of the selected block with the attribute properties currently defined. This does not affect any values assigned to attributes in each block. Update Blocks Applies the changes made and closes the dialog box open. See also: Modify a Block Attribute Definition Attribute Editor Dialog Box Allows you to edit attributes for a block definition.
Tag Sets the identifier assigned to the attribute. Prompt Sets the text for the prompt that is displayed when you insert the block. Default Sets the default value assigned to the attribute when you insert the block. Options Mode options determine whether and how attribute text appears. Invisible Displays or hides the attribute in the drawing area. If selected, hides the attribute value in the drawing area. If cleared, displays the attribute value.
Turns value verification on and off. If selected, prompts you to verify the values you assign to the attribute when inserting a new instance of the block. If this option is cleared, verification is not performed. Preset Turns default value assignment on and off. If selected, sets the attribute to its default value when the block is inserted. If cleared, ignores the attribute's default value and prompts you to enter a value when inserting the block.
Specifies the angle that attribute text is slanted away from its vertical axis. Height Specifies the height of the attribute text. Width Factor Sets the character spacing for attribute text. Entering a value less than 1.0 condenses the text. Entering a value greater than 1.0 expands it. Multiline Text Width Specifies the maximum length of the lines of text in a multiple-line attribute before wrapping to the next line. A value of 0.000 means that there is no restriction on the length of a line of text.
Layer Specifies the layer that the attribute is on. Linetype Specifies the linetype of attribute text. Color Specifies the attribute's text color. Lineweight Specifies the lineweight of attribute text. Changes you make to this option are not displayed if the LWDISPLAY (page 1404) system variable is off. Plot Style Specifies the plot style of the attribute. If the current drawing uses color-dependent plot styles, the Plot Style list is not available.
BATTORDER Specifies the order of attributes for a block. Summary Displays the Attribute Order dialog box (page 140), which controls the order in which attributes are listed and prompted for when you insert or edit a block reference. You can only use the BATTORDER command in the Block Editor (page 143). See also: Attach Data to Blocks (Block Attributes) Attribute Order Dialog Box Specifies the order in which attributes are listed and prompted for when you insert or edit a block reference.
Attribute Definitions Lists the attribute definitions in the current block. Drag an attribute definition up or down in the list to reorder it. See also: Attach Data to Blocks (Block Attributes) BCLOSE Closes the Block Editor. Access Methods Toolbar: Block Editor visor ➤ Close Summary Closes the Block Editor (page 143). If you have modified the block definition since it was last saved, you are prompted to save or discard the changes.
Summary The Edit Block Definition dialog box (page 142) is displayed. Select a block definition to edit or enter a name for a new block definition to create, then click Edit Block to open the Block Editor (page 143). When the BLOCKEDITLOCK (page 1219) system variable is set to 1, the Block Editor cannot be opened. The Block Editor is a separate environment for creating and changing block definitions for the current drawing. You can also use it to add dynamic behavior to blocks.
Summary When you click Edit Block, the Edit Block Definition dialog box closes, and the Block Editor is displayed. ■ If you selected a block definition from the list, that block definition is displayed and is available for editing in the Block Editor. ■ If you entered a name for a new block definition, the Block Editor is displayed, and you can start adding objects to the block definition. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Summary You use the Block Editor to define the objects and behavior for a block definition. The following commands are used for editing blocks and are available only in the Block Editor: ■ BATTORDER (page 140) ■ BCLOSE (page 141) ■ BSAVE (page 163) ■ BSAVEAS (page 163) When the BLOCKEDITLOCK (page 1219) system variable is set to 1, the Block Editor cannot be opened. Block Editor Visor Provides tools for adding attributes to the block open for edit, save changes to a block, and close the Block Editor.
-BEDIT Summary If you select a block in a drawing and enter -bedit at the Command prompt, the selected block is opened in the Block Editor (page 143). If nothing is selected, the following prompt is displayed: List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed Enter block name (page 145) or [? (page 145)]: Enter a name or ? Block Name Specifies the name of a block saved in the current drawing to open in the Block Editor or specifies the name of a new block to create.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Modify tool group ➤ Blend Menu: Modify ➤ Blend Summary Select each object near an endpoint. The shape of the resulting spline depends on the specified continuity. The lengths of the selected objects remain unchanged. Valid objects include lines, arcs, elliptical arcs, helixes, open polylines, and open splines. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
If you use the Smooth option, do not switch the display from control vertices to fit points. This action changes the spline to degree 3, which will change shape of the spline. See also: Draw Splines BLIPMODE Controls the display of marker blips. Obsolete Access Methods Command entry: 'blipmode for transparent use Summary When Blip mode is on, a temporary mark in the shape of a plus sign (+) appears where you specify a point. BLIPMODE is off by default.
BLOCK Creates a block definition from selected objects. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Block tool group ➤ Create Menu: Draw ➤ Block ➤ Make Summary The Define Block dialog box (page 148) is displayed. If you enter -block at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page 151). You create a block definition by selecting objects, specifying an insertion point, and giving it a name. See also: Define Blocks Define Block Dialog Box Defines and names a block.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Name Names the block. The name can have up to 255 characters and can include letters, numbers, blank spaces, and any special character not used by the operating system or the program for other purposes. The block name and definition are saved in the current drawing. Preview If an existing block is selected under Name, displays a preview of the block.
Select Objects Closes the Block Definition dialog box temporarily while you select the objects for the block. When you finish selecting objects, press Enter to return to the dialog box. Convert to Block Converts the selected objects to a block instance in the drawing after you create the block. Retain Objects Retains the selected objects as distinct objects in the drawing after you create the block. Delete Objects Deletes the selected objects from the drawing after you create the block.
Specifies whether or not the block reference is prevented from being non-uniformly scaled. Annotative Specifies that the block is annotative. Match Block Orientation to Layout Specifies that the orientation of the block references in paper space viewports matches the orientation of the layout. This option is unavailable if the Annotative option is cleared. Allow Exploding Specifies whether or not the block reference can be exploded. Units Specifies units for the block.
Block Name Names the block. The name can have up to 255 characters and can include letters, numbers, blank spaces, and any special character not used by the operating system and the program for other purposes if the system variable EXTNAMES (page 1325) is set to 1. If you enter the name of an existing block, you are prompted as follows: Redefine Block Reference By redefining a block, you automatically update all references to that block.
The insertion base point becomes the origin of the block's coordinate system, which is parallel to the UCS in effect at the time that you define the block. When you insert the block into a drawing, its coordinate system is aligned parallel to the current UCS. Thus, you can insert a block at any orientation in space by setting the UCS first. ?—List Previously Defined Blocks Lists the block names in the text window.
appear in the new file, even if the Plot Glyph property of the lights is set to No. NOTE When the FILEDIA (page 1334) system variable is set to 0 (Off), Command prompts are displayed. See also: Export Raster Files BOUNDARY Creates a region or a polyline from an enclosed area. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Closed Shapes tool group (expanded) ➤ Boundary Menu: Draw ➤ Boundary Summary The Boundary Creation dialog box (page 155) is displayed.
See also: Create and Combine Areas (Regions) Boundary Creation Dialog Box Defines the object type, boundary set, and island detection method for creating a region or polyline using a specified point within an area enclosed by objects. List of Options The following options are displayed. Pick Points Determines a boundary from existing objects that form an enclosed area around the specified point.
Island Detection Controls whether boundary detects internal closed boundaries, called islands. Boundary Set Defines the set of objects boundary analyzes when defining a boundary from a specified point. Current Viewport Defines the boundary set from everything in the current viewport extents. Selecting this option discards any current boundary set. New Prompts you to select the objects that define the boundary set.
Island Detection Specifies whether boundary uses objects within the outermost boundary as boundary objects. For information about specifying island detection at the Command prompt, see the HATCH (page 473) Command prompt option. Object Type Specifies the type of object that boundary creates. ■ Region ■ Polyline See also: Create and Combine Areas (Regions) BOX Creates a 3D solid box.
Entering a positive value draws the height along the positive Z axis of the current UCS. Entering a negative value draws the height along the negative Z axis. The base of the box is always drawn parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS (work plane). The height of the box is specified in the Z-axis direction. You can enter both positive and negative values for the height. Center Creates the box by using a specified center point. Cube Creates a box with sides of equal length.
Cube Creates a box with sides of equal length. Length Creates a box with length, width, and height values you specify. If you enter values, the length corresponds to the X axis, the width to the Y axis, and the height to the Z axis. If you pick a point to specify the length, you also specify the rotation in the XY plane. 2Point Specifies that the height of the box is the distance between the two specified points. See also: Create a Solid Box BREAK Breaks the selected object between two points.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Modify tool group (expanded) ➤ Break Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Modify tool group (expanded) ➤ Break at Point Menu: Modify ➤ Break Summary You can create a gap between two specified points on an object, breaking it into two objects. If the points are off of an object, they are automatically projected on to the object. break is often used to create space for a block or text. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
First Point Overrides the original first point with the new point that you specify. Specify first break point: Specify second break point: The portion of the object is erased between the two points that you specify. If the second point is not on the object, the nearest point on the object is selected; therefore, to break off one end of a line, arc, or polyline, specify the second point beyond the end to be removed.
See also: Break and Join Objects BREP Removes the history from 3D solids and composite solids, and associativity from surfaces. Summary When a solid loses the history of the original parts from which it was created, the original parts can no longer be selected and modified. BREP also removes surface associativity. When a surface loses associativity it loses any mathematical expressions or information about how the surface was created.
See also: Display Original Forms of Composite Solids BROWSER Launches the default web browser defined in your system's registry. Summary Pressing Enter displays your web browser, which automatically connects to the location you specify. Because browser does not append “http://” to web locations, you can specify an FTP or file location to your default web browser. See also: Get Started with Internet Access BSAVE Saves the current block definition.
Access Methods Toolbar: Block Editor visor ➤ Save As Summary Displays the Save Block Definition As dialog box (page 164). You can only use the BSAVEAS command in the Block Editor (page 143). See also: Create Blocks Within a Drawing Save Block Definition As Dialog Box Saves a copy of the current block definition under a new name. List of Options The following options are displayed. Block Name Specifies a new name under which to save a copy of the current block definition.
Save Block as Drawing Saves the geometry in the Block Editor as a drawing file. Selecting an existing drawing file on disk overwrites the file. By default, the block name specified is used as the drawing file name. Block List Displays a list of block definitions that are saved in the current drawing. Preview Displays a preview of the selected block definition. Description Displays the description saved with the block definition.
Understand Syntax of Expressions CAL evaluates expressions according to standard mathematical rules of precedence: ■ Expressions in parentheses first, starting with the innermost set ■ Operators in standard order: exponents first, multiplication and division second, and addition and subtraction last ■ Operators of equal precedence from left to right Numeric Expressions Numeric expressions are real integer numbers and functions combined with the operators in the following table.
Vector Expressions A vector expression is a collection of points, vectors, numbers, and functions combined with the operators in the following table.
You can separate feet, inches, and fractional inches with a dash, a space, or nothing. You can use any of the following syntax cases to enter valid feet-inch formatted values: ■ 5' or 60” ■ 5'-9” or 5' 9” or 5'9” ■ 5'-1/2” or 5' 1/2” or 5'1/2” ■ 5'-9-1/2” or 5' 9-1/2” or 5'9-1/2” ■ 5'-9 1/2” or 5' 9 1/2” or 5'9 1/2” To designate inches for linear calculations, entering double quotes (“) is optional. For example, instead of entering 5'9-1/2”, you could enter 5'9-1/2.
Pi radians is equal to 180 degrees, and 100 grads is equal to 90 degrees. See also: Use the Command Prompt Calculator Use Points and Vectors Both points and vectors are pairs or triples of real numbers. A point defines a location in space, but a vector defines a direction (or translation) in space. Some CAL functions, such as pld and plt, return a point. Other functions, such as nor and vec, return a vector.
The following are valid points: [1,2] is the same as [1,2,0] [,,3] is the same as [0,0,3] [ ] is the same as [0,0,0] In the following example, the point is entered in the relative spherical coordinate system with respect to the (WCS). The distance is 1+2=3; the angles are 10+20=30 degrees and 45 degrees, 20 minutes. [ *1+2<10+20<45d20"] The following is a valid point that contains arithmetic expressions as its components: [2*(1.0+3.3),0.4-1.1,2*1.
Assigning Values to AutoLISP Variables To assign a value to an AutoLISP variable, precede the arithmetic expression with the variable name and the equal sign (=). Later, you can use the value of this variable for other calculations. This example saves the values of two expressions in AutoLISP variables P1 and R1.
getvar(userr2) See also: Use the Command Prompt Calculator Convert Units of Measurement The cvunit function converts either a number or a point from one unit of measurement to another. See the acad.unt file for a list of units that you can convert.
Numeric functions Function Description atan(real) Arctangent of the number ln(real) Natural log of the number log(real) Base-10 log of the number exp(real) Natural exponent of the number exp10(real) Base-10 exponent of the number sqr(real) Square of the number sqrt(real) Square root of the number; the number must be nonnegative abs(real) Absolute value of the number round(real) Number rounded to the nearest integer trunc(real) Integer portion of the number r2d(angle) Angles in radians
Calculate a Vector from Two Points The functions vec and vec1 calculate a vector from two points. vec(p1,p2) Provides the vector from point p1 to point p2. vec1(p1,p2) Provides the unit vector from point p1 to point p2.
Calculate the Length of a Vector The abs function calculates the length of a vector. abs(v) Calculates the length of vector v, a nonnegative real number. In spherical coordinates (dist
>> Expression: +3*vec1(cen,cen) The first point of the line is 1 unit in the Y direction from the center of the first selected circle. The second point of the line is 3 units away from the first point. The direction of the line is from the center of the first selected circle to the center of the second selected circle. See also: Use the Command Prompt Calculator Use Snap Modes in Arithmetic Expressions You can use Snap modes as parts of arithmetic expressions.
CAL Snap modes Abbreviation Snap mode QUA QUADRANT PER PERPENDICULAR TAN TANGENT The following example uses the Center and Endpoint Snap modes in a CAL expression: (cen+end)/2 CAL prompts for a circle or arc and an object. It then determines the midpoint between the center of the circle or arc and the end of the selected object.
Filtering the X, Y, and Z Components of a Point or Vector The following functions filter the X, Y, and Z components of a point or vector. Point-filter functions Function Description xyof(p1) X and Y components of a point; Z component is set to 0.0 xzof(p1) X and Z components of a point; Y component is set to 0.0 yzof(p1) Y and Z components of a point; X component is set to 0.0 xof(p1) X component of a point; Y and Z components are set to 0.
Calculate a Point on a Line The plt and pld functions return a point on a given line. You can specify the location of the point on the line either by its distance from the first point or parametrically by a t parameter. pld(p1,p2,dist) Calculates a point on the line passing through points p1 and p2. The parameter dist defines the distance of the point from the point p1. plt(p1,p2,t) Calculates a point on the line passing through points p1 and p2.
See also: Use the Command Prompt Calculator Obtain an Intersection Point The ill and ilp functions determine intersection points. ill(p1,p2,p3,p4) Determines the intersection point between two lines (p1,p2) and (p3,p4). All points are considered three-dimensional. ilp(p1,p2,p3,p4,p5) Determines the intersection point between a line (p1,p2) and a plane passing through three points (p3,p4,p5).
dpp(p,p1,p2,p3) Determines the distance from a point p to a plane defined by three points (p1,p2,p3). dist(p1,p2) Determines the distance between two points, p1 and p2. This is the same as the vector expression abs(p1-p2).
Obtain a Radius The rad function determines the radius of a selected object. rad Determines the radius of a selected object. The object can be a circle, an arc, or a 2D polyline arc segment. The following example uses rad with the CIRCLE (page 196) command.
ang(apex,p1,p2,p) Determines the angle between lines (apex,p1) and (apex,p2). The lines are considered 3D. The last parameter, point p, is used to define the orientation of the angle. The angle is measured counterclockwise with respect to the axis going from apex to p. The following examples show how angles are measured.
Calculate a Normal Vector The nor function calculates the unit normal vector (a vector perpendicular to a line or plane), not a point. The vector defines the direction of the normal, not a location in space. You can add this normal vector to a point to obtain another point. nor Determines the three-dimensional unit normal vector of a selected circle, arc, or polyline arc segment. This normal vector is the Z coordinate of the object coordinate system (OCS) of the selected object.
The following example sets the view direction perpendicular to a selected object. The program displays the object in plan view and does not distort the object by the parallel projection.
Use Shortcut Functions The functions in the table are shortcuts for commonly used expressions that combine a function with the Endpoint Snap mode.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Modify tool group ➤ Chamfer Menu: Modify ➤ Chamfer Summary The distances and angles that you specify are applied in the order that you select the objects. You can chamfer lines, polylines, rays, and xlines. You can also chamfer 3D solids and surfaces. If you select a mesh to chamfer, you can choose to convert it to a solid or surface before completing the operation. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
If you select lines or polylines, their lengths adjust to accommodate the chamfer line. You can hold down Shift while selecting the objects to override the current chamfer distances with a value of 0. If the selected objects are line segments of a 2D polyline, they must be adjacent or separated by no more than one segment. If they're separated by another polyline segment, CHAMFER deletes the segment that separates them and replaces it with the chamfer.
Undo Reverses the previous action in the command. Polyline Chamfers an entire 2D polyline. The intersecting polyline segments are chamfered at each vertex of the polyline. Chamfers become new segments of the polyline. If the polyline includes segments that are too short to accommodate the chamfer distance, those segments are not chamfered. Distance Sets the distance of the chamfer from the endpoint of the selected edge.
Trim Controls whether CHAMFER trims the selected edges to the chamfer line endpoints. NOTE Trim sets the TRIMMODE (page 1521) system variable to 1; No Trim sets TRIMMODE to 0. If the TRIMMODE system variable is set to 1, CHAMFER trims the intersecting lines to the endpoints of the chamfer line. If the selected lines do not intersect, CHAMFER extends or trims them so that they do. If TRIMMODE is set to 0, the chamfer is created without trimming the selected lines.
Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Solids - Edit tool group ➤ Chamfer Edge Menu: Modify ➤ Solid Editing ➤ Chamfer Edges Summary You can select more than one edge at a time, as long as they belong to the same face. Enter a value for the chamfer distance or click and drag the chamfer grips. List of Prompts Select an Edge Selects a single solid or surface edge to chamfer. Distance 1 Sets the distance of the first chamfer edge from the selected edge. The default value is 1.
CHANGE Changes the properties of existing objects. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed Select objects (page 192): Specify change point (page 192) or [Properties (page 193)]: Specify a new point, or press Enter to enter new values Specify Objects If you select lines and other changeable objects in the same selection set, you get varying results depending on the object selection sequence.
Specify New Text Insertion Point Relocates the text. Attribute Definitions Changes the text and text properties of an attribute that is not part of a block. Blocks Changes the location or rotation of a block. Specifying a new location relocates the block. Pressing Enter leaves the block in its original location. Properties Modifies properties of existing objects. NOTE The Plotstyle option is displayed only when you are using named plot styles. You can change several properties at a time.
Ltype Changes the linetype of the selected objects. If the new linetype is not loaded, the program tries to load it from the standard linetype library file, acad.lin. If this procedure fails, use LINETYPE (page 578) to load the linetype. Ltscale Changes the linetype scale factor of the selected objects. Lweight Changes the lineweight of the selected objects. Lineweight values are predefined values.
Enter property to change [Color (page 195)/LAyer (page 195)/LType (page 195)/ltScale (page 195)/LWeight (page 195)/Thickness (page 195)/TRansparency (page 196)/Material (page 196)/Annotative (page 196)]: NOTE The Plotstyle option is displayed only when you are using named plot styles. If you select several objects with different values for the property you want to change, varies is displayed as the current value. Color Changes the color of the selected objects.
Transparency Changes the transparency level of selected objects. Set the transparency to ByLayer or ByBlock, or enter a value from 0 to 90. Material Changes the material of the selected objects if a material is attached. Annotative Changes the Annotative property of the selected objects. See also: Display and Change the Properties of Objects CIRCLE Creates a circle.
For example: Diameter Defines the diameter of the circle. Enter a value, or specify a second point. For example: 3P (Three Points) Draws a circle based on three points on the circumference. For example: Tan, Tan, Tan Creates a circle tangent to three objects.
2P (Two Points) Draws a circle based on two endpoints of the diameter. For example: TTR (Tangent, Tangent, Radius) Draws a circle with a specified radius tangent to two objects. Sometimes more than one circle matches the specified criteria. The program draws the circle of the specified radius whose tangent points are closest to the selected points.
See also: Draw Circles CLASSICGROUP Creates and manages saved sets of objects called groups. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter a group option [? (page 199)/Order (page 199)/Add (page 199)/Remove (page 199)/Explode (page 199)/REName (page 199)/Selectable (page 200)/Create (page 200)] : Enter an option or press Enter ?—List Groups Lists names and descriptions of groups defined in the drawing. Order Changes the numerical order of objects within a group.
Selectable Specifies whether a group is selectable. When a group is selectable, selecting one object in the group selects the whole group. Objects on locked or frozen layers are not selected. Create Creates a group. Group names can be up to 31 characters long and can include letters, numbers, and special characters dollar sign ($), hyphen (-), and underscore (_) but not spaces. The name is converted to uppercase characters.
CLEANSCREENOFF Restores the state of the display before CLEANSCREENON was used. Access Methods Button Menu: View ➤ Clean Screen Command entry: Cmd-0 Toolbar: Status bar ➤ Clean Screen Summary Restores the state of the display before CLEANSCREENON (page 200) was used. Use CLEANSCREENON (page 200) to clear the screen of most user interface elements. See also: Set Up the Drawing Area CLIP Crops a selected external reference, image, viewport, or PDF underlay to a specified boundary.
On Turns on clipping and displays the PDF underlay or image clipped to the previously defined boundary. Off Turns off clipping and displays the entire PDF underlay or image, and frame. If you clip the PDF underlay or image again while clipping is off, clipping automatically turns on. You are prompted to delete the old boundary even when clipping is off and the clipping boundary is not visible. Delete Removes a predefined clipping boundary and redisplays the full original PDF underlay or image.
■ Remove. Removes both the front and back clipping planes. Delete Removes a clipping boundary for the selected xref or block. To temporarily turn off a clipping boundary, use the Off option. Delete erases the clipping boundary and the clipdepth. The ERASE (page 410) command cannot be used to delete clipping boundaries. Generate Polyline Automatically draws a polyline coincident with the clipping boundary. The polyline assumes the current layer, linetype, lineweight, and color settings.
viewport that has been previously clipped, the original clipping boundary is deleted, and the new clipping boundary is applied. See also: Clip External References and Blocks Clip Raster Images Clip PDF Underlays CLOSE Closes the current drawing. Access Methods Menu: File ➤ Close Summary The current drawing is closed. If you modified the drawing since it was last saved, you are prompted to save or discard the changes.
COLOR Sets the color for new objects. Access Methods Menu: Format ➤ Color Command entry: 'color for transparent use Summary The Color Palette dialog box (page 205) is displayed. If you enter -color at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page 212). See also: Set the Current Color Color Palette Dialog Box Defines the color of objects. Summary You can select from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors, true colors, and Color Book colors. List of Tabs The following tabs are displayed.
Index Color Tab (Color Palette Dialog Box) Specifies color settings using the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors. List of Options The following options are displayed. AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) Palettes Specifies a color from the AutoCAD Color Index. If you hover over a color, the number of the color and its red, green, blue value are displayed below the palette. Click a color to select it, or enter the color number or name in the Color box. The large palette displays colors 10 through 249.
Bylayer Specifies that new objects assume the color assigned to the layer on which you create them. When BYLAYER is selected, the color of the current layer is displayed in the Old and New color swatches. Byblock Specifies that new objects use the default color (white or black, depending on your background color) until you group the objects into a block and insert the block. When you insert the block into a drawing, the objects in the block inherit the current Color setting.
Summary Specifies color settings using true colors (24-bit color) with either the Hue, Saturation, and Luminance (HSL) color model or the Red, Green, and Blue (RGB) color model. Over sixteen million colors are available when using true color functionality. The options available on the True Color tab are dependent on whether the HSL or RGB color model is specified. List of Options The following options are displayed. HSL Color Model Specifies the HSL color model for selecting colors.
Saturation (S) Specifies the purity of a color. High saturation causes a color to look more pure while low saturation causes a color to look washed-out. To specify color saturation, use the color spectrum or specify a value in the Saturation box. Adjusting this value affects the RGB value. Valid saturation values are from 0 to 100%. Luminance (L) Specifies the brightness of a color. To specify color luminance, use the color slider or specify a value in the Luminance box.
Specifies the blue component of a color. Adjust the slider on the color bar or specify a value from 1 to 255 in the Blue box. If this value is adjusted, it will be reflected in the HSL color mode values. Color Specifies the RGB color value. This option is updated when changes are made to HSL or RGB options. You can also edit the RGB value directly using the following format: 000,000,000. True Color Stored as RGB Indicates the value for each RGB color component.
Summary Once a color book is selected, the Color Books tab displays the name of the selected color book. List of Options The following options are displayed. Color Book Specifies the color book to be used when selecting colors. The list consists of all the color books that are found in the Color Book Locations specified in the Application References dialog box, Application tab. Displays the pages of the selected color book and the colors and color names on each page.
Indicates the currently selected color book color. You can search for a specific color in a color book by entering the number of the color swatch and pressing Tab. This action updates the New color swatch with the requested color number. If the specified color is not found in the color book, the closest number match is displayed. Old Color Swatch Displays the previously selected color. New Color Swatch Displays the currently selected color.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. True Color Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object. Enter three integer values from 0 to 255 separated by commas to specify a true color Color Book Specifies a color from a loaded color book to be used for the selected object. Enter the name of a color book that has been installed. If you enter a color book name, you are prompted to enter the color name in the color book.
Access Methods Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Command Line Menu: Window ➤ Command Line Command entry: Cmd-3 Summary Hides the Command Line. When the Command Line is hidden, you can still enter commands with dynamic prompts turned on. See also: The Command Line COMPILE Compiles shape files and PostScript font files into SHX files. Summary The Select Shape or Font File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box (page 723)) is displayed. Enter the SHP or PFB file name in the dialog box.
Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Modeling ➤ Cone Summary Creates a 3D solid with a circular or elliptical base that tapers symmetrically to a point or to a circular or elliptical planar face. You can control the smoothness of 3D curved solids, such as a cone, in a shaded or hidden visual style with the FACETRES system variable. Use the Top Radius option to create a cone frustum. Initially, the default base radius is not set to any value.
Specify center point of base or [3P (page 216)/2P (page 217)/Ttr (page 217)/Elliptical (page 217)]: Specify a point (1) or enter an option Specify base radius or [Diameter (page 216)] : Specify a base radius, enter d to specify a diameter, or press Enter to specify the default base radius value Specify height or [2Point (page 216)/Axis endpoint (page 216)/Top radius (page 216)] : Specify a height, enter an option, or press Enter to specify the default height value Center Point of Base 2Po
■ Top Radius (page 216) 2P (Two Points) Defines the base diameter of the cone by specifying two points. ■ 2Point (page 216) ■ Axis Endpoint (page 216) ■ Top Radius (page 216) TTR (Tangent, Tangent, Radius) Defines the base of the cone with a specified radius tangent to two objects. Sometimes, more than one base matches the specified criteria. The program draws the base of the specified radius whose tangent points are closest to the selected points.
Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Parametric tool group ➤ Constraint Display flyout ➤ Show Geometric Constraints Menu: Parametric ➤ Constraints Bars ➤ Select Objects Summary The selection preview behavior for constraint bars is as follows: ■ Placing the cursor over an icon on a constraint bar highlights related geometry. ■ Placing the cursor over a constrained object (while constraint bars are displayed) highlights the constraint icons associated with the selected object.
CONSTRAINTSETTINGS Controls the display of geometric constraints on constraint bars. Access Methods Menu: Parametric ➤ Constraint Settings Summary The Constraint Settings dialog box (page 219) is displayed. See also: Overview of Constraints Constraint Settings Dialog Box Allows you to control the geometric constraints, dimensional constraints, and autoconstrain settings.
List of Options The following options are displayed. The Constraint Settings dialog box includes the following: ■ Geometric Tab (page 220) ■ Dimensional Tab (page 220) ■ Autoconstrain Tab (page 221) Geometric Tab Controls the display of constraint types on constraint bars. Infer Geometric Constraints Infers geometric constraints when creating and editing geometry. Displayed Constraints Controls the display of constraint bars or constraint point markers for objects in the drawing editor.
Show Lock Icon for Annotational Constraints Displays a lock icon against an object that has an annotational constraint applied (DIMCONSTRAINTICON (page 1267) system variable). Show Hidden Dynamic Constraints for Selected Objects Displays dynamic constraints that have been set to hide when selected. Autoconstrain Tab Controls the constraints that are applied to a selection set, and the order in which they are applied when using the AUTOCONSTRAIN (page 131) command.
See also: Overview of Constraints +CONSTRAINTSETTINGS Controls the tab that is displayed by default when the Constraint Settings dialog box is invoked. Tab Index Tab Displayed 0 Geometric tab 1 Dimensional tab 2 AutoConstrain tab See also: Overview of Constraints CONTENT Opens the Content palette.
Summary The Content palette (page 223) allows you to insert blocks from the current drawing or a custom library of blocks. You create libraries to access and organize your blocks. Blocks that you use frequently can be added to the Favorites library. See also: The Content Palette Content Palette Allows you to access and insert your blocks stored in libraries. List of Options The following options are displayed. Libraries List Displays the available libraries.
Manage Content Libraries Displays the Manage Content Libraries dialog box (page 225) in which you create and manage content of libraries. Blocks List Displays the blocks in the library selected from the Libraries list. Click a block from the list to insert it in the current drawing. If you right-click in the Blocks list, one of two shortcut menus is displayed.
■ Manage Libraries - Displays the Manage Content Libraries dialog box (page 225). See also: The Content Palette Manage Content Libraries Dialog Box Allows you to create and manage the blocks in a library. List of Options The following options are displayed. Libraries List Lists the available libraries. The Favorites library is available by default. Select a library to manage the blocks contained in the library in the Blocks list. Double-click the name of a library to rename it.
Add Block (+) Displays the Open File Dialog (a standard navigation dialog box) in which you select a drawing (DWG) or drawing template (DWT) file to add to the selected library. NOTE Hold down the Command key to select more than one file. Delete Library (-) Removes the selected block from the library. Filter Blocks List Filters the blocks displayed in the Blocks list. Click the ‘X’ in the text box to clear the current filter. Enter a text string to control which blocks are displayed in the Blocks list.
In most cases, you do not need to update polylines with CONVERT. By default, the PLINETYPE (page 1437) system variable specifies that polylines are updated automatically when you open an older drawing. Polylines may be created in the old format by third-party applications, and they may be contained in an older drawing that was inserted as a block and then exploded.
Use this method to convert 3D faces (3DFACE) and legacy polygonal and polyface meshes (from AutoCAD 2009 and earlier). You can also convert 2D objects such as regions and closed polylines. The level of smoothness upon conversion depends on the mesh type setting (FACETERMESHTYPE (page 1329) system variable). If the mesh type is not set to be optimized, the converted object is not smoothed. To convert mesh objects to 3D surfaces or solids, use CONVTOSOLID (page 229) or CONVTOSURFACE (page 232) commands.
CONVTONURBS Converts 3D solids and surfaces into NURBS surfaces. Access Methods Menu: Modify ➤ Surface Editing ➤ Convert to NURBS Summary Converts solids and procedural surfaces to NURBS surfaces. To convert meshes to NURBS surfaces, convert them to a solid or surface first with CONVTOSOLID (page 229) or CONVTOSURFACE (page 232) and then convert them to NURBS surfaces. See also: Create NURBS Surfaces CONVTOSOLID Converts 3D meshes and polylines and circles with thickness to 3D solids.
Summary Take advantage of the solid modeling capabilities available for 3D solids. When you convert mesh, you can specify whether the converted objects are smoothed or faceted, and whether the faces are merged. The smoothness and number of faces of the resulting 3D solid are controlled by the SMOOTHMESHCONVERT (page 1479) system variable.
Object Required properties Polyline Closed, zero-width, with thickness Surface Encloses a volume with no gaps between edges (such as a revolved surface that is capped at both ends or closed mesh objects that were converted to surfaces). If the surfaces enclose a watertight area, you can also convert to a solid with the SURFSCULPT (page 1058) command. Limitations on Conversion to Solid Objects Object Description Polyline Cannot contain zero-width vertices.
Select objects Specifies one or more objects to convert to 3D solid objects. You can select objects with thickness or mesh objects. If one or more objects in the selection set are invalid for the command, you will be prompted again to select objects. See also: Create 3D Solids from Objects CONVTOSURFACE Converts objects to 3D surfaces.
With the CONVTOSURFACE command, you can convert the following objects into surfaces: Objects That Can Be Converted to 3D Surfaces Objects 2D solids 3D solids Regions Open, zero-width polylines with thickness Lines with thickness Arcs with thickness Mesh objects Planar 3D faces C Commands | 233
objects converted to surfaces You can select the objects to convert before you start the command. NOTE You can create surfaces from 3D solids with curved faces, such as a cylinder, with the EXPLODE (page 411) command. The DELOBJ (page 1251) system variable controls whether the geometry used to create 3D objects is automatically deleted when the new object is created or whether you are prompted to delete the objects. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
See also: Convert Objects to Procedural Surfaces COPY Copies objects a specified distance in a specified direction. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Copy tool group ➤ Copy Menu: Modify ➤ Copy Shortcut menu: Select the objects to copy, and right-click in the drawing area. Click Copy Selection. Summary With the COPYMODE (page 1240) system variable, you can control whether multiple copies are created automatically.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select objects: Use an object selection method and press Enter when you finish Specify base point or [Displacement/mOde/Multiple] : Specify a base point or enter an option Specify second point or [Array]
Number of Items to Array Specifies the number of items in the array, including the original selection set. Second Point Determines a distance and direction for the array relative to the base point. By default, the first copy in the array is positioned at the specified displacement. The remaining copies are positioned in a linear array beyond that point using the same incremental displacement. Fit Positions the final copy in the array at the specified displacement.
Access Methods Menu: Edit ➤ Copy Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Clipboard ➤ Copy. Command entry: Cmd-C Summary COPYCLIP copies all objects you select to the Clipboard. You can paste the contents of the Clipboard into a document or drawing. NOTE If the cursor is in the drawing area, the selected objects are copied to the Clipboard. If the cursor is on the command line or in the text window, the selected text is copied to the Clipboard.
Access Methods Menu: Tools ➤ Customize ➤ Interface (CUI) Summary The Customize dialog box is displayed. You use the Customize dialog box to customize the menu bar and Tool Sets palette. For information about customizing the different user interface elements found in the Customize dialog box, see User Interface Customization in the Customization Guide. See also: Understand User Interface Customization Customize Dialog Box Manages customized user interface elements for the menu bar and Tool Sets palette.
Commands Tab (Customize Dialog Box) Creates and manages the available commands that can be added to menus and tool sets. List of Options The following options are displayed. Commands List Displays all the standard and custom commands available. ■ Image - Thumbnail of the current image assigned to the command. ■ Command - Name of the command. Displayed on the menu bar when the command is assigned to a menu or in a tooltip when the command is assigned to a tool group on the Tool Sets palette.
A custom command can be used to start a core AutoCAD command or one defined by a third party. Commands can also contain AutoLISP code. Options Displays a menu which allows you to manage existing commands in the Commands list. ■ Duplicate - Creates a copy of the command currently selected in the Commands list. Duplicating a command allows you to modify an existing command without changing the original one. ■ Delete - Removes the selected command from the Commands list.
Menus Tab (Customize Dialog Box) Creates and manages the menus and menu items on the Mac OS menu bar. List of Options The following options are displayed. Commands List Displays a list of the standard and custom commands that can be added to menus and tool sets. You must be on the Commands tab (page 240) if you want to create or edit a command. Drag the command to the location in the menu you want it positioned and drop it. The location of the command is indicated by the horizontal bar.
Enter a text string to control which commands are displayed in the Commands list. Only the names of the commands that contain the text string are displayed in the Commands list. Menus List Lists the menus available on the Mac OS menu bar. Expand a menu to see the commands and sub-menus that are assigned to the menu. Create New Element(+) Displays a menu which allows you to create a new menu or sub-menu. ■ Add Menu - Creates a new parent menu that is displayed directly on the Mac OS menu bar.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Commands List Displays a list of the standard and custom commands that can be added to menus and tool sets. You must be on the Commands tab (page 240) if you want to create or edit a command. Drag the command to the location in the menu you want it positioned and drop it. The location of the command is indicated by the horizontal bar. If you hover over a menu or sub-menu while dragging a command, the menu or sub-menu will expand after a short interval.
Tool Sets List Lists the tool sets available on the Tool Sets palette. Expand a tool set to see the commands, tool groups, and drop-downs (also known as flyouts) that are assigned to the tool set. Right-click over a tool set in the list and choose Specify Tool Set Image to display the Specify Tool Set Image dialog box (page 246). The image assigned appears next to the tool set name in the Tool Sets list on the Tool Sets palette.
Specify Tool Set Image Dialog Box Assigns an external image or internal resource to a tool set. List of Options The following options are displayed. Image Displays the name of the resource or external image file that is assigned to the tool set. Click […] to display the Select an Image File dialog box and specify the external image to assign to the tool set. Preview Displays a thumbnail of the selected image.
Summary CUTCLIP copies selected objects to the Clipboard, removing them from the drawing. You can paste the contents of the Clipboard into a document (see PASTECLIP (page 770)). When you want to use objects from a drawing file in another application, you can cut these objects to the Clipboard and then paste them into another application. You can also use Cut and Paste to transfer objects between drawings.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select a NURBS surface or curve to add control vertices Select a valid NURBS surface or curve and press Enter. Point Select a valid NURBS surface or curve and press Enter. Insert Knots Turns off the display of control vertices and allows you to place a point directly on a surface. This option only displays if you select a surface; it does not display for splines.
See also: Edit NURBS Surfaces CVREBUILD Rebuilds the shape of NURBS surfaces and curves. Access Methods Menu: Modify ➤ Surface Editing ➤ NURBS Surface Editing ➤ Rebuild Summary If you have difficulties editing the control vertices or there are too many control vertices, you can rebuild a surface or curve with less control vertices in the U or V direction. CVREBUILD also allows you to change the degree of the surface or curve.
If you select a surface, the Rebuild Surface dialog box (page 250) is displayed. If you select a spline, the Rebuild Curve dialog box (page 251) is displayed. See also: Edit NURBS Surfaces Rebuild Surface Dialog Box Rebuilds the CV hull of a NURBS surface. Summary Reshapes a NURBS surface by rebuilding the CV hull. List of Options The following options are displayed. Control Vertices Count Specifies the number of control vertices in the U and V directions.
In U Direction Specifies the degree of the NURBS surface in the U direction. (REBUILDDEGREEU (page 1456) system variable) In V Direction Specifies the degree of the NURBS surface in the V direction. (REBUILDDEGREEV (page 1457) system variable) Options Specifies the build options. (REBUILDOPTIONS (page 1457) system variable) Delete Input Geometry Specifies whether the original surface is retained along with the rebuilt surface.
Specifies the number of control vertices. (REBUILD2DCV (page 1455) system variable) Degree Specifies the degree of the NURBS curve. (REBUILD2DDEGREE (page 1455) system variable) Options Specifies the build options. (REBUILDOPTIONS (page 1457) system variable) Delete input geometry Specifies whether the original curve is retained along with the rebuilt curve. (REBUILD2DOPTION (page 1456) system variable) Maximum Deviation Displays the maximum deviation between the original curve and the new one.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select a NURBS surface or curve to remove control vertices Select a valid NURBS surface or curve and press Enter. Point Specifies a valid NURBS surface or curve and press Enter. Remove Knots Turns off the display of control vertices and allows you to remove a point directly from the surface. This option only displays if you select a surface; it does not display for splines.
Access Methods Menu: Modify ➤ Surface Editing ➤ NURBS Surface Editing ➤ Show CV Summary Prompts you to select the NURBS surfaces and curves whose control vertices you want to display. Non-NURBS surfaces do not have control vertices. You can convert objects to NURBS surfaces with the CONVTONURBS command. See also: Edit NURBS Surfaces CYLINDER Creates a 3D solid cylinder.
Summary In the illustration, the cylinder was created using a center point (1), a point on the radius (2), and a point for the height (3). The base of the cylinder is always on a plane parallel with the workplane. You can control the smoothness of curved 3D solids, such as a cylinder, in a shaded or hidden visual style with the FACETRES system variable. During a drawing session, the default value for the base radius is always the previously entered base radius value.
2P (Two Points) Defines the base diameter of the cylinder by specifying two points. ■ 2Point ■ Axis endpoint TTR (Tangent, Tangent, Radius) Defines the base of the cylinder with a specified radius tangent to two objects. Sometimes more than one base matches the specified criteria. The program draws the base of the specified radius whose tangent points are closest to the selected points. ■ 2Point ■ Axis endpoint Elliptical Specifies an elliptical base for the cylinder.
See also: Create a Solid Cylinder D Commands DBLIST Lists database information for each object in the drawing. Summary The text window displays information about each object in the current drawing. The program pauses when the window fills with information. Press Enter to resume output, or press Esc to cancel. See also: Display and Change the Properties of Objects DCALIGNED Constrains the distance between two points on different objects.
The following table outlines the valid constraint objects and points: Valid Objects or Points Characteristics Line Polyline segment Arc Two constraint points on objects Line and constraint point Two lines ■ When a line or an arc is selected, the distance between the endpoints of the object is constrained. ■ When a line and a constraint point are selected, the distance between the point and the closest point on the line is constrained.
Line Selects a line object. Dimension Line Location Determines where the dimension line is located on the constrained object. 2Lines Selects two line objects. The lines are made parallel and the aligned constraint controls the distance between the two lines. First Line Select the first line to be constrained. Second Line to Make Parallel Select the second line to constrain the distance between the two selected lines.
390), but the value displayed is based on the formatting of the units (for example, 30 if decimal degrees). When an expression with variables evaluates to greater than 360 or less than -360, the constraint value is displayed in the Parameters Manager based on the units of the drawing.
Arc Selects an arc and constrains the angle. Dimension Line Location Determines where the dimension line is located on the constrained object. 3Point Selects three valid constraint points on the object. Angle Vertex Specifies the angle vertex, which is at the center point of the constraint. First Angle Constraint Point Specifies the first angle endpoint of the arc. Second Angle Constraint Point Specifies the second angle endpoint of the arc.
DCDIAMETER Constrains the diameter of a circle or an arc. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Parametric tool group ➤ Dimensional Contraints flyout ➤ Diameter Menu: Parametric ➤ Dimensional Constraints ➤ Diameter Summary This command is equivalent to the Diameter option in DIMCONSTRAINT (page 289). The following table outlines the valid contraint objects and points: Valid Objects or Points Characteristics Circle Arc ■ Constrains the diameter of the circle or arc.
DCDISPLAY Displays or hides the dynamic constraints associated with a selection set of objects. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Parametric tool group ➤ Constraint Display flyout ➤ Show Dynamic Constraints Menu: Parametric ➤ Dynamic Dimensions ➤ Select Objects List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Setting the value for this command defines the Constraint Form property of the object. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter constraint form [Annotational (page 264)/Dynamic (page 264)] : Select a constraint form Annotational Applies annotational dimensional constraints to objects. Dynamic Applies dynamic dimensional constraints to objects.
The following table outlines the valid contraint objects and points: Valid Objects or Points Characteristics Line Polyline segment Arc Two constraint points on objects ■ When a line or an arc is selected, the horizontal distance between the endpoints of the object is constrained. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Parametric tool group ➤ Dimensional Contraints flyout ➤ Linear Summary This command is equivalent to the Linear option in DIMCONSTRAINT (page 289). The following table outlines the valid contraint objects and points: Valid Objects or Points Characteristics Line Polyline segment Arc Two constraint points on objects ■ When a line or an arc is selected, the horizontal or vertical distance between the endpoints of the object is constrained.
DCRADIUS Constrains the radius of a circle or an arc. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Parametric tool group ➤ Dimensional Constraints flyout ➤ Radius Menu: Parametric ➤ Dimensional Constraints ➤ Radius Summary This command is equivalent to the Radius option in DIMCONSTRAINT (page 289). The following table outlines the valid constraint objects and points: Valid Objects or Points Characteristics Circle Arc ■ Constrains the radius of the circle or arc.
DCVERTICAL Constrains the Y distance between points on an object, or between two points on different objects. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Parametric tool group ➤ Dimensional Contraints flyout ➤ Vertical Menu: Parametric ➤ Dimensional Constraints ➤ Vertical Summary This command is equivalent to the Vertical option in DIMCONSTRAINT (page 289).
Dimension Line Location Determines where the dimension line is located on the constrained object. Object Selects an object instead of a constraint point. See also: Apply Dimensional Constraints DDEDIT Edits single-line text, dimension text, attribute definitions, and feature control frames. Access Methods Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Text ➤ Edit Shortcut menu: Select a text object, right-click in the drawing area, and click Edit. Pointing device: Double-click a text object.
See also: Change Text Edit Attribute Definition Dialog Box Edits an attribute text object. List of Options The following options are displayed. Tag Specifies the attribute tag, which identifies the attribute in the drawing. The tag can contain exclamation marks (!). The case change is not immediately displayed in the tag field. Prompt Specifies the attribute prompt that is displayed when you insert a block containing this attribute definition. Default Specifies the default attribute value.
DDPTYPE Specifies the display style and size of point objects. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Open Shapes tool group (expanded) ➤ Point Style Menu: Format ➤ Point Style Command entry: 'ddptype for transparent use Summary The Point Style dialog box (page 271) is displayed. See also: Draw Reference Points Point Style Dialog Box Shows the current point style and size. Change the point style by selecting an icon.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Point Size Sets the point display size. The value you enter can be relative to the screen or in absolute units. The point display size is stored in the PDSIZE (page 1429) system variable. Subsequent point objects that you draw use the new value. Set Size Relative to Screen Sets the point display size as a percentage of the screen size. The point display does not change when you zoom in or out.
DELAY Provides a timed pause within a script. Access Methods Command entry: 'delay for transparent use Summary Specifies the duration of a pause. Entering delay 1000 in your script delays the start of execution of the next command for about one second. The longest delay available is 32767, which is slightly less than 33 seconds. See also: Overview of Command Scripts DELCONSTRAINT Removes all geometric and dimensional constraints from a selection set of objects.
DIM and DIM1 Accesses Dimensioning mode commands. Summary The Dim prompt indicates that you're in Dimensioning mode, in which you can use a special set of dimensioning commands (page 274). (DIM and DIM1 are provided only for compatibility with previous releases.) Use DIM to remain in Dimensioning mode after you have used a dimensioning command. Use DIM1 to execute a dimensioning command and immediately return to the Command prompt. To exit Dimensioning mode, enter e or exit, or press Esc.
The following table shows which AutoCAD commands are equivalent to the rest of the Dimensioning mode commands. For information about these Dimensioning mode commands, see the equivalent AutoCAD command.
Dimensioning mode command equivalents Dimensioning mode command Equivalent command RESTORE -DIMSTYLE (page 319) Restore ROTATED DIMLINEAR (page 304) Rotated SAVE -DIMSTYLE (page 319) Save STATUS -DIMSTYLE (page 319) Status TEDIT DIMTEDIT (page 355) TROTATE DIMEDIT (page 295) Rotate UPDATE -DIMSTYLE (page 319) Apply VARIABLES -DIMSTYLE (page 319) Variables VERTICAL DIMLINEAR (page 304) Vertical See also: Overview of Dimensioning DIMALIGNED Creates an aligned linear dimension.
Menu: Dimension ➤ Aligned Summary Creates a linear dimension that is aligned with the origin points of the extension lines. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
If you select a circle, the endpoints of its diameter are used as the origins of the extension line. The point used to select the circle defines the origin of the first extension line. Dimension Line Location Specifies the placement of the dimension line and determines the direction to draw the extension lines. After you specify the location, the DIMALIGNED command ends. Mtext Displays the In-Place Text Editor (page 678), which you can use to edit the dimension text.
See also: Create Aligned Dimensions DIMANGULAR Creates an angular dimension.
Summary Measures the angle between selected objects or 3 points. Objects that can be selected include arcs, circles, and lines, among others. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
The second angle endpoint is the origin of the second extension line and does not have to lie on the circle. Line Selection Defines the angle using two lines. The program determines the angle by using each line as a vector for the angle and the intersection of the lines for the angle vertex. The dimension line spans the angle between the two lines. If the dimension line does not intersect the lines being dimensioned, extension lines are added as needed to extend one or both lines.
strings to enter special characters or symbols. See Control Codes and Special Characters (page 1083). For more information, see Select and Modify Objects. The current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated measurements. Text Customizes the dimension text at the Command prompt. The generated dimension measurement is displayed within angle brackets. To include the generated measurement, use angle brackets (< >) to represent the generated measurement.
DIMARC Creates an arc length dimension. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Dimensions tool group ➤ Dimensions flyout ➤ Arc Length Menu: Dimension ➤ Arc Length List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display them by entering square brackets ([]). For more information, see Select and Modify Objects. The current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated measurements. Text Customizes the dimension text at the Command prompt. The generated dimension measurement is displayed within angle brackets. To include the generated measurement, use angle brackets (< >) to represent the generated measurement.
Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Dimensions tool group ➤ Continue flyout ➤ Baseline Menu: Dimension ➤ Baseline Summary The default spacing between baseline dimensions can be set from the Dimension Style Manager, Lines tab, Baseline Spacing (DIMDLI (page 1268) system variable). If no dimension was created in the current session, you are prompted to select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the base for the baseline dimension. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
extension line origin becomes the extension line of the base dimension closest to the pick point of the selection. When you select a second point, the baseline dimension is drawn and the Specify a Second Extension Line Origin prompt is redisplayed. To end the command, press Esc. To select another linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the basis for the baseline dimension, press Enter.
Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Dimensions tool group ➤ Break Dimension Menu: Dimension ➤ Dimension Break Summary Dimension breaks can be added to linear, angular, and ordinate dimensions, among others. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Manual Places a dimension break manually. You specify two points on the dimension or extension lines for the location of the break. Any dimension break that is created using this option is not updated if the dimension or intersecting objects are modified. You can only place a single manual dimension break at a time with this option. See also: Break a Dimension Line DIMCENTER Creates the center mark or the centerlines of circles and arcs.
See also: Create Radial Dimensions DIMCONSTRAINT Applies dimensional constraints to selected objects or points on objects, or converts associative dimensions to dimensional constraints. Access Methods Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Parametric tool group Menu: Parametric ➤ Dimensional Constraints ➤ Aligned Summary Applies a dimensional constraint to a selected object or converts an associative dimension to a dimensional constraint.
Objects Valid Constraint Points Polyline Endpoints, midpoints of line and arc subobjects, center of arc subobjects Block, Xref, Text, Mtext, Attribute, Table Insertion point After you specify the dimensional constraint type, you can either enter an expression value or accept the default (constraintname=value).
See also: Apply Dimensional Constraints DIMCONTINUE Creates a dimension that starts from an extension line of a previously created dimension. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Dimensions tool group ➤ Continue flyout ➤ Continue Menu: Dimension ➤ Continue Summary Automatically continues creating additional dimensions from the last linear, angular, or ordinate dimension created, or from a selected extension line. The dimension lines are lined up automatically.
Select continued dimension: Select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension Otherwise, the program skips this prompt and uses the dimension object that was last created in the current session.
press Esc. To select another linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the basis for the continued dimension, press Enter. Select continued dimension: Select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension Select a base dimension, or press Esc to end the command. Undo Undoes the last continued dimension entered during the command session. Select Prompts you to select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the continued dimension.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select arc or circle: Specify dimension line location (page 294) or [Mtext (page 294)/Text (page 294)/Angle (page 294)]: Specify a point or enter an option Dimension Line Location Determines the angle of the dimension line and the location of the dimension text. If the dimension is placed off of an arc resulting in the dimension pointing outside the arc, AutoCAD automatically draws an arc extension line.
See also: Create Radial Dimensions DIMDISASSOCIATE Removes associativity from selected dimensions. Summary DIMDISASSOCIATE filters the selection set to include only associative dimensions that are not on locked layers, and that are not in a different space than the current space (for example, if model space is active, associative dimensions in paper space are excluded).
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter type of dimension editing [Home (page 296)/New (page 296)/Rotate (page 296)/Oblique (page 297)] : Enter an option or press Enter Home Moves rotated dimension text back to its default position. The selected dimension text is returned to its default position and rotation as specified in its dimension style. New Changes dimension text using the In-Place Text Editor (page 678). The generated measurement is represented with angle brackets (< >).
Oblique The Oblique option is useful when extension lines conflict with other features of the drawing. The oblique angle is measured from the X axis of the UCS. See also: Modify Dimension Text DIMINSPECT Adds or removes inspection information for a selected dimension.
Summary Inspection dimensions specify how frequently manufactured parts should be checked to ensure that the dimension value and tolerances of the parts are within the specified range. The Inspection Dimension dialog box (page 298) is displayed and allows you to add or remove inspection dimensions from an existing dimension.
Summary Use the Shape and Inspection Label/Rate settings to the appearance of the frame of the inspection dimension and the inspection rate value. List of Options The following options are displayed. Select Dimensions Specifies the dimensions that an inspection dimension should be added to or removed from. Remove Inspection Removes the inspection dimension from the selected dimension.
Specifies that no frame is drawn around the values; the fields are not separated by vertical lines. Label/Inspection Rate Specifies the label text and inspection rate for an inspection dimension. Label Turns the display of the label field on and off. Label Value Specifies the label text. The label is displayed in the leftmost section of the inspection dimension when the Label check box is selected. Inspection Rate Turns the display of the rate field on and off.
None Specifies that no frame is drawn around the values; the fields are not separated by vertical lines. None No label is displayed with the inspection dimension. Remove Removes the inspection dimension from the selected dimensions. See also: Convert Dimensions into Inspection Dimensions DIMJOGGED Creates jogged dimensions for circles and arcs.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select arc or circle: Select an arc, circle, or polyline arc segment Specify center location override: Specify a point Accepts a new center point for a jogged radius dimension that takes the place of the true center point of the arc or circle.
Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes. Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text. Also determines the angle of the dimension line and the location of the dimension text. Specify Jog Location Locates the middle point of the jog. The transverse angle of the jog is determined by the Dimension Style Manager. See also: Create Radial Dimensions DIMJOGLINE Adds or removes a jog line on a linear or aligned dimension.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select dimension to add jog (page 304) or [Remove (page 304)]: Select a linear or aligned dimension Add Jog Specifies the linear or aligned dimension to which to add a jog. You are prompted for the location of the jog.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Mtext Displays the In-Place Text Editor, which you can use to edit the dimension text. Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. See Control Codes and Special Characters (page 1083). If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display them by entering square brackets ([ ]). For more information about formatting dimension text, see Select and Modify Objects.
Dimension Line Location Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line. ■ Mtext (page 306) ■ Text (page 306) ■ Angle (page 306) Vertical Creates vertical linear dimensions. Dimension Line Location Dimension Line Location (page 305) ■ Mtext (page 306) ■ Text (page 306) ■ Angle (page 306) Rotated Creates rotated linear dimensions. Object Selection Automatically determines the origin points of the first and second extension lines after you select an object.
For polylines and other explodable objects, only the individual line and arc segments are dimensioned. You cannot select objects in a non-uniformly scaled block reference. If you select a line or an arc, the line or arc endpoints are used as the origins of the extension lines. The extension lines are offset from the endpoints by the distance you specify in Offset from Origin in the Lines and Arrows tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes. See DIMSTYLE (page 319).
Summary Ordinate dimensions measure the horizontal or vertical distance from an origin point called the datum to a feature, such as a hole in a part. These dimensions prevent escalating errors by maintaining accurate offsets of the features from the datum. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Ydatum Measures the Y ordinate and determines the orientation of the leader line and dimension text. The Leader Endpoint prompts are displayed, where you can specify the endpoint. Mtext Displays the In-Place Text Editor, which you can use to edit the dimension text. Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. See Control Codes and Special Characters (page 1083).
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Dimensions tool group (expanded) ➤ Override Menu: Dimension ➤ Override Summary Overrides a specified dimensioning system variable for selected dimensions, or clears the overrides of selected dimension objects, returning them to the settings defined by their dimension style. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Dimensions tool group ➤ Dimension flyout ➤ Radius Menu: Dimension ➤ Radius Summary Measures the radius of a selected circle or arc and displays the dimension text with a radius symbol in front of it. You can use grips to reposition the resulting radius dimension easily. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Text Customizes the dimension text at the Command prompt. The generated dimension measurement is displayed within angle brackets. To include the generated measurement, use angle brackets (< >) to represent the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display alternate units by entering square brackets ([ ]). Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select dimensions to reassociate... Select objects or [Disassociated]: Select the dimension objects to reassociate or press D to select all disassociated dimensions. Press Esc to terminate the command without losing the changes that were already specified. Use UNDO (page 1125) to restore the previous state of the changed dimensions.
Radius Select arc or circle : Select an arc or a circle, or press Enter to skip to the next dimension object, if any NOTE DIMREASSOCIATE does not change the setting of DIMLFAC (page 1273) in a dimension. Use DIMOVERRIDE (page 310) to clear dimension linear factors in legacy drawings. See also: Change Dimension Associativity DIMREGEN Updates the locations of all associative dimensions. Summary The locations of all associative dimensions in the current drawing are updated.
Summary Creates a linear dimension with a rotated dimension line. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes. Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text. Object Selection Automatically determines the origin points of the first and second extension lines after you select an object. For polylines and other explodable objects, only the individual line and arc segments are dimensioned. You cannot select objects in a non-uniformly scaled block reference.
Summary The spacing between parallel dimension lines is made equal. You can also make the dimension lines of a series of linear or angular dimensions line up by using a spacing value of 0. Spacing is applied only to parallel linear dimensions or to angular dimensions that share a common vertex. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles. Access Methods Menu: Format ➤ Dimension Style Summary The Dimension Style Manager (page 319) is displayed. A dimension style is a named collection of dimension settings that control the appearance of dimensions. You create dimension styles to specify the format of dimensions quickly, and to ensure that dimensions conform to standards. If you enter -dimstyle at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page 352).
List of Options The following options are displayed. Current Dimension Style Displays the name of the dimension style that is current. The default dimension style is STANDARD. The current style is applied to dimensions you create. Styles Lists dimension styles in the drawing. The current style is highlighted. Right-click in the list to display a shortcut menu with options to set the current style, rename styles, and delete styles. You cannot delete a style that is current or in use in the current drawing.
New Displays the Create New Dimension Style dialog box (page 322), in which you can define a new dimension style. Delete Deletes the dimension style selected in the Styles list. A style that is being used in the drawing cannot be deleted. Options Manages the dimension styles in the list. Set Current Sets the style selected under Styles to current. The current style is applied to dimensions you create.
Create New Dimension Style Dialog Box Names the new dimension style, sets the style on which to start the new one, and indicates the dimension types to which you want the new style to apply. List of Options The following options are displayed. New Style Name Specifies the new dimension style name. Start With Sets a style to use as a basis for the new one. For the new style, you change only the properties that differ from the properties you start with.
New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes Set properties for dimension styles. Summary When you choose Continue in the Create New Dimension Style dialog box, the New Dimension Style dialog box is displayed. You define the properties for the new style in this dialog box. The dialog box initially displays the properties of the dimension style that you selected to start the new style in the Create New Dimension Style dialog box.
Summary Sets the dimension line properties. List of Options The following options are displayed. Dimension Lines Color Displays and sets the color for the dimension line. If you click Select Color (at the bottom of the Color list), the Color Palette dialog box (page 205) is displayed. You can also enter a color name or number. (DIMCLRD (page 1266) system variable) Linetype Sets the linetype of the dimension line. (DIMLTYPE (page 1274) system variable) Lineweight Sets the lineweight of the dimension line.
Specifies a distance to extend the dimension line past the extension line when you use oblique, architectural, tick, integral, and no marks for arrowheads. (DIMDLE (page 1268) system variable) Baseline Spacing Sets the spacing between the dimension lines of a baseline dimension. Enter a distance. For information about baseline dimensions, see DIMBASELINE (page 284). (DIMDLI (page 1268) system variable) Suppress Suppresses display of dimension lines.
Sets the linetype of the first extension line. (DIMLTEX1 (page 1274) system variable) Linetype Ext Line 2 Sets the linetype of the second extension line. (DIMLTEX2 (page 1274) system variable) Lineweight Sets the lineweight of the extension line. (DIMLWE (page 1276) system variable) Suppress Suppresses the display of extension lines. Extension Line 1 suppresses the first extension line; Extension Line 2 suppresses the second extension line.
Sets the total length of the extension lines starting from the dimension line toward the dimension origin. (DIMFXL (page 1270) system variable) Preview Displays sample dimension images that show the effects of changes you make to dimension style settings. See also: Use Dimension Styles Symbols and Arrows Tab Sets the format and placement for arrowheads, center marks, arc length symbols, and jogged radius dimensions.
Summary Controls the appearance of the dimension arrowheads. List of Options The following options are displayed. Arrowheads First Sets the arrowhead for the first dimension line. When you change the first arrowhead type, the second arrowhead automatically changes to match it. (DIMBLK1 (page 1264) system variable) To specify a user-defined arrowhead block, select User Arrow. The Select Custom Arrow Block dialog box is displayed. Select the name of a user-defined arrowhead block.
To specify a user-defined arrowhead block, select User Arrow. The Select Custom Arrow Block dialog box is displayed. Select the name of a user-defined arrowhead block. (The block must be in the drawing.) Leader Sets the arrowhead for the leader line. (DIMLDRBLK (page 1272) system variable) To specify a user-defined arrowhead block, select User Arrow. The Select Custom Arrow Block dialog box is displayed. Select the name of a user-defined arrowhead block. (The block must be in the drawing.
Size Displays and sets the size of the center mark or centerline. (DIMCEN system variable) Radius Jog Dimension Controls the display of jogged (zigzag) radius dimensions. Jogged radius dimensions are often created when the center point of a circle or arc is located off the page. Jog Angle Determines the angle of the transverse segment of the dimension line in a jogged radius dimension.
Linear Jog Dimension Controls the display of the jog for linear dimensions. Jog lines are often added to linear dimensions when the actual measurement is not accurately represent by the dimension. Typically the actual measurement is smaller than the desired value. Jog Height Factor Determines the height of the of the jog, which is determined by the distance between the two vertices of the angles that make up the jog.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Text Appearance Controls the dimension text format and size. Text Style Lists the available text styles. Text Style Button Displays the Text Style Dialog Box (page 1041) where you can create or modify text styles. (DIMTXSTY system variable) Text Color Sets the color for the dimension text. If you click Select Color (at the bottom of the Color list), the Color Palette dialog box (page 205) is displayed. You can also enter color name or number.
displayed. You can also enter color name or number. (DIMTFILL (page 1283) and DIMTFILLCLR (page 1283) system variables) Text Height Sets the height of the current dimension text style. Enter a value in the text box. If a fixed text height is set in the Text Style (that is, the text style height is greater than 0), that height overrides the text height set here. If you want to use the height set on the Text tab, make sure the text height in the Text Style is set to 0.
Horizontal Controls the horizontal placement of dimension text along the dimension line, in relation to the extension lines. (DIMJUST (page 1272) system variable) Horizontal position options include the following: ■ Centered: Centers the dimension text along the dimension line between the extension lines. ■ At Ext Line 1: Left-justifies the text with the first extension line along the dimension line. The distance between the extension line and the text is twice the arrowhead size plus the text gap value.
View Direction Controls the dimension text viewing direction. (DIMTXTDIRECTION (page 1289) system variable) View Direction includes the following options: ■ Left-to-Right: Places the text to enable reading from left to right. ■ Right-to-Left: Places the text to enable reading from right to left. Offset from Dim Line Sets the current text gap, which is the distance around the dimension text when the dimension line is broken to accommodate the dimension text.
Preview Displays sample dimension images that show the effects of changes you make to dimension style settings. See also: Use Dimension Styles Fit Tab Controls the placement of dimension text, arrowheads, leader lines, and the dimension line. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Fit Options Controls the placement of text and arrowheads based on the space available between the extension lines. When space is available, text and arrowheads are placed between the extension lines. Otherwise, text and arrowheads are placed according to the Fit options.
Moves text outside the extension lines first, then arrowheads (DIMATFIT (page 1261) system variable). ■ When space is available for text and arrowheads, places both between the extension lines. ■ When space is available for text only, places the text between the extension lines and places arrowheads outside them. ■ When not enough space is available for text, places both text and arrowheads outside the extension lines.
Over the Dimension Line, with Leader If selected, dimension lines are not moved when text is moved. If text is moved away from the dimension line, a leader line is created connecting the text to the dimension line. The leader line is omitted when text is too close to the dimension line. (DIMTMOVE (page 1285) system variable) Over the Dimension Line, Without Leader If selected, dimension lines are not moved when text is moved.
Ignores any horizontal justification settings and places the text at the position you specify at the Dimension Line Location prompt. (DIMUPT (page 1290) system variable) Draw Dim Line Between Ext Lines Draws dimension lines between the measured points even when the arrowheads are placed outside the measured points. (DIMTOFL (page 1285) system variable) Preview Displays sample dimension images that show the effects of changes you make to dimension style settings.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Linear Dimensions Sets the format and precision for linear dimensions. Unit Format Sets the current units format for all dimension types except Angular. (DIMLUNIT (page 1275) system variable) The relative sizes of numbers in stacked fractions are based on the DIMTFAC (page 1282) system variable (in the same way that tolerance values use this system variable). Precision Displays and sets the number of decimal places in the dimension text.
Suffix Includes a suffix in the dimension text. You can enter text or use control codes to display special symbols. For example, entering the text mm results in dimension text similar to that shown in the illustration. When you enter a suffix, it overrides any default suffixes. (DIMPOST (page 1276) system variable) If you specify tolerances, the suffix is added to the tolerances as well as to the main dimension. For more information, see Control Codes and Special Characters (page 1083).
Includes a suffix to the dimension value sub unit. You can enter text or use control codes to display special symbols. For example, enter cm for .96m to display as 96cm. Trailing Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal dimensions. For example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5, and 30.0000 becomes 30. 0 Feet Suppresses the feet portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the distance is less than one foot. For example, 0'-6 1/2" becomes 6 1/2".
See also: Use Dimension Styles Alternate Units Tab Specifies display of alternate units in dimension measurements and sets their format and precision. List of Options The following options are displayed. Display Alternate Units Adds alternate measurement units to dimension text. Sets the DIMALT (page 1254) system variable to 1. Alternate Units Displays and sets the current alternate units format for all dimension types except Angular.
Sets the unit format for alternate units. (DIMALTU (page 1257) system variable) The relative sizes of numbers in stacked fractions are based on DIMTFAC (page 1282) (in the same way that tolerance values use this system variable). Precision Sets the number of decimal places for alternate units. (DIMALTD (page 1254) system variable) Multiplier for Alt Units Specifies the multiplier used as the conversion factor between primary and alternate units. For example, to convert inches to millimeters, enter 25.4.
Zero Suppression Controls the suppression of leading and trailing zeros and of feet and inches that have a value of zero. (DIMALTZ (page 1257) system variable) Leading Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal dimensions. For example, 0.5000 becomes .5000. Sub-units factor Sets the number of sub units to a unit. It is used to calculate the dimension distance in a sub unit when the distance is less than one unit. For example, enter 100 if the suffix is m and the sub-unit suffix is to display in cm.
Preview Displays sample dimension images that show the effects of changes you make to dimension style settings. See also: Use Dimension Styles Tolerances Tab Specifies the display and format of dimension text tolerances. List of Options The following options are displayed. Tolerance Format Controls the tolerance format.
Sets the method for calculating the tolerance. (DIMTOL (page 1286) system variable) ■ None: Does not add a tolerance. The DIMTOL (page 1286) system variable is set to 0. ■ Symmetrical: Adds a plus/minus expression of tolerance in which a single value of variation is applied to the dimension measurement. A plus-or-minus sign appears after the dimension. Enter the tolerance value in Upper Value. The DIMTOL (page 1286) system variable is set to 1. The DIMLIM (page 1273) system variable is set to 0.
Sets the number of decimal places. (DIMTDEC (page 1282) system variable) Upper Value Sets the maximum or upper tolerance value. When you select Symmetrical in Method, this value is used for the tolerance. (DIMTP (page 1287) system variable) Lower Value Sets the minimum or lower tolerance value. (DIMTM (page 1284) system variable) Scaling for Height Sets the current height for the tolerance text.
Values are stacked by their decimal separators. Operational Symbols Values are stacked by their operational symbols. Suppress Controls the suppression of leading and trailing zeros and of feet and inches that have a value of zero. (DIMTZIN (page 1290) system variable) Zero suppression settings also affect real-to-string conversions performed by ® the AutoLISP rtos and angtos functions. Leading Zeros Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal dimensions. For example, 0.5000 becomes .5000.
Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal dimensions. For example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5, and 30.0000 becomes 30. 0 Feet Suppresses the feet portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the distance is less than 1 foot. For example, 0'-6 1/2" becomes 6 1/2". 0 Inches Suppresses the inches portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the distance is an integral number of feet. For example, 1'-0" becomes 1'.
Summary You can output the results of the comparison to the Clipboard, and then paste to other applications. List of Options The following options are displayed. Compare Specifies the first dimension style for the comparison. With Specifies the second dimension style for the comparison. If you set the second style to or to the same style as the first, all the properties of the dimension style are displayed.
Summary You can save or restore dimensioning system variables to a selected dimension style. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Current dimension style: Annotative: Enter a dimension style option [ANnotative (page 353)/Save (page 353)/Restore (page 353)/STatus (page 354)/Variables (page 354)/Apply (page 354)/? (page 354)] : Enter an option or press Enter Annotative Creates an annotative dimension style.
the Enter Dimension Style Name prompt. Only settings that differ are displayed, with the current setting in the first column, and the setting of the compared style in the second column. After the differences are displayed, the previous prompt returns. ?—List Dimension Styles Lists the named dimension styles in the current drawing. Select Dimension Makes the dimension style of the selected object the current dimension style. Status Displays the current values of all dimension system variables.
DIMTEDIT Moves and rotates dimension text and relocates the dimension line. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Dimensions tool group (expanded) ➤ Text Angle Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Dimensions tool group (expanded) ➤ Left Justify, Center Justify, Right Justify Menu: Dimension ➤ Align Text ➤ Angle Summary The companion command that edits the dimension text and changes the extension line angle is DIMEDIT. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Right Right-justifies the dimension text along the dimension line. This option works only with linear, radius, and diameter dimensions. Center Centers the dimension text on the dimension line. This option works only with linear, radius, and diameter dimensions. Home Moves the dimension text back to its default position.
Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text. The center point of the text does not change. If the text moves or the dimension is regenerated, the orientation set by the text angle is retained. Entering an angle of 0 degrees puts the text in its default orientation. The text angle is measured from the X axis of the UCS. See also: Modify Dimension Text DIST Measures the distance and angle between two points.
Summary In general, the DIST command reports 3D distances in model space and 2D distances on a layout in paper space. In model space, changes in X, Y, and Z component distances and angles are measured in 3D relative to the current UCS. In paper space, distances are normally reported in 2D paper space units. However, when using object snaps on model space objects that are displayed in a single viewport, distances are reported as 2D model space distances projected onto a plane parallel to your screen.
DISTANTLIGHT Creates a distant light. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Lights tool group (expanded) ➤ Distant Light Menu: View ➤ Render ➤ Light ➤ New Distant Light List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify light direction FROM <0,0,0> or [Vector]: Specify a point or enterv Specify light direction TO <1,1,1>: Specify a point If you enter the Vector option, the following prompt is displayed: Specify vector direction <0.0000,-0.0100,1.
Intensity/Intensity Factor Sets the intensity or brightness of the light. The range is 0.00 to the maximum value that is supported by your system. Status Turns the light on and off. If lighting is not enabled in the drawing, this setting has no effect. Photometry Photometry is available when the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 1 or 2. Photometry is the measurement of the luminous intensities of visible light sources.
Sharp Displays shadows with sharp edges. Use this option to increase performance. Soft Mapped Displays realistic shadows with soft edges. Specifies the amount of memory that should be used to calculate the shadow map. Specifies the softness to use to calculate the shadow map. Color/Filter Color Controls the color of the light. True Color Specifies a True Color. Enter in the format R,G,B (red, green, blue). Index Specifies an ACI (AutoCAD Color Index) color.
Number of Segments Places point objects at equal intervals along the selected objects. Use DDPTYPE (page 271) to set the style and size of all point objects in a drawing. Block Places blocks at equal intervals along the selected object. If the block has variable attributes, these attributes are not included. Yes Specifies that the X axes of the inserted blocks be tangent to, or collinear with, the divided object at the dividing points. No Aligns the blocks according to their normal orientation.
DONUT Creates a filled circle or a wide ring. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Closed Shapes tool group (expanded) ➤ Donut Menu: Draw ➤ Donut Summary A donut consists of two arc polylines that are joined end-to-end to create a circular shape. The width of the polylines is determined by the specified inside and outside diameters. To create solid-filled circles, specify an inside diameter of zero. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
The location of the donut is set based on the center point. After you specify the diameters, you are prompted for the locations at which to draw donuts. A donut is drawn at each point specified (2). How the interior of a donut is filled depends on the current setting of the FILL (page 435) command. See also: Draw Donuts DRAGMODE Controls the way dragged objects are displayed. Access Method Command entry: 'dragmode for transparent use List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Off Ignores all dragging requests, including those embedded in menu items. Auto Turns on dragging for every command that supports it. Dragging is performed whenever it is possible. Entering drag each time is not necessary. See also: Set Up the Drawing Area DRAWINGRECOVERY Displays a list of drawing files that can be recovered after a program or system failure. Access Methods Menu: Help ➤ Recover Files Summary Opens the Files Recovered dialog box (page 365).
Summary You can preview and open each drawing or backup file to choose which one should be saved as the primary DWG file. List of Options The following options are displayed. Backup Files Displays the drawings that may need to be recovered after a program or system failure. A top-level drawing node contains a set of files associated with each drawing.
See also: Recover from a System Failure DRAWINGRECOVERYHIDE Closes the Files Recovered dialog box. See also: Recover from a System Failure DRAWORDER Changes the draw order of images and other objects. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Move/Rotate/Scale tool group (expanded) ➤ Draw Order flyout Menu: Tools ➤ Draw Order ➤ Bring to Front Shortcut menu: Select an object, right-click, and then click Draw Order.
Enter object ordering option [Above objects (page 368)/Under objects (page 368)/Front (page 368)/Back (page 368)] : Enter an option or press Enter Above Objects Moves the selected object above the specified reference objects. Under Objects Moves the selected objects below the specified reference objects. Front Moves the selected objects to the top of the order of objects in the drawing. Back Moves the selected objects to the bottom of the order of objects in the drawing.
See also: Use Precision Tools Drafting Settings Dialog Box Specifies drafting settings organized for drawing aids. Summary The following categories are available. ■ Snap and Grid (page 369) ■ Polar Tracking (page 373) ■ Object Snap (page 375) ■ 3D Object Snap (page 379) ■ Dynamic Input (page 383) List of Options The following options are displayed. Snap and Grid Tab (Drafting Settings Dialog Box) Specifies Snap and Grid settings.
Snap On Turns Snap mode on or off. You can also turn Snap mode on or off by clicking Snap on the status bar, by pressing F9, or by using the SNAPMODE (page 1483) system variable. Snap Spacing Controls an invisible, rectangular grid of snap locations that restricts cursor movement to specified X and Y intervals. Snap X Spacing Specifies the snap spacing in the X direction. The value must be a positive real number.
Forces the X and Y spacing to the same values for snap spacing and for grid spacing. The snap spacing intervals can be different from the grid spacing intervals. Polar Spacing Controls the PolarSnap™ increment distance. Polar Distance Sets the snap increment distance when PolarSnap is selected under Snap Type & Style. If this value is 0, the PolarSnap distance assumes the value for Snap X Spacing. The Polar Distance setting is used in conjunction with polar tracking and/or object snap tracking.
Dot Grid in 2D Model Space Sets the grid style to dotted grid for 2D model space. (GRIDSTYLE (page 1345) system variable) Dot Grid in Paper Space Sets the grid style to dotted grid for sheet and layout. (GRIDSTYLE (page 1345) system variable) Grid Spacing Controls the display of a grid that helps you visualize distances. NOTE The limits of the grid are controlled by the LIMITS (page 575) command and the GRIDDISPLAY (page 1343) system variable. Grid X Spacing Specifies the grid spacing in the X direction.
Follow Dynamic UCS Changes the grid plane to follow the XY plane of the dynamic UCS. (GRIDDISPLAY (page 1343) system variable) Polar Tracking Tab (Drafting Settings Dialog Box) Controls the AutoTrack settings. Polar Tracking On Turns polar tracking on and off. You can also turn polar tracking on or off by pressing F10 or by using the AUTOSNAP (page 1217) system variable. Polar Angle Settings Sets the alignment angles for polar tracking.
Additional Angles Makes any additional angles in the list available for polar tracking. The Additional Angles check box is also controlled by the POLARMODE (page 1441) system variable, and the list of additional angles is also controlled by the POLARADDANG (page 1440) system variable. NOTE Additional angles are absolute, not incremental. List of Angles If Additional Angles is selected, lists the additional angles that are available. To add new angles, click New. To remove existing angles, click Delete.
Relative to Last Segment Bases polar tracking angles on the last segment drawn. Object Snap Tab (Drafting Settings Dialog Box) Controls running object snap settings. With running object snap settings, also called Osnap, you can specify a snap point at an exact location on an object. When more than one option is selected, the selected snap modes are applied to return a point closest to the center of the aperture box. Press TAB to cycle through the options.
specifying points in a command. To use object snap tracking, you must turn on one or more object snaps. (AUTOSNAP (page 1217) system variable) Object Snap Modes Lists object snaps that you can turn on as running object snaps. Endpoint Snaps to the closest endpoint of an arc, elliptical arc, line, multiline, polyline segment, spline, region, or ray, or to the closest corner of a trace, solid, or 3D face.
Snaps to a quadrant point of an arc, circle, ellipse, or elliptical arc. Intersection Snaps to the intersection of an arc, circle, ellipse, elliptical arc, line, multiline, polyline, ray, region, spline, or xline. Extended Intersection is not available as a running object snap. Intersection and Extended Intersection do not work with edges or corners of 3D solids. NOTE You might get varying results if you have both the Intersection and Apparent Intersection running object snaps turned on at the same time.
Tangent Snaps to the tangent of an arc, circle, ellipse, elliptical arc, or spline. Deferred Tangent snap mode is automatically turned on when the object you are drawing requires that you complete more than one tangent snap. You can use Deferred Tangent to draw a line or xline that is tangent to arcs, polyline arcs, or circles. When the aperture box passes over a Deferred Tangent snap point, a marker and an AutoSnap tooltip are displayed.
object is parallel to the previous linear object, an alignment path is displayed, which you can use to create the parallel object. NOTE Turn off ORTHO mode before using the parallel object snap. Object snap tracking and polar snap are turned off automatically during a parallel object snap operation. You must specify the first point of a linear object before using the parallel object snap. Select All Turns on all object snap modes. Clear All Turns off all object snap modes.
3D Object Snap On Turns 3D object snaps on and off. The 3D object snaps selected under 3D Object Snap Modes are active while object snap is on. (3DOSMODE (page 1201) system variable) 3D Object Snap Modes Lists the 3D object snaps modes. Vertex Snaps to the closest vertex of a 3D object. Midpoint on Edge Snaps to the midpoint of a face edge.
Center of Face Snaps to the center of a face.
Snaps to a knot on a spline. Perpendicular Snaps to a point perpendicular to a face.
Nearest to Face Snaps to a point that is nearest to a 3D object face. Select All Turns on all 3D object snap modes. Clear All Turns off all 3D object snap modes. Dynamic Input Tab (Drafting Settings Dialog Box) Controls pointer input, dimension input, dynamic prompting, and the appearance of drafting tooltips.
Enable Pointer Input Turns on pointer input. When pointer input and dimensional input are both turned on, dimensional input supersedes pointer input when it is available. (DYNMODE (page 1317) system variable) Pointer Input Displays the location of the crosshairs as coordinate values in a tooltip near the cursor. When a command prompts you for a point, you can enter coordinate values in the tooltip instead of in the Command window. Preview Area Shows an example of pointer input.
Displays the Pointer Input Settings dialog box (page 386). Enable Dimension Input where Possible Turns on dimensional input. Dimensional input is not available for some commands that prompt for a second point. (DYNMODE (page 1317) system variable) Dimension Input Displays a dimension with tooltips for distance value and angle value when a command prompts you for a second point or a distance. The values in the dimension tooltips change as you move the cursor.
Pointer Input Settings Dialog Box Controls the settings of pointer input tooltips. List of Options The following options are displayed. Format Controls coordinate format in the tooltips that are displayed when pointer input is turned on. Polar Format Displays the tooltip for the second or next point in polar coordinate format. Enter a comma (,) to change to Cartesian format.
Always—Even When Not in a Command Always displays tooltips when pointer input is turned on. (DYNPIVIS (page 1319) system variable) See also: Use Dynamic Input Dimension Input Settings Dialog Box Controls the settings of dimension input tooltips. List of Options The following options are displayed. Visibility Controls which tooltips are displayed during grip stretching when dimensional input is turned on.
Angle Change Displays the change in the angle as you move the grip. Arc Radius Displays the radius of an arc, which is updated as you move the grip. See also: Use Dynamic Input Tooltip Appearance Dialog Box Controls the appearance of tooltips. Summary Use the TOOLTIPMERGE (page 1517) system variable to combine drafting tooltips into a single tooltip. For more information about tooltips, see Set Interface Options. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Applies the settings only to the drafting tooltips used in Dynamic Input. See also: Use Dynamic Input DVIEW Defines parallel projection or perspective views by using a camera and target. Summary NOTE Transparent ZOOM (page 1188) and PAN (page 767) are not available in DVIEW. When you define a perspective view, ZOOM, PAN, transparent ZOOM and PAN are not available while that view is current. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select objects (page 389) or
1 unit by 1 unit area, with its origin at the lower-left corner. The following illustration shows an example of using the default DVIEWBLOCK to set the view (moving the graphics cursor adjusts the view). Point Specification Rolls the view under the camera. The point you select with your pointing device is a start point for the dragging operation. Your viewing direction changes about the target point as you move the pointing device. The angles must be positive.
Enter Angle in XY Plane from X Axis Sets the position at an angle in the XY plane relative to the X axis of the current UCS. This angle measures from -180 to 180 degrees. A rotation angle of 0 degrees looks down the X axis of the UCS toward the origin. The illustration shows the camera rotating to the left from its initial position, leaving its angle from the XY plane unchanged. Toggle (Angle From) Switches between two angle input modes.
Toggle (Angle From) Toggle (Angle From) (page 391) Distance Moves the camera in or out along the line of sight relative to the target. This option turns on perspective viewing, which causes objects farther from the camera to appear smaller than those closer to the camera. A special perspective icon replaces the coordinate system icon. You are prompted for the new camera-to-target distance. A slider bar along the top of the drawing area is labeled from 0x to 16x, with 1x representing the current distance.
The illustration shows the effect of moving the camera along the line of sight relative to the target, where the field of view remains constant. Points Locates the camera and target points using X,Y,Z coordinates. You can use XYZ point filters. To help you define a new line of sight, a rubber-band line is drawn from the current camera position to the crosshairs. You are prompted for a new camera location.
For information about entering direction and magnitude angles, see Point Specification. Pan Shifts the image without changing the level of magnification. Zoom If perspective viewing is off, dynamically increases or decreases the apparent size of objects in the current viewport. A slider bar along the top of the drawing area is labeled from 0x to 16x, with 1x representing the current scale. Moving the slider bar to the right increases the scale. Moving it to the left decreases the scale.
Twist Twists or tilts the view around the line of sight. The twist angle is measured counterclockwise, with 0 degrees to the right. Clip Clips the view, obscuring portions of the drawing that are behind or in front of the front clipping plane. The front and back clipping planes are invisible walls that you can position perpendicular to the line of sight between the camera and target. Back Obscures objects located behind the back clipping plane. ■ Distance from Target.
Front Obscures objects located between the camera and the front clipping plane. ■ Distance from Target.Positions the front clipping plane and turns on front clipping. A positive distance places the clipping plane between the target and the camera. A negative distance places it beyond the target. You can use the slider bar to drag the clipping plane. ■ Eye. Positions the front clipping plane at the camera. ■ On. Turns on front clipping. This option is available only when perspective viewing is off.
DXBIN Imports an AutoCAD DXB (drawing interchange binary) file. Access Methods Menu: Insert ➤ Drawing Exchange Binary Summary AutoCAD DXB files contain only 2D vectors in binary format with 16-bit integer precision. These vectors are imported as line objects, and they assume the current layer and object properties. The Select DXB File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box (page 723)) is displayed. Enter the name of the file to import.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select a block: After you select a block with attributes, the Enhanced Attribute Editor (page 398) is displayed. See also: Modify a Block Attribute Definition Enhanced Attribute Editor Lists the attributes in a selected block instance and displays the properties of each attribute.
List Lists the attributes in the selected block instance and displays the tag, prompt, and value for each attribute. Value Assigns a new value to the selected attribute. Single-line attributes include a button to insert a field. When clicked, the Insert Field dialog box (page 432) is displayed. Multiple-line attributes include a button with an ellipsis. Click to open the In-Place Text Editor (page 678) with the ruler.
Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the attribute text. Oblique Angle Specifies the angle that the attribute text is slanted away from its vertical axis. Not available for multiple-line attributes. Height Specifies the height of the attribute text. Width Factor Sets the character spacing for the attribute text. Entering a value less than 1.0 condenses the text. Entering a value greater than 1.0 expands it.
Backwards Specifies whether or not the attribute text is displayed backwards. Not available for multiple-line attributes. Upside Down Specifies whether or not the attribute text is displayed upside down. Not available for multiple-line attributes. Annotative Specifies that the attribute is annotative. Click the information icon to learn more about annotative objects. Justification Specifies how the attribute text is justified (left-, center-, or right-justified).
Linetype Specifies the linetype of the attribute. Color Specifies the color of the attribute. Lineweight Specifies the lineweight of the attribute. Changes you make to this option are not displayed if the LWDISPLAY (page 1404) system variable is off. Plot Style Specifies the plot style of the attribute. If the current drawing uses color-dependent plot styles, the Plot Style list is not available. See also: Modify a Block Attribute Definition EDGE Changes the visibility of 3D face edges.
If the edges of one or more 3D faces are collinear, the program alters the visibility of each collinear edge. Display Selects invisible edges of 3D faces so that you can redisplay them. All Selects the hidden edges of all 3D faces in the drawing and displays them. If you want to make the edges of the 3D faces visible once again, use the Edge option. You must select each edge with your pointing device to display it.
Summary Select four adjoining edges that define the mesh. The edges can be lines, arcs, splines, or open polylines. The edges must touch at their endpoints to form a single, closed loop. You can select the four edges in any order. The first edge (SURFTAB1 (page 1500)) determines the M direction of the generated mesh, which extends from the endpoint closest to the selection point to the other end. The two edges that touch the first edge form the N edges (SURFTAB2 (page 1500)) of the mesh.
Edit PGP Opens the Program Parameters (PGP) text file that defines command abbreviations Access Methods Button Menu: Tools ➤ Customize ➤ Edit Command Aliases (PGP) Summary Commands can have abbreviated names called command aliases that you can enter at the Command prompt. Command aliases are defined in the PGP file. If you edit the PGP file while the program is running, enter RE-INIT and then a value of 16 to use the revised file. You can also restart the program to reload the file automatically.
ELEV controls only new objects; it does not affect existing objects. The elevation is reset to 0.0 whenever you change the coordinate system to the world coordinate system (WCS). List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify New Default Elevation The current elevation is the default Z value for new objects when you specify only X and Y values for a 3D point. The elevation setting is the same for all viewports regardless of their user coordinate systems (UCS definitions).
Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Closed Shapes tool group ➤ Ellipse flyout ➤ Center Menu: Draw ➤ Ellipse ➤ Center Summary The first two points of the ellipse determine the location and length of the first axis. The third point determines the distance between the center of the ellipse and the end point of the second axis. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Move the crosshairs around the center of the ellipse and click. If you enter a value, the higher the value, the greater the eccentricity of the ellipse. Entering 0 defines a circular ellipse. Arc Creates an elliptical arc. The angle of the first axis determines the angle of the elliptical arc. The first axis can define either the major or the minor axis depending on its size. The first two points of the elliptical arc determine the location and length of the first axis.
Parameter Requires the same input as Start Angle, but creates the elliptical arc using the following parametric vector equation: p(u) = c + a * cos(u) + b * sin(u) where c is the center of the ellipse and a and b are its major and minor axes, respectively. ■ End Parameter: Defines the end angle of the elliptical arc by using a parametric vector equation. The Start Parameter option toggles from Angle mode to Parameter mode. The mode controls how the ellipse is calculated.
Isocircle Creates an isometric circle in the current isometric drawing plane. NOTE The Isocircle option is available only when you set the Style option of SNAP (page 986) to Isometric. Radius Creates a circle using a radius you specify. Diameter Creates a circle using a diameter you specify. Specify diameter of isocircle: Specify a distance See also: Draw Ellipses ERASE Removes objects from a drawing.
Instead of selecting objects to erase, you can enter an option, such as L to erase the last object drawn, p to erase the previous selection set, or ALL to erase all objects. You can also enter ? to get a list of all options. See also: Erase Objects EXPLODE Breaks a compound object into its component objects.
The color, linetype, and lineweight of any exploded object might change. Other results differ depending on the type of compound object you're exploding. See the following list of objects that can be exploded and the results for each. To explode objects and change their properties at the same time, use XPLODE (page 1184). ® NOTE If you're using a script or an ObjectARX function, you can explode only one object at a time. 2D and Lightweight Polyline Discards any associated width or tangent information.
Block Removes one grouping level at a time. If a block contains a polyline or a nested block, exploding the block exposes the polyline or nested block object, which must then be exploded to expose its individual objects. Blocks with equal X, Y, and Z scales explode into their component objects. Blocks with unequal X, Y, and Z scales (nonuniformly scaled blocks) might explode into unexpected objects.
EXPORT Saves the objects in a drawing to a different file format. Access Methods Menu: File ➤ Export Summary The Export Data dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box (page 723)) is displayed. If you do not see the file format that you need in the Files of Type drop-down list, also check the PLOT command for other file types, including PDF.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Modify tool group ➤ Extend Menu: Modify ➤ Extend Summary To extend objects, first select the boundaries. Then press Enter and select the objects that you want to extend. To use all objects as boundaries, press Enter at the first Select Objects prompt. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Current settings: Projection = current, Edge = current Select boundary edges...
Shift-Select to Trim Trims the selected objects to the nearest boundary rather than extending them. This is an easy method to switch between trimming and extending. Fence Selects all objects that cross the selection fence. The selection fence is a series of temporary line segments that you specify with two or more fence points. The selection fence does not form a closed loop. Crossing Selects objects within and crossing a rectangular area defined by two points.
View Specifies projection along the current view direction. Edge Extends the object to another object's implied edge, or only to an object that actually intersects it in 3D space. Extend Extends the boundary object along its natural path to intersect another object or its implied edge in 3D space. No Extend Specifies that the object is to extend only to a boundary object that actually intersects it in 3D space.
Undo Reverses the most recent changes made by EXTEND. See also: Trim or Extend Objects EXTERNALREFERENCES Opens the Reference Manager palette. Access Methods Menu: Insert ➤ References Manager Summary The EXTERNALREFERENCES command opens the Reference Manager palette (page 418) when the palette is closed. NOTE The FILEDIA (page 1334) system variable is ignored when attaching files from the Reference Manager palette.
Summary The Reference Manager palette organizes, displays, and manages referenced files.
The Reference Manager palette contains a toolbar along the top. You can right-click over the files list to display a shortcut menu that allows you to attach or manage an attached external reference. Click the Show Details button on the toolbar to view details and thumbnail preview for the selected external reference.
Relink File Displays the Select File to Relink dialog box where you can update the location of the selected file reference. Show Details Displays the Details and Preview panel (page 424) which displays a thumbnail preview and details for the selected file reference.
Menu Item Description Close File Closes the drawing file. If changes were made, you are prompted to save or discard them before the drawing can be closed. No File Reference Selected When no file reference is selected, the shortcut menu presents the following functions: Menu Item Description Attach Reference Displays the Select Reference File dialog box. Reload All References Reloads all file referenced files attached to the current drawing. (Unavailable if no file references are attached.
Menu Item Description Reference Status Show Details Displays the thumbnail preview and details for the selected file reference. Always available - status has no affect on this function. Reveal in Finder Opens Finder and displays the location where the file reference is stored. Available only for file references with a Loaded status Unavailable when Unloaded, Not Found or Unresolved. Attach Switches the selected DWG file reference to the Attach attachment type.
Menu Item Description Reference Status Bind-Insert Binds the DWG reference to the current drawing in a way similar to detaching and inserting the reference drawing. Rather than being renamed using blockname$n$definitionname syntax, xref-dependent named objects are stripped of the xref name. As with inserting drawings, no name-incrementing occurs if a local named object shares the same name as a bound xref-dependent named object.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Details Each file reference shares a common set of properties. Referenced images, display additional properties specific to the file type. The common set of details displayed for each file reference is name, status, file size, file type, creation date, saved path, and found at path. Some of the properties can be edited. Reference Name Displays the file reference name. This property is editable for all file reference types.
Date Displays the last date the file reference was modified. This date is not displayed if the file reference is not found. This property cannot be edited. Found At Displays the absolute path of the selected file reference. This property cannot be edited. Saved Path Displays the save location of the selected file reference. This is where the referenced file is saved and is not necessarily the same as the Found At location.
EXTERNALREFERENCESCLOSE Closes the Reference Manager palette. Summary The EXTERNALREFERENCESCLOSE command closes the Reference Managers palette (page 418) when currently displayed. See also: Attach and Detach Referenced Drawings EXTRUDE Creates a 3D solid or surface by extending a 2D or 3D curve. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Solids - Create tool group ➤ Extrude Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Modeling ➤ Extrude Summary Extrusions can extend in the Z direction or be set to taper or follow a path.
The DELOBJ (page 1251) system variable controls whether the object(s) and path (if selected) are automatically deleted when the solid or surface is created or whether you are prompted to delete the object(s) and path.
Object type Can be extruded? Can be extrusion path? Regions X 2D Solids X 3D Solids: edges X 3D Solids: faces X Splines: 2D and 3D X X Surfaces: edges X X Surfaces: planar and non-planar X X Traces X Comments X List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Objects to Extrude Specifies the objects to extrude. NOTE Select face and edge subobjects by pressing Ctrl while you select them. Mode Controls whether the extruded object is a solid or a surface.
Direction Specifies the length and direction of the extrusion with two specified points. (The direction cannot be parallel to the plane of the sweep curve created by the extrusion.) Path Specifies the extrusion path based on a selected object. The path is moved to the centroid of the profile. Then the profile of the selected object is extruded along the chosen path to create solids or surfaces. NOTE Select face and edge subobjects by pressing Ctrl while you select them.
Positive angles taper in from the base object. Negative angles taper out. The default angle, 0, extrudes a 2D object perpendicular to its 2D plane. All selected objects and loops are tapered to the same value. Specifying a large taper angle or a long extrusion height can cause the object or portions of the object to taper to a point before reaching the extrusion height. Individual loops of a region are always extruded to the same height.
F Commands FIELD Creates a multiline text object with a field that can be updated automatically as the field value changes. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Fields tool group ➤ Insert Field Menu: Insert ➤ Field Shortcut menu: Right-click while editing text in an in-place text editor, and click Insert Field. Summary Fields can be inserted in any kind of text except tolerances. The FIELDEVAL system variable and the UPDATEFIELD command determine how fields are updated.
Summary The options available change based on the selected field category and field name. List of Options The following options are displayed. Field Category Sets the types of fields to be listed under Field Names (for example, Date & Time, Document, and Objects). Field Names Lists the fields that are available in a category. Select a field name to display the options available for that field. Preview Displays the current value of the field, or displays an empty string (----) if the field value is invalid.
Use the list to choose one of the loaded project data (DST) files or click Load Project to load a project data file that is not currently loaded in the Project Manager. Project Navigation Tree Displays a tree view of layouts or layout views in the selected project data (DST) file, from which you can select an item for the field. Property Displays the properties available as fields for the item selected in the Project Navigation tree.
Average/Sum/Count When Formula is selected in Field Names, closes the Field dialog box temporarily while you specify table cells. The result is appended to the formula. Cell When Formula is selected in Field Names, closes the Field dialog box temporarily while you specify a table cell. The cell address is appended to the formula. Precision Specifies precision for fields based on the selected format. Select Current Precision to use the current setting of the LUPREC (page 1403) system variable.
See also: Control the Display of Polylines, Hatches, Gradient Fills, Lineweights, and Text FILLET Rounds and fillets the edges of objects. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Modify tool group ➤ Fillet Menu: Modify ➤ Fillet Summary In the example, an arc is created that is tangent to both of the selected lines. The lines are trimmed to the ends of the arc. To create a sharp corner instead, enter a radius of zero.
You can fillet arcs, circles, ellipses, elliptical arcs, lines, polylines, rays, splines, and xlines. You can also fillet 3D solids and surfaces. If you select a mesh object for filleting, you can choose to convert the mesh to a solid or surface and continue the operation. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
FILLET does not trim circles; the fillet arc meets the circle smoothly. If you select a 3D solid, you can select multiple edges, but you must select the edges individually.
Edge Selects a single edge. You can continue to select single edges until you press Enter. If you select three or more edges that converge at a vertex to form the corner of a box, FILLET computes a vertex blend that is part of a sphere if the three incident fillets have the same radii. Chain Changes from selection of single edges to selection of sequential tangent edges, called a chain selection. Edge Chain Selects a tangential sequence of edges when you select a single edge.
Select 2D polyline: If one arc segment separates two line segments that converge as they approach the arc segment, FILLET removes the arc segment and replaces it with a fillet arc. Radius Defines the radius of the fillet arc. The value you enter becomes the current radius for subsequent FILLET commands. Changing this value does not affect existing fillet arcs. Trim Controls whether FILLET trims the selected edges to the fillet arc endpoints. Multiple Rounds the edges of more than one set of objects.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select an Edge Specifies one or more edges on the same solid body to fillet. After pressing Enter, you can drag the fillet grip to specify a radius, or use the Radius option. Chain Specifies more than one edge when the edges are tangent to one another. Loop Specifies a loop of edges on the face of a solid. For any edge, there are two possible loops. After selecting a loop edge you are prompted to Accept the current selection or choose the Next loop.
Menu: Edit ➤ Find Shortcut menu: With no commands active, right-click in the drawing area and click Find. Summary The Find and Replace dialog box (page 442) is displayed. See also: Find and Replace Text Find and Replace Dialog Box - FIND Specifies the text you want to find, replace, or select and controls the scope and results of the search. List of Options The following options are displayed.
value. You can use the Select Objects button to temporarily close the dialog box and create or modify the selection set. Find What Specifies the text string you want to find. Enter a text string, including any wild-card characters, or choose one of the six most recently used strings from the list. For more information on wild-card searches, see Find and Replace Text in the User’s Guide. Replace With Specifies the text string you want to use to replace the found text.
Finds only whole words that match the text in Find What. For example, if you select Find Whole Words Only and search for “Front Door,” FIND does not locate the text string “Front Doormat.” Use Wildcards Allows the use of wild-card characters in searches. For more information on wild-card searches, see Find and Replace Text in the User’s Guide. Search XRefs Includes text in externally referenced files in search results. Search Blocks Includes text in blocks in search results.
Includes text found in hyperlink descriptions in search results. Hyperlink Includes hyperlink URLs in search results. See also: Find and Replace Text FLATSHOT Creates a 2D representation of all 3D objects based on the current view. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Section tool group ➤ Flatshot Summary The Flatshot dialog box (page 446) is displayed. The edges of all 3D solids, surfaces, and meshes are projected line-of-sight onto a plane parallel to the viewing plane.
Flatshot Dialog Box Creates a 2D representation of all 3D objects based on the current view. Summary The edges of all 3D solids and surfaces are projected line-of-sight onto a plane parallel to the viewing plane. The 2D representations of these edges are inserted as a block on the XY plane of the UCS. This block can be exploded for additional changes. The result can also be saved as a separate drawing file. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Replace Existing Block Replaces an existing block in the drawing with the newly created block. Select Block Closes the dialog box temporarily while you select the block you are replacing in the drawing. When you finish selecting the block, press Enter to re-display the Flatshot dialog box. Block Selected / No Block Selected Indicates whether a block has been selected. Export to a File Saves the block to an external file.
See also: Create a Flattened View FREESPOT Creates free spotlight which is similar to a spotlight without a specified target. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Hotspot Specifies the angle that defines the brightest cone of light, which is known to lighting designers as the beam angle. This value can range from 0 to 160 degrees or the equivalent values based on AUNITS (page 1215). Falloff Specifies the angle that defines the full cone of light, which is also known as the field angle. This value can range from 0 to 160 degrees. The default is 50 degrees or the equivalent values based on AUNITS (page 1215).
If you enter k, you can specify the color of the light based on a Kelvin temperature value. Shadow Makes the light cast shadows. Off Turns off display and calculation of shadows for the light. Turning shadows off increases performance. Sharp Displays shadows with sharp edges. Use this option to increase performance. Soft Mapped Displays realistic shadows with soft edges. Map Size Specifies the amount of memory that should be used to calculate the shadow map.
Use Limits Specifies whether to use limits or not. Attenuation Start Limit Specifies the point where light starts as an offset from the center of the light. The default is 0. Attenuation End Limit Specifies the point where light ends as an offset from the center of the light. No light is cast beyond this point. Setting an end limit increases performance where the effect of lighting is so minimal that the calculations are wasted processing time. Color/Filter Color Controls the color of the light.
Name Specifies the name of the light. You can use uppercase and lowercase letters, numbers, spaces, hyphens (-), and underscores (_) in the name. The maximum length is 256 characters. Intensity Factor Sets the intensity or brightness of the light. The range is 0.00 to the maximum value that is supported by your system. Status Turns the light on and off. If lighting is not enabled in the drawing, this setting has no effect.
Web Specifies the intensity for a light at points on a spherical grid. File Specifies which web file to use to define the properties of the web. Web files have the file extension .ies. X Specifies the X rotation for the web. Y Specifies the Y rotation for the web. Z Specifies the Z rotation for the web. Shadow Makes the light cast shadows. Off Turns off display and calculation of shadows for the light. Turning shadows off increases performance. Sharp Displays shadows with sharp edges.
G Commands GCCOINCIDENT Constrains two points together or a point to a curve (or an extension of a curve). Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Parametric tool group ➤ Geometric Constraints flyout ➤ Coincident Menu: Parametric ➤ Geometric Constraints ➤ Coincident Summary This command is equivalent to the Coincident option in GEOMCONSTRAINT (page 467). A constraint point on an object can be made coincident with an object or a constraint point on another object.
Select first point (page 455) or [Object (page 455)/Autoconstrain (page 455)]
Summary This command is equivalent to the Collinear option in GEOMCONSTRAINT (page 467). Following are the valid constraint objects and points: ■ Line ■ Polyline segment ■ Ellipse ■ Multiline text List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select first object (page 456) or [Multiple (page 456)]: Select an object or entermto select multiple points or objects Object Selects an object to be constrained. First object Selects the first object to be constrained.
Menu: Parametric ➤ Geometric Constraints ➤ Concentric Summary This command is equivalent to the Concentric option in GEOMCONSTRAINT (page 467). Following are the valid constraint objects and points: ■ Circle ■ Arc ■ Polyline arc ■ Ellipse List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select first object (page 457): Select a circle, arc, or ellipse Object Selects an object to be constrained. First object Selects the first circle, arc, or ellipse to be constrained.
Summary This command is equivalent to the Equal option in GEOMCONSTRAINT (page 467). Following are the valid constraint objects and points: ■ Line ■ Polyline segment ■ Circle ■ Arc ■ Polyline arc List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select first object (page 458) or [Multiple (page 458)]: Select an object or entermto select multiple objects Object Selects an object to be constrained. First object Selects the first object to be constrained.
Summary This command is equivalent to the Fix option in GEOMCONSTRAINT (page 467). When you apply the Fix constraint to a point on an object, you lock the node in place. You can move the object around the locked node. When you apply the Fix constraint to an object, the object is locked and cannot be moved.
Summary This command is equivalent to the Horizontal option in GEOMCONSTRAINT (page 467). You can select different constraint points on the same object or different objects. The following are the valid constraint objects and points: ■ Line ■ Polyline segment ■ Ellipse ■ Multiline text ■ Two valid constraint points List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
GCPARALLEL Causes selected lines to lie parallel to each other. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Parametric tool group ➤ Geometric Constraints flyout ➤ Parallel Menu: Parametric ➤ Geometric Constraints ➤ Parallel Summary This command is equivalent to the Parallel option in GEOMCONSTRAINT (page 467).
Menu: Parametric ➤ Geometric Constraints ➤ Perpendicular Summary This command is equivalent to the Perpendicular option in GEOMCONSTRAINT (page 467). Lines do not have to intersect to be perpendicular. Following are the valid constraint objects and points: ■ Line ■ Polyline segment ■ Ellipse ■ Multiline text See also: Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints GCSMOOTH Constrains a spline to be contiguous and maintain G2 continuity with another spline, line, arc, or polyline.
■ Arc ■ Polyline arc The splines are updated to be contiguous with one another. NOTE Endpoints of the curves to which you apply the smooth constraints are made coincident. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select first spline curve (page 463): Select a spline object Curve Selects an endpoint of a curve. First Spline Curve Selects the first spline curve to be constrained. Second Curve Selects the second curve to be made continuous with the first spline curve.
Summary This command is equivalent to the Symmetric option in GEOMCONSTRAINT (page 467). For lines, the line’s angle is made symmetric (and not the endpoints). For arcs and circles, the center and radius are made symmetric (not the endpoints of the arc). Following are the valid constraint objects and points: ■ Line ■ Polyline segment ■ Circle ■ Arc ■ Polyline arc ■ Ellipse NOTE You must have an axis around which you will constrain the objects or points to be symmetrical.
See also: Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints GCTANGENT Constrains two curves to maintain a point of tangency to each other or their extensions. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Parametric tool group ➤ Geometric Constraints flyout ➤ Tangent Menu: Parametric ➤ Geometric Constraints ➤ Tangent Summary This command is equivalent to the Tangent option in GEOMCONSTRAINT (page 467).
GCVERTICAL Causes lines or pairs of points to lie parallel to the Y axis of the current coordinate system. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Parametric tool group ➤ Geometric Constraints flyout ➤ Vertical Menu: Parametric ➤ Geometric Constraints ➤ Vertical Summary This command is equivalent to the Vertical option in GEOMCONSTRAINT (page 467).
GEOMCONSTRAINT Applies or persists geometric relationships between objects or points on objects. Access Methods Menu: Parametric ➤ Geometric Constraints Summary When you apply a geometric constraint to a pair of objects, the order in which the objects are selected and the point on which each object is selected can affect how the objects are positioned relative to each other. The following table outlines the valid constraint points for an object.
Causes lines or pairs of points to lie parallel to the X axis of the current coordinate system. Vertical (GCVERTICAL (page 466)) Causes lines or pairs of points to lie parallel to the Y axis of the current coordinate system. Perpendicular (GCPERPENDICULAR (page 461)) Causes selected lines to lie 90 degrees to one another. Parallel (GCPARALLEL (page 461)) Causes selected lines to lie parallel to each other.
GRADIENT Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a gradient fill. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Closed Shapes tool group ➤ Gradient Menu: Draw ➤ Gradient Summary The Gradient visor or Hatch and Gradient dialog box (page 475) is displayed. A gradient fill creates a smooth transition between one or two colors. See also: Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill GRID Displays a grid pattern in the current viewport.
Toolbar: Status bar ➤ Grid List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify grid spacing(X) (page 470) or [ON (page 470)/OFF (page 470)/Snap (page 470)/Major (page 470)/aDaptive (page 470)/Limits (page 470)/Follow (page 470)/Aspect (page 470)] : Specify a value or enter an option Grid Spacing (X) Sets the grid to the specified value. Entering x after the value sets the grid spacing to the specified value multiplied by the snap interval. On Turns on the grid using the current spacing.
The Aspect option is not available when the current snap style is Isometric. See also: Adjust Grid and Grid Snap GROUP Creates saved sets of objects called groups. Access Methods Menu: Tools ➤ Group Summary If you enter -group at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page 471). List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select objects or [Name/Description]: Select objects to add to the new group or enter an option Name Specifies the group name.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter a group option [? (page 472)/Order (page 472)/Add (page 472)/Remove (page 472)/Explode (page 472)/REName (page 472)/Selectable (page 472)/Create (page 472)] : Enter an option or press Enter ?—List Groups Lists names and descriptions of groups defined in the drawing. Order Changes the numerical order of objects within a group. Reordering is useful when creating tool paths.
See also: Group Objects GROUPEDIT Adds and removes objects from the selected group, or renames a selected group. Summary For existing groups, add or remove objects; or rename a group. The following prompts are displayed. Select group or [Name]: In the drawing area, select a group or enter the name of a group. If a selected object is not included in a group, you are prompted again. List of Options When a group is selected, the following options are displayed.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Closed Shapes tool group ➤ Hatch Menu: Draw ➤ Hatch Summary The Hatch visor (page 486) or Hatch and Gradient dialog box (page 475) is displayed. If you enter -hatch at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page 491). NOTE To prevent the creation of an enormous number of hatch lines, the maximum number of hatch lines created in a single hatch operation is limited. This limit prevents memory and performance problems.
Hatch and Gradient Dialog Box Defines the boundaries, pattern, or fill properties, and other parameters for hatches and fills.
NOTE Red circles are displayed at unconnected endpoints of boundary objects to identify gaps in the hatch boundary. These circles are temporary and can be removed with REDRAW (page 881) or REGEN (page 889). Add: Select Objects Determines a boundary from selected objects that form an enclosed area. Interior objects are not automatically detected. You must select the objects within the selected boundary to hatch or fill those objects according to the current island detection style.
Recreate Boundary Creates a polyline or region around the selected hatch or fill, and optionally associates the hatch object with it. View Selections Displays the currently defined boundaries with the current hatch or fill settings. This option is available only when a boundary has been defined. Display Boundary Objects Selects the objects that form the boundaries of the selected associative hatch object. Use the displayed grips to modify the hatch boundaries.
Separate Hatches Controls whether a single hatch object or multiple hatch objects are created when several separate closed boundaries are specified. (HPSEPARATE (page 1368) system variable) Draw Order Assigns a draw order to a hatch or fill. You can place a hatch or fill behind all other objects, in front of all other objects, behind the hatch boundary, or in front of the hatch boundary.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Type and Pattern Specifies the hatch’s type, pattern, color, and background color. Type Specifies whether to create a predefined, user-defined, or custom hatch pattern. Predefined patterns are stored in the acad.pat or acadiso.pat files supplied with the program. User-defined patterns are based on the current linetype in your drawing. A custom pattern is a pattern that is defined in any custom PAT files that you have added to the search path.
Displays the Hatch Library (page 488), in which you can preview images for all predefined patterns. Hatch Color Overrides the current color with a specified color for hatch patterns and solid fills. (HPCOLOR (page 1360) system variable) Background Color Specifies the background color for new hatch objects. Choose None to turn off the background color. (HPBACKGROUNDCOLOR (page 1358) system variable) Swatch Displays a preview of the selected pattern. Click the swatch to display the Hatch Library (page 488).
Scales the hatch pattern relative to paper space units. This allows you to display hatch patterns at a scale that is appropriate for your named layout. This option is available only from a named layout. Spacing Specifies the spacing of lines in a user-defined pattern. This option is available only when Type is set to User Defined. (HPSPACE (page 1368) system variable) ISO Pen Width Scales an ISO predefined pattern based on the selected pen width.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Color Specifies whether to fill the hatch boundary with a monochormatic or two-color blend. One Color Specifies a fill that uses a smooth transition between a color and a specified tint (the color mixed with white) or between a color and a specified shade (the color mixed with black). (GFCLRSTATE (page 1342) system variable) Two Color Specifies a fill that uses a smooth transition between two colors.
you can select an AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) color, true color, or color book color. (GFCLR1 (page 1340) and GFCLR2 (page 1341) system variables) Shade and Tint Slider Specifies the tint (the selected color mixed with white) or shade (the selected color mixed with black) of a color to be used for a gradient fill of one color. (GFCLRLUM (page 1341) system variable) Gradient Patterns Displays fixed patterns for gradient fills. These patterns include linear sweep, spherical, and parabolic.
Normal Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary. If an internal island is encountered, hatching or filling is turned off until another island within the island is encountered. (HPISLANDDETECTION (page 1363) system variable) Outer (Recommended) Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary. This option hatches or fills only the specified area and leaves the internal islands unaffected.
Object Type Controls the type of the new boundary object. The resulting boundary object can be either a polyline or a region object. This option is available only when Retain Boundaries is selected. (HPBOUND (page 1359) system variable) For more information about regions, see Create and Combine Areas (Regions). Boundary Set Defines the set of objects analyzed when defining a boundary from a specified point. The selected boundary set has no effect when you use Select Objects to define a boundary.
See also: Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills Hatch Visor Defines the boundaries, pattern or fill properties, and other parameters for hatch and fills. Hatch pattern controls Solid fill controls Gradient fill controls Summary The Hatch visor is displayed when you start the HATCH or GRADIENT command, or select an existing hatch or fill in a drawing. When multiple hatches or fills of different types are selected in a drawing, some of the controls on the Hatch visor are disabled.
Background Color (Hatch Patterns) Specifies the color for hatch pattern backgrounds. Not available when using the Solid pattern. (HPBACKGROUNDCOLOR (page 1358) system variable) Gradient Color 1 (Gradient Fills) Specifies the first of two gradient colors. (GFCLR1 (page 1340) system variable) Gradient Color 2 (Gradient Fills) Specifies the second gradient color.
When you use the Select Boundary option, HATCH does not automatically detect interior objects. You must select the objects within the selected boundary to hatch or fill those objects according to the current island detection style. Right-click and choose Settings to change the current island detection style. Remove Boundary Removes from the boundary definition any of the objects that were previously added. Option is only available after a boundary has been defined.
The Hatch Library can be displayed as a dialog box when using the Hatch and Gradient dialog box, or as a palette from the Hatch or Gradient visors.
The Hatch Library can be displayed as a dialog box when using the Hatch and Gradient dialog box, or as a palette from the Hatch or Gradient visors. Summary Organizes patterns into five categories, with patterns listed alphabetically. Click an image to select a pattern. List of Options The following options are displayed. Pattern Category Lists the pattern categories used to group related hatch and gradient patterns. The following categories are listed: ■ Show All. Shows all patterns in all categories.
-HATCH Uses command prompts to fill an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern, solid fill, or gradient fill. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Pattern Name—Predefined or Custom Specifies a predefined pattern in the acad.pat or acadiso.pat file or a custom pattern in its own PAT file. Enter the pattern name followed by an optional hatch style code. Precede the pattern name with an asterisk (*) to fill the area with individual lines instead of a hatch object. ?—List Pattern Names Lists and describes the hatch patterns defined in the acad.pat file. Solid Specifies a solid fill and redisplays the first HATCH prompt, where you can define a boundary.
While selecting objects, you can right-click at any time in the drawing area to display a shortcut menu. You can undo the last selection or all selections, change the selection method, change the island detection style, or preview the hatch or fill. Draw Boundary Uses specified points to define the boundary of a hatch or fill. The options that are available as you specify points are also available in PLINE (page 796). When you complete the polyline boundary, press Enter.
+X Runs a line in the positive X direction from the point you specify to the first object encountered and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise direction. -X Runs a line in the negative X direction from the point you specify to the first object encountered and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise direction. +Y Runs a line in the positive Y direction from the point you specify to the first object encountered and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise direction.
Angle Runs a line at the specified angle from the point you specify to the first object encountered and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise direction. Style Specifies the method used to hatch or fill objects within the outermost hatch boundary. If you have selected no internal objects, a hatching style has no effect. Because you can define a precise set of boundaries, it's often best to use the Normal style. Ignore Ignores all internal objects and hatches or fills through them.
Associativity Specifies that the new hatch pattern is updated when its boundaries are modified. A new hatch pattern's associativity is set by the HPASSOC (page 1358) system variable. Changing the associativity setting here also changes the setting in the HPASSOC system variable. Gap Tolerance Sets the maximum size of gaps that can be ignored when objects are used as a hatch boundary. The default value, 0, specifies that the objects must enclose the area with no gaps.
Annotative Specifies that the hatch is annotative. This property automates the process of scaling annotations so that they plot or display at the correct size on the paper. Hatch Color Overrides the current color with a specified color for hatch patterns and solid fills. The color value is stored in the HPCOLOR (page 1360) system variable. When Hatch Type is set to Pattern, you can also specify a new background color.
Toolbar: Select a hatch or fill to edit its properties on the Hatch visor. Shortcut menu: Select a hatch or fill to edit. Right-click in the drawing area and click Hatch Edit. Pointing device: Double-click a hatch or gradient fill. Summary Modifies hatch-specific properties, such as pattern, scale, and angle for an existing hatch or fill. If you enter -hatchedit at the Command prompt, the associated options are displayed (page 499) in the command line.
-HATCHEDIT Uses command prompts to modify hatch-specific properties, such as pattern, scale, and angle for existing hatches or fills. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Add Boundaries Modifies the area of a single hatch or fill by adding boundaries. Available when editing a single hatch or fill. For more information, see Add: Pick Points (page 475) or Add: Select Objects (page 476). Remove Boundaries Modifies the area of a single hatch or fill by removing boundaries. Available when editing a single hatch or fill. For more information, see Remove Boundaries (page 476).
and its center. You can also store the value of the new hatch origin in the HPORIGIN (page 1365) system variable. Annotative Specifies that hatches in the selection set are annotative. This property automates the process of scaling annotations so that they plot or display at the correct size on the paper. Hatch Color Overrides the current color with a specified color for hatch patterns and solid fills. The color value is stored in the HPCOLOR (page 1360) system variable.
Access Methods Shortcut menu: Select a hatch object. Right-click and choose Generate Boundary. Summary Creates a new non-associative polyline boundary around the selected hatch. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select hatch objects: Use an object selection method and press Enter. See also: Set Property Overrides for Hatches and Fills Control How Overlapping Objects Are Displayed HATCHSETBOUNDARY Redefines a selected hatch or fill to conform to a different closed boundary.
HATCHSETORIGIN Controls the starting location of hatch pattern generation for a selected hatch. Access Methods Shortcut menu: Select a hatch object. Right-click and choose Set Origin. Summary Controls the hatch origin location point for solid and gradient hatches. You can select and change multiple hatch objects and change their hatch origin for multiple hatches at the same time. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select hatch object: Select the hatch object.
Summary Selects all hatches in the drawing, including hatch patterns, solid fills, and gradient fills, and sets their draw order to be behind all other objects. Hatch objects on locked layers are also modified. See also: Set Property Overrides for Hatches and Fills Control How Overlapping Objects Are Displayed HELIX Creates a 2D spiral or 3D spring.
Initially, the default base radius is set to 1. During a drawing session, the default value for the base radius is always the previously entered base radius value for any solid primitive or helix. The default value for the top radius is always the value of the base radius. The base radius and top radius cannot both be set to 0. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Specify axis endpoint: Specify a point Turns Specifies the number of turns (revolutions) for the helix. The number of turns for a helix cannot exceed 500. Initially, the default value for the number of turns is three. During a drawing session, the default value for the number of turns is always the previously entered number of turns value. Enter number of turns: Enter a number Turn Height Specifies the height of one complete turn within the helix.
Summary Executing the HELP command while a command is active displays Help for that command. You can also click the Help icon that appears on the right side of the command line when a command is active. Clicking the Help button in a dialog box displays Help for that dialog box. See also: Access and Search the Product Help HIDE Regenerates a 3D wireframe model with hidden lines suppressed.
When using the HIDE command, if the INTERSECTIONDISPLAY (page 1380) system variable is on, face-to-face intersections of 3D surfaces are displayed as polylines. The 3D Hidden visual style does not honor the setting of INTERSECTIONDISPLAY. If the DISPSILH (page 1293) system variable is on, HIDE displays 3D solid objects with silhouette edges only. It won't show the internal edges produced by objects that have facets.
HIDEOBJECTS Hides selected objects. Access Methods Button Menu: Tools ➤ Isolate ➤ Hide Objects Shortcut menu: Right-click in the drawing area and click Isolate ➤ Hide Objects. Summary Temporarily hides selected objects in the current view. All other objects are visible. List of Prompts The following prompt is displayed. Select objects: Use an object selection method See also: Control the Display of Objects HIDEPALETTES Hides all currently displayed palettes, including the command window.
See also: Specify the Behavior of Palettes I Commands ID Displays the UCS coordinate values of a specified location. Access Methods Menu: Tools ➤ Inquiry ➤ ID Point Command entry: 'id for transparent use Summary ID lists the X, Y, and Z values of the specified point and stores the coordinate of the specified point as the last point. You can reference the last point by entering @ at the next prompt that requests a point. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Access Methods Menu: File ➤ Attach Menu: Insert ➤ Reference Manager Summary The Reference Manager palette (page 418) is displayed. If you enter -image at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page 511). See also: Attach Raster Images -IMAGE Attaches a raster image to the drawing. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Old path: Lists the current path name for each image Enter New path: Enter the new path name for the specified image Reload Reloads the selected images, making that information available for display and plotting. Unload Removes image data from working memory so that the images are not displayed, thus improving performance. All information associated with the image remains stored with the drawing. The image frame of each attached image remains visible.
or imagename="path name/long file name.bmp" If you enter a valid image name without a file extension, the program searches for the file in this order: first, an existing image definition in the drawing, and second, an image file in the folders in order of the search path. The program searches for all the image files with the specified name, regardless of extension, and uses the first name found. If no image name or image file is found, the message “Image Not Found” is displayed and the prompt is repeated.
Brightness Controls the brightness, and indirectly the contrast, of the image. The greater the value, the brighter the image and the more pixels that become white when you increase contrast. Fade Controls the fading effect of the image. The greater the value, the more the image blends with the current background color. A value of 100 blends the image completely into the background. Changing the screen background color causes the image to fade to the new color.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Name Identifies the image you have selected to attach. Browse Opens the Select Reference File dialog (a standard file selection dialog box (page 723)). Preview Displays the image that you have selected to attach. Insertion Point Specifies the insertion point for the selected image file. Specify On-Screen is the default. The default insertion point is 0,0,0. Specify On-Screen Directs input at the Command prompt or the pointing device.
If INSUNITS (page 1373) is set to “unitless” or if the image does not contain resolution information, the scale factor becomes the image width in AutoCAD units. If INSUNITS has a value such as millimeters, centimeters, inches, or feet, and the image has resolution information, the scale factor is applied after the true width of the image in AutoCAD units is determined. Specify On-Screen Allows you to input at the Command prompt or the pointing device.
See also: Attach Raster Images Image Visor Displays options for modifying attached images. Summary The Image visor is displayed when you select an attached image. List of Options The following options are displayed. Brightness Controls the brightness and the contrast of the image. The greater the value, the brighter the image. (-IMAGEADJUST (page 513) command) Contrast Controls the contrast and the fading effect of the image. The greater the value, the more the image fades.
See also: Attach Raster Images IMAGECLIP Crops the display of a selected image to a specified boundary. Access Methods Menu: Modify ➤ Clip ➤ Image Shortcut menu: Select an image to clip. Right-click in the drawing area and choose Clip Image. Summary The clipping boundary determines the portion of a raster image that is hidden, either outside or inside the boundary. The visibility of the clipping boundary is controlled by the IMAGEFRAME (page 1369) system variable.
New Boundary Defines a rectangular or polygonal clipping boundary, or generates a polygonal clipping boundary from a polyline. NOTE You can only create a new clipping boundary for a selected IMAGE underlay after the old boundary is deleted. Select Polyline Defines the boundary with the selected polyline. The polyline can be open but must consist of straight line segments and cannot intersect itself.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. High Produces a high-quality display of the image. Draft Produces a lower-quality display of the image. See also: Improve the Display Speed of Raster Images IMPORT Imports files of different formats into the current drawing. Access Methods Menu: File ➤ Import Summary You can import data files, other than DWG files, that were created with other applications into the current drawing.
IMPRINT Imprints 2D geometry on a 3D solid or surface, creating additional edges on planar faces. Access Methods Menu: Modify ➤ Solid Editing ➤ Imprint Edges Summary 2D geometry located on a face or the intersection of a 3D solid with a face can be combined with that face to create additional edges. These edges can provide a visual effect, and can be pressed and pulled to create indentations and extrusions.
See also: Add Facets to Faces on Solids and Surfaces INSERT Inserts a block or drawing into the current drawing. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Block tool group ➤ Insert Menu: Insert ➤ Block Summary The Insert Block dialog box (page 522) is displayed. If you enter -insert at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page 525). A good practice is to insert a block from a block library.
Summary The position of the inserted block depends on the orientation of the UCS. Name Specifies the name of a block to insert, or the name of a file to insert as a block. Browse Opens the Select Drawing File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) where you can select a block or drawing file to insert. Path Specifies the path to the block. Explode Block Explodes the block and inserts the individual parts of the block. When Explode is selected, you can specify a uniform scale factor only.
Component objects of a block drawn on layer 0 remain on that layer. Objects having color BYBLOCK are white. Objects with linetype BYBLOCK have the CONTINUOUS linetype. Description Displays the description that was saved with the block. Preview Displays a preview of the specified block to insert. A lightning bolt icon in the lower-right corner of the preview indicates that the block is dynamic. A icon indicates that the block is annotative. Show\Hide Insertion Options Expands or collapses the Insertion Opti
Y Sets the Y scale factor. Z Sets the Z scale factor. Uniform Scale Specifies a single scale value for X, Y, and Z coordinates. Rotation Specifies the rotation angle for the inserted block in the current UCS. Specify On-Screen Specifies the rotation of the block using the pointing device. Angle Sets a rotation angle for the inserted block. Block Unit Displays information about the block units. Unit Specifies the INSUNITS (page 1373) value for the inserted block.
Enter block name (page 526) or [? (page 527)] : Enter a name, enter ?, enter ~, or press Enter Units: Conversion: Specify insertion point (page 527) or [Basepoint (page 527)/Scale (page 527)/X (page 527)/Y (page 527)/Z (page 527)/Rotate (page 527)]: Specify a point or enter an option Block Name Entering a tilde (~) displays the Select Drawing File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box (page 723)).
?—List Block Names Lists the blocks currently defined in the drawing. Insertion Point Specifies a location for the block or drawing. Scale Factor All X and Y dimensions of the block or drawing are multiplied by the X and Y scale factors. The block or drawing is rotated by the specified angle, using the insertion point as the center of rotation. Corner Defines the X and Y scale factors at the same time, using the insertion point and another point as the corners of a box.
INTERFERE Creates a temporary 3D solid from the interferences between two sets of selected 3D solids. Access Methods Button Menu: Modify ➤ 3D Operations ➤ Interference Checking Summary Interferences are highlighted with a temporary 3D solid that represents the intersecting volume. You can also choose to retain the overlapping volumes. If you define a single selection set, INTERFERE checks all the solids in the set against one another.
Pressing Enter starts the interference testing of pairs of 3D solids and displays the Interference Checking dialog box (page 530). If you enter -interfere at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page 532). List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. First set of objects Specifies a set of objects to be checked. If you do not select a second set of objects, all objects in this selection set are checked against each other.
Interference Settings Dialog Box Controls the display of interference objects List of Options The following options are displayed. Interference Objects Specifies the visual style and color for interference objects. Visual Style Specifies the visual style for interference objects (INTERFEREOBJVS (page 1379)). Color Specifies the color for interference objects (INTERFERECOLOR (page 1378)). Highlight Interfering Pair Highlights the interfering pair of solids.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Interfering Objects Displays the number of interferences found between each set during the INTERFERE (page 528) command. First Set Displays the number of objects selected in the first set. Second Set Displays the number of objects selected in the second set. Interfering Pairs Found Displays the number of interferences found among the selected objects. Zoom Closes the dialog box and starts the ZOOM (page 1188) command.
Next Highlights the next interference object. Close Closes the dialog box and deletes the interference objects if that option is selected. See also: Check 3D Models for Interferences -INTERFERE Summary INTERFERE highlights all interfering 3D solids and displays the number of objects selected and the number of interfering pairs. If you define a single selection set, INTERFERE checks all the solids in the set against one another.
Next Pair Cycles through the interfering pairs of 3D solids. Nested Selection Allows you to select individual solid objects that are nested in blocks and xrefs. See also: Check 3D Models for Interferences INTERSECT Creates a 3D solid, surface, or 2D region from overlapping solids, surfaces, or regions.
The selection set can contain regions, solids, and surfaces that lie in any number of arbitrary planes. INTERSECT divides the selection set into subsets and tests for intersections within each subset. The first subset contains all the solids and surfaces in the selection set. The second subset contains the first selected region and all subsequent coplanar regions.
See also: Control the Display of Objects ISOPLANE Specifies the current isometric plane. Access Methods Command entry: 'isoplane for transparent use Summary The isometric plane affects the cursor movement keys only when Snap mode is on and the snap style is Isometric. If the snap style is Isometric, Ortho mode uses the appropriate axis pair even if Snap mode is off. The current isometric plane also determines the orientation of isometric circles drawn by ELLIPSE (page 406).
Selects the top face of the cube, called the top plane, defined by the 30-degree and 150-degree axis pair. Right Selects the right-hand plane, defined by the 90-degree and 30-degree axis pair. See also: Set Isometric Grid and Snap J Commands JOIN Joins the endpoints of linear and curved objects to create a single object.
You can join objects in different planes if the source object is a spline or a 3D polyline. Each type of object has additional restrictions. NOTE Construction lines, rays, and closed objects cannot be joined. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select source object or multiple objects to join at once: Select lines, polylines, 3D polylines, arcs, elliptical arcs, helixes, or splines. Source Object Specifies a single source object to which you can join other objects.
Elliptical Arc Only elliptical arcs can be joined to the source elliptical arc. The elliptical arcs must be coplanar and have the same major and minor axes, but can have gaps between them. The elliptical arcs are joined counterclockwise starting from the source elliptical arc. The Close option converts the source elliptical arc into an ellipse. Helix Any linear or curved object can be joined to the source helix. All objects must be contiguous, but can be noncoplanar. The resulting object is a single spline.
Summary The Create Raster File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box (page 723)) is displayed. Enter the file name in the dialog box. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select objects or : Press Enter to select all objects and viewports or use an object selection method and press Enter A JPEG file is created that contains the objects you select. Shade Plot options are preserved in the file when you use this command.
Use layers to control the visibility of objects and to assign properties such as color and linetype. Objects on a layer normally assume the properties of that layer. However, you can override any layer property of an object. For example, if an object’s color property is set to BYLAYER, the object displays the color of that layer. If the object’s color is set to Red, the object displays as red, regardless of the color assigned to that layer.
Summary You can add, delete, and rename layers, change their properties, set property overrides for layout viewports, or add layer descriptions and apply changes in realtime. When switching layouts or when activating a viewport on named (paper space) layout, the Layers palette is updated and displays the current state of the layer properties in the current space. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Previous Layer Undoes the last change or set of changes made to layer settings. (See LAYERP (page 557) command) Isolate Layer Hides or locks all layers except those of the selected objects. (See LAYISO (page 559) command) Unisolate Layer Restores all layers that were hidden or locked with the LAYISO command. (See LAYUNISO (page 569) command) Freeze Layer Freezes the layer of selected objects. (See LAYFRZ (page 558) command) Layer Off Turns off the layer of a selected object.
other operations; improve object selection performance; and reduce regeneration time for complex drawings. Objects on frozen layers are not displayed, plotted, hidden, rendered, or regenerated. Freeze the layers you want to be invisible for long periods. If you plan to switch visibility settings frequently, use the On/Off property to avoid regenerating the drawing. You can freeze a layer in all viewports, in the current layout viewport, or in new layout viewports as they are created.
VP Freeze overrides the Thaw setting for a layer in the drawing. That is, you can freeze a layer in the current viewport if it's thawed in the drawing, but you can't thaw a layer in the current viewport if it's frozen or off in the drawing. A layer is not visible when it is set to Off or Frozen in the drawing. VP Color (not available on the Model layout) Sets an override for the color associated with the selected layer for the active named (paper space) layout viewport.
the drawing. All layers except those selected, are turned off and locked. (See LAYISO (page 559) command) Remove Viewport Overrides For (not available on the Model layout) Removes the layer property overrides assigned to all layers in the drawing or only for the selected layers in the current viewport only or in all viewports. Rename Renames the selected layer. Delete Deletes the selected layer from the drawing. You can delete only unreferenced layers.
Select All Layers Selects all layers displayed in the list view. Select All Others Selects all other layers in the list view except the current selected layers. Layer List - Layer Group Item Shortcut Menu Edit Group (Applies to dynamic layer groups only) Displays the New Dynamic Group dialog box and allows you to modify the groups rules. Group Layer Status Toggles the Visibility, Freeze, or Lock, Freeze in New Viewports, or Prints layer status of the selected layers.
New Layer Creates a new layer. The layer list displays a layer named Layer1. You can edit the name immediately. The new layer inherits the properties of the currently selected layer in the layer list (color, on or off state, and so on). New Layer Group Creates a new layer group. The layer list displays a layer group named Group1. You can edit the name immediately.
■ External References. Toggles the display of the Xref layer group. This layer group dynamically updates to list all attached external references (xrefs) as nested layer groups and their layers. Show Xref Layers must be enabled before this layer group can be displayed. (See SHOWXREFGROUPS (page 1476) system variable) ■ Layers with Overrides. Toggles the display of the Viewport Overrides layer group.
Summary When a dynamic layer group is added to the Layers palette (page 540), layers that match the rules are displayed in the Layer list under the layer group when expanded. List of Options The following options are displayed. Group Name Provides a space to enter a name for the layer group. Parent Group Displays a list of all the layer groups that the new dynamic layer group can be nested under. Rules Displays the properties of layers. You can use one or more properties to define the layer group.
Viewport Color Selects layers that have a color override, and match or do not match the selected color. Choose Select Color to display the Color Palette dialog box (page 205). Viewport Freeze State Selects Frozen or Thawed layers in the current viewport. Viewport Linetype Selects layers that have a linetype override, and match or do not match the selected linetype. Choose Manage to display the Select Linetype dialog box (page 552).
List of Options The following options are displayed. Choose a Group to Add the Layer To Lists the layer groups that you can add selected layers to. Search for Group Filters the Layer Group list by name as you enter characters. Layer Group List Lists all the layer groups in the current drawing or the layer groups that match the characters entered in the Search for Group text box. Add the Layer to a New Group Adds the layers selected in the Layers palette to the new layer group.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Choose an existing layer to move content to Lists the available layers in the current drawing that you can merge the selected layers with from the Layers palette. All objects on the selected layers from the Layers palette are moved to the specified layer and then the layers are removed from the drawing. See also: Work with Layers Select Linetype Dialog Box Displays linetypes available in the current drawing.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Loaded Linetypes Displays the list of linetypes loaded in the current drawing. Load Displays the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box (page 581), in which you can load selected linetypes into the drawing and add them to the list of linetypes. See also: Work with Layers -LAYER Manages layers and layer properties. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
(page 554)/Ltype (page 555)/LWeight (page 555)/TRansparency (page 555)/MATerial (page 555)/Plot (page 555)/PStyle (page 555)/Freeze (page 556)/Thaw (page 556)/LOck (page 556)/Unlock (page 556)/stAte (page 556)/Description (page 556)/rEconcile (page 556)]: NOTE The Pstyle option is available only when you are using named plot styles.
Color Book Specifies a color from a loaded color book, guide, or set to use for the selected object. Enter the name of a color book that has been installed, such as "DIC COLOR GUIDE(R)$DIC 43". The color is assigned to the layer or layers, and the layers are turned on. To assign a color but turn off the layer, precede the color with a minus sign (-). Ltype Changes the linetype associated with a layer. Lweight Changes the lineweight associated with a layer.
Freeze Freezes layers, making them invisible and excluding them from regeneration and plotting. Thaw Thaws frozen layers, making them visible and available for regeneration and plotting. Lock Locks layers, preventing editing of objects on those layers. Unlock Unlocks selected locked layers, permitting editing of objects on those layers. State Saves and restores the state and property settings of the layers in a drawing.
See also: Use Layers to Manage Complexity LAYERCLOSE Closes the Layers palette. Summary Closes the Layers palette if it is open. See also: Work with Layers LAYERP Undoes the last change or set of changes made to layer settings. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Layers palette ➤ Previous Layer Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Previous Summary Undoes changes you have made to layer settings such as color or linetype. If settings are restored, a message is displayed: “Restored previous layer states.
■ Deleted layers: If you delete or purge a layer, using Layer Previous does not restore it. ■ Added layers: If you add a new layer to a drawing, using Layer Previous does not remove it. See also: Change Layer Settings and Layer Properties LAYERPMODE Turns on and off the tracking of changes made to layer settings. Summary When Layer Previous mode is on, changes made to layers are tracked. When Layer Previous mode is off, changes made to layers are no longer tracked.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Current settings: Viewports=current, Block nesting level=current Select an object on a layer to be frozen (page 559) or [Settings (page 559)/Undo (page 559)]: Select an object or enter s or u Layer has been frozen. Select an Object on a Layer to be Frozen Specifies the layer to be frozen. Layer “” has been frozen. Settings Displays settings for viewports and block definitions.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Layers palette ➤ Isolate Layer Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Isolate Summary All layers except the layers of the selected objects are either turned off, frozen in the current layout viewport, or locked, depending on the current setting. The layers that remain visible and unlocked are called isolated. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Off Turns off all but the selected layers in all viewports. Lock and Fade Locks all layers except the layers of the selected objects, and sets the fading for locked layers. See also: Use Layers to Manage Complexity LAYLCK Locks the layer of a selected object. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Layers palette ➤ Lock Layer Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Lock Summary Using this command, you can prevent objects on a layer from being accidentally modified.
Toolbar: Layers palette ➤ Layer Match Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Match List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select objects to be changed: Select an object to change its layer Select object on destination layer (page 562) or [Name (page 562)]: Select an object or enter n to open the Change to Layer dialog box Select Object on Destination Layer Select an object on the destination layer. Name Displays the Change to Layer dialog box (page 562).
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Layers palette ➤ Make Current Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Make Object’s Layer Current Summary You can change the current layer by selecting an object on that layer. This is a convenient alternative to specifying the layer name in the Layers palette. See also: Use Layers to Manage Complexity LAYMRG (-LAYMRG) Merges selected layers into a target layer, removing the previous layers from the drawing. Summary You can reduce the number of layers in a drawing by merging them.
Select Object on Target Layer Select an object on the target layer. Name Displays a list of layers onto which you can merge the selected object or layer. See also: Use Layers to Manage Complexity LAYOFF Turns off the layer of a selected object. Access Methods Toolbar: Layers palette ➤ Layer Off Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Off Summary Turning off the layer of a selected object makes that object invisible.
Returns the following prompt: ■ Vpfreeze: In paper space, freezes the layer selected in the current viewport. ■ Off: In paper space, turns off selected layers in all viewports. Block Selection Displays the Block Selection setting types, where you can freeze layers of selected objects. ■ Block: Turns off the layers of selected objects. If a selected object is nested in a block, the layer containing that block is turned off. If a selected object is nested in an xref, the layer of the object is turned off.
Access Methods Menu: Insert ➤ Layout ➤ New Layout Menu: Insert ➤ Layout ➤ Layout from Template Toolbar: Status bar ➤ Layout drop-down ➤ Create New Layout List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter layout option [Copy (page 566)/Delete (page 566)/New (page 566)/Template (page 566)/Rename (page 566)/SAveas (page 566)/Set (page 567)/? (page 567)] : NOTE Many of these options are available by right-clicking a layout tab name. Copy Copies a layout.
eliminate unnecessary information. See “Reuse Layouts and Layout Settings” in the User's Guide. The last current layout is used as the default for the layout to save as a template. If the FILEDIA (page 1334) system variable is set to 1, a standard file selection dialog box is displayed in which you can specify the template file in which to save the layout. The default layout template directory is specified in the Application Preferences dialog box. Set Makes a layout current.
Print Layout Outputs the current layout to a printer or file. (PLOT (page 803) command) Close the Visor Closes the Layout visor. The visor is not displayed when switching named layouts until the PAPERSPACEVISOR (page 1425) system variable is set back to 1. See also: Work on a Named Layout LAYTHW Thaws all layers in the drawing. Summary All layers that were previously frozen are unfrozen.
Summary When you move the cursor over objects on locked layers, the locked icon is displayed. You can select an object on a locked layer and unlock that layer without specifying the name of the layer. Objects on unlocked layers can be selected and modified. See also: Prevent Objects from Being Selected LAYUNISO Restores all layers that were hidden or locked with the LAYISO command.
LEADER Creates a line that connects annotation to a feature. Summary It is recommended that you use the workflow available through the MLEADER (page 654) command to create leader objects. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify leader start point: Specify next point: A leader line segment is drawn and prompts for points and options are displayed.
Copy Copies text, a multiline text object, a feature control frame with geometric tolerances, or a block and connects the copy to the end of the leader line. The copy is associated with the leader line, meaning that if the copied object moves, the end of the leader line moves with it. The display of the hook line depends on the object copied.
Spline Draws the leader line as a spline. The vertices of the leader line are the control points, each of equal unit weight. Straight Draws the leader line as a set of straight line segments. Arrow Draws an arrowhead at the start point of the leader line. None Draws a leader line with no arrowhead at the start point. Undo Undoes the last vertex point on the leader line. The previous prompt is displayed.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select an object (page 573) or [DElta (page 573)/Percent (page 574)/Total (page 574)/DYnamic (page 574)]: Select one object or enter an option Object Selection Displays the length and, where applicable, the included angle of the object. LENGTHEN does not affect closed objects. The extrusion direction of the selected object need not be parallel to the Z axis of the current user coordinate system (UCS).
Percent Sets the length of an object by a specified percentage of its total length. Total Sets the length of a selected object by specifying the total absolute length from the fixed endpoint. Total also sets the included angle of a selected arc by a specified total angle. Total Length Lengthens the object to the specified value from the endpoint that is closest to the selection point. Angle Sets the included angle of the selected arc. Dynamic Turns on Dynamic Dragging mode.
LIGHT Creates a light. List of Prompts Depending on the type of light you specify, the prompts that are displayed are identical to the prompts in the POINTLIGHT (page 827), SPOTLIGHT (page 1031), WEBLIGHT (page 1164), TARGETPOINT (page 1075), FREESPOT (page 448), FREEWEB (page 451) or DISTANTLIGHT (page 359) command. See also: Guidelines for Lighting LIMITS Sets and controls the limits of the grid display in the current Model or named layout.
On Turns on limits checking. When limits checking is on, you cannot enter points outside the grid limits. Because limits checking tests only points that you enter, portions of objects such as circles can extend outside the grid limits. Off Turns off limits checking but maintains the current values for the next time you turn on limits checking. See also: Adjust Grid and Grid Snap LINE Creates straight line segments.
Specify first point: Specify a point or press Enter to continue (page 577) from the last drawn line or arc Specify next point or [Close (page 577)/Undo (page 577)]: Continue Continues a line from the endpoint of the most recently drawn line. If the most recently drawn object is an arc, its endpoint defines the starting point of the line, and the line is drawn tangent to the arc. Close Ends the last line segment at the beginning of the first line segment, which forms a closed loop of line segments.
Entering u more than once backtracks through line segments in the order you created them. See also: Draw Lines LINETYPE Loads, sets, and modifies linetypes. Access Methods Menu: Format ➤ Linetype Command entry: 'linetype for transparent use Summary The Linetype Manager (page 578) is displayed. If you enter -linetype at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page 582). See also: Work with Linetypes Linetype Manager Loads linetypes and sets the current linetype.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Linetype Filters Determines which linetypes to display in the linetype list. You can filter linetypes based on whether they are xref-dependent, or whether they are referenced by objects. List of Linetypes Displays the loaded linetypes according to the option specified in Linetype Filters. To quickly select all or clear all linetypes, right-click in the linetype list to display the shortcut menu. Current Indicates which linetype is current.
Linetype Displays names of loaded linetypes. To rename a linetype, select it and then click it again and enter a new name. BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, CONTINUOUS, and xref-dependent linetypes cannot be renamed. Appearance Displays a sample of selected linetypes. Description Displays descriptions of the linetypes, which can be edited in the Details area. Load (+) Displays the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box (page 581), in which you can load into the drawing selected linetypes from the acad.
Scales linetypes in paper space and model space identically. Useful when working with multiple viewports. (PSLTSCALE (page 1449) system variable) See also: Work with Linetypes Load or Reload Linetypes Dialog Box Loads a linetype whose definition exists in a linetype library (LIN) file. Summary The acad.lin file contains the standard linetypes. List of Options The following options are displayed. File Name Displays the name of the current LIN file.
Displays the linetypes available to load. To select or clear all of the linetypes on the list, right-click and choose Select All or Clear All. See also: Work with Linetypes -LINETYPE Loads, sets, and modifies linetypes. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter an option [? (page 582)/Create (page 582)/Load (page 583)/Set (page 583)]: ?—List Linetypes Displays the Select Linetype File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box (page 723)).
a text editor to create a linetype, you must enter a at the beginning of the definition. After creating a linetype, you must load it to make it accessible. Load Loads a linetype whose definition exists in a file. The acad.lin file contains the standard linetypes. The Select Linetype File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box (page 723)) is displayed. Enter or select the file in which the linetype you want to load is stored.
The text window displays the object type, object layer, and the X,Y,Z position relative to the current user coordinate system (UCS) and whether the object is in model space or paper space. LIST also reports the following information: ■ Color, linetype, lineweight, and transparency information, if these properties are not set to BYLAYER. ■ The thickness of an object, if it is nonzero. ■ Elevation (Z coordinate information).
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select section object Turns on live sectioning for the section object you select. See also: Use Live Section to Adjust the Cross Section LOAD Makes shapes available for use by the SHAPE command. Summary The Select Shape File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box (page 723)) is displayed. Enter the shape file name, or select a file name from the list.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Solids - Create tool group ➤ Loft Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Modeling ➤ Loft Summary Creates a 3D solid or surface by specifying a series of cross sections. The cross sections define the shape of the resulting solid or surface. You must specify at least two cross sections. Loft profiles can be open or closed, planar or non-planar, and can also be edge subobjects. Use the mode option to select whether to create a surface or a solid.
You can use the following objects and subobjects with LOFT: Objects That Can Be Used as Cross Sections Objects That Can Be Used as a Loft Path Objects That Can Be Used as Guides 2D polyline Spline 2D spline 2D spline Helix 3D spline Arc Arc Arc Circle Circle 2D polyline 2D solid NOTE 2D polylines can be used as guides if they contain only 1 segment.
Objects That Can Be Used as Cross Sections Objects That Can Be Used as a Loft Path Objects That Can Be Used as Guides Region Trace To automatically delete the cross sections, guides, and paths, use DELOBJ (page 1251). If surface associativity (page 1498) is on, DELOBJ is ignored and the originating geometry is not deleted. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Bulge Magnitude This option only displays if the LOFTNORMALS (page 1397) system variable is set to 1 (smooth fit). Specifies a bulge magnitude value for objects that have a continuity of G1 or G2. Guides Specifies guide curves that control the shape of the lofted solid or surface. You can use guide curves to control how points are matched up on corresponding cross sections to prevent undesired results, such as wrinkles in the resulting solid or surface.
The path curve must intersect all planes of the cross sections. Cross Sections Only Creates lofted objects without using guides or paths. Settings Displays the Loft Settings dialog box (page 590). See also: Create a Solid or Surface by Lofting Loft Settings Dialog Box Controls the contour of a lofted surface at its cross sections. Also allows you to close the surface or solid.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Ruled Specifies that the solid or surface is ruled (straight) between the cross sections and has sharp edges at the cross sections. (LOFTNORMALS (page 1397) system variable) Smooth Fit Specifies that a smooth solid or surface is drawn between the cross sections and has sharp edges at the start and end cross sections.
Start Continuity Sets the tangency and curvature of the first cross section. Start Bulge Magnitude Sets the size of the curve of the first cross section. End Continuity Sets the tangency and curvature of the last cross section. End Bulge Magnitude Sets the size of the curve of the last cross section. Normal To Controls the surface normal of the solid or surface where it passes through the cross sections.
surface. 0 is defined as outward from the plane of the curve. (LOFTNORMALS (page 1397) system variable) The following illustration shows the affect of using a different draft angle for the first and last cross sections of a lofted solid. The first cross section is assigned a draft angle of 45 degrees, while the last cross section is assigned a draft angle of 135 degrees. You can also use the draft angle handle to adjust the draft angle (triangular grip) and magnitude (circular grip).
Start Angle Specifies the draft angle for the start cross section. (LOFTANG1 (page 1395) system variable) Start Magnitude Controls the relative distance of the surface from the start cross section in the direction of the draft angle before the surface starts to bend toward the next cross section. (LOFTMAG1 (page 1396) system variable) End Angle Specifies the draft angle for the end cross section.
Periodic (Smooth Ends) Creates a smooth, closed surface whose seam will not kink if it is reshaped. This option is only available if the loft is ruled or smooth fit and the Close Surface or solid option is selected. See also: Create a Solid or Surface by Lofting LOGFILEOFF Closes the command history log file opened by LOGFILEON. Summary The program stops recording the text window contents and closes the log file. Each drawing saves a log file (with the extension .
Summary The contents of the text window are recorded in the log file until you exit the program or use the LOGFILEOFF (page 595) command. Each drawing saves a log file (with the extension .log) that may need periodic deletion as the number of log files continues to grow. See also: View and Edit Within the Command History LTSCALE Sets the global linetype scale factor.
Access Methods Menu: Format ➤ Lineweight Shortcut menu: Right-click Show/Hide Lineweight on the status bar and choose Settings. Command entry: 'lweight for transparent use Summary The Lineweight Settings dialog box (page 597) is displayed. If you enter -lweight at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page 599).
Summary For a table of valid lineweights, see Overview of Lineweights in the User's Guide. List of Options The following options are displayed. Units Specifies whether lineweights are displayed in millimeters or inches. You can also set Units for Listing by using the LWUNITS (page 1404) system variable. Millimeters (mm) Specifies lineweight values in millimeters. Inches (in.) Specifies lineweight values in inches. Default Controls the DEFAULT lineweight for layers. The initial DEFAULT lineweight is 0.
scale to better display different lineweight widths. The Lineweight list reflects the current display scale. Objects with lineweights that are displayed with a width of more than one pixel may increase regeneration time. If you want to optimize performance when working in the Model layout, set the lineweight display scale to the minimum value or turn off lineweight display altogether. See also: Overview of Lineweights -LWEIGHT Sets the current lineweight, lineweight display options, and lineweight units.
NOTE If you save a drawing using the AutoCAD Release 14, or earlier, format, the drawing preview displays lineweights even though the drawing saved in the earlier format does not display lineweights. See also: Overview of Lineweights M Commands MASSPROP Calculates the mass properties of regions or 3D solids. Access Methods Menu: Tools ➤ Inquiry ➤ Region/Mass Properties Summary Refer to the Help system for a complete list of definitions for each of the region or mass properties computed.
Regions The following table shows the mass properties that are displayed for all regions. Mass properties for all regions Mass property Description Area The surface area of solids or the enclosed area of regions. Perimeter The total length of the inside and outside loops of a region. The perimeter of a solid is not calculated. Bounding box The two coordinates that define the bounding box.
Additional mass properties for coplanar regions Mass property Description Products of inertia Property used to determine the forces causing the motion of an object. It is always calculated with respect to two orthogonal planes. The formula for product of inertia for the YZ plane and XZ plane is product_of_inertiaYZ,XZ = mass * distcentroid_to_YZ * distcentroid_to_XZ This XY value is expressed in mass units times the length squared.
Mass properties for solids Mass property Description Moments of inertia The mass moments of inertia, which is used when computing the force required to rotate an object about a given axis, such as a wheel rotating about an axle. The formula for mass moments of inertia is 2 mass_moments_of_inertia = object_mass * radiusaxis Mass moments of inertia unit is mass (grams or slugs) times the distance squared. Products of inertia Property used to determine the forces causing the motion of an object.
Parameters that control MASSPROP units Parameter Used to calculate LENGTH*LENGTH Area of regions and surface area of solids LENGTH*LENGTH*LENGTH Bounding box, radii of gyration, centroid, and perimeter DENSITY*LENGTH*LENGTH Moments of inertia, products of inertia, and principal moments See also: Obtain Area and Mass Properties Information MATBROWSERCLOSE Closes the Materials Browser. Summary This command closes the Materials Browser (page 605).
Menu: View ➤ Render ➤ Materials Browser Summary The Materials Browser (page 605) is displayed. See also: Browse Material Library Materials Browser The Materials Browser allows you to navigate and manage your materials.
Summary You can also manage your material libraries in the Materials Browser. It also allows you search and sort materials in all open libraries and in the drawing. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Search Searches for materials in the loaded library. Document Materials Displays the materials saved with the current drawing. Use the drop-down list on the right to filter which materials and how they are displayed in the list.
Thumbnail Size Adjusts the size of the material swatches in the list. ■ 16 x16. Thumbnails are scaled to a size of 16 x 16 pixels. (Default option) ■ 24 x24. Thumbnails are scaled to a size of 24 x 24 pixels. ■ 32 x32. Thumbnails are scaled to a size of 32 x 32 pixels. ■ 64 x64. Thumbnails are scaled to a size of 64 x 64 pixels. Current Library Displays the materials from the selected library. Expand a library to display the associated materials in the Materials list.
■ 32 x32. Thumbnails are scaled to a size of 32 x 32 pixels. ■ 64 x64. Thumbnails are scaled to a size of 64 x 64 pixels. See also: Browse Material Library MATCHCELL Applies the properties of a selected table cell to other table cells. Access Methods Button Toolbar: With a table and table cell selected, on the Table Cell visor, click Match Cell. Summary All the properties of the source cell are copied to the destination cells except for the cell type: text or block.
Access Methods Menu: Modify ➤ Match Properties Command entry: painter (or 'matchprop for transparent use) Summary The types of properties that can be applied include color, layer, linetype, linetype scale, lineweight, plot style, transparency, and other specified properties. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Summary Specifies which basic properties and special properties to copy from the source object to the destination objects. List of Options The following options are displayed. Basic Properties Color Changes the color of the destination object to that of the source object. Available for all objects. Layer Changes the layer of the destination object to that of the source object. Available for all objects. Linetype Changes the linetype of the destination object to that of the source object.
Changes the linetype scale factor of the destination object to that of the source object. Available for all objects except attributes, hatches, multiline text, points, and viewports. Lineweight Changes the lineweight of the destination object to that of the source object. Available for all objects. Transparency Changes the transparency of the of the destination object to that of the source object. Available for all objects.
In addition to basic object properties, changes the text style and annotative properties of the destination object to that of the source object. Available only for single-line and multiline text objects. Viewport In addition to basic object properties, changes the following properties of the destination paper space viewport to match those of the source viewport: on/off, display locking, standard or custom scale, shade plot, snap, grid, and UCS icon visibility and location.
Select objects: Pick one or more objects Select objects or [Undo]: Press Enter to exit the command See also: Browse Material Library MATERIALS Opens the Materials Browser. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Materials tool group ➤ Material Browser Menu: View ➤ Render ➤ Materials Browser Command entry: Cmd-9 Summary The Materials Browser (page 605) is displayed. The Materials Browser allows you navigate and manage your materials.
See also: Browse Material Library MEASURE Creates point objects or blocks at measured intervals along the length or perimeter of an object. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Open Shapes tool group (expanded) ➤ Point flyout ➤ Measure Menu: Draw ➤ Point ➤ Measure Summary The resulting points or blocks are always located on the selected object and their orientation is parallel to the XY plane of the UCS. Use DDPTYPE to set the style and size of all point objects in a drawing.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select object to measure: Specify length of segment (page 615) or [Block (page 615)]: Specify a distance or enter b Length of Segment Places point objects at the specified interval along the selected object, starting at the endpoint closest to the point you used to select the object. Measurement of closed polylines starts at their initial vertex (the first one drawn).
See also: Specify Measured Intervals on Objects MEASUREGEOM Measures the distance, radius, angle, area, and volume of selected objects or sequence of points. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Utilities tool group ➤ Measure flyout ➤ Distance Menu: Tools ➤ Inquiry ➤ Distance Summary The MEASUREGEOM command performs many of the same calculations as the following commands: ■ AREA (page 78) ■ DIST (page 357) ■ MASSPROP (page 600) List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
■ Distance in X direction (Delta X) ■ Distance in Y direction (Delta Y) Multiple Points A running total of distance based on existing line segments and the current rubber-band line is calculated. The total updates as you move the cursor and displays in the tooltip. If you enter Arc, Length, or Undo Options for Selecting Polylines (page 618) display. Radius Measures the radius and diameter of a specified arc or circle. Angle Measures the angle of a specified arc, circle, line, or vertex.
Object Measures the volume of an object or defined area. You can select a 3D solids or 2D objects. If you select a 2D object you must specify a height for that object. If you define an object by specifying points, you must specify at least three points to define a polygon. All must lie on a plane parallel to the XY plane of the UCS. If you do not close the polygon, an area will be calculated as if a line existed between the first and last points entered.
Half width Specifies the width from the center of a wide polyline segment to one of its edges. The starting half-width becomes the default ending half-width. The ending half-width becomes the uniform half-width for all subsequent segments until you change the half-width again. The starting and ending points of wide line segments are at the center of the line. Typically, the intersections of adjacent wide polyline segments are beveled.
MESH Creates a 3D mesh primitive object such as a box, cone, cylinder, pyramid, sphere, wedge, or torus. Access Methods Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Modeling ➤ Meshes ➤ Primitives ➤ Box Summary The basic mesh forms, known as mesh primitives, are the equivalent of the primitive forms for 3D solids. You can reshape mesh objects by smoothing, creasing, refining, and splitting faces. You can also drag edges, faces, and vertices to mold the overall form. NOTE By default, new mesh primitives are created with no smoothness.
First corner / Corner Sets the first corner of the mesh box. ■ Other corner. Sets the opposite corner of the mesh box. ■ Cube (page 621) ■ Length (page 621) Center Sets the center of the mesh box. ■ Corner. Sets the opposite corner of the mesh box. ■ Cube (page 621) ■ Length (page 621) Cube Sets all edges of the box to be of equal length. ■ Length (page 621) Length Sets the length of the mesh box along the X axis.
Specify the diameter and height. Center point of base Sets the center point of the base of the mesh cone. ■ Base radius (page 623) ■ Diameter (page 623) 3P (three points) Sets the location, size, and plane of the mesh cone by specifying three points: ■ First point. Sets the first point on the circumference of the mesh cone base. ■ Second point. Sets a second point on the circumference of the mesh cone base. ■ Third point. Sets the size and planar rotation of the mesh cone base.
■ 2Point (height) (page 623) ■ Axis endpoint (page 624) ■ Top radius (page 624) If the specified criteria can produce multiple results, the closest tangent points are used. Elliptical Specifies an elliptical base for the mesh cone. ■ Endpoint of first axis. Sets the start point for the first axis of the mesh cone base and then specifies the other axis endpoints: ■ Other endpoint of first axis. Sets the first axis endpoint. ■ ■ Endpoint of second axis. Sets the second axis endpoint Center.
■ Second point. Sets the second point of a two-point distance. Axis endpoint Sets the location of the top point of the cone or the center of the top face of a cone frustum. The orientation of the axis endpoint can be anywhere in 3D space. Top radius Specifies the top radius of the cone, creating a cone frustum. ■ Height (page 623) ■ 2Point (height) (page 623) ■ Axis endpoint (page 624) Cylinder Creates a 3D mesh cylinder. Specify the size of the base and height.
2P (diameter) Sets the diameter of the mesh cylinder base by specifying two points: ■ First endpoint of diameter. Sets the first point on the diameter of the mesh cylinder base. ■ Second endpoint of diameter. Sets the second point on the diameter of the mesh cylinder base. ■ Height (page 626) ■ 2Point (height) (page 625) ■ Axis endpoint (page 626) 2Point (height) Defines the height of the mesh cylinder by specifying the distance between two points: ■ First point.
Height Sets the height of the mesh cylinder along an axis that is perpendicular to the plane of the base. Axis endpoint Sets the location of the top face of the cylinder. The orientation of the axis endpoint can be anywhere in 3D space. Elliptical Specifies an elliptical base for the mesh cylinder. ■ Endpoint of first axis. Sets the start point for the first axis of the mesh cone base. ■ Other endpoint of first axis. Sets the first axis endpoint. ■ ■ Endpoint of second axis. Sets the second axis endpoint.
■ Second endpoint of edge. Sets the second location of the edge of the mesh pyramid. ■ Height (page 627) ■ 2Point (height) (page 627) ■ Axis endpoint (page 627) ■ Top radius (page 627) Sides Sets the number of sides for the mesh pyramid. Enter a positive value from 3-32. ■ Center point of base (page 626) ■ Edge (page 626) ■ Sides. Resets the number of sides for the mesh pyramid. Base radius Sets the radius of the mesh pyramid base.
■ 2Point (height) (page 627) ■ Axis endpoint (page 627) Circumscribed Specifies that the base of the pyramid is circumscribed, or is drawn around, the base radius. ■ Base radius (page 627) ■ Inscribed (page 627) Sphere Creates a 3D mesh sphere. Specify the size of the sphere (diameter or radius). Center point Sets the center point of the sphere. ■ Radius. Creates a mesh sphere based on a specified radius. ■ Diameter. Creates a mesh sphere based on a specified diameter.
Ttr (tangent, tangent, radius) Defines a mesh sphere with a specified radius that is tangent to two objects: ■ Point on object for first tangent. Sets a point on an object to serve as the first tangent point. ■ Point on object for second tangent. Sets a point on an object to serve as the second tangent point. ■ Radius of circle. Sets the radius of the mesh sphere. If the specified criteria can produce multiple results, the closest tangent points are used. Wedge Creates a 3D mesh wedge.
■ Length (page 630) Cube Sets all edges of the mesh wedge base to be of equal length. ■ Length (page 630) Length Sets the length of the mesh wedge base along the X axis. ■ Width (page 630) (not available for Cube) Width Sets the width of the mesh box along the Y axis. ■ Height (page 630) ■ 2Point (height) (page 630) Height Sets the height of the mesh wedge. Enter a positive value to draw the height along the positive Z axis of the current UCS.
3P (three points) Sets the location, size, and rotation of the mesh torus by specifying three points. The path of the tube passes through the specified points: ■ First point. Sets the first point on the path of the tube. ■ Second point. Sets the second point on the path of the tube. ■ Third point. Sets the third point on the path of the tube.
Diameter (torus) Sets the diameter of the mesh torus, measured from the center point of the torus to the center point of the tube. ■ Tube radius (page 632) ■ 2Point (tube radius) (page 632) ■ Diameter (tube) (page 632) Tube radius Sets the radius of the profile that is swept around the mesh torus path. 2Point (tube radius) Sets the radius of the profile of the tube based on the distance between two points that you specify: ■ First point. Sets the first point of a two-point distance. ■ Second point.
Summary You can close gaps in mesh objects by selecting the edges of the surrounding mesh faces. For best results, the faces should be on the same plane. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select connecting mesh edges to create a new mesh face Specifies which mesh edges form the boundary for the closure. Click the edges to select them. Select edges or [CHain] Edges Selects individual edges and adds them to the selection set.
Summary You can cause the vertices of surrounding mesh faces to converge at the center of a selected edge or face. The shapes of surrounding faces change to accommodate the loss of one or more vertices. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select mesh face or edge to collapse Specifies a mesh edge or a face whose midpoint becomes the point of convergence for the surrounding faces. Click a single mesh edge or face.
You can also apply creases to mesh subobjects by changing the crease type and crease level in the Properties Inspector palette (page 844). List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select mesh subobjects to crease Specifies the mesh subobjects to crease. Click mesh faces, edges, and vertices to crease their associated edges. Press Shift+click to remove a subobject from the selection set.
Summary When you extrude, or extend, a mesh face, you can specify several options to determine the shape of the extrusion. You can also determine whether extruding multiple mesh faces results in joined or separate extrusions. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Mesh face(s) to extrude Specifies the mesh faces to extrude. Click one or more faces to select them.
Height of extrusion Extrudes mesh faces along the Z axis. Enter a positive value to extrude the face along the positive Z axis. Enter a negative value to extrude along the negative Z axis. Multiple mesh faces do not need to be parallel to the same plane. Direction Specifies the length and direction of the extrusion. (The direction cannot be parallel to the plane of the sweep curve created by the extrusion.) ■ Start point of direction. Specifies the first point in the direction vector.
Positive angles taper inward from the base mesh face. Negative angles taper outward. The default angle, 0, extrudes the face perpendicular to the plane of the mesh. If the adjacent faces are not set to be joined, the faces that are selected for extrusion are tapered to the same value. However, for joined extrusions, the taper is applied only to the portion of the extrusion that is not adjacent to another extruded face.
The merge operation is performed only on mesh faces that are adjacent. Other types of subobjects are removed from the selection set. Merging mesh faces that wrap a corner can have unintended results when you try to edit the mesh or convert it to other types of solid objects. For example, the mesh might no longer be watertight. For best results, restrict mesh merging to faces that are on the same plane. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Refining an object resets the smoothing level that was assigned to the object to 0 (zero). This level of smoothness becomes the new baseline for the object. That is, the smoothness level can no longer be decreased beyond that level. Refining a subobject does not reset the smoothing level. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Mesh object or face subobjects to refine Specifies 3D mesh objects or mesh faces to be refined. Press Ctrl+click to isolate a specific face.
The level of smoothness upon conversion depends on the mesh type setting (FACETERMESHTYPE (page 1329) system variable). If the mesh type is not set to be optimized, the converted object is not smoothed. To convert mesh objects to 3D surfaces or solids, use CONVTOSOLID (page 229) or CONVTOSURFACE (page 232) commands.
You can decrease the smoothness of multiple objects. If the selected objects have different levels of smoothness, their respective levels are decreased by one. If the selection set contains ineligible objects, those objects can be filtered out. See also: Change Mesh Smoothness Levels MESHSMOOTHMORE Increases the level of smoothness for mesh objects by one level.
Facets are the underlying components of each mesh face. You can increase the smoothness level up to the value of SMOOTHMESHMAXLEV (page 1481) as long as the number of faces does not exceed the value in the SMOOTHMESHMAXFACE (page 1480) system variable. If you select multiple objects with differing levels of smoothness, their respective levels are increased by one. You can only smooth mesh objects. However, you have the option of converting some types of objects to mesh during the smoothing operation.
NOTE You can use MESHSPLIT (page 644) to divide a rectangular face into two triangular faces. If you plan to spin the edge between the triangular faces, use the Vertex option to ensure that the split extends precisely from one vertex to the other. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. First triangular mesh face to spin Specifies one of two faces to be modified. Click a triangular mesh face. Second adjacent triangular mesh face to spin Specifies the second of two faces to be modified.
For more precision in the placement of the split, you can specify that the split starts or ends at a vertex. The Vertex option is useful for creating two triangular faces from a rectangular face. It provides the precision you need if you later want to spin the new edge using MESHSPIN (page 643). List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed: Face to split In the drawing area, specifies which mesh face to split. ■ First split point on face edge.
MESHUNCREASE Removes the crease from selected mesh faces, edges, or vertices. Access Methods Menu: Modify ➤ Mesh Editing ➤ Uncrease Summary Restore smoothness to an edge that has been creased. You can also remove a selected crease in the Crease area of Properties Inspector (page 844) by changing the Type value to None when a face on a mesh is selected. List of Prompts The following prompt is displayed: Select crease to remove Specifies which creased edges to smooth.
Summary Options at the insertion point preset the scale and rotation of a block before you specify its position. Presetting is useful for dragging a block using a scale factor and a rotation other than 1 or 0. If you enter one of the options, respond to the prompts by specifying a distance for the scale options or an angle for rotation. Blocks inserted using MINSERT cannot be exploded. You cannot use MINSERT with annotative blocks. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Corner Sets the scale factor by using the block insertion point and the opposite corner. ■ Specify Rotation Angle (page 647) ■ Number of Rows/Columns (page 647) ■ Distance Between Rows (page 647) ■ Distance Between Columns (page 647) XYZ Sets X, Y, and Z scale factors.
Y Sets the Y scale factor. ■ Specify Rotation Angle (page 647) ■ Number of Rows/Columns (page 647) ■ Distance Between Rows (page 647) ■ Distance Between Columns (page 647) Z Sets the Z scale factor. ■ Specify Rotation Angle (page 647) ■ Number of Rows/Columns (page 647) ■ Distance Between Rows (page 647) ■ Distance Between Columns (page 647) Rotate Sets the angle of insertion for both the individual blocks and the entire array.
■ Corner (page 648) ■ XYZ (page 648) Preview Y Sets the scale factor for the Y axis to control the display of the block as it is dragged into position. ■ X Scale Factor (page 647) ■ Corner (page 648) ■ XYZ (page 648) Preview Z Sets the scale factor for the Z axis to control the display of the block as it is dragged into position. ■ X Scale Factor (page 647) ■ Corner (page 648) ■ XYZ (page 648) Preview Rotate Sets the rotation angle of the block as it is dragged into position.
Menu: Modify ➤ Mirror Summary You can create objects that represent half of a drawing, select them, and mirror them across a specified line to create the other half. NOTE By default, when you mirror a text object, the direction of the text is not changed. Set the MIRRTEXT (page 1409) system variable to 1 if you do want the text to be reversed. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
plane perpendicular to the XY plane of the user coordinate system (UCS) containing the mirror line. Erase source objects? [Yes/No] : Enteryorn, or press Enter Yes Places the mirrored image into the drawing and erases the original objects. No Places the mirrored image into the drawing and retains the original objects. See also: Mirror Objects MIRROR3D Creates a mirrored copy of selected objects across a mirroring plane.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select objects: Use an object selection method and press Enter to finish Specify first point of mirror plane (3 points) or [Object (page 653)/Last (page 653)/Zaxis (page 653)/View (page 654)/XY/YZ/ZX (page 654)/3points (page 654)] <3points>: Enter an option, specify a point, or press Enter Object Uses the plane of a selected planar object as the mirroring plane.
View Aligns the mirroring plane with the viewing plane of the current viewport through a point. XY/YZ/ZX Aligns the mirroring plane with one of the standard planes (XY, YZ, or ZX) through a specified point. 3 Points Defines the mirroring plane by three points. If you select this option by specifying a point, the First Point on Mirror Plane prompt is not displayed. See also: Mirror Objects MLEADER Creates a multileader object.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Leaders tool group ➤ Multileader Menu: Dimension ➤ Multileader Summary A multileader object typically consists of an arrowhead, a horizontal landing, a leader line or curve, and either a multiline text object or a block. Multileaders can be created arrowhead first (page 655), leader landing first (page 656), or content first (page 656). If a multileader style has been used, then the multileader can be created from that specified style.
Leader Landing First Specifies a location for the landing line of the multileader object. Specify Leader Arrowhead Location Sets placement of the arrowhead for the new multileader object. If you exit the command at this point, then no text is associated with the multileader line. Content First Specifies a location for the text or block associated with the multileader object. Point Selection Sets placement for the text box for the text label associated with the multileader object.
Mtext Specifies that multiline text is included with the multileader. ■ Enter the multiline text. None Specifies no content type. Maxpoints Specifies a maximum number of points for the new leader line. ■ Enter the maximum points for leader line. ■ None. First Angle Constrains the angle of the first point in the new leader line. ■ Enter first angle constraint. ■ None. Second Angle Constrains the second angle in the new leader line. ■ Enter second angle constraint. ■ None.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select multileader to align to or [Options (page 658)]: Options Specifies options for aligning and spacing the selected multileaders. Distribute Spaces content evenly between two selected points. Make Leader Segments Parallel Places content so that each of the last leader segments in the selected multileaders are parallel. Specify Spacing Specifies spacing between the extents of the content of selected multileaders.
Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Multileader ➤ Collect Summary After you select multileaders, you can specify their placement. For example: List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify collected multileader location (page 659) or [Vertical (page 659)/Horizontal (page 659)/Wrap (page 659)] Specify Collected Multileader Location Specifies the point for placing the multileader collection in the upper-left corner of the collection. Vertical Places the multileader collection in one or more columns.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Leaders tool group ➤ Add Leader, Remove Leader Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Multileader ➤ Add Leader Pointing device: Hover over Landing grip and choose Add Leader; hover over leader endpoint grip and choose Remove Leader List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify leader arrowhead location (page 660) or [Remove Leaders (page 660)] Add Leader Adds a leader line to a selected multileader object.
See also: Create and Modify Leaders MLEADERSTYLE Creates and modifies multileader styles. Access Methods Menu: Format ➤ Multileader Style Summary The Multileader Style Manager (page 661) is displayed.
Summary Sets the current multileader style and creates, modifies, and deletes multileader styles. The appearance of multileaders is controlled by multileader styles. These styles specify formatting for landing lines, leader lines, arrowheads, and content. List of Options The following options are displayed. Current Multileader Style Displays the name of the multileader style that is applied to multileaders you create. The default multileader style is Standard.
List Controls the contents of the Styles list. Click All Styles to display all multileader styles available in the drawing. Click Styles In Use to display only the multileader styles that are referenced by multileaders in the current drawing. Preview Of Displays a preview image of the style that is selected in the Styles list. New (+) Displays the Create New Multileader Style dialog box, in which you can define new multileader styles. Delete (-) Deletes the multileader style selected in the Styles list.
Summary Controls the general appearance of the multileader. List of Options The following options are displayed. Preview Displays a preview image of the style being modified. List of Tabs The following tabs are displayed.
Leader Format Tab Controls the formatting of the leader lines and arrowheads for the multileader. General Controls the general settings of the arrowheads. Type Determines the type of leader line. You can choose a straight leader, a spline, or no leader line. Color Determines the color of the leader line. Linetype Determines the linetype of the leader line. Lineweight Determines the lineweight of the leader line. Arrowhead Controls the appearance of the multileader arrowheads.
Leader Structure Tab Controls the number of leader points, landing size, and scale for the multilieader. Constrain Controls the constraints of the multileader. Maximum Leader Points Specifies a maximum number of points for the leader line. First Segment Angle Specifies the angle of the first point in the leader line. Second Segment Angle Specifies the angle of the second point in the multileader landing line. Landing Controls the landing settings of the multileader.
Content Tab Controls the type of content attached to the multileader. Multileader Type Determines whether the multileader contains text or a block. MText: Text Options Controls the appearance of the text for the multileader. Default Text Sets default text for the multileader content. The [...] button launches the MTEXT In Place Editor. Text Style Lists the available text styles. Text Style Button Displays the Text Style dialog box (page 1041) where you can create or modify text styles.
Horizontal Inserts the leader to the left or right of the text content. A horizontal attachment includes a landing line between the text and the leader. Left Controls the attachment of the landing line to the multileader text when the text is to the right of the leader. Right Controls the attachment of the landing line to the multileader text when the text is to the left of the leader. Landing Gap Specifies the distance between the landing line and the multileader text.
Specifies the color of the multileader block content. The Block color control in the MLEADERSTYLE Content tab only takes effect if the object color included in the block is set to ByBlock. Scale Specifies the scale of the block upon insertion. For example, if the block is a 1 inch square and the scale specified is 0.5000, then the block is inserted as a 1/2 inch square.
MLEDIT (-MLEDIT) Edits multiline intersections, breaks, and vertices. Access Methods Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Multiline Summary If you enter -mledit at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page 670). See also: Modify Multilines -MLEDIT Edits multiline intersections, breaks, and vertices. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. CC Creates a closed-cross intersection between two multilines. OC Creates an open-cross intersection between two multilines.
CJ Creates a corner joint between multilines. The multilines are trimmed or extended to their intersection. AV Adds a vertex to a multiline. DV Deletes a vertex from a multiline. CS Creates a visual break in a selected element of a multiline. CA Creates a visual break through the entire multiline. WA Rejoins multiline segments that have been cut. See also: Modify Multilines MLINE Creates multiple parallel lines. Access Methods Menu: Draw ➤ Multiline List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Undo Undoes the last vertex point on the multiline. Close Closes the multiline by joining the last segments with the first segments. Justification Determines how the multiline is drawn between the points you specify. ■ Top (page 672) ■ Zero (page 672) ■ Bottom (page 672) Top Draws the multiline below the cursor, so that the line with the most positive offset is at the specified points. Zero Draws the multiline with its origin centered at the cursor, so that the element with an offset of 0.
Scale Controls the overall width of the multiline. This scale does not affect linetype scale. The scale factor is based on the width established in the multiline style definition. A scale factor of 2 produces a multiline twice as wide as the style definition. A negative scale factor flips the order of the offset line—the smallest on top when the multiline is drawn from left to right. A negative scale value also alters the scale by the absolute value.
Summary On the Model layout, you can create drawings in model space. The Model layout automatically sets the TILEMODE (page 1511) system variable to 1, and you can create model viewports to display various views of your drawing. Once you have completed your drawing, you can choose a named (paper space) layout to begin designing a layout environment from which to plot.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select objects: Specify base point or [Displacement]: Specify second point or
Number of Actions Reverses the specified number of actions. All Reverses all previous actions. Last Reverses only the last action. See also: Correct Mistakes MSPACE In a layout, switches from paper space to model space in a layout viewport. Access Methods Pointing device: Double-click over a viewport on a named layout. Double-click outside of a viewport on a named layout to return to paper space. Summary Commands operate in either model space or paper space.
Summary Displays either the Text Editor visor and the In-Place Text Editor to modify the formatting or content of the selected multiline text object. The In-Place Text Editor (page 678) is displayed. See also: Change Multiline Text MTEXT Creates a multiline text object. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Text tool group ➤ Multiline flyout ➤ Multiline Text Menu: Draw ➤ Text ➤ Multiline Text Summary You can create several paragraphs of text as a single multiline text (mtext) object.
In-Place Text Editor Creates or modifies single or multiline text objects. Summary You can import or paste text from other files to use in multiline text, set tabs, adjust paragraph and line spacing and alignment, and create and modify columns.
Insert Field Displays the Insert Field dialog box (page 432). Symbol Displays a list of available symbols. You can also select a Non-breaking space and open the Characters dialog box for additional symbols. Import Text Displays the Select File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box (page 723)). Select any file that is in ASCII or RTF format. Imported text retains its original character formatting and style properties, but you can edit and format the imported text in the editor.
■ Continue: Adds the selected paragraphs to the last list above and continues the sequence. If list items rather than paragraphs are selected, unselected items below the selected items continue the sequence. ■ Allow Auto-list: Applies list formatting as you type. The following characters can be used as punctuation after letters and numbers and cannot be used as bullets: period (.), comma (,), close parenthesis ()), close angle bracket (>), close square bracket (]), and close curly bracket (}).
Background Mask Displays the Background Mask dialog box (page 689). (Not available for table cells and single-line text.) Stack Creates stacked text, for example, fractions, if the selected text contains stack characters. Also, unstacks text if stacked text is selected. When the stack characters, carat (^), forward slash (/), and pound sign (#), are used, the text to the left of the stack character is stacked on top of the text to the right.
See also: Overview of Multiline Text Text Editor Visor Formats the text of the current multiline text object. List of Options The following options are displayed. Text Editor Visor - Row 1 Style Options Style Applies a text style to the multiline text object. The Standard text style is active by default. Text Height Sets the character height in drawing units for new text or changes the height of selected text.
Editor Options Undo Undoes actions in the text editor, including changes to either text content or text formatting. Redo Redoes actions in the text editor, including changes to either text content or text formatting. Cancel Closes the text editor and changes are ignored. Save Closes the text editor and saves your changes. More Options Displays the second row of the visor which contains additional formatting options.
dialog box, which contains the entire character set for each font available on your system. When you have selected the character that you want to use, click Insert to place the character in the text editor. Close the Characters dialog box when you are done inserting special characters. Symbols are not supported in vertical text. Insert Field Displays the Insert Field dialog box (page 432), where you can select a field to insert in the text.
Summary Specifies tab stops, indents, controls paragraph alignment, paragraph spacing, and paragraph line spacing. NOTE Not all of the new options for paragraph and paragraph line spacing are supported in AutoCAD 2007 and previous releases. See MTEXT Paragraph and Paragraph Line Spacing in Previous Releases in the User’s Guide. List of Options The following options are displayed. Tab Specifies the tab stops and decimal styles to use for the paragraph.
Tab Stops Displays tab setting options, including adding and removing tabs. Options include setting left, center, right, and decimal tabs. You can also set tabs from the Tab selection button on the In-Place Editor’s ruler. Decimal style Sets the decimal style based on current user locale. Options include setting the decimal style as period, comma, and space. This setting is preserved with the drawing even if the locale setting is changed. Indent Controls the left and right indents for the paragraph.
Summary You can specify column and gutter width, height, and number of columns. You can edit column width and height with grip-editing. To create multiple columns you always start with a single column. Depending on the column mode you choose, you have two different methods for creating and manipulating columns – static mode or dynamic mode. List of Options The following options are displayed. No Columns Specifies no columns for the current mtext object.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Column Type Lists choices for the type of columns you want to create. Height Displays the height of the multiline text object when Auto Height with Dynamic or Static Columns is selected. Number Sets the number of columns. This is only active when you select Static Columns. Width Displays and specifies control column and gutter width values. The gutter value is five times the default multiline text height.
Also displays the total width value of the multiline text object. See also: Overview of Multiline Text Background Mask Dialog Box Controls using an opaque background behind multiline text. List of Options The following options are displayed. Use Background Mask Puts an opaque background behind the text. NOTE When you apply a background mask to mtext multiple columns only the column areas will be masked. The space between the columns commonly referred to as gutters will be unmasked.
See also: Overview of Multiline Text Find and Replace Dialog Box - MTEXT Searches for specified text strings and replaces them with new text. Access Methods Shortcut menu: Select the Find and Replace icon in the text editor or from the MTEXT shortcut menu List of Options The following options are displayed. Find What Provides a space for you to type the text you want to find. Replace With Provides a space for you to type the text you want to replace the text you typed in Find What.
Replace Finds the next instance of the text specified in Find What and replaces it with the text in Replace With. Replace All Finds all instances of the text specified in Find What and replaces it with the text in Replace With. Hide Options Specifies advanced find options. Match Case Finds only text with uppercase and lowercase characters as specified in Find What. The case of all characters in the text string must match the case of the text in Find What.
Summary To open the Stack Properties dialog box, select the stacked text, right-click, and click Stack Properties on the shortcut menu. You can edit the upper and lower text separately. The Appearance options control the stack style, position, and text size of the stacked text. List of Options The following options are displayed. Text Changes the upper and lower numbers of a stacked fraction. Upper Edits the number in the upper part or first half of a stacked fraction.
NOTE Releases of AutoCAD earlier than AutoCAD 2000 do not support diagonal fractions. If a multiline text object contains diagonal fractions, the fractions are converted to horizontal fractions when you save the drawing to pre-AutoCAD 2000 releases. Diagonal fractions are restored when the drawing is re-opened in AutoCAD 2000 or a later release.
Access Methods Shortcut menu: Select stacked text in the text editor. Right-click and click Stack Properties on the shortcut menu. In the Stack Properties dialog box, click AutoStack. List of Options The following options are displayed. Enable AutoStacking Automatically stacks numeric characters entered before and after the carat, slash, or pound character. For example, if you type 1#3 followed by a nonnumeric character or space, the text is automatically stacked as a diagonal fraction.
Symbols and Special Characters You can include special characters and symbols by entering a control code or a Unicode string. With the In-Place Text Editor (page 678), you can right-click and click Symbol on the shortcut menu. NOTE Symbols are not supported in vertical text. Unicode strings and control codes Control Codes Unicode Strings Result %%d \U+00B0 Degree symbol (°) %%p \U+00B1 Tolerance symbol ( ) %%c \U+2205 Diameter symbol ( ) To insert the following text symbols, click Symbol on the
Text symbols and Unicode strings Name Symbol Unicode String Delta \U+0394 Electrical phase \U+0278 Flow line \U+E101 Identity \U+2261 Initial length \U+E200 Monument line \U+E102 Not equal \U+2260 Ohm \U+2126 Omega \U+03A9 Plate/property line \U+214A 696 | Chapter 2 Commands
Text symbols and Unicode strings Name Symbol Unicode String Subscript 2 \U+2082 Squared \U+00B2 Cubed \U+00B3 These text symbols are available in the following True Type (TTF) and SHX fonts: ■ Simplex* ■ Romans* ■ gdt* ■ amgdt* ■ Isocp ■ Isocp2 ■ Isocp3 ■ Isoct ■ Isoct2 ■ Isoct3 ■ Isocpeur (TTF only)* ■ Isocpeur italic (TTF only) ■ Isocteur (TTF only) ■ Isocteur italic (TTF only) * These fonts also include the Initial Length symbol used for arc length dimensions.
-MTEXT Creates a multiline text object. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify first corner. Specify opposite corner (page 698) or [Height (page 698)/Justify (page 698)/Line spacing (page 700)/Rotation (page 701)/Style (page 701)/Width (page 701)/Columns (page 701)]. Opposite Corner As you drag the pointing device to specify the opposite corner, a rectangle is displayed to show the location and size of the multiline text object.
middle, the top, or the bottom of the paragraph with respect to the top and bottom text boundaries. Enter justification [TL/TC/TR/ML/MC/MR/BL/BC/BR] . Justify Options Option Meaning TL Top Left TC Top Center TR Top Right ML Middle Left MC Middle Center MR Middle Right BL Bottom Left BC Bottom Center BR Bottom Right The following illustrations show each justification option.
Line Spacing Specifies line spacing for the multiline text object. Line spacing is the vertical distance between the bottom (or baseline) of one line of text and the bottom of the next line of text. NOTE Exact spacing is recommended when you use MTEXT to create a table. Use a smaller text height than the specified line spacing to ensure that text does not overlap. At Least Adjusts lines of text automatically based on the height of the largest character in the line.
Exactly Forces the line spacing to be the same for all lines of text in the multiline text object. Spacing is based on the text height of the object or text style. Spacing Factor Sets the line spacing to a multiple of single-line spacing. Single spacing is 1.66 times the height of the text characters. You can enter a spacing factor as a number followed by x to indicate a multiple of single spacing. For example, specify single spacing by entering 1x, or specify double spacing by entering 2x.
Dynamic Specifies column width, gutter width and column height. Dynamic columns are text driven. Adjusting columns affect text flow and text flow causes columns to be added or removed. No columns Sets no column mode to current mtext object. The default column setting is stored in the MTEXTCOLUMN (page 1411) system variable. See also: Overview of Multiline Text MULTIPLE Repeats the next command until canceled. Summary The command that you enter is repeated until you press Esc.
Summary In a layout, you can create as many viewports as you want, but only up to 64 viewports can be active at one time (see MAXACTVP (page 1405)). Objects in model space are visible only in active viewports. Viewports that are not active are blank. Use the On and Off options to control whether viewports are active. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Wireframe Specifies that a viewport is plotted wireframe regardless of the current display. Hidden Specifies that a viewport is plotted with hidden lines removed regardless of the current display. All Visual Styles Specifies that a viewport is plotted using the specified visual style. All Render Presets Specifies that a viewport is plotted using the specified render preset. Lock Prevents the zoom scale factor in the selected viewport from being changed when working in model space.
Fit Sizes the viewports to fill the drawing area. Layer Resets layer property overrides for the selected viewport to their global layer properties. ■ Reset Viewport Layer Property Overrides Back To Global Properties. Enter Y to remove all layer property overrides. ■ Select Viewports. 2 Divides the specified area horizontally or vertically into two viewports of equal size. ■ Enter Viewport Arrangement.
■ Fit (page 705) 4 Divides the specified area horizontally and vertically into four viewports of equal size. ■ First Corner (page 705) ■ Fit (page 705) See also: Create and Modify Layout Viewports MVSETUP Sets up the specifications of a drawing. Summary When you enter mvsetup, the prompts displayed depend on whether you are on the Model layout (model space) (page 706) or on a named layout (paper space) (page 707).
On the Model layout, you set the units type, drawing scale factor, and paper size at the Command prompt using MVSETUP. Using the settings you provide, a rectangular border is drawn at the grid limits. List of Prompts When the TILEMODE (page 1511) system variable is on (the default), the following prompt are displayed: Enable paper space? [No/Yes] : Enternor press Enter Pressing Enter turns off TILEMODE and proceeds as described in the following section, Using MVSETUP on a Layout Tab.
List of Prompts When the TILEMODE (page 1511) system variable is off, or when you enter y or press Enter at the Enable Paper Space prompt, the following prompts are displayed: Enter an option [Align (page 708)/Create (page 708)/Scale viewports (page 709)/Options (page 709)/Title block (page 710)/Undo (page 709)]: Enter an option or press Enter to end the command Align Pans the view in a viewport so that it aligns with a base point in another viewport.
The viewing angle for each quadrant is set as shown in the table. Quadrant View Upper-left Top (XY plane of UCS) Upper-right SE isometric view Lower-left Front (XZ plane of UCS) Lower-right Right side (YZ plane of UCS) Entering 3 defines a matrix of viewports along the X and Y axes. Specifying points at the next two prompts defines the rectangular area of the drawing that contains the viewport configuration.
Limits Specifies whether to reset the grid limits to the drawing extents after a title block has been inserted. Units Specifies whether the sizes and point locations are translated to inch or millimeter paper units. Xref Specifies whether the title block is inserted or externally referenced. Title Block Prepares paper space, orients the drawing by setting the origin, and creates a drawing border and a title block. Delete Objects Deletes objects from paper space.
N Commands NAVVCUBE Indicates the current viewing direction. Dragging or clicking the ViewCube tool rotates the scene. Access Methods Menu: View ➤ Display ➤ ViewCube ➤ On Toolbar: Status bar ➤ ViewCube Summary Click the ViewCube tool to rotate and fill the window with the entire model or an object selected in the view. The Home button displayed near the ViewCube tool rotates the model to a three-fourths view or a user-defined view while performing a fit-to-view.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Display Location Identifies the corner in a viewport where the ViewCube tool is displayed. (NAVVCUBELOCATION (page 1414) system variable) Size Specifies the size of the ViewCube tool. (NAVVCUBESIZE (page 1415) system variable) Select Automatic to have the size of the ViewCube tool adjust based on the current size of the active viewport, zoom factor of the active layout, or drawing window.
Specifies if the current view is adjusted to the closest preset view when changing the view by dragging the ViewCube tool. When Clicking Zoom to Extents Specifies if the model is forced to fit the current viewport after a view change. Orient ViewCube to Current UCS Controls whether the ViewCube tool reflects the current UCS or WCS. (NAVVCUBEORIENT (page 1415) system variable) Animate When Switching Views Controls the use of smooth view transitions when switching between views.
Summary If the FILEDIA system variable is set to 0 instead of 1, a Command prompt is displayed (page 714). See also: Overview of Starting a New Drawing NEW Command Prompt Summary Enter a tilde (~) at the prompt to display the Select Template dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box (page 723)). List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter template file name or [. (for none)] : Enter a name, enter a period (.
a new project. After a project data file is created, you can create new layouts or add layouts from existing drawings to the project. See also: Create a Project O Commands OBJECTSCALE Adds or deletes supported scales for annotative objects. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Annotation Scaling tool group ➤ Add/Delete Scales Menu: Modify ➤ Annotative Object Scale ➤ Add/Delete Scales Shortcut menu: Select an annotative object.
Annotation Object Scale List Dialog Box Adds or deletes supported scales for the selected annotative object. List of Options The following options are displayed. Object Scale List Displays the list of scales supported by the selected object. List all scales for selected objects Specifies that all scales supported by the selected objects are displayed in the Object Scale List.
See also: Scale Views in Layout Viewports Add Scales to Object Dialog Box Adds a new scale to the selected annotative object. List of Options The following option is displayed. Scale List Displays the list of scales that can be added to the selected annotative object. Multiple scales can be selected by holding down the Shift or Command key while selecting the scales. Use the SCALELISTEDIT (page 930) command to add custom scales to this list.
-OBJECTSCALE List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select annotative objects: Use an object selection method Enter an option [Add (page 718)/Delete (page 718)/? (page 718)] : Enter a or d or press Enter Add Adds an annotation scale to the selected annotative objects. When created, an annotative object supports one annotation scale: the current annotation scale. However, an annotative object can be updated to support additional annotation scales for views at different scales.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Copy tool group ➤ Offset Menu: Modify ➤ Offset Summary You can offset an object at a specified distance or through a point. After you offset objects, you can trim and extend them as an efficient method to create drawings containing many parallel lines and curves. The OFFSET command repeats for convenience. To exit the command, press Enter. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Offset Distance Creates an object at a specified distance from an existing object. Exit Exits the OFFSET command. Multiple Enters the Multiple offset mode, which repeats the offset operation using the current offset distance. Undo Reverses the previous offset. Through Creates an object passing through a specified point. NOTE For best results when you offset a polyline with corners, specify the through point near the midpoint of a line segment, not near a corner.
OFFSETEDGE Creates a closed polyline or spline object that is offset at a specified distance from the edges of a selected planar face on a 3D solid or surface. Summary You can offset the edges of a planar face on a 3D solid or surface. The result is a closed polyline or spline that is located on the same plane as the selected face or surface, and can be inside or outside the original edges. TIP You can use the resulting object with PRESSPULL (page 838) or EXTRUDE (page 427) to create new solids.
Specify point on side to offset Specify a point location to determine whether the offset distance is applied inside or outside the edges of the face. Corner Specifies the type of corners on the offset object when it is created outside the edges of the selected face. Sharp Creates sharp corners between offset linear segments. Rounded Creates rounded corners between offset linear segments, using a radius that is equal to the offset distance.
OPEN Opens an existing drawing file. Access Methods Menu: File ➤ Open Summary The Select File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box (page 723)) is displayed. When FILEDIA (page 1334) is set to 0 (zero), OPEN displays a Command prompt (page 726). See also: Open a Drawing Standard File Selection Dialog Boxes Several commands display standard file selection dialog boxes, in which you can navigate through the files and folders on a local and network drive.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Task Pane Provides access to categories that represent locations files might be stored in; devices, shared and predefined places, and media. You can reorder the items under a category by dragging them to a new position. To add a new item to Places, drag a folder from the list. Changes to Places affect all standard file selection dialog boxes. Devices Lists the local storage devices attached to your computer.
Places Lists a number of predefined, user added, or Smart folders that are dependent on your user profile. Documents Displays the contents of the Documents folder for the current user profile. Desktop Displays the contents of your desktop. Search For Lists the files that you most recently searched for. Media Lists folders related to media located on your computer, such as photos or movies. Back Returns to the previous file location. Forward Returns you to the file location before Back was clicked.
Search Allows you to search for a file or folder located on the computer using Spotlight. Search results can be saved as Smart folders under Places in the Task Pane. Files List Displays the files and folders in the current place. Use the Views buttons to control navigation behavior, and how files and folders are listed. File Format When you are opening or saving files, File Format specifies the format of the files you can select for open or in which the file is saved.
OPENSHEETSET Opens a selected project data (DST) file. Access Methods Menu: File ➤ Open Project Toolbar: Project Manager palette ➤ Project action button ➤ Open Project Summary The Open Project dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box (page 723)) is displayed. In this dialog box, you can select a project data (DST) file to load into the Project Manager. See also: Create and Manage a Project OPTIONS Customizes the program settings.
Application Preferences Dialog Box Customizes the program settings. List of Tabs The Application Preferences dialog box includes the following tabs: ■ General (page 728) ■ Cursor & Selection (page 730) ■ Units & Guides (page 733) ■ Look & Feel (page 735) ■ Application (page 738) ■ Document Settings (page 742) See also: Set Up the Drawing Area General Tab (Application Preferences Dialog Box) Controls the behavior of program features.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Mouse & Trackpad Customization Controls the behavior of the mouse or trackpad. Enable Quick Secondary Click as Return Key Controls right-click behavior. A quick click is the same as pressing Enter. A longer click displays a shortcut menu. You can set the duration of the longer click in milliseconds. (DBLCLKEDIT (page 1245) system variable) Reverse Zoom Direction Toggles the direction of transparent zoom operations when you scroll the middle mouse wheel.
Layout Elements Controls the tasks that the program performs when a new layout is created. Create Viewports in New Layouts Creates a single viewport automatically when you create a new layout. (LAYOUTCREATEVIEWPORT (page 1388) system variable) Show Page Setup Manager Displays the Page Setup Manager (page 753) the first time you click a named (paper space) layout. Use this dialog box to set options related to paper and print settings.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Selection Modes Controls the selection of objects in the drawing area. Use Shift Key to Add to Selection Controls whether subsequent selections replace the current selection set or add to it. To clear a selection set quickly, draw a selection window in a blank area of the drawing. (PICKADD (page 1432) system variable) Click and Drag to Start Selection Controls the method of drawing a selection window.
Selection Tool Controls the appearance of the cursor in the drawing area. Preview Shows a representation of how the crosshair, ObjectSnap aperture, and pickbox will appear in the drawing area. Crosshair Color Controls the color of the crosshair, ObjectSnap aperture, and pickbox in the drawing area. Automatic is the default color. When set to Automatic, the actual color applied changes between white and black based on the background color of the drawing area.
Enable Grips Tips Controls the display of grip tips and Ctrl-cycling tooltips. This option has no effect on standard objects. (GRIPTIPS (page 1351) system variable) Limit Grip Display To N Selected Objects Suppresses the display of grips when the selection set includes more than the specified number of objects. The valid range is 1 to 32,767. The default setting is 100. (GRIPOBJLIMIT (page 1349) system variable) Grip Size Sets the size of the grip box in pixels.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Insertion Scale Controls the default scale for inserting blocks and drawings into a drawing. Source Content Units Sets source content units value when INSUNITS is set to 0. If Unspecified-Unitless is selected, the object is not scaled when inserted. (INSUNITSDEFSOURCE (page 1375) system variable) Target Drawing Units Sets target drawing units value when INSUNITS is set to 0.
AutoTrack Settings ™ Controls the settings that relate to AutoTrack behavior, which is available when polar tracking or object snap tracking is turned on (see DSETTINGS (page 368)). Display Polar Tracking Vector Displays a vector along specified angles when polar tracking is on. With polar tracking, you can draw lines along angles. Polar angles are 90-degree divisors, such as 45, 30, and 15 degrees.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Interface Theme Defines the color scheme for the user interface. Themes Controls which theme to apply to elements such as the status bar, palettes, and the drawing windows. You can choose from a Dark or Light theme. Tooltip Appearance Controls the appearance of drafting tooltips. Size Specifies a size for tooltips. The default size is 0. Use the slider to make tooltips larger or smaller.
Transparency Controls the transparency of tooltips. The lower the setting, the less transparent the tooltip. A value of 0 sets the tooltip to opaque. Interface Overrides Overrides used to fine tune the colors applied to the background of the drawing area. Model Space Specifies the background color of the drawing area when the Model layout is active. Choose a color or Select Color to specify one of the non-standard colors.
Xrefs Controls the dimming for all DWG xref objects. (XDWGFADECTL (page 1573) system variable) This option only affects the display on the screen. It does not affect plotting or plot preview. Tool Set & Status Bar Icons Controls the size of the icons used in parts of the user interface. Icon Size Specifies the size of the icons displayed on the Tool Sets palette and status bar.
Working Support File Search Path Displays the active directories that the program searches for support files specific to your system. The list is read-only and displays valid paths from the Support Files Search Path that exist within the current directory structure and network mappings. Device Driver File Search Path Specifies the search path for device drivers for the video display, pointing devices, printers, and plotters. WARNING Do NOT remove the DRV path and always add paths as secondary paths.
If you click Browse, the Alternate Font dialog box (page 744) is displayed, from which you can choose an available font. Font Mapping File Specifies the font mapping file to be used. (FONTMAP (page 1337) system variable) Print File, Spooler, and Prolog Section Names Specifies settings related to plotting. Plot File Name for Legacy Plotting Scripts Specifies a default name for the temporary plot files used with plotting scripts created with AutoCAD Release 14 or earlier.
Template Settings Specifies the drawing template settings. Drawing Template File Location Specifies the path to locate drawing template files used by the Select Template dialog box. Project Template File Location Specifies the path to locate project template files used by the New Project dialog box. Default Template File Name for QNEW Specifies the drawing template file used by the QNEW (page 872) command.
Remove Removes the selected search path or file. Options Edits or changes the order of a selected path. Change Path Displays the Browse for Folder or Select a File dialog box, depending on what you selected in the Files list. Move Item Up Moves the selected search path above the preceding search path. Move Item Down Moves the selected search path below the following search path. Set as Current Makes the selected project or spelling dictionary current.
List of Options The following options are displayed. 2D Display Resolution Controls the display of 2D objects. Polyline Curve Segments Sets the number of line segments to be generated for each spline-fit polyline generated by the Spline option of the PEDIT command. (SPLINESEGS (page 1488) system variable) Arc & Circle Smoothness Sets the resolution for objects in the current viewport. (VIEWRES (page 1143) command) 3D Display Resolution Controls the display of 3D objects.
See also: Set Up the Drawing Area Select Alternate Font Dialog Box Specifies the location of the font file to use if the original font cannot be located and an alternate font is not specified in the font mapping file. Access Methods Pointing device: Application Preferences dialog box, Application tab Summary You can also set the location of Alternate Font File by using the FONTALT (page 1336) system variable.
Lists the font family name for all registered TrueType fonts and all SHX fonts in the Fonts folder. Font Style Specifies font character formatting, such as italic, bold, or regular. If the missing font is a Big Font, this option changes to Big Font and lists all available Asian-language Big Font files. See also: Substitute Fonts Default Scale List Dialog Box Controls the default list of scales stored in the registry.
Press Tab to move between the fields of the scale being edited. Delete Removes the selected scale from the scale list. Options Manages items in the scale list. Edit Edits the selected scale in-place in the scale list. Press Tab to move between the fields of the scale being edited. Reset Deletes all custom scales and restores the default list of scales defined in AutoCAD. See also: Scale Views in Layout Viewports ORTHO Constrains cursor movement to the horizontal or vertical direction.
Ortho mode is used when you specify an angle or distance by means of two points using a pointing device. In Ortho mode, cursor movement is constrained to the horizontal or vertical direction relative to the UCS. Horizontal is defined as being parallel to the X axis of the UCS and vertical as being parallel to the Y axis. In a 3D view, ORTHO is additionally defined as being parallel to the Z axis of the UCS, and the tooltip displays +Z or -Z for the angle depending on the direction along the Z axis.
Object Snap Modes Specify one or more object snap modes by entering the first three characters of the name. If you enter more than one name, separate the names with commas. ENDpoint CENter TANgent MIDpoint NODe NEArest INTersection QUAdrant PARallel EXTension INSertion APParent Intersection PERpendicular For a description of each of these object snap modes, see the Object Snaps tab of the Drafting Settings dialog box (page 369). QUIck Snaps to the first snap point found.
Summary Displays the Delete Duplicate Objects dialog box (page 749). Removes redundant geometry. ■ Duplicate copies of objects are deleted ■ Arcs drawn over portions of circles are deleted ■ Lines, partially overlapping, drawn at the same angle are combined into a single line ■ Duplicate line or arc segments overlapping polyline segments are deleted If you enter -overkill at the Command prompt, options are displayed.
List of Prompts The following options are displayed. Object Difference Tolerance Controls the precision with which OVERKILL makes numeric comparisons. If this value is 0, the two objects being compared must match before OVERKILL modifies or deletes one of them. Ignore Object Property: Use these settings to determine which object properties are ignored during comparison. Color Object color is ignored. Layer Object layers are ignored. Linetype Object linetypes are ignored.
Lineweight Object lineweight is ignored. Thickness Object thickness is ignored. Transparency Object transparency is ignored. Plot style Object plot style is ignored. Material Object material is ignored. Options Use these settings to control how OVERKILL deals with lines, arcs, and polylines. Optimize polyline segments When selected, individual line and arc segments within selected polylines are examined. Duplicate vertices and segments are removed.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Combine Partial Overlap Overlapping objects area combined into single objects. Combine End to End Objects that have common endpoints are combined into single objects. Associativity Associative objects are not deleted or modified. See also: Erase Objects P Commands PAGESETUP Controls the page layout, plotting device, paper size, and other settings for each new layout. Access Methods Menu: File ➤ Page Setup Manager Toolbar: Status bar ➤ Quick View.
Summary You can also create named page setups, modify existing ones, or import page setups from other drawings. List of Options The following options are displayed. Current Layout Lists the current layout to which the page setup will be applied. Page Setups Displays the current page setup, sets a different page setup as current, creates a new page setup, modifies an existing page setup, and imports page setups from other drawings.
Current Page Setup Indicated by a triangle to the left of the page setup name. Page Setup List Lists the page setups that are available to apply to the current layout. The list includes the named and default layout page setups that are available in the drawing. Double-click the column to the left of a page setup in this list to set it as the current page setup for the current layout or double-click in the Page Setups column to rename a page setup.
If you select DWT as the file type, the Template folder opens automatically in the Select Page Setup From File dialog box. When you click Open, the Import Page Setups dialog box (page 763) is displayed. Details Displays information about the selected page setup. Device Name Displays the name of the output device specified in the currently selected page setup. Printer Displays the type of output device specified in the currently selected page setup.
List of Options The following options are displayed. New Page Setup Name Specifies the name for the new page setup. Start From Specifies a page setup to use as a starting point for the new page setup. When you click Continue, the Page Setup dialog box (page 757) is displayed with the settings of the selected page setup, which you can modify as necessary. Specifies that the default output device is set as the printer in the new page setup.
Summary The Page Setup dialog box is displayed in the following cases: ■ When you create a new page setup through the Page Setup Manager (page 753) ■ When you modify an existing page setup through the Page Setup Manager (page 753) ■ When you modify an existing page setup through the Print dialog box (page 804) The page setup settings that you specify are stored with the layout and can be applied to other layouts or imported into other drawings. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Page Setup Name Displays the name of the current page setup. Printer/Plotter Specifies a configured output device to use when printing layouts. Printer Lists the available system printers from which you can select to print the current layout. Where Displays the physical location of the output device specified in the currently selected page setup. Description Displays descriptive text about the output device specified in the currently selected page setup.
Click the Window button to use the pointing device to specify the two corners of the area to be plotted, or enter coordinate values. Model/Layout Views Plots a view that was previously saved with the -VIEW (page 1139) command. Layout/Limits When plotting a layout, plots everything within the printable area of the specified paper size, with the origin calculated from 0,0 in the layout. When plotting from the Model layout, plots the entire drawing area that is defined by the grid limits.
The printable area of a drawing sheet is defined by the selected output device and is represented by a dashed line in a layout. When you change to another output device, the printable area may change. You can offset the geometry on the paper by entering a positive or negative value in the X and Y offset boxes. The plotter unit values are in inches or millimeters on the paper. Center on Page Automatically calculates the X and Y offset values to center the plot on the paper.
■ Hidden: Plots objects with the Hidden visual style applied regardless of the way the objects are displayed on the screen. ■ Realistic: Plots objects with the Realistic visual style applied regardless of the way the objects are displayed on the screen. ■ Shaded: Plots objects with Shaded visual style applied regardless of the way the objects are displayed on the screen.
Plot stamp settings are specified in the Plot Stamp Settings dialog box (page 812), in which you can specify the information that you want applied to the plot stamp, such as drawing name, date and time, plot scale, and so on. Include Plot Stamp Turns on plot stamping for the layout. Plot Stamp Settings Displays the Plot Stamp Settings dialog box when Include Plot Stamp is selected. Print Options Specifies options for lineweights, transparency, and the order in which objects are plotted.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Source Drawing Displays the source drawing that contains the listed page setups that are available to import. Page Setups Lists the page setups that are available to import and their location in the source drawing. Selected page setups are imported into the current drawing when you click OK. When you import page setups into a page setup overrides file for a sheet set, only page setups with Plot Area set to Layout or Extents are listed.
Device Name Displays the name of the plot device specified in the currently selected page setup. Printer Displays the type of output device specified in the currently selected page setup. Page Size Displays the paper size and orientation specified in the currently selected page setup. Where Displays the physical location of the output device specified in the currently selected page setup. Description Displays descriptive text about the output device specified in the currently selected page setup.
PALETTEICONOFF Restores the display of all palettes collapsed by PALETTEICONON.
See also: Specify the Behavior of Palettes PAN Moves the view planar to the screen. Access Methods Menu: View ➤ Pan ➤ Realtime Toolbar: Status bar ➤ Pan Shortcut menu: With no objects selected, right-click in the drawing area and click Pan. Summary You can pan the drawing display in real time (page 767). List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Press Esc or Enter to exit, or right-click to display a shortcut menu (page 768).
Summary The cursor changes to a hand cursor. By holding down the pick button on the pointing device, you lock the cursor to its current location relative to the viewport coordinate system. The drawing display is moved in the same direction as the cursor. When you reach a logical extent (edge of the drawing space), a bar is displayed on the hand cursor on that edge.
Zoom Window Zooms to display an area specified by a rectangular window. Zoom Original Restores the original view. Zoom Extents Zooms to display the drawing extents. See also: Pan or Zoom a View -PAN Moves the view planar to the screen by specifying a distance and direction the view should be moved in. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
See also: Pan or Zoom a View PARAMETERS (-PARAMETERS) Manages all dimensional constraint parameters, reference parameters, and user variables in the current drawing from the Command prompt. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter a parameter option [New (page 770)/Edit (page 770)/Rename (page 770)/Delete (page 770)/? (page 770) ]: NOTE You cannot use the -PARAMETERS command in the Block Editor (page 143). New Creates a user variable.
Summary If the Clipboard contains ASCII text, the text is inserted as a multiline text (mtext) object using the MTEXT (page 677) defaults. A spreadsheet is inserted as a table object. When you copy objects to the Clipboard, information is stored in all available formats. When you paste the Clipboard contents into a drawing, the format that retains the most information is used. You can also use Copy and Paste to transfer objects between drawings.
Fade Controls the fade effect of the underlay. Values range from 0 through 100, default value is 0. The greater the value, the lighter the linework in the underlay appears. Works indirectly with the contrast effect; a higher contrast value blends the underlay in the background when fade is set to a higher value. Contrast Controls the contrast, and indirectly the fading effect, of the underlay. Values range from 0 through 100, default value is 100.
Attach PDF Underlay Dialog Box Names, locates, and defines the insertion point, scale, and rotation of attached PDF underlays. List of Options The following options are displayed. Name Identifies the PDF file you have selected to attach. Browse Opens the Select Reference File dialog (a standard file selection dialog box (page 723)). Details Saved Path Displays the path that is saved with the drawing when the PDF file is attached. The path is dependent upon the Path Type setting.
Select page(s) Displays all of the pages that are found in the PDF file. If the PDF file only contains a single page, that page is listed. You can select multiple pages by holding Shift or Cmd and selecting the pages to attach. Show\Hide Attachment Options Expands or collapses the Attachment Options section to allow you to specify the insertion point, rotation and scale for the PDF underlay being attached. Insertion Point Specifies the insertion point for the selected PDF file.
See also: Attach PDF Files as Underlays PDF Underlay Visor Displays options for modifying PDF underlays. Summary The PDF Underlay visor is displayed when you select a PDF underlay. List of Options The following options are displayed. Scale Enlarges or reduces the size of the PDF underlay. (SCALE (page 928) command) Fade Controls the appearance of the linework. The greater the value, the lighter the linework in the PDF underlay is displayed.
External Reference Manager Opens or closes the Reference Manager palette. (EXTERNALREFERENCES (page 418) command) See also: Attach PDF Files as Underlays -PDFATTACH Attach a PDF underlay from the command line. Summary When you attach a PDF file as an underlay, you link that referenced file to the current drawing. Any changes to the referenced file are displayed in the current drawing when it is opened or reloaded. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
AutoCAD units. If INSUNITS has a value such as millimeters, centimeters, inches, or feet, and the underlay has resolution information, the scale factor is applied after the true width of the underlay in AutoCAD units is determined. Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the selected PDF underlay. See also: Attach PDF Files as Underlays PDFCLIP Crops the display of a selected PDF underlay to a specified boundary.
Delete Removes a predefined clipping boundary and displays the full original underlay. New Boundary Defines a rectangular or polygonal clipping boundary, or generates a polygonal clipping boundary from a polyline. Select Polyline Defines the boundary with the selected polyline. The polyline can be open but must consist of straight line segments and cannot intersect itself. Polygonal Defines a polygonal clipping boundary with three or more points that you specify for the vertices of a polygon.
The ULAYERS (page 1122) command manages the layers of all underlays in the current document. See also: Control the Display of Layers in a PDF Underlay PEDIT Edits polylines and 3D polygon meshes. Access Methods Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Polyline Shortcut menu: Select a polyline to edit. Right-click in the drawing area and click Polyline Edit.
The precision value determines how accurately the resulting polyline is to fit to the source spline. Valid value is an integer between 0 and 99. NOTE A high precision value may cause performance problems. The PLINECONVERTMODE (page 1436) system variable determines whether the polylines are created with linear or arc segments. When the PEDITACCEPT (page 1429) system variable is set to 1, this prompt is suppressed, and the selected object is automatically converted to a polyline.
Enter an option [Close/Join/Width/Edit vertex/Fit/Spline/Decurve/Ltype gen/Reverse/Undo]: Enter an option or press Enter to end the command NOTE You can select a single arc or line segment, also called a subobject, within a polyline by pressing the Ctrl key when you click over it. If the polyline you select is a closed polyline, Open replaces the Close option in the prompt. You can edit a 2D polyline if its normal is parallel to and in the same direction as the Z axis of the current UCS.
Width Specifies a new uniform width for the entire polyline. You can use the Width option of the Edit Vertex option to change the starting and ending widths of a segment. Edit Vertex Marks the first vertex of the polyline by drawing an X on the screen. If you have specified a tangent direction for this vertex, an arrow is also drawn in that direction. Next Moves the X marker to the next vertex. The marker does not wrap around from the end to the start of the polyline even if the polyline is closed.
Go Deletes any segments and vertices between the two vertices you specify and returns to Edit Vertex mode. Exit Exits Break and returns to Edit Vertex mode. Insert Adds a new vertex to the polyline after the marked vertex. Move Moves the marked vertex. Regen Regenerates the polyline. Straighten Saves the location of the marked vertex while you move the X marker to any other vertex.
If you want to remove an arc segment that connects two straight segments of a polyline and then extend the straight segments until they intersect, use the FILLET (page 436) command with a fillet radius of 0. Next Moves the X marker to the next vertex. Previous Moves the X marker to the previous vertex. Go Deletes any segments and vertices between the two vertices you select, replaces them with single straight line segments, and returns to Edit Vertex mode.
Spline Uses the vertices of the selected polyline as the control points, or frame, of a curve approximating a B-spline. This curve, called a spline-fit polyline, passes through the first and last control points unless the original polyline was closed. The curve is pulled toward the other points but does not necessarily pass through them. The more control points you specify in a particular part of the frame, the more pull they exert on the curve. Quadratic and cubic spline-fit polylines can be generated.
■ BREAK (page 159) and TRIM (page 1101) generate a polyline with only the fit spline, which is consistent with fit curves, where the curve fitting is permanent. ■ EXPLODE (page 411) deletes the frame and generates lines and arcs to approximate the spline-fit polyline. ■ OFFSET (page 718) generates a polyline with only the fit spline, which is consistent with its behavior with fit curves.
becomes more precise. The generated spline occupies more space in the drawing file and takes longer to generate. If you set SPLINESEGS to a negative value, the program generates segments using the absolute value of the setting and then applies a fit-type curve to those segments. Fit-type curves use arcs as the approximating segments. Using arcs yields a smoother generated curve when few segments are specified, but the curve can take longer to generate.
3D Polyline Selection (PEDIT) If you select a 3D polyline, the following prompt is displayed: List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter an option [Close/Join/Edit vertex/Spline curve/Decurve/Reverse/Undo]: Enter an option or press Enter If the polyline you select is closed, Open replaces the Close option in the prompt. Close Creates the closing segment of the polyline, connecting the last segment with the first. The polyline is considered open unless you close it with Close.
Exit Exits Break and returns to Edit Vertex mode. If one of the specified vertices is at an end of the polyline, the polyline is truncated. If both specified vertices are at endpoints of the polyline, or if just one vertex is specified and it is at an endpoint, you cannot use Break mode. Insert Adds a new vertex to the polyline after the marked vertex. Move Moves the marked vertex. Regen Regenerates the polyline.
Decurve Removes extra vertices inserted by a fit or spline curve and straightens all segments of the polyline. Retains tangent information assigned to the polyline vertices for use in subsequent fit curve requests. If you edit a spline-fit polyline with a command such as BREAK (page 159) or TRIM (page 1101), you cannot use the Decurve option. Reverse Reverses the order of vertices of the polyline. Use this option to reverse the direction of objects that use linetypes with included text.
M and N values for RULESURF (page 924), TABSURF (page 1073), REVSURF (page 917), and EDGESURF (page 403). Pressing Enter accepts the current default, which is either Next or Previous. Next Moves the X marker to the next vertex. The marker does not wrap around from the end to the start of the mesh, even if the mesh is closed. Previous Moves the X marker to the previous vertex. The marker does not wrap around from the start to the end of the mesh, even if the mesh is closed.
Desmooth Restores the original control-point polygon mesh. Mclose Closes the M-direction polylines if the polygon mesh is open in the M direction. Mopen Opens the M-direction polylines if the polygon mesh is closed in the M direction. Nclose Closes the N-direction polylines if the polygon mesh is open in the N direction. Nopen Opens the N-direction polylines if the polygon mesh is closed in the N direction. Undo Reverses operations as far back as the beginning of the PEDIT session.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify location for vertex (page 793) 1: Specify a point Specify location for vertex 2 or : Specify a point or press Enter Specify location for vertex n or : Specify a point or press Enter Vertex Location You specify all vertices used in the mesh. The vertex numbers displayed in the prompts are the numbers used to reference each vertex. The prompt is repeated until you press Enter.
See also: Create Custom Mesh (Legacy) PLAN Displays an orthographic view of the XY plane of a specified user coordinate system. Access Methods Menu: View ➤ 3D Views ➤ Plan View ➤ World UCS List of Options The following options are displayed. Current UCS Regenerates a plan view of the display so that the drawing extents fit in the current viewport of the current UCS. UCS Changes to a plan view of a previously saved UCS and regenerates the display.
World Regenerates a plan view of the display so that the drawing extents fit on the screen of the world coordinate system. See also: Change to a View of the XY Plane PLANESURF Creates a planar surface. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Surfaces - Create tool group ➤ Planar Surface Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Modeling ➤ Surfaces ➤ Planar Summary You can create a planar surface by selecting closed objects or by specifying the opposite corners of a rectangular surface.
of the surface through the command, the surface is created parallel to the work plane. The SURFU (page 1501) and SURFV (page 1502) system variables control the number of lines displayed on the surface. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify first corner or [Object]: Specify the first point for the planar surface Specify other corner: Specify second point (other corner) for the planar surface Object Creates a planar or trimmed surface by object selection.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Open Shapes tool group ➤ Polyline Menu: Draw ➤ Polyline Summary A 2D polyline is a connected sequence of segments created as a single planar object. You can create straight line segments, arc segments, or a combination of the two. NOTE A temporary plus-shaped marker displays at the first point. This marker can be useful when you create long and complicated polylines. It is removed when you complete the polyline.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify start point: Specify a point Current line-width is Specify next point (page 798) or [Arc (page 798)/Close (page 801)/Halfwidth (page 802)/Length (page 802)/Undo (page 802)/Width (page 802)]: Specify a point or enter an option Next Point Draws a line segment. The previous prompt is repeated. Arc Adds arc segments to the polyline.
Specify endpoint of arc or [Center/Radius]: Specify a point or enter an option Endpoint of Arc Specifies the endpoint and draws the arc segment. Center Specifies the center of the arc segment. Specify center point of arc: Radius Specifies the radius of the arc segment. Specify radius of arc: Specify a distance Specify direction of chord for arc : Specify a point or press Enter Center Specifies the center of the arc segment.
Halfwidth Specifies the width from the center of a wide polyline segment to one of its edges. Specify starting half-width : Enter a value or press Enter Specify ending half-width : Enter a value or press Enter The starting half-width becomes the default ending half-width. The ending half-width becomes the uniform half-width for all subsequent segments until you change the half-width again. The starting and ending points of wide line segments are at the center of the line.
Specify direction of chord for arc : Specify an angle or press Enter Second Pt Specifies the second point and endpoint of a three-point arc. Specify second point on arc: Specify a point (2) Specify end point of arc: Specify a point (3) Undo Removes the most recent arc segment added to the polyline. Width Specifies the width of the next arc segment.
Halfwidth Specifies the width from the center of a wide polyline line segment to one of its edges. Specify starting half-width : Enter a value or press Enter Specify ending half-width : Enter a value or press Enter The starting half-width becomes the default ending half-width. The ending half-width becomes the uniform half-width for all subsequent segments until you change the half-width again. The starting and ending points of wide line segments are at the center of the line.
The starting width becomes the default ending width. The ending width becomes the uniform width for all subsequent segments until you change the width again. The starting and ending points of wide line segments are at the center of the line. Typically, the intersections of adjacent wide polyline segments are beveled. No beveling is performed for nontangent arc segments or very acute angles or when a dot-dash linetype is used. See also: Draw Polylines PLOT Outputs a drawing to a printer or file.
Print Dialog Box Specifies device and media settings, and plots your drawing. Summary You can display more options by clicking the Show Advanced Settings button to the right of the Printer drop-down list. Printing allows you to output a single layout at a time. If you want to print more than one layout at a time, use the PUBLISH command. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Printer Specifies an output device to use when printing layouts. If the selected output device does not support the layout's selected paper size, a warning is displayed and you can select the device's default paper size or a custom paper size. Click the disclosure triangle to the right of the Printer drop-down list to expand the Print dialog box. When the dialog box is expanded, additional settings are available that allow you to control the printing of the layout.
NOTE Drawing orientation is also affected by the PLOTROTMODE (page 1438) system variable. Print Options Specifies which advanced print settings should be used for printing. Select AutoCAD to use the page setup assigned to the layout. See the Mac OS Help documentation for information on the other options. Page Setup Lists the named page setup assigned to the layout and allows you to edit the page setup settings for the layout. Name Displays the name of the assigned page setup.
Fit to Paper Scales the plot to fit within the selected paper size and displays the custom scale factor in the Scale, Inch =, and Units boxes. Scale Defines the exact scale for the output. Custom defines a user-defined scale. You can create a custom scale by entering the number of inches (or millimeters) equal to the number of drawing units. NOTE You can modify the list of scales with SCALELISTEDIT (page 930).
Detailed plot configuration [Yes (page 808)/No (page 808)] : Enter yor n or press Enter No Indicates that you do not want a detailed plot configuration for this plot. Enter a layout name or [?] : Enter a page setup name < >: Enter an output device name or [?] : Write the plot to a file [Yes/No] : Enter file name: : Save changes to layout [Yes/No] : Proceed with Plot [Yes/No] : For information about these prompts, see the description for Yes.
Landscape Orients and plots the drawing so that the long edge of the paper represents the top of the page. Plot upside down [Yes/No] : Orients and plots the drawing upside down. Enter plot area [Display/Extents/Limits/Layout/View/Window] : Display Plots the view in the current viewport on the Model layout or the current view in the layout, depending on which tab you select to plot. Extents Plots all of the objects in the current viewport, except objects on frozen layers.
Enter plot offset (x, y) or [Center] : Specify the plot offset in either the X or Y direction, or enter c to center the plot on the paper Plot with plot styles [Yes/No] : Specify whether to plot using the plot styles applied to objects and defined in the plot style table If you specify Yes to plot with plot styles, the following prompt is displayed: Enter plot style table name or [?] (enter . for none) : Enter a plot style table name, ? to view plot style tables, or .
If you enter y, the current settings in the Page Setup dialog box are saved. If you enter q, you are prompted for the shaded plotting quality and are given the option of providing a custom dpi. Then you are prompted to save the page setup with the added quality settings.
Plot Stamp Settings Dialog Box Specifies the information for the plot stamp. List of Options The following options are displayed. AutoCAD Fields Specifies the drawing information you want applied to the plot stamp. The selected fields are separated by commas and a space. Drawing Name Includes the drawing name and path in the plot stamp information.
Layout Name Includes the name of the layout in the plot stamp information. Date and Time Includes the date and time in the plot stamp information. NOTE A plot stamp uses the current date and time format setting of the operating system. Plot stamp specifically uses the short date style for dates. Login Name Includes the user login name in the plot stamp information. The user login name is contained in the LOGINNAME system variable.
Specifies the location of the plot stamp parameter file. Load Displays the Plotstamp Parameter File Name dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) in which you can specify the location of the parameter file you want to use. Save As Saves the current plot stamp settings in a new parameter file. Show/Hide Advanced Settings Expands or collapses the Advanced Settings section towhich contains placement and text options for the plot stamp.
Offset Relative to Printable Area Calculates the offset values that you specify from the corner of the printable area of the paper (not the corner of the paper). Offset Relative to Paper Border Calculates the offset values that you specify from the corner of the paper (not the corner of the printable area of the paper). Text and Units Determines the font, height, and number of lines you want to apply to the plot stamp text.
Log File Name Specifies the file name for the log file you are creating. Enter a new file name if you do not want to use the default file name, plot.log. Browse Lists the currently saved plot stamp log files. You can choose to overwrite an existing plot stamp log file with the currently specified plot stamp information, and then to save this file. See also: Set Options for Plotted Objects Add User Defined Fields Dialog Box Create and mange user-defined fields.
-PLOTSTAMP Places a plot stamp on a specified corner of each drawing and logs it to a file. If you enter -plotstamp at the Command prompt, the following prompts are displayed. The settings in the PSS file are displayed as defaults for each prompt. You can use -PLOTSTAMP as part of a plotting script to modify plot stamp information for a drawing. LIst of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Location Determines the location of the plot stamp on the page based on offset, orientation, and relationship to either the printable area or the border of the paper. Location selections include and are relative to the printable area or the border of the paper, depending on what you specify at the prompt. Enter stamp location [TL/TR/BL/BR] : ■ TL: Top Left ■ TR: Top Right ■ BL: Bottom Left ■ BR: Bottom Right Text orientation indicates the rotation angle of the plot stamp in relation to the page.
PLOTSTYLE Create and edit plot style files. Access Methods Menu: Format ➤ Plot Style Summary Displays the Edit Plot Style Table dialog box (page 819). If you enter -plotstyle at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page 825). See also: Use Plot Styles to Control Plotted Objects Edit Plot Style Table Dialog Box Create or edit plot style table files. List of Options The following options are displayed. Plot Style Table Displays a list of the available plot style files that can be edited.
with selecting a plot style to edit from the list, you can also select one of the following: ■ Reveal in Finder. Opens Finder to the folder that contains the listed plot styles. The location in which AutoCAD locates plot styles can be changed under Printer Support File Path ➤ Plot Style Table Search Path on the Application tab of the Application Preferences dialog box (OPTIONS (page 727) command). ■ New. Displays the Plot Style Table Editor (page 820) with the default properties for a new plot style.
Summary Lists all of the plot styles in the plot style table and their settings. Plot styles are displayed in columns from left to right. The first plot style in a named plot style table is NORMAL and represents an object's default properties (no plot style applied). You cannot modify or delete the NORMAL style.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Plot Styles Displays the names of plot styles in named plot style tables. Plot styles in named plot style tables can be changed. Plot style names in color-dependent plot style tables are tied to object color and cannot be changed. The program accepts up to 255 characters for style names. Add Style (+) Adds a new plot style to a named plot style table.
more visible. When you turn off dithering, the program maps colors to the nearest color, resulting in a smaller range of colors when plotting. Grayscale Converts the object's colors to grayscale if the plotter supports grayscale. If you clear Convert to Grayscale, the RGB values are used for object colors. Dithering is available whether you use the object's color or assign a plot style color.
Fill Style If you assign a fill style, the fill style overrides the object's fill style at plot time. Pen# Specifies a pen to use when plotting objects that use this plot style. Available pens range from 1 to 32. If plot style color is set to Use Object Color, or you are editing a plot style in a color-dependent plot style table, the value is set to Automatic. If you specify 0, the field updates to read Automatic.
Scale Factor Specifies the amount to scale non-ISO linetypes and fill patterns. Save As Displays the Save dialog box and saves the plot style table to a new name. See also: Use Plot Styles to Control Plotted Objects -PLOTSTYLE Lists all available plot styles in the current drawing and to set a plot style current. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Current plot style is "current" Enter an option [?/Current]: ?—List Plot Styles Lists the plot styles in the attached plot style table.
A Portable Network Graphics file is created that contains the objects you select. The file reflects what is displayed on the screen. Light glyphs that are displayed in the drawing appear in the new file, even if the Plot Glyph property of the lights is set to No. NOTE When the FILEDIA (page 1334) system variable is set to 0 (Off), prompts are displayed at the Command prompt. See also: Export Raster Files POINT Creates a point object.
PDSIZE controls the size of the point figures, except for PDMODE values 0 and 1. A setting of 0 generates the point at 5 percent of the drawing area height. A positive PDSIZE value specifies an absolute size for the point figures. A negative value is interpreted as a percentage of the viewport size. After you change PDMODE and PDSIZE, the appearance of existing points changes the next time the drawing is regenerated. You can use MEASURE and DIVIDE to create points along an object.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Lights tool group ➤ Point Light Menu: View ➤ Render ➤ Light ➤ New Point Light Summary Use point lights for general lighting effects. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Intensity/Intensity Factor Sets the intensity or brightness of the light. The range is 0.00 to the maximum value that is supported by your system. Enter intensity (0.00-max float) <1.0000>: Status Turns the light on and off. If lighting is not enabled in the drawing, this setting has no effect Enter status [oN/oFf] : Photometry Photometry is available when the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 1 or 2. Photometry is the measurement of the luminous intensities of visible light sources.
Specify the color of the light based on a color name or a Kelvin temperature. Enter ? to display a list of color names. Enter color name(s) to list <*>: Enter a text string using wild card characters to display a partial listing of color names, or an asterisk (*) to display all the possible choices. If you enter k, you can specify the color of the light based on a Kelvin temperature value. Enter Kelvin temperature <3600.0000>: Exit Exits the command option. Shadow Makes the light cast shadows.
Attenuation Type Controls how light diminishes over distance. The farther away an object is from a point light, the darker the object appears. Attenuation is also known as decay. Enter attenuation type [None/Inverse linear/inverse Squared] : ■ None. Sets no attenuation. Objects far from the point light are as bright as objects close to the light. ■ Inverse Linear. Sets attenuation to be the inverse of the linear distance from the light.
Exit Exits the command. See also: Use Point Lights POLYGON Creates an equilateral closed polyline. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Closed Shapes tool group (expanded) ➤ Polygon Menu: Draw ➤ Polygon List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter number of sides : Enter a value between 3 and 1024 or press Enter Specify center of polygon (page 832) or [Edge (page 833)]: Specify a point (1) or enter e Center of Polygon Defines the center of the polygon.
Inscribed in Circle Specifies the radius of a circle on which all vertices of the polygon lie. Specify radius of circle: Specify a point (2) or enter a value Specifying the radius with your pointing device determines the rotation and size of the polygon. Specifying the radius with a value draws the bottom edge of the polygon at the current snap rotation angle. Circumscribed about Circle Specifies the distance from the center of the polygon to the midpoints of the edges of the polygon.
You can specify the different parameters of the polygon including the number of sides. The difference between the inscribed and circumscribed options is shown. See also: Draw Rectangles and Polygons POLYSOLID Creates a 3D wall-like polysolid. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Solids - Create tool group ➤ Solid Primitives flyout ➤ Polysolid Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Modeling ➤ Polysolid Summary You can create walls with straight and curved segments of constant height and width.
With the POLYSOLID command, you can convert an existing line, 2D polyline, arc, or circle to a solid with a rectangular profile. A polysolid can have curved segments, but the profile is always rectangular by default. You can draw a solid with POLYSOLID just as you would a polyline. The PSOLWIDTH (page 1451) system variable sets the default width for the solid. The PSOLHEIGHT (page 1450) system variable sets the default height for the solid. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Specify the next point (page 836) or [Arc (page 837)/Undo (page 838)]: Specify the next point for the profile of the solid, or enter an option Object Specifies an object to convert to a solid. You can convert: ■ Line ■ Arc ■ 2D polyline ■ Circle Select object: Select an object to convert to a solid Height Specifies the height of the solid. The default height is set to the current PSOLHEIGHT (page 1450) setting.
Specify endpoint of arc or [Close/Direction/Line/Second point/Undo]: Specify an endpoint or enter an option ■ Close. Closes the solid by creating a line or arc segment from the last point specified to the starting point of the solid. At least two points must be specified to use this option. ■ Direction. Specifies a starting direction for the arc segment. Specify the tangent direction from the start point of arc: Specify a point Specify endpoint of arc: Specify a point ■ Line.
Specify end point of arc: Specify a point Undo Removes the most recent arc segment added to the solid. Undo Removes the most recent segment added to the solid. See also: Create a Polysolid PRESSPULL Dynamically modifies objects by extrusion and offset. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Solids - Create tool group ➤ Presspull Summary Get visual feedback as you move the cursor after selecting a 2D object, an area formed by a closed boundary or a 3D solid face.
Selection Presspull behavior Open 2D object (such as an arc) Extrudes to create a surface Closed 2D object (such as a circle) Extrudes to create a 3D solid Inside a bounded area Extrudes to create a 3D solid 3D solid face Offsets the face, expanding or condensing the 3D solid The command repeats automatically until you press Esc, Enter, or the Spacebar. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
extrusion direction of planar objects is normal to planar objects and in the Z direction of the current UCS for non-planar objects. See also: Pressing or Pulling Areas, Faces, and Edges PREVIEW Displays the drawing as it will be printed. Summary The preview is based on the current print configuration, as defined by the settings in the Page Setup dialog box (page 757). It shows exactly how the drawing will look when printed, including lineweights, fill patterns, and other print options.
Next Displays the next page in a multi-page preview. Zoom Reduces or enlarges the preview image. Click (-) to reduce the preview image and (+) to enlarge the preview image. Move Moves the preview image planar to the screen. Text Allows you to select text objects. (Not available in AutoCAD) Select Creates a selection window in the preview image that allows you to copy part of the preview to the Clipboard. Sidebar Displays a secondary pane that contains thumbnails for multi-page previews.
Projects the geometry along the positive or negative Z axis of the current UCS. Project to View Projects the geometry based on the current view. Project to Two Points Projects the geometry along a path between two points.
PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. Access Methods Menu: Modify ➤ Properties Shortcut menu: Select the objects whose properties you want to view or modify, right-click in the drawing area, and click Properties. Summary The Properties Inspector palette (page 844) is displayed and lists the properties of the selected objects. When more than one object is selected, only those properties common to all selected objects are displayed.
Properties Inspector Palette Displays the properties of the selected object or set of objects. Current Properties Layer Properties Summary When more than one object is selected, only those properties common to all selected objects are displayed. When no objects are selected, only the current settings of general properties are displayed. You can specify a new value to modify any property that can be changed. Click the value and use one of the following methods: ■ Enter a new value.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Current Displays the properties for the current drawing or selected objects. Layer Displays the properties for the layer selected in the Layer list of the Layers palette. Object Type Displays the type of objects that are selected and filters which objects you are modifying. Essentials Displays the most commonly edited or viewed properties for the current drawing or selected objects.
NOTE Layers or objects that are assigned property overrides in viewports display a ByLayer (VP) value and a background color for applicable properties. List of Options The following options are displayed. Color Specifies the color for objects. Selecting Select Color in the color list allows you to define the color of objects by selecting from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors, true colors, and color book colors (see COLOR (page 205)). Layer Specifies the current layer of the object.
Cell Border Properties Dialog Box Sets the properties of the borders of table cells. Access Methods Pointing device: With a table cell selected and the Properties Inspector palette open, click All. Under the Cell section, click the button to the right of the Border Style field. List of Options The following options are displayed. Properties Controls the properties of the borders of the selected table cells.
Sets the lineweight to be used for borders that are displayed. If you use a heavy lineweight, you may have to change the cell margins. Linetype Sets the linetype to be used for borders that are displayed. Color Sets the color to be used for borders that are displayed. Double Line When checked, a double line border will be added to the selected cells. Spacing Determines the spacing of double-line borders. The default value is .1800.
Left Border Applies the border properties setting to the left borders of the selected table cells. Inside Vertical Border Applies the border properties setting to the inside vertical border of the selected table cells. Right Border Applies the border properties setting to the right border of the selected table cells. See also: Display and Change the Properties of Objects Lighting Properties Sets the properties of the lights.
Shadows Indicates if the light is casting a shadow. Hotspot Angle (Spotlight and Freespot only) Specifies the angle of the brightest cone of light. Falloff Angle (Spotlight and Freespot only) Specifies the outer extremity of the light, where it meets the darkness. Intensity Factor Magnifies the effect of the skylight. Filter Color Specifies the secondary color of the light. Represents the color of a physical filter over the lamp. Default color is white.
requires an extra control to specify this distance and an additional affordance in the viewport to show the distance. Lamp Intensity Specifies the brightness of a lamp. More specifically, it represents the luminous intensity, or power in a particular direction. Intensity Factor Magnifies the effect of the skylight. Resulting Intensity Reports the final brightness of the light. This is determined by the product of the Lamp Intensity and the Intensity factor.
Attenuation In the real world, the intensity of light diminishes over distance. Objects far from the light source appear darker than objects near the source. This effect is known as attenuation. Attenuation is available under standard lighting workflow only. Under the Attenuation panel the following property settings are available: Type Controls how light diminishes over distance. The farther away an object is from a spotlight, the darker the object appears. Attenuation is also known as decay.
Samples Specifies the number of shadow rays for the light. (Soft sampled type only) Visible in Render Specifies whether the light shape is actually rendered. The default is No. (Soft sampled type only) Shape Specifies the shape of the lamp bulb. For the Spotlight distribution type selection under the General panel, options are Rectangle (default) and Disk. For Point and Web types the options are Linear, Rectangle, Disk, Cylinder and Sphere (default).
Daylight Saving Displays the current setting for daylight saving time. Azimuth Displays the angle of the sun along the horizon clockwise from due north. This setting is read-only. Altitude Displays the angle of the sun vertically from the horizon. The maximum is 90 degrees, or directly overhead. This setting is read-only. Display Sun Light Turns the sun on and off. If lighting is not enabled in the drawing, this setting has no effect. Intensity Factor Sets the intensity or brightness of the sun.
Aerial Perspective Specifies if aerial perspective is applied. Values are On/Off. Visibility Distance Specifies the distance at which 10% haze occlusion results. Values are 0.0-MAX. Rendered Shadow Details Type Displays the setting for shadow type. This setting is read-only when display of shadows is turned off. The selections are Sharp, Soft (mapped) which display the Map size option and Soft (area) which displays the Samples option.
(.dwt), or drawing interchange format (.dxf) file whose page setups you want to import. If FILEDIA (page 1334) is set to 0 (zero) and you enter -psetupin at the Command prompt, PSETUPIN displays command prompts (page 856). When you select the drawing file that you want to use, the Import Page Setups dialog box (page 763) is displayed. See also: Specify Page Setup Settings -PSETUPIN If you enter -psetupin at the Command prompt, the following prompts are displayed.
On the named layout, use paper space to create a finished layout of a drawing for printing. As part of designing your layout, you create layout viewports, which are windows containing different views of the model. By switching from paper space to model space (see MSPACE (page 676)), you can edit the model and views within the current layout viewport. You can make a viewport current by double-clicking inside it.
Summary You can publish the drawing set to a PDF file or send it to the printer named in the page setup for hardcopy output. List of Options The following options are displayed. Publish To: Defines how to layouts should be published. You can publish to either a PDF file (an electronic drawing set) or to the printer specified in the page setup (a paper drawing set). PDF Indicates that the layouts should be published to a PDF file.
Sheet List Contains the list of drawing sheets to be included for publishing. Click the page setup column to change the sheet’s settings. Use the shortcut menu to add sheets or make other changes to the list. Sheet Name Combines the drawing name and the layout name with a dash (-). Drawing sheet names must be unique within a single PDF file. Page Setup Displays the named page setup for the sheet. You can change the page setup by clicking the page setup name and selecting another page setup from the list.
Sheet Details Displays the following information about the selected sheet: status, source drawing, drawing location, layout name, plot device, plot size, plot scale, and page setup details. Printer from Page Setup Options The following options are specific to publishing to a printer. Number of Copies Specifies the number of copies to publish. Include Plot Stamp Places a plot stamp on a specified corner of each drawing and logs it to a file.
Publish Starts the publishing operation. To display information about the published sheets, including any errors or warnings, click the Plotting Details Report message balloon to displays the Print Details dialog box (page 1141). This information is also saved to the Plot and Publish log file. See also: Overview of Publishing PURGE Removes unused items, such as block definitions and layers, from the drawing.
Summary Allows you to remove unused named objects from a drawing at the Command prompt. You can only remove one level of reference at a time. Repeat the command until there are no unreferenced, named objects. NOTE The PURGE command will not remove unnamed objects (zero-length geometry or empty text and mtext objects) from blocks or locked layers. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Summary By default, a pyramid is defined by the center of the base point, a point on the middle of the edge, and another point that determines the height. Initially, the default base radius is not set to any value. During a drawing session, the default value for the base radius is always the previously entered base radius value for any solid primitive. Use the Top Radius option to create a pyramid frustum. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
2Point Specifies that the height of the pyramid is the distance between two specified points. Specify first point: Specify a point Specify second point: Specify a point Axis Endpoint Specifies the endpoint location for the pyramid axis. This endpoint is the top of the pyramid. The axis endpoint can be located anywhere in 3D space. The axis endpoint defines the length and orientation of the pyramid.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Dimensions tool group ➤ Quick Dimension Menu: Dimension ➤ Quick Dimension Summary This command is particularly useful for creating a series of baseline or continued dimensions, or for dimensioning a series of circles and arcs. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
See also: Overview of Dimensioning QLEADER Creates a leader and leader annotation. Summary It is recommended that you use the workflow available through the MLEADER (page 654) command to create leader objects.
Tolerance If Tolerance is selected on the Annotation tab, the Geometric Tolerance dialog box (page 1092) is displayed. Use the dialog box to create the tolerance feature control frame. Enter block name or [?]: Enter the name, or enter ? to display a list of blocks defined in the drawing Insertion Point For a description of the insertion options, see INSERT Command Line (page 525). Settings Displays the Leader Settings dialog box (page 867).
Annotation Tab (Leader Settings Dialog Box) Annotation Type Sets the leader annotation type. The type you select changes the QLEADER leader annotation prompt. MText Prompts you to create multiline text (mtext) annotation. Copy an Object Prompts you to copy a multiline text, single-line text, tolerance, or block reference object and connects the copy to the end of the leader line. The copy is associated with the leader line, meaning that if the copied object moves, the end of the leader line moves with it.
MText Options The options are available only when the multiline text annotation type is selected. Prompt for Width Prompts you to specify the width of the multiline text annotation. Always Left Justify Left-justifies the multiline text annotation, regardless of leader location. Frame Text Places a frame around multiline text annotation. Annotation Reuse Sets options for reusing leader annotation. None Does not reuse leader annotation.
Leader Line Sets the leader line format. Straight Creates straight-line segments between the points you specify. Spline Creates a spline object using the leader points you specify as control points. Arrowhead Defines the leader arrowhead. The arrowheads are also available for dimension lines (DIMSTYLE (page 319) command). If you select User Arrow, a list of blocks in the drawing is displayed.
Top of Top Line Attaches the leader line at the top of the top multiline text line. Middle of Top Line Attaches the leader line at the middle of the top multiline text line. Middle of Multiline Text Attaches the leader line at the middle of the multiline text. Middle of Bottom Line Attaches the leader line at the middle of the bottom multiline text line. Bottom of Bottom Line Attaches the leader line at the bottom of the bottom multiline text line.
QNEW Starts a new drawing from a selected drawing template file. Summary QNEW creates a new drawing from the default drawing template file and folder path specified in Default Template File Name for QNEW in the Application section of the Application Preferences dialog box. When a default drawing template file is set to None or is not specified, QNEW displays the Select Template File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box (page 723)).
QTEXT Controls the display and plotting of text and attribute objects. Summary When QTEXT (Quick Text) is on, each text and attribute object is displayed as a bounding box around the text object. Turning QTEXT mode on reduces the time it takes the program to redraw and regenerate drawings that contain many text objects.
Drawing previews are displayed vertically along the left, while the layout previews of the selected drawing are displayed on the right. The preview for Model is always located in the top-left of the layout previews. See also: Switch Between Layouts in the Current Drawing QuickView Dialog Box Displays a list of all open drawings and the layouts in the current drawing. List of Options The following options are displayed. Drawing List Displays a list of all open drawings.
■ Close . - Closes the drawing. You are prompted to save changes if the drawing has been changed since it was last saved. ■ Close All. - Closes all open drawings. You are prompted to save any drawings that have been changed before they are closed. ■ Duplicate. - Allows you to create a copy of the drawing. The Save Drawing As dialog box is displayed (see SAVEAS (page 926)). ■ Create New Layout. - Adds a new layout to the drawing. The Create/Duplicate Layout dialog box is displayed.
QUIT Exits the program. Access Methods Menu: AutoCAD ➤ Quit AutoCAD Summary Quits the program if there have been no changes since the drawing was last saved. If the drawing has been modified, you are prompted to save or discard the changes before quitting. You can quit a file that has been opened in read-only mode if you have made no modifications or if you are willing to discard them. To save modifications to a read-only drawing, use the SAVEAS (page 926) command to save the drawing under another name.
Summary The ray is extended to the edge of the display in the direction defined by the starting point and the through point. The prompt for a through point is redisplayed so you can create multiple rays. Press Enter to end the command. Lines that extend to infinity in one direction, known as rays, can be used as references for creating other objects. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Summary The program extracts as much material as it can from the damaged file. Files that can be recovered include DWG and DWT files. Performing a recover on a DXF file will only open the file. In the Select File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box (page 723)), enter the drawing file name or select the damaged drawing file. Results are displayed in the text window. When FILEDIA (page 1334) is set to 0 (zero), RECOVER displays the following command prompt.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Current settings: Rotation = 0 Specify first corner point (page 879) or [Chamfer (page 879)/Elevation (page 879)/Fillet (page 879)/Thickness (page 880)/Width (page 880)]: Specify a point or enter an option First Corner Point Specifies a corner point of the rectangle. Other Corner Point Creates a rectangle using the specified points as diagonally opposite corners. Area Creates a rectangle using the area and either a length or a width.
Thickness Specifies the thickness of the rectangle. Width Specifies the polyline width of the rectangle to be drawn. See also: Draw Rectangles and Polygons REDEFINE Restores AutoCAD internal commands overridden by UNDEFINE. Summary If a command has been undefined, you can still use it if you precede the command name with a period. Enter the name of an AutoCAD command turned off by the UNDEFINE (page 1124) command.
See also: Correct Mistakes REDRAW Refreshes the display in the current viewport. Access Methods Menu: View ➤ Redraw Command entry: 'redraw for transparent use Summary Removes temporary graphics left by some operations in the current viewport. To remove stray pixels, use the REGEN (page 889) command. See also: Erase Objects REDRAWALL Refreshes the display in all viewports.
REFCLOSE Saves back or discards changes made during in-place editing of a reference, either an xref or a block definition. Access Methods Toolbar: Reference Editor visor ➤ Save Toolbar: Reference Editor visor ➤ Discard Changes Summary If you save or discard changes with REFCLOSE, you can still use the UNDO (page 1125) command to return to the reference editing session.
See also: Save Back Edited Referenced Drawings and Blocks REFEDIT Edits an xref or a block definition directly within the current drawing. Access Methods Button Menu: Tools ➤ Edit Xref In-place Toolbar: External Reference visor ➤ Edit Reference in Place Summary The objects that you select from the selected xref or block are temporarily extracted and made available for editing in the current drawing.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Add to Working Set Adds objects to the current working set while editing an xref or a block definition in-place. (REFSET (page 888) command) Remove From Working Set Removes objects from the current working set while editing an xref or a block definition in-place. (REFSET (page 888) command) Discard Changes Discards the changes made to an xref or a block definition.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Select a Reference to Edit Displays the reference selected for in-place editing and any references nested within the selected reference. Nested references are displayed only if the selected object is part of a nested reference. If multiple references are displayed, choose a specific xref or block to modify. Only one reference can be edited in place at a time. Preview Displays a preview image of the currently selected reference.
Path Displays the file location of the selected reference. If the selected reference is a block, no path is displayed. Nested Objects Specifies how the selection of nested objects should be handled. Automatically Select All Nested Objects Controls whether nested objects are included automatically in the reference editing session. If this option is checked, all the objects in the selected reference will be automatically included in the reference editing session.
Lock Objects Not in Working Set Locks all objects not in the working set. This prevents you from accidentally selecting and editing objects in the host drawing while in a reference editing state. The behavior of locked objects is similar to objects on a locked layer. If you try to edit locked objects, they are filtered from the selection set. See also: Edit Selected Objects in Referenced Drawings and Blocks -REFEDIT Edits an xref or a block definition directly within the current drawing.
A working set is formed with the objects you have selected for editing. The working set includes objects that can be saved back to update the xref or block definition. When you save back changes, changes made to the objects in the reference file are saved without actually opening the reference drawing or recreating the block. The working set is visually distinct from the rest of the current drawing: all objects in the current drawing, except objects in the working set, appear faded.
Transfer objects between the Refedit working set and host drawing... Enter an option [Add (page 889)/Remove (page 889)] : Enter an option or press Enter Add Adds objects to the working set. An object that is part of the working set is added to the reference when changes are saved back, and the object is removed from the current drawing. Remove Removes objects from the working set.
Access Methods Menu: View ➤ Regen All Summary REGENALL regenerates the entire drawing and recomputes the screen coordinates for all objects in all viewports. It also reindexes the drawing database for optimum display and object selection performance. See also: Control the Display of Polylines, Hatches, Gradient Fills, Lineweights, and Text REGENAUTO Controls automatic regeneration of a drawing.
If you click OK, the drawing is regenerated. If you click Cancel, the last action is cancelled and the drawing is not regenerated. See also: Control the Display of Polylines, Hatches, Gradient Fills, Lineweights, and Text REGION Converts an object that encloses an area into a region object. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Closed Shapes tool group (expanded) ➤ Region Menu: Draw ➤ Region Summary Regions are two-dimensional areas you create from closed shapes or loops.
closed planar loops (outer boundaries and holes of a region). If more than two curves share an endpoint, the resulting region might be arbitrary. The boundary of the region consists of end-connected curves where each point shares only two edges. All intersections and self-intersecting curves are rejected. If a selected polyline has been smoothed by either the Spline or Fit option of PEDIT (page 779), the resulting region contains the line or arc geometry of the smoothed polyline.
Rename Dialog Box Changes the names assigned to named objects such as layers and dimension styles. List of Options The following options are displayed. Named Objects Lists named objects in a drawing by category. Items Displays items of the type specified in Named Objects. See also: Resolve Name Conflicts in External References -RENAME Changes the names assigned to named objects from the Command prompt. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Enter object type to rename [Block/dEtailviewstyle/Dimstyle/LAyer/LType/Material/multileadeRstyle/Plotstyle/seCtionviewstyle/Style/Tablestyle/Ucs/VIew/VPort]: Enter a named object type to rename an object Enter old object name: Enter the old name Enter new object name: Enter the new name See also: Resolve Name Conflicts in External References RENDER Creates a photorealistic or realistically shaded image of a 3D solid or surface model.
By default, all objects in the current view in the drawing are rendered. If a named view is not specified, the current view is rendered. If you enter -render at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page 902).
Summary From the Render Window, you can ■ Save the image to a file. ■ Monitor the progress of the current rendering. List of Options The following options are displayed. Image Pane Primary output target of the renderer. Progress Meter Displays the overall progress of the current rendering. Clicking the X icon next to the progress meter, or by pressing Esc to cancel the current rendering. Save Displays the Render Output File dialog box (page 897) where you can save the image to disk.
See also: Save a Rendered Image Render Output File Dialog Box Saves a rendering to a raster image file. Summary The Render Output File dialog box is a standard file selection dialog boxes (page 723). You specify the file name of the image you want to save and the output file format. In this dialog box, you can only choose from raster image output file formats. The file formats for saving your rendered images to include the following: List of Options The following options are displayed. BMP (*.
that is called lossy compression because of the loss of image quality as you increase the compression. However, the JPEG compression scheme is extremely good and you can sometimes compress the file up to 200:1 without severe loss of image quality. JPEG is consequently a popular format for posting image files on the Internet for minimum file size and minimum download time. Clicking Save after choosing this format displays the JPEG Image Options dialog box (page 901). PNG (*.
See also: Save a Rendered Image PCX Image Options Dialog Box Options used when saving a rendering to a PCX image file. Summary When PCX is chosen as the output format, the PCX Image Options dialog box is displayed. List of Options The following options are displayed. Color Monochrome Creates a 2-bit black and white image. 8 Bits (256 Grayscale) Creates an 8-bit grayscale image using 256 shades of gray. 8 Bits (256 Colors) Renders a smaller, 8-bit color image from a palette of 256 colors.
Color 8 Bits (256 Grayscale) Creates an 8-bit grayscale image using 256 shades of gray. 8 Bits (256 Colors) Renders a smaller, 8-bit color image from a palette of 256 colors. 24 Bits (16.7 Million Colors) Creates a 24 bit color image that uses a 16.7 million color palette. 32 Bits (24 Bits + Alpha) Creates a 24 bit color image that includes an 8 bit alpha channel. Alpha is a type of data, found in 32-bit image files, that assigns transparency to the pixels in the image.
32 Bits (24 Bits + Alpha) Creates a 24 bit color image that includes an 8 bit alpha channel. Alpha is a type of data, found in 32-bit image files, that assigns transparency to the pixels in the image. Compressed Applies lossless compression to the file. Dots Per Inch Sets the dots per inch (dpi) for the saved image. This setting does not change the resolution of the final image, but can affect the way it prints in documents.
Summary When PNG is chosen as the output format, the PNG Image Options dialog box is displayed. List of Options The following options are displayed. Color Monochrome Creates a 2-bit black and white image. 8 Bits (256 Grayscale) Creates an 8-bit grayscale image using 256 shades of gray. 8 Bits (256 Colors) Renders a smaller, 8-bit color image from a palette of 256 colors. 16 Bits (65,536 Grayscale) Creates a grayscale 16-bit image that uses 65,536 shades of gray. 24 Bits (16.
Specify render preset [Draft (page 903)/Low (page 903)/Medium (page 903)/High (page 904)/Presentation (page 904)/Other (page 904)] : Enter an option or press Enter Specify render destination [Render Window (page 904)/Viewport (page 904)] : Enter an option or press Enter Draft Draft is the lowest level standard render preset. This setting is intended for very fast, test renderings where anti-aliasing is bypassed and sample filtering is very low.
High The High we preset matches the Medium preset settings with regards to anti-aliasing, but sample filtering and raytracing is improved. Due to the improved sample filtering and raytracing, rendered images take longer to process, but the image quality is much better. Presentation The Presentation render preset is used for high quality, photo-realistic rendered images and takes the longest to process. Sample filtering and raytracing is further improved.
See also: Render 3D Objects for Realism Save a Rendered Image RENDERENVIRONMENT Controls visual cues for the apparent distance of objects. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Render tool group ➤ Render Environment Menu: View ➤ Render ➤ Render Environment Summary The Render Environment dialog box (page 905) is displayed. See also: Control the Rendering Environment Render Environment Dialog Box Defines the cues for distance between objects and the current viewing direction.
Summary Fog and depth cueing are atmospheric effects that cause objects to appear to fade as they increase in distance from the camera. Fog uses a white color while depth cueing uses black. List of Options The following options are displayed. Fog and Depth Cue Enable Fog Turns fog on and off without affecting the other settings in the dialog box. Color Specifies the color of the fog. Near Distance Specifies the distance from the camera where the fog begins.
RENDEROUTPUTSIZE Specifies the image size to create when rendering a 3D model. Summary Displays the Output Size dialog box (page 907). If you enter -renderoutputsize at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page 908). See also: Save a Rendered Image Output Size Dialog Box Sets the output image size when rendering a 3D model. List of Options The following options are displayed. Output Image Size (Pixels) List of commonly used output sizes.
Aspect Ratio Sets the aspect ratio, the ratio of width to height, of the rendered image. Changing this value changes the Height value to maintain the correct dimensions for the active resolution. The image aspect value is always expressed as a multiplier value. Lock Aspect Ratio Locks the aspect ratio when using a custom output resolution. When it is locked, the Width and Height spinners are locked to each other; adjusting one alters the other to maintain the aspect-ratio value.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Render tool group (expanded) ➤ Show Render Window Summary The Render window (page 895) is displayed, but a rendering of the current drawing is not initiated. If the drawing was previously rendered, you can view and save the rendered image. See also: Basics of Rendering RESETBLOCK Resets one or more dynamic block references to the default values of the block definition. Access Methods Shortcut menu: Select a dynamic block reference in a drawing.
Summary The Reset Palettes message box is displayed. Resetting palettes closes and restarts AutoCAD. List of Options The following prompts are displayed. Reset Palettes Closes and restarts AutoCAD. After AutoCAD restarts, the placement of all palettes is reset to their default settings. See also: Specify the Behavior of Palettes RESUME Continues an interrupted script.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Closed Shapes tool group (expanded) ➤ Revision Cloud Menu: Draw ➤ Revision Cloud Summary NOTE REVCLOUD stores the last used arc length in the system registry. This value is multiplied by DIMSCALE (page 1278) to provide consistency when the program is used with drawings that have different scale factors. You can create a new revision cloud by dragging your cursor, or you can convert a closed object such as an ellipse or polyline into a revision cloud.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Minimum arc length: 0.5000 Maximum arc length: 0.5000 Specify start point or [Arc length/Object/Style]
The REVERSE command does not change the orientation of text where rotation is specified as upright. For more information, see Text in Custom Linetypes. See also: Modify Polylines REVOLVE Creates a 3D solid or surface by sweeping an object around an axis. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Solids - Create tool group ➤ Solid Creation flyout ➤ Revolve Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Modeling ➤ Revolve Summary Open profiles create surfaces and closed profiles can create either a solid or a surface.
Revolve path and profile curves can be: ■ Open or closed ■ Planar or non-planar ■ Solid and surface edges ■ A single object (to extrude multiple lines, convert them to a single object with the JOIN (page 536) command) ■ A single region (to extrude multiple regions, convert them to a single object with the REGION (page 891) command) To automatically delete the profile, use the DELOBJ (page 1251) system variable.
Axis Start Point Specifies the first point of the axis of revolution. The positive axis direction is from the first to the second point. Axis Endpoint Sets the endpoint for the axis of revolution. Start Angle Specifies an offset for the revolution from the plane of the object being revolved. Drag your cursor to specify and preview the start angle of the object. Angle of Revolution Specifies how far the selected object revolves about the axis.
Y (Axis) Sets the positive Y axis of the current UCS as the positive axis direction. Z (Axis) Sets the positive Z axis of the current UCS as the positive axis direction. Reverse Changes the direction of the revolve; similar to entering a - (minus) angle value. The revolved object on the right shows a spline revolved at the same angle as the object on the left, but using the reverse option. Expression Enter a formula or equation to specify the revolve angle.
REVSURF Creates a mesh by revolving a profile about an axis. Access Methods Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Modeling ➤ Meshes ➤ Revolved Meshes Summary Select a line, arc, circle, or 2D or 3D polyline to sweep in a circular path around a selected axis. The MESHTYPE (page 1408) system variable sets which type of mesh is created. Mesh objects are created by default. Set the variable to 0 to create legacy polyface or polygon mesh.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Current wire frame density: SURFTAB1=current SURFTAB2=current Object to revolve Select a line, arc, circle, or 2D or 3D polyline. Object that defines axis of revolution Select a line or open 2D or 3D polyline. The axis direction cannot be parallel to the plane of the original object. The path curve is swept about the selected axis to define the mesh. The path curve defines the N direction of the mesh.
Included Angle Specifies how far about the axis of revolution the mesh extends. The included angle is the distance through which the path curve is swept. Entering an included angle that is less than a full circle prevents the circle from closing. The point you use to select the axis of revolution affects the direction of revolution. The mesh in the following example was created by specifying a start angle of 0 degrees and an included angle of 90 degrees.
Shortcut menu: Select the objects to rotate. Right-click in the drawing area and click Rotate. Summary You can rotate selected objects around a base point to an absolute angle. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
ROTATE3D Moves objects about a 3D axis. Summary It is recommended that you use the gizmos available through the 3DMOVE (page 36) and 3DROTATE (page 47) commands to manipulate 3D objects. For more information about using gizmos, see Use Gizmos to Modify Objects. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Arc Aligns the axis of rotation with the 3D axis of the arc (perpendicular to the plane of the arc and passing through the center of the arc). ■ Rotation Angle (page 921) ■ Reference (page 921) 2D Polyline Segment Aligns the axis of rotation with a segment of the polyline. Treats a straight segment as a line segment. Treats an arc segment as an arc. ■ Rotation Angle (page 921) ■ Reference (page 921) Last Uses the last axis of rotation.
2 Points Uses two points to define the axis of rotation. ■ Rotation Angle (page 921) ■ Reference (page 921) See also: Rotate Objects RSCRIPT Repeats a script file. Summary RSCRIPT is useful for demonstrations that repeat a script; for example, a script that must run over and over during a trade show or in a showroom. If RSCRIPT is the last line in a script file, the file runs continuously until interrupted by Esc.
RULESURF Creates a mesh that represents the surface between two lines or curves. Access Methods Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Modeling ➤ Meshes ➤ Ruled Mesh Summary Select two edges that define the mesh. The edges can be lines, arcs, splines, circles, or polylines. If one of the edges is closed, then the other edge must also be closed. You can also use a point as one edge for either an open or a closed curve. The MESHTYPE (page 1408) system variable sets which type of mesh is created.
The ruled mesh is constructed as a 2 by N polygon mesh. RULESURF places half the mesh vertices at equal intervals along one defining curve, and the other half at equal intervals along the other curve. The number of intervals is specified by the SURFTAB1 (page 1500) system variable. It is the same for each curve; therefore, the distance between the vertices along the two curves differs if the curves are of different lengths. The N direction of the mesh is along the boundary curves.
S Commands SAVE Saves the drawing under the current file name or a specified name. Obsolete. The SAVE command is functionally identical to the QSAVE (page 872) command. The Save option on the File menu is QSAVE. Summary The Save Drawing As dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box (page 723)) is displayed. Save the drawing under the current file name, or enter a different file name to save a copy of the drawing under that name.
template, the template options (page 927) are displayed, where you can set the units of measurement and provide a description for the template. When FILEDIA (page 1334) is set to 0 (zero), SAVEAS displays command prompts (page 927). See also: Save a Drawing Template Options When a drawing is saved as a drawing template, you are prompted for the measurement to use when a new drawing is created from the drawing template and a description for the template. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
See also: Save a Drawing SAVEIMG Saves a rendered image to a file. Summary The Render Output File dialog box (page 897) is displayed. NOTE SAVEIMG is not available if the current rendering device does not support scan-line images. See also: Save a Rendered Image SCALE Enlarges or reduces selected objects, keeping the proportions of the object the same after scaling.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select objects: Use an object selection method and press Enter when you finish Specify base point: Specify a point The base point you specify identifies the point that remains in the same location as the selected objects change size (and thus move away from the stationary base point).
SCALELISTEDIT Controls the list of scales available for layout viewports, page layouts, and plotting. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Annotation Scaling tool group ➤ Scale List Menu: Format ➤ Scale List Command entry: 'scalelistedit for transparent use Summary Displays a list of predefined scales used throughout the program. This list can be easily modified to display only the scales you need. The Edit Drawing Scales dialog box (page 930) is displayed.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Scale List Displays the list of currently defined scales. Also displays temporary scales that are imported when xrefs are attached. If a scale name is duplicated, but has a different value, a number is appended to the name. Add Creates a new scale in the scale list. Press Tab to move between the fields of the scale being edited. Delete Removes the selected scale from the scale list.
-SCALELISTEDIT Controls the list of scales available for layout viewports, page layouts, and plotting. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter option [?/Add/Delete/Reset/Exit] : Enter an option or press Enter ? Displays a list of defined scales. Add Adds a new scale to the scale list. Enter a ratio in the format n:m, where n is the number of paper units and m is the number of drawing units Delete Removes a specified scale.
When FILEDIA (page 1334) is set to 0 (zero), SCRIPT displays the following command prompt. See also: Overview of Command Scripts SECTION Uses the intersection of a plane and solids, surfaces, or mesh to create a region. Summary The SECTION command creates a region object that represents a 2D cross section of 3D objects, including 3D solids, surfaces, and meshes.
■ 3points (page 935) Object Aligns the sectioning plane with a circle, ellipse, circular or elliptical arc, 2D spline, or 2D polyline segment. Z Axis Defines the sectioning plane by specifying a point on the sectioning plane and another point on the Z axis, or normal, of the plane. ■ Point on the section plane. Sets the first point on the plane. ■ Point on the Z-axis (normal) of the plane. Specifies a point that defines the axis that is perpendicular to the plane.
ZX Aligns the sectioning plane with the ZX plane of the current UCS. 3points Uses three points to define the sectioning plane: See also: Create Section Objects SECTIONPLANE Creates a section object that acts as a cutting plane through 3D objects.
Summary Section plane objects create sections of 3D solids, surfaces, and meshes. Use live sectioning with section plane objects to analyze a model, and save sections as blocks for use in layouts. List of Options The following options are displayed. Face or Any Point to Locate Section Line Specifies a face to establish the plane of the section object. Alternatively, you can select any point on the screen that is not on a face to create a section object independent of the solid or surface.
A section object that contains all 3D objects is created with the specified orientation relative to the UCS (not the current view). This option creates a section object in the Section Plane state with live sectioning turned on. ■ Align section to.
See also: Create Section Objects SECTIONPLANEJOG Adds a jogged segment to a section object. Access Methods Ribbon: Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Section panel ➤ Section Plane Jog Shortcut menu: Select a section plane. Right-click in the drawing area and click Add Jog to Section. Summary You can insert a jog, or angle, into a section object as you create it. The jog is created on the section line. The jogged segment is created at a 90-degree angle to the section line.
See also: Add Jogs to a Section SECTIONPLANESETTINGS Sets display options for the selected section plane. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Section tool group (expanded) ➤ Section Plane Settings Shortcut menu: Select a live section object. Right-click in the drawing area and click Live Section Settings. Summary The Section Settings dialog box (page 939) is displayed. See also: Set Section Object States and Properties Section Settings Dialog Box Sets display options for section planes.
Summary Contains display settings for creating 2D and 3D sections from the Generate Section / Elevation dialog box (page 946) and for live sectioning. All settings are stored with the section object.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Section Plane If a section plane has not been selected, specifies a selection plane to be modified. Select Section Plane Temporarily closes the Section Settings dialog box so that you can select a section object in the drawing area. Setting Type Specifies which setting types are displayed in the properties list. 2D Section / Elevation Block Creation Settings Determines how a 2D section from a 3D object is displayed when generated.
■ Lineweight. Sets whether the lineweight is ByLayer, ByBlock, matches the default, or has a unique value. ■ Division Lines. Sets whether division lines are displayed. (2D section blocks only) ■ Show. Sets whether the intersection boundary is displayed. (3D section blocks only) Intersection Fill Sets the optional fill that is displayed inside the boundary area of the cut surface where the section object intersects the 3D object. ■ Show. Sets whether the intersection fill is displayed. ■ Face Hatch.
■ Layer. Sets the layer of the component. Select an existing layer, or select *LayerByObject* to split the block component onto a separate layer. If you want to add a customized prefix or suffix to the *LayerByObject* name, click New Layer Name Settings to open the New Layer Name dialog box (page 944). ■ Linetype. Sets the linetype to be ByLayer, ByBlock, or Continuous. ■ Linetype Scale. Sets the scale of the linetype. ■ Plot Style. Displays the current plot style. ■ Lineweight.
■ Layer. Sets the layer of the curve tangency lines. Select an existing layer, or select *LayerByObject* to split the block component onto a separate layer. If you want to add a customized prefix or suffix to the *LayerByObject* name, click New Layer Name Settings to open the New Layer Name dialog box (page 944). ■ Linetype. Sets the linetype to be ByLayer, ByBlock, or Continuous. ■ Linetype Scale. Sets the scale of the linetype. ■ Plot Style. Displays the current plot style.
Access Methods Pointing device: In the Section Settings dialog box (page 939), Layer list, click New Layer Name Settings. Summary By default, all section block geometry is placed on Layer 0 (zero). However, you can specify suffix or prefix labels to help organize section block components, such as intersection boundaries and fill.
See also: Set Section Object States and Properties SECTIONPLANETOBLOCK Saves selected section planes as 2D or 3D blocks. Access Methods Shortcut menu: Select a live section object. Right-click in the drawing area and click Generate 2D/3D Section. Summary The Generate Section /Elevation dialog box (page 946) is displayed. See also: NO LABEL Save Sections as Blocks or Drawings Generate Section /Elevation Dialog Box Saves 2D and 3D sections as blocks.
Summary Specifies the display settings for the cross sections that you save and reuse. List of Options The following options are displayed. Section Plane Select Section Plane Closes the dialog box so that you can select a section plane to modify or save as a block.
Creates and saves or inserts a block that represents a 2D cross section. 3D Section Creates and saves or inserts a cutaway 3D block. Hide/Show Advanced Settings Controls the display of the Source Geometry, Destination, and Section Settings options. Source Geometry Include All Objects Includes all 3D objects (3D solids, surfaces, and regions) in the drawing, including objects in xrefs and blocks.
Create Creates the section. See also: Create Section Objects SELECT Places selected objects in the Previous selection set. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Selection tool group ➤ Select Summary A small box, called the object selection target or pickbox, replaces the crosshairs on the graphics cursor. At the Select Objects prompt in a subsequent command, use the Previous option to retrieve the previous selection set.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
All Selects all objects in either model space or the current layout, except those objects on frozen or on locked layers. Fence Selects all objects crossing a selection fence. The Fence method is similar to CPolygon except that that the fence is not closed, and a fence can cross itself. Fence is not affected by the PICKADD (page 1432) system variable. WPolygon Selects objects completely inside a polygon defined by points. The polygon can be any shape but cannot cross or touch itself.
Group Selects all objects within a specified group. Add Switches to the Add method: selected objects can be added to the selection set by using any of the object selection methods. Auto and Add are the default methods. Remove Switches to the Remove method: objects can be removed from the current selection set using any object selection method. An alternative to Remove mode is to hold down Shift while selecting single objects or use the Automatic option.
Subobject Allows you to select original individual forms that are part of composite solids or vertices, edges, and faces on 3D solids. You can select one of these subobjects, or create a selection set of more than one subobject. Your selection set can include more than one type of subobject. Pressing and holding the Ctrl key is the same as selecting the SELECT command’s Subobject option. Object Ends the ability to select subobjects. Allows you to use object selection methods.
List of Prompts The following prompt is displayed. Select objects or [SEttings]: Use an object selection method and press Enter The Settings option displays the Select Similar Settings dialog box. See also: Select Objects by Properties Select Similar Settings Dialog Box Controls which properties must match for an object of the same type to be selected. List of Options The following options are displayed. Color Considers objects with matching colors to be similar.
SETVAR Lists or changes the values of system variables. Access Methods Menu: Tools ➤ Inquiry ➤ Set Variable Command entry: 'setvar for transparent use List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter variable name (page 955) or [? (page 955)] : Enter a variable name, enter ?, or press Enter Variable Name Specifies the name of the system variable you want to set.
Enter option [2D wireframe (page 956)/3D wireframe (page 956)/Hidden (page 956)/Flat (page 956)/Gouraud (page 956)/fLat+edges (page 956)/gOuraud+edges (page 956)] : 2D Wireframe Displays the objects using lines and curves to represent the boundaries. Raster images, linetypes, and lineweights are visible. 3D Wireframe Displays the objects using lines and curves to represent the boundaries. Material colors that you have applied to the objects are shown.
dependent shapes cannot be used in the current drawing unless they are reloaded. ?—List Shapes Lists shapes and the files in which the shapes are defined. If you enter an asterisk (*), the program lists shape names. See also: Overview of Shape Files SHEETSET Opens the Project Manager.
Summary The Project Manager is not fully functional if ■ A command is active; ■ No drawing is open; ■ The project is locked; or ■ A layout is locked by another user.
Components of the Project Manager The following explains which each of the components of the Project Manager are used for. 1 Project Popup Menu. Lists all the open and recently opened projects. Use the list to switch between open projects. 2 Publish Project Button. Displays and populates the Batch Publish dialog box with all the layouts in the current project. 3 Project Tree View. Displays an organized list of all layouts in the current project.
7 Show/Hide Details Button. Toggles the display of the Details panel. 8 Project Action Button. Displays a popup menu that allows you open, close, or publish a project. You can also control how layouts are opened and renamed. ■ Open Project. Displays the Open Project dialog box and loads the information in the project data (DST) file into the Project Manager. ■ Close Project. Closes the current project. ■ Batch Publish.
Project Tree View Shortcut Menus When working in the Project tree view in the Project Manager, there are several shortcut menus that can be displayed when you right-click an item. The following tables show the shortcut menu items that you are presented under certain conditions. Project Selected When the project is selected, the top node in the tree, the shortcut menu presents the following functions: Menu Item Description Close Project Closes the current project data (DST) file.
Menu Item Description Page setup overrides are stored in the project's Page Setup property under File Locations. Reveal in Finder Opens Finder and displays the location where the project data (DST) file is stored. Properties Toggles the display of the Details panel. Layout Selected When a layout is selected, the shortcut menu presents the following functions: Menu Item Description Open Layout Opens the drawing (DWG) file associated with the layout and sets the layout current.
Menu Item Description NOTE When the Publish property for a layout is not enabled, the layout is excluded from the Batch Publish dialog box. Page Setup Displays the Page Setup Manager and allows you to modify the page setup overrides in the current project. Publish with Overrides Publishes the selected layouts using the selected page setup override rather than the page setup specified in each drawing. Page setup overrides are stored in the project's Page Setup property under File Locations.
Menu Item Description Publish Group Displays the Batch Publish dialog box and adds all layouts in the group. NOTE When the Do Not Publish Layouts property for a group is not enabled, the layouts in the group are excluded from the Batch Publish dialog box. Page Setup Displays the Page Setup Manager and allows you to modify the page setup overrides in the current project.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Project Displays fields commonly used to identify a project. Project Number Specifies the number assigned to the project. Project Name Specifies the name assigned to the project. Project Phase Specifies the current phase of the project. Project Milestone Specifies the current milestone of the project. Description Specifies a description of the project.
Project File Displays the path and file name of the project data (DST) file. Label Block Displays the path and file name of the drawing template (DWT) or drawing (DWG) file that contains the label block for the project. Click the Ellipsis button to display the Label Block for Views dialog box (page 977) and specify a label block for the project. Callout Blocks Click Manage to display the Callout Blocks dialog box (page 976) and manage the callout blocks for the project.
Layout Custom Properties Displays the user-defined custom properties associated with each layout in the project. You can manage user-defined custom properties by: ■ Clicking Add Property to display the Add Custom Property dialog box and create a new property. ■ Right-clicking over a property and choosing Remove Custom Property to remove the property. You can also choose New Custom Property to display the Add Custom Property dialog box and create a new property.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Layout Displays information used to identify the layout in the project. Layout Name Displays the name of the layout in the project. Layout Number Displays the number for the layout. Revision Number Displays the revision number assigned to the layout. Revision Date Displays the revision date for the layout. Purpose Displays what the layout is used for. Category Displays the name of the category the layout.
Page Size Displays the page size for the layout. Description Displays the description for the layout. Publish Controls whether the layout is added to the Batch Publish dialog box when publishing a group or all layouts in the project. File Version Lists information about the associated drawing (DWG) file. Last Modified Displays the date when the file was last modified. Last Modified By Displays the name of the user who made the last modification to the file.
Preview Displays a preview image of the selected layout. See also: Include Information with Projects, Groups, Layouts, and Views Work with Layouts in a Project Group Properties (Project Manager) Displays information that is specific to the selected group. List of Options The following options are displayed. Group Displays the name and if the group is included when publishing. Group Name Displays the name of the group.
Reveal in Finder Displays the resolved absolute path to the folder on disk that the group represents. Template Location Displays settings used when creating a new layout in the group. Layout Template Displays the layout to use when creating a new layout. The layouts displayed in the drop-down list come from the file specified in the Default Template property. Default Template Specifies the drawing template (DWT) or drawing (DWG) file to use when creating new drawing files for the project.
Summary Views represent named views that have been placed on a layout in the current project using the Sheet Set Manager in AutoCAD for Windows. Views cannot be modified or placed using the Project Manager. List of Options The following options are displayed. View Displays information about the view. View Name Displays the name of the view. Category Assigns a category to the view.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Project Name Specifies the name of the project. Project Location Specifies the path of the project data (DST) file. The name of the project data (DST) file is determined by the text entered for the Project Name. Click Browse to select a folder in Finder. Description Specifies a description for the project. Create Blank Project Creates a new empty project using the default settings and property values.
See also: Create a Project New Project Layout Dialog Box Creates a new layout in the current project by creating a new drawing (DWG) file that includes a named layout with the same name as the drawing. List of Options The following options are displayed. Layout Number Specifies the number for the layout in the current project. It is recommended that you do not fill in the number when you first create a layout.
The default folder for a group is specified in the Details panel when the group is selected; and the default folder for a project is specified in the Details panel when the project name is selected. Click Browse to select a folder in Finder for the new drawing. Template Specifies the drawing template (DWT) file and the named layout to use when creating a new layout in the project.
Owner Specifies whether the custom property will belong to the project or layout. Name Specifies the name of the new custom property. Default Value Specifies a value for the custom property. See also: Include Information with Projects, Groups, Layouts, and Views Callout Blocks Dialog Box Lists, adds, or removes callout blocks for use in the current project. List of Options The following options are displayed. Preview Displays a preview image when a block is selected.
Add Block (+) Displays the Select Drawing dialog box. Select the drawing file to use as a callout block or a drawing that contains the blocks you want to use. Remove Block (-) Removes the selected block from the list of callout blocks. See also: Create and Modify Layouts in a Project Label Block for Views Dialog Box Adds a new label block for use in the current project. List of Options The following options are displayed. Preview Displays a preview image when a block is selected.
Click Browse to display the Select Drawing dialog box and select the drawing file to use. NOTE The locations of the last five most recently selected drawing files are retained in the drop-down list. Use Drawing as Block Use the entire specified drawing or drawing template file as the block definition. Choose Block in the Drawing File Use a selected block definition from the specified drawing or drawing template file.
Status Current status of the layout in the project: missing or resolved. Project Layout Name of each missing layout in the current project. Project Drawing Drawing (DWG) file name in which the project layout is contained in. Drawing Name List of all the drawing (DWG) files that are referenced in the project or added to the dialog box using the Add Drawing (+) button. Drawing Layout Lists all the layouts in the drawing selected from the Drawing Name list.
Summary Restores the state of the display and position of palettes hidden by HIDEPALETTES (page 509). Press Tab to switch between HIDEPALETTES and SHOWPALETTES. NOTE If a palette was manually turned back on, it is not affected by SHOWPALETTES (even if it was manually closed again) See also: Specify the Behavior of Palettes SKETCH Creates a series of freehand line segments. Summary Sketching is useful for creating irregular boundaries or for tracing with a digitizer.
Type Specifies the object type for the sketch line. (SKPOLY (page 1478) system variable) ■ Line (page 576) ■ Polyline (page 796) ■ Spline (page 1022) Increment Defines the length of each freehand line segment. You must move the pointing device a distance greater than the increment value to generate a line. (SKETCHINC (page 1477) system variable) Tolerance For Splines, specifies how closely the spline’s curve fits to the freehand sketch.
The sliced objects retain the layer and color properties of the original solids. However, the resulting solid or surface objects do not retain a history of the original objects. Objects that Can Be Used in a Slice Operation Objects that can be sliced Objects that can be used as cutting planes 3D solids Surfaces Surfaces Circles Ellipses Circular or elliptical arcs 2D splines 3D polyline segments List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
■ View (page 984) ■ XY (page 984) ■ YZ (page 985) ■ ZX (page 985) ■ 3points (page 986) Start point of slicing plane Sets the first of two points that define the angle of the slicing plane. The slicing plane is perpendicular to the XY plane of the current UCS. ■ Second point on plane. Sets the second of two points on the slicing plane.
NOTE You cannot select meshes created with the EDGESURF (page 403), REVSURF (page 917), RULESURF (page 924), and TABSURF (page 1073) commands. ■ Point on desired side (page 986) ■ Keep both sides (page 986) Z axis Defines the cutting plane by specifying a point on the plane and another point on the Z axis (normal) of the plane. ■ Specify a point on the section plane. Sets a point on the slicing plane. ■ Specify a point on the Z-axis (normal) of the plane.
■ Point on the XY-plane. Sets the location of the slice. ■ ■ Point on desired side (page 986) ■ Keep both sides (page 986) YZ Aligns the cutting plane with the YZ plane of the current UCS. Specifying a point defines the location of the cutting plane. ■ Point on the YZ-plane. Sets the location of the slice. ZX Aligns the cutting plane with the ZX plane of the current UCS. Specifying a point defines the location of the cutting plane. ■ Point on the ZX-plane. Sets the location of the slice.
3points Defines the cutting plane using three points. Point on desired side Uses a point to determine which side of the sliced solids your drawing retains. The point cannot lie on the cutting plane. Keep both sides Retains both sides of the sliced solids. Slicing a single solid into two pieces creates two solids from the pieces on either side of the plane. SLICE never creates more than two new composite solids for each selected solid.
Access Methods Menu: Tools ➤ Drafting Settings Toolbar: Status bar ➤ Snap Command entry: snap or ‘snap for transparent use List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify snap spacing (page 987) or [ON (page 987)/OFF (page 987)/Aspect (page 987)/Legacy (page 987)/Style (page 988)/Type (page 988)] : Specify a distance, enter an option, or press Enter Snap Spacing Activates Snap mode with the value you specify. On Activates Snap mode using the current settings of the snap grid.
Style Specifies the format of the snap grid, which is Standard or Isometric. (SNAPSTYL (page 1483) system variable) Standard Sets a rectangular snap grid that is parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS. X and Y spacing may differ. Spacing Specifies the overall spacing of the snap grid. Aspect Specifies the horizontal and vertical spacing of the snap grid separately. Isometric Sets an isometric snap grid, in which the snap locations are initially at 30-degree and 150-degree angles.
Access Methods Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Modeling ➤ Setup ➤ Drawing Summary After using SOLVIEW, visible and hidden lines representing the silhouette and edges of solids in the viewport are created and then projected to a plane perpendicular to the viewing direction. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select viewports to draw ... Select objects: Select the viewports to be drawn SOLDRAW can only be used in viewports that have been created with SOLVIEW (page 1009).
Summary 2D solids are filled only when the FILLMODE (page 1336) system variable is on (1) and the viewing direction is orthogonal to the 2D solid. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. First point Sets the first point in the 2D solid. Second point Sets the first edge of the 2D solid. Third point Sets the corner that is opposite the second point. Fourth point or The fourth point is diagonally opposite the first point. Pressing Enter at the Fourth Point prompt creates a filled triangle.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Solids - Edit tool group (expanded) Summary You can extrude, move, rotate, offset, taper, copy, delete, and assign colors and materials to faces. You can also copy and assign colors to edges. You can imprint, separate, shell, clean, and check the validity of the entire 3D solid object (body). You cannot use SOLIDEDIT with mesh objects. However, if you select a closed mesh object, you will be prompted to convert it to a 3D solid.
■ Select faces. Specifies which faces to modify. ■ Undo (page 992) ■ Remove (page 992) Remove Removes previously selected faces from the selection set. ■ Remove faces. Removes the selected face from the solid object. ■ Undo (page 992) ■ Add (page 992) ■ All (page 993) Undo Cancels the selection of the faces you added most recently to the selection set and redisplays the prompt. Add Adds faces you select to the selection set.
■ Undo (page 992) ■ Remove (page 992) ■ All (page 993) All Selects all faces and adds them to the selection set. ■ Select faces. Selects specific faces (instead of all of them). ■ Undo (page 992) ■ Remove (page 992) Height of extrusion Sets the direction and distance of the extrusion. Entering a positive value extrudes the face in the direction of its normal. Entering a negative value extrudes the face in the direction opposite to its normal. ■ Angle of taper for extrusion.
Tapering the selected face with a positive angle tapers the face in, and a negative angle tapers the face out. The default angle, 0, extrudes the face perpendicular to its plane. All selected faces in the selection set are tapered to the same value. If you specify a large taper angle or height, you can cause the face to taper to a point before it reaches the extrusion height. Path Sets a path for the extrusion path based on a specified line or curve.
If the path is a spline, the path should be perpendicular to the plane of the profile and at one of the endpoints of the path. If not, the profile is rotated to be perpendicular to the spline path. If one of the endpoints of the spline is on the plane of the face, the face is rotated about the point; otherwise, the spline path is moved to the center of the profile and the profiles are rotated about its center.
Select faces Specifies the face to be moved. ■ Base point of displacement. Sets the base point for the move. If you specify a single point, usually entered as a coordinate, and then press Enter, the coordinate is used as the new location. ■ Second point of displacement. Sets a displacement vector that indicates how far the selected face is moved and in what direction. Face: Rotate Rotate Rotates one or more faces or a collection of features on a solid about a specified axis.
Pressing Enter at the main Rotate prompt displays the following prompts. Specifying a point at the main prompt skips the prompt for the first point: ■ ■ First point on the rotation axis. Sets the first point on the axis of revolution. Second point on the rotation axis. Sets the second point on the axis. Rotation angle (page 998) ■ ■ Reference (page 998) Axis by object Aligns the axis of rotation with an existing object.
■ Reference (page 998) Xaxis, Yaxis, Zaxis Aligns the axis of rotation with the axis (X, Y, or Z) that passes through the selected point. ■ Origin of rotation (page 998) ■ Rotation angle (page 998) ■ Reference (page 998) Origin of rotation Sets the point of rotation. ■ Rotation angle (page 998) ■ Reference (page 998) Rotation angle Rotates the object about the selected axis the specified amount from the current orientation. Reference Specifies the reference angle and the new angle.
■ Specify the offset distance. Sets a positive value to increase the size of the solid or a negative value to decrease the size of the solid. Face: Taper Taper Tapers faces on a 3D solid at a specified angle. The rotation of the taper angle is determined by the selection sequence of the base point and second point along the selected vector. A positive angle tapers the face in, and a negative angle tapers the face out. The default angle, 0, extrudes the face perpendicular to its plane.
■ Remove (page 992) ■ All (page 993) Select faces (taper) Specifies the faces to be tapered and then sets the slope of the taper. ■ Base point. Sets the first point for determining the plane. ■ Another point along the axis of tapering. Sets the orientation of the axis that determines the direction of the taper. ■ Taper angle. Specify an angle between -90 and +90 degrees to set the slope of the taper from the axis. Face: Delete Delete Deletes or removes faces, including fillets and chamfers.
Creates a new object with the original orientation and profile of the face. The result can be used as a reference to create a new 3D solid. ■ Select faces (copy) (page 1001) ■ Undo. Cancels the selection of the faces that you selected most recently. ■ Remove (page 992) ■ All (page 993) Select faces (copy) Specifies the face to be copied. ■ Base point or displacement. Sets the first point to determine the distance and direction for the placement of the copied face (displacement).
■ Remove (page 992) ■ All (page 993) Select faces (material) Specifies the faces to be modified. The Color Palette dialog box (page 205) is displayed. ■ Enter new material name. Enter the name of the material to be assigned to the selected face. (The name of a material can be found by opening the Materials window and selecting the material swatch to display the name in the Name field.) ■ ByLayer. Assigns the material based on the layer assignment.
■ Undo (page 1003) ■ Remove (page 1003) Select Edges (copy) Specifies the edges to copy. Press Ctrl+click to select the edge. Then set the displacement: ■ Base point of displacement. Sets the first point for determining where the new object is placed. ■ Second point of displacement. Sets the relative direction and distance for the new object. Undo Cancels selection of the edges you added most recently to the selection set. The previous prompt is displayed.
Edge: Exit Exits the face-editing options and displays the Enter a Solids Editing Option prompt. Body Body Edits the entire solid object by imprinting other geometry on the solid, separating the solid into individual solid objects, shelling, cleaning, or checking the selected solid.
A union or subtract operation can result in a single 3D solid that consists of more than one continuous volume. You can separate these volumes into independent 3D solids. NOTE Separating solids does not separate Boolean objects that form a single volume. Select a 3D solid Specifies the 3D solid object to separate. Press Ctrl+click to select the edge. Body: Shell Shelling creates a hollow, thin wall with a specified thickness. You can specify a constant wall thickness for all the faces.
■ Add. Press Ctrl+click an edge to indicate which faces to retain. ■ All. Temporarily selects all faces for removal. You can then use Add to add the faces you want to retain. Enter the shell offset distance Sets the size of the offset. Specify a positive value to create a shell to the inside perimeter of the solid. Specify a negative value to create a shell on the outside perimeter of the solid.
Undo Undo Undoes the editing action. Exit Exit Exits the SOLIDEDIT command. See also: Clean and Check 3D Solids SOLPROF Creates 2D profile images of 3D solids for display in a layout viewport. Access Methods Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Modeling ➤ Setup ➤ Profile Summary The selected 3D solids are projected onto a 2D plane parallel with the current layout viewport. The resulting 2D objects are generated on separate layers for hidden and visible lines and are displayed only in that viewport.
PH-viewport handle for the hidden profile layer For example, if you create a profile in a viewport whose handle is 4B, the blocks containing the visible lines are inserted on layer PV-4B, and the block containing the hidden lines (if requested) is inserted on layer PH-4B. If these layers do not exist, the command creates them. If the layers do exist, the blocks are added to the information already on the layers.
No Creates the profile lines with 3D objects. The next prompt determines whether tangential edges are displayed. A tangential edge is the transition line between two tangent faces. It's the imaginary edge at which two faces meet and are tangent. For example, if you fillet the edge of a box, tangential edges are created where the cylindrical face of the fillet blends into the planar faces of the box. Tangential edges are not shown for most drafting applications.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter an option [Ucs (page 1010)/Ortho (page 1012)/Auxiliary (page 1012)/Section (page 1013)]: Enter an option or press Enter to exit the command SOLVIEW places the viewport objects on the VPORTS layer, which it creates if it does not already exist. The view-specific information that is saved with each viewport you create is used by SOLDRAW (page 988) to generate the final drawing view.
Named Uses the XY plane of a named UCS to create a profile view. Enter the name of the UCS you want to use and the scale of your view. Entering a scale is equivalent to zooming your viewport by a factor relative to paper space. The center is based on the current model space extents. World Uses the XY plane of the WCS to create a profile view. Enter the name of the UCS you want to use and the scale of your view. Entering a scale is equivalent to zooming your viewport by a factor relative to paper space.
Ortho Creates a folded orthographic view from an existing view. Once you select the side of the viewport you want to use for projecting the new view, a rubber-band line perpendicular to the side of the viewport helps you locate the center of the new view. Auxiliary Creates an auxiliary view from an existing view. An auxiliary view is one that is projected onto a plane perpendicular to one of the orthographic views and inclined in the adjacent view.
Two points define the inclined plane used for the auxiliary projection. Both points must be located in the same viewport. A rubber-band line perpendicular to the inclined plane helps you select the center of the new viewport. Section Creates a drafting sectional view of solids, complete with cross-hatching.
In the original viewport, specify two points to define the sectioning plane. Define the viewing side by specifying a point on one side of the cutting plane. Enter the scale of the new view. Entering a scale is equivalent to zooming your viewport by a factor relative to paper space. The default value is a 1:1 scale, which is equivalent to zoom 1.0xp. At the next prompt, specify the center of the new viewport.
Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Text tool group ➤ Check Spelling Menu: Tools ➤ Spelling Toolbar: Text Command entry: 'spell for transparent use Summary When you enter spell at the Command prompt, the Check Spelling dialog box (page 1015) is displayed. Select the Start button to begin the spelling check. If Check Spelling is set to Entire Drawing, spelling is checked on the Model layout, then on named (paper space) layouts. If a flagged word is identified, the drawing area highlights and zooms to that word.
Summary Checks the spelling in single-line text, multiline text, multileader text, text within block attributes, text within xrefs, and text added to dimensions. In block attributes, only the attribute values are checked. The spelling in text objects within block references and nested block references is checked, but spell checking in block definitions is performed only if the associated block reference has been selected. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Select Objects Limits the spelling check to the selected single-line text, multiline text, dimension text, multileader text, text within block attributes, and text within xrefs. Not in Dictionary Displays the word identified as misspelled. Suggestions Displays a list of suggested replacement words from the current dictionary. You can select another replacement word from the list, or edit or enter a replacement word in the top Suggestions text area. Start Starts checking text for spelling errors.
Specifies to search external references for spelling errors. Options Ignore Capitalized Words Specifies to ignore capitalized words. Ignore Words with Mixed Cases Specifies to ignore words that contain uppercase and lowercase letters. Ignore Words in Uppercase Specifies to ignore words that are in all uppercase. Ignore Words with Numbers Specifies to ignore words that include numbers. Ignore Words Containing Punctuation Specifies to ignore words that contain punctuation.
Summary Specifies specific text options that will be checked in your drawing. List of Options The following options are displayed. Include Dimension Text Searches dimension text. Block Attributes Searches block attributes text for spelling errors. External References Specifies to search external references for spelling errors. Options Ignore Capitalized Words Specifies to ignore capitalized words. Ignore Words with Mixed Cases Specifies to ignore words that contain uppercase and lowercase letters.
Ignore Words in Uppercase Specifies to ignore words that are in all uppercase. Ignore Words with Numbers Specifies to ignore words that include numbers. Ignore Words Containing Punctuation Specifies to ignore words that contain punctuation. See also: Check Spelling SPHERE Creates a 3D solid sphere.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify center point (page 1021) or [3P (page 1021)/2P (page 1021)/Ttr (page 1022)]: Specify a point or enter an option Center Point Specifies the center point of the sphere. When you specify the center point, the sphere is positioned so that its central axis is parallel to the Z axis of the current user coordinate system (UCS). Latitudinal lines are parallel to the XY plane. Radius Defines the radius of the sphere.
TTR (Tangent, Tangent, Radius) Defines the sphere with a specified radius tangent to two objects. The specified tangency points are projected onto the current UCS. See also: Create a Solid Sphere SPLINE Creates a smooth curve that passes through or near a set of fit points, or that is defined by the vertices in a control frame.
To display or hide the control vertices and control frame, select or deselect the spline, or use CVSHOW (page 253) and CVHIDE (page 248). For splines created with control vertices, you can display the control frame by selecting the spline. List of Prompts The prompts that display depend on whether you create a spline with fit points or with control vertices.
(cubic), and so on up to degree 10. Adjusting the shape of a spline by moving control vertices often provides better results than moving fit points. This is the preferred method if you are creating geometry to use with 3D NURBS surfaces. Object Converts 2D or 3D quadratic or cubic spline-fit polylines to equivalent splines. The original polyline is retained or discarded depending on the setting of the DELOBJ (page 1251) system variable. Next Point Creates additional spline segments until you press Enter.
Options for Splines with Fit Points The following options are specific to the fit point method. Knots Specifies the knot parameterization, one of several computational methods that determines how the component curves between successive fit points within a spline are blended. (SPLKNOTS (page 1489) system variable) ■ Chord (or Chord-Length method). Spaces the knots connecting each component curve to be proportional to the distances between each associated pair of fit points.
End Tangency Specifies a tangent condition on the ending point of the spline. Tolerance Specifies the distance by which the spline is allowed to deviate from the specified fit points. A tolerance value of 0 requires the resulting spline to pass directly through the fit points. The tolerance value applies to all fit points except the starting and ending fit points, which always have a tolerance of 0.
SPLINEDIT Modifies the parameters of a spline or converts a spline-fit polyline to a spline. Access Methods Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Spline Shortcut menu: Select a spline to edit. Right-click in the drawing area and click Spline. Summary Modifies the data that defines a spline, such as the number and weight of control vertices, the fit tolerance, and the starting and ending tangents.
Close/Open One of the following options displays, depending on whether the selected spline is open or closed. An open spline has two endpoints, while a closed spline forms a loop. Close Closes an open spline by defining the last point to be coincident with the first. By default, closed splines are periodic, maintaining curvature continuity (C2) along the entire curve.
Close/Open One of the following options displays, depending on whether the selected spline is open or closed. An open spline has two endpoints, while a closed spline forms a loop. Close Closes an open spline by defining the last point to be coincident with the first. By default, closed splines are periodic, maintaining curvature continuity (C2) along the entire curve.
The System Default option calculates the default end tangents. Tolerance Refits the spline to the existing fit points using the new tolerance value. Exit Returns to the previous prompt.
New Weight Recalculates the spline based on the new weight value for the specified control vertex. A larger value pulls the spline closer to the control vertex. ■ Next (page 1029) ■ Previous (page 1029) ■ Select Point (page 1029) Exit Returns to the previous prompt. Convert to Polyline Converts the spline to a polyline. The precision value determines how closely the resulting polyline matches the spline. Valid values are any integer between 0 and 99.
Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Lights tool group ➤ Spotlight Menu: View ➤ Render ➤ Light ➤ New Spotlight Summary A spotlight distribution casts a focused beam of light like a flashlight, a follow spot in a theater, or a headlight. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Hotspot Specifies the angle that defines the brightest cone of light, which is known to lighting designers as the beam angle. This value can range from 0 to 160 degrees or the equivalent values based on AUNITS (page 1215). Falloff Specifies the angle that defines the full cone of light, which is also known as the field angle. This value can range from 0 to 160 degrees. The default is 50 degrees or the equivalent values based on AUNITS (page 1215).
If you enter k, you can specify the color of the light based on a Kelvin temperature value. Shadow Makes the light cast shadows. Off Turns off display and calculation of shadows for the light. Turning shadows off increases performance. Sharp Displays shadows with sharp edges. Use this option to increase performance. Soft Mapped Displays realistic shadows with soft edges. ■ Map Size. Specifies the amount of memory to use to calculate the shadow map. ■ Softness.
Attenuation End Limit Specifies the point where light ends as an offset from the center of the light. No light is cast beyond this point. Setting an end limit increases performance where the effect of lighting is so minimal that the calculations are wasted processing time. Color/Filter Color Controls the color of the light. True Color Specifies a True Color. Enter in the format R,G,B (red, green, blue). Index Specifies an ACI (AutoCAD Color Index) color.
When used at the DIM prompt, STATUS reports the values and descriptions of all dimensioning system variables. In addition, STATUS displays the following information. List of Options The following options are displayed. Model or Paper Space Limits Are Displays the grid limits defined by LIMITS (page 575). The first line shows the XY coordinate of the limit's lower-left corner, stored in the LIMMIN (page 1393) system variable.
Current Material Sets the material of new objects. (CMATERIAL (page 1230) system variable) Current Lineweight Sets the lineweight of new objects. (CELWEIGHT (page 1225) system variable) Current Plot Style Sets the current plot style of new objects. (CPLOTSTYLE (page 1240) system variable) Current Elevation Stores the current elevation of new objects relative to the current UCS. (ELEVATION (page 1321) system variable) Thickness Sets the current 3D thickness.
to the SLA as a faceted representation of the model. The facets consist of a set of triangles (with outward pointing normals) that approximate the faces of the model. From the faceted data, the SLA workstation produces a set of contours that defines a series of layers representing the part to be built. See also: Export Stereolithography STL Files Create STL File Dialog Box Saves a drawing as an STL file. Summary The Create STL File dialog box is a standard file selection dialog box.
Summary Objects that are partially enclosed by a crossing window are stretched. Objects that are completely enclosed within the crossing window, or that are selected individually, are moved rather than stretched. Several objects such as circles, ellipses, and blocks, cannot be stretched. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select objects to stretch by crossing-window or crossing-polygon... Select objects: Use the cpolygon option or the crossing object selection method, and press Enter.
Displacement Specify displacement : Enter displacement values for X,Y (and optionally Z) If you enter a second point, the objects are stretched the vector distance from the base point to the second point. If you press Enter at the Specify Second Point of Displacement prompt, the first point is treated as an X,Y,Z displacement. See also: Resize or Reshape Objects STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles.
Text Style Dialog Box Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. Summary Creates, modifies, or sets named text styles. List of Options The following options are displayed. Preview Displays sample text that changes dynamically as you change fonts and modify the effects. Effects Modifies characteristics of the font, such as its height, width factor, and obliquing angle and whether it is displayed upside down, backwards, or vertically aligned.
Specifies that the text is annotative. Click the information icon to learn more about the annotative objects. Match Text Orientation to Layout Specifies that the orientation of the text in paper space viewports matches the orientation of the layout. This option is available when the Annotative option is selected. Upside Down Displays the characters upside down. Backwards Displays the characters backwards. Vertical Displays the characters aligned vertically.
NOTE TrueType fonts using the effects described in this section might appear bold on the screen. Onscreen appearance has no effect on plotted output. Fonts are plotted as specified by applied character formatting. Styles Displays the list of styles in the drawing. Style names can be up to 255 characters long. They can contain letters, numbers, and the special characters dollar sign ($), underscore (_), and hyphen (-).
See also: Overview of Text Styles -STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter name of text style (page 1044) or [? (page 1045)] : Enter a style name, enter ?, or press Enter Text Style Name Specifies the text style name. To define a style that uses Big Fonts, you can use long file names that do not contain commas. Commas are used to separate SHX files and Big Font files for defining a Big Font file.
Obliquing Angle Entering a value between -85 and 85 obliques the text. Vertical Vertical is available only if the selected font supports dual orientation. ?—List Text Styles Lists the text styles available in the drawing. At the Enter Text Style(s) to List prompt, entering the name of a style displays the name, font file, height, width factor, obliquing angle, and generation of the style and exits the command.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Solids - Edit tool group ➤ Booleans flyout ➤ Subtract Summary With SUBTRACT, you can create a 3D solid by subtracting one set of existing 3D solids from another, overlapping set. You can create a 2D region object by subtracting one set of existing region objects from another, overlapping set. You can select only regions for use with this command. NOTE Using SUBTRACT with 3D surfaces is not recommended. Use the SURFTRIM (page 1059) command instead.
Objects in the second selection set are subtracted from objects in the first selection set. A single new region is created. You can only subtract regions from other regions that are on the same plane. However, you can perform simultaneous SUBTRACT actions by selecting sets of regions on different planes. The program then produces separate subtracted regions on each plane. Regions for which there are no other selected coplanar regions are rejected. You cannot use SUBTRACT with mesh objects.
Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Surfaces - Create tool group ➤ Surface Blend Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Modeling ➤ Surfaces ➤ Blend Summary When you blend two surfaces together, you specify surface continuity and bulge magnitude. Set SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY (page 1498) to 1 to create a relationship between the blend surface and the originating curves. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Bulge Magnitude Sets the roundness of the blend surface edge where it meets the originating surface. The default is 0.5. Valid values are between 0 and 1. See also: Blend a Surface SURFEXTEND Lengthens a surface by a specified distance.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify Extension Distance Specifies the extension length. Expression Enter a formula or equation to specify the length of the surface extension. See Constrain a Design with Formulas and Equations. Modes ■ Extend - Extrudes the surface in a way that tries to mimic and continue the shape of the surface. ■ Stretch - Extrudes the surface without trying to mimic and continue the shape of the surface.
Access Methods Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Open Shapes tool group (expanded) ➤ Extract Isolines Menu: Modify ➤ 3D Operations ➤ Extract Isolines Summary Creates curves, typically in the U and V directions, on a surface, a 3D solid, or a face on a 3D solid. The curves can be a lines, polylines, arcs, or splines based depending on the shape of the surface or 3D solid. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select a Surface, Solid, or Face Select a surface, 3D solid, or face of a 3D solid.
Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Surfaces - Edit tool group ➤ Surface Fillet Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Modeling ➤ Surfaces ➤ Fillet Summary The fillet surface has a constant radius profile and is tangent to the original surfaces. The original surfaces are automatically trimmed to connect the edges of the fillet surface. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. First and Second Surface or Region Specifies the first and second surfaces or regions. Radius Specifies fillet radius.
SURFNETWORK Creates a surface in the space between several curves in the U and V directions (including surface and solid edge subobjects). Access Methods Button Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Surfaces - Create tool group ➤ Surface Network Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Modeling ➤ Surfaces ➤ Network Summary A network surface can be created between a network of curves or between the edges of other 3D surfaces or solids.
Select Curves or Surface Edges in the Second Direction Select a network of open curves, open surface edges, or region edges (not the surfaces or regions) for the U or V direction. Bulge Magnitude Sets the roundness of the network surface edge where it meets the originating surface. Valid values are between 0 and 1. The default is 0.5. This option displays only if a lofting edge belongs to a 3D solid or surface (not a curve).
List of Prompts The following prompts display. Specify Offset Distance Specifies the distance between the offset surface and the original surface. Flip Direction Reverses the offset direction shown by the arrows. Both Sides Offsets the surface in both directions (creates two new surfaces in instead of one). Solid Creates a solid from the offset. This is similar to the THICKEN (page 1086) command. Connect Connects multiple offset surfaces, if the original surfaces are connected.
Expression Enter a formula or equation to specify the distance of the surface offset. See Constrain a Design with Formulas and Equations. See also: Offset a Surface SURFPATCH Creates a new surface by fitting a cap over a surface edge that forms a closed loop. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Surfaces - Create tool group ➤ Surface Patch Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Modeling ➤ Surfaces ➤ Patch Summary You can also add an additional curve over the closed loop to constrain and guide the patch surface.
When you create a patch surface, you can specify surface continuity and bulge magnitude. If the SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY (page 1498) system variable is set to 1, associativity is maintained between the patch surface and the originating edges or curves. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select Surface Edges (page 1057) to patch or [Chain (page 1057)/Curves (page 1057)] : Surface Edges Selects individual surface edges and adds them to the selection set.
Bulge Magnitude For best results, enter a value between 0 and 1 to set the roundness of the patch surface edge where it meets the originating surface. The default is 0.5. Guides Uses additional guide curves to shape the patch surface. Guide curves can be curves or points. See also: Patch a Surface SURFSCULPT Trims and combines surfaces that bound a watertight area to create a solid.
The SURFSCULPT command also works with solid and mesh objects. If you are working with meshes, the operation uses the SMOOTHMESHCONVERT (page 1479) setting. See also: Create 3D Solids from Objects SURFTRIM Trims portions of a surface where it meets another surface or type of geometry.
Select Surfaces or Regions to Trim Select one or more surfaces or regions to trim. Select Cutting Curves, Surfaces, or Regions The curves that can be used as a trimming edge includes lines, arc, circles, ellipses, 2D polylines, 2D spline fit polylines, 2D curve fit polylines, 3D polylines, 3D spline-fit polylines, splines, and helixes. You can also use surfaces and regions as trimming boundaries. Select Area to Trim Select one or more regions on a surface to remove.
SURFUNTRIM Replaces surface areas removed by the SURFTRIM command. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Surfaces - Edit tool group (expanded) ➤ Surface Untrim Menu: Modify ➤ Surface Editing ➤ Untrim Summary If the trimmed edge is dependent on another surface edge that has also been trimmed, you may not be able to fully restore the trimmed area. NOTE SURFUNTRIM does not restore areas removed by the SURFAUTOTRIM system variable and PROJECTGEOMETRY.
See also: Trim and Untrim Surfaces SWEEP Creates a 3D solid or surface by sweeping a 2D or 3D object or subobject along a path. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Solids - Create tool group ➤ Solid Creation flyout ➤ Sweep Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Modeling ➤ Sweep Summary Creates a solid or surface by sweeping an open or closed, planar or non-planar curve (profile) along an open or closed path.
Objects that Can Be Swept Objects that Can Be Used as a Sweep Path 2D polylines 2D and 3D polylines 2D solids Solid, surface and mesh edge subobjects 3D solid face subobjects Helices Arcs Arcs Circles Circles Ellipses Ellipses Elliptical arcs Elliptical arcs Lines Lines Regions Solid, surface and mesh edge subobjects Trace NOTE Select face and edge subobjects by pressing Ctrl while you select them.
Mode Controls whether the sweep action creates a solid or a surface. Surfaces are swept as either NURBS surfaces or procedural surfaces, depending on the SURFACEMODELINGMODE (page 1500) system variable. Alignment Specifies whether the profile is aligned to be normal to the tangent direction of the sweep path. NOTE If the profile is not perpendicular (normal) to the tangent of the start point of the path, then the profile automatically aligns. Enter No at the alignment prompt to prevent this.
Summary A table is a compound object that contains data in rows and columns. It can be created from an empty table or a table style. When you create a table, the number of columns and rows created is determined by the two points picked to define the size of the table. If you enter -table at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page 1070). List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Access Methods Toolbar: Table Cell visor (expanded) ➤ Manage Cell Contents List of Options The following options are displayed. Cell Content Lists all text and/or blocks in the selected cell in order of appearance. Text is indicated with the label Table Cell Text. Blocks are indicated with Block preceding the name of the block. Delete (-) Removes the selected content from the table cell. Options Changes the direction and spacing of the content in the cell.
Places cell content based on the width of the cell. Stacked Horizontally Places cell content horizontally, regardless of cell width. Stacked Vertically Places cell content vertically, regardless of cell height. Spacing Determines the spacing between text and/or blocks within the cell. See also: Create and Modify Tables Table Cell Format Dialog Box The options displayed here change based on the selected data type and format you select. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Preview Displays a preview of the option you selected in the Format list. Format Depending on the data type you select, displays a list of relevant format types. For example, if you selected Angle as the data type, options such as Decimal Degrees, Grads, Radians, and so on are displayed. Precision For Angle, Decimal Number, and Points data types only, sets the precision for applicable formats.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Value Displays the value in base drawing units, and reflects the value as it will appear once the conversion factor and other settings are applied. Conversion Specifies the conversion factor to use on the current value. The default is 1 for no conversion. Additional Text Specifies a prefix or a suffix for the value. Number Separators Specifies a decimal separator and the formatting for numbers over 1000.
Decimal Specifies the separator for decimal values. Select a period, a comma, or a space. Thousands Inserts a comma to group thousands in a field value. Zero Suppression Controls the suppression of leading and trailing zeros, and of feet and inches that have a value of zero. Leading Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal values. For example, 0.5000 becomes .5000. Trailing Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal values. For example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5, and 30.0000 becomes 30.
Width Specifies a width for the table columns. Height Specifies a height for the table rows. Style Specifies a table style for the table. The specified table style must contain a starting table. Auto Specifies a size and a location for the table. When this option is selected, you can set the number of columns or the column width, but not both. The number of rows and the row height depend on the size of the window you specify. First Corner Specifies the location of the upper-left corner of the table.
The cell type is set in the Properties Inspector palette. The Header and Title cell styles use the Label cell type by default. Data Text Retains rows with a cell type of Data found in the table style’s starting table. The cell type is set in the Properties Inspector palette. The Data cell style uses the Data cell type property by default. Formulas Retains formulas found in the specified table style’s starting table. Fields Retains fields found in the specified table style’s starting table.
Summary A standard file selection dialog box (page 723) is displayed. Table data is exported in the comma-separated (CSV) file format. All formatting of the table and its text is lost. See also: Create and Modify Tables TABSURF Creates a mesh from a line or curve that is swept along a straight path. Access Methods Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Modeling ➤ Meshes ➤ Tabulated Mesh Summary Select a line, arc, circle, ellipse, or polyline to sweep in a straight path.
size set by SURFTAB1. If the path curve is a polyline that has not been spline fit, tabulation lines are drawn at the ends of straight segments, and each arc segment is divided into intervals set by SURFTAB1. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Object for path curve Specifies which object is swept along the path. The path curve defines the approximated surface of the polygon mesh. It can be a line, arc, circle, ellipse, or 2D or 3D polyline.
See also: Create Meshes from Other Objects TARGETPOINT Creates a target point light. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Photometry Photometry is available when the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 1 or 2. Photometry is the measurement of the luminous intensities of visible light sources. In photometry, luminous intensity is a measure of the perceived power emitted by a light source in a particular direction. Luminous flux is the perceived power per unit of solid angle. The total luminous flux for a lamp is the perceived power emitted in all directions.
Map Size Specifies the amount of memory that should be used to calculate the shadow map. Softness Specifies the softness to use to calculate the shadow map. Soft Sampled Displays realistic shadows with softer shadows (penumbra) based on extended light sources. Shape Specify the shape of the shadow by entering s and then the dimensions of the shape. (For example, the radius of the sphere or the length and width of a rectangle.) Attenuation Attenuation Type Controls how light diminishes over distance.
Exit Exits the command. See also: Use Point Lights TEXT Creates a single-line text object. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Text tool group ➤ Multiline Text flyout ➤ Single Line Menu: Draw ➤ Text ➤ Single Line Text Summary You can use single-line text to create one or more lines of text, where each text line is an independent object that you can move, format, or otherwise modify. Right-click in the text box to select options on the shortcut menu.
You can enter special characters and format text by entering Unicode strings (page 1083) and control codes (page 1083). Use -TEXT to honor the TEXTEVAL system variable (page 1085). List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Current text style: Current text height: Annotative: Specify start point (page 1079) of text or [Justify (page 1079)/Style (page 1082)]: Specify a point or enter an option Start Point Specifies a start point for the text object.
Fit Specifies that text fits within an area and at an orientation defined with two points and a height. Available for horizontally oriented text only. The height is the distance in drawing units that the uppercase letters extend from the baseline. Designated text height is the distance between the start point and a point you specify. The longer the text string, the narrower the characters. The height of the characters remains constant.
TC (Top Center) Centers text at a point specified for the top of the text. Available for horizontally oriented text only. TR (Top Right) Right-justifies text at a point specified for the top of the text. Available for horizontally oriented text only. ML (Middle Left) Left-justifies text at a point specified for the middle of the text. Available for horizontally oriented text only. MC (Middle Center) Centers the text both horizontally and vertically at the middle of the text.
BR (Bottom Right) Right-justifies text at a point specified for the baseline. Available for horizontally oriented text only. Style Specifies the text style, which determines the appearance of the text characters. Text you create uses the current text style. Entering ? lists the current text styles, associated font files, height, and other parameters. See also: Create Single-Line Text Text Shortcut Menu Displays options available for creating and modifying single-line text.
See also: Create Single-Line Text Special Unicode Characters When entering text, you can create special characters, including the degree symbol, plus/minus tolerance symbol, and the diameter symbol, by entering the following Unicode character strings. List of Options The following options are displayed. \U+00B0 Degrees symbol (°) \U+00B1 Tolerance symbol ( ) \U+2205 Diameter symbol ( ) See “Unicode Font Descriptions” in the Customization Guide.
You can use these control codes with standard AutoCAD text fonts only: %%o Toggles overscoring on and off. %%u Toggles underscoring on and off. %%d Draws degrees symbol (°). %%p Draws plus/minus tolerance symbol ( ). %%c Draws circle diameter dimensioning symbol (ý). %%% Draws a single percent sign (%). This is valid for the TEXT command only. Overscoring and underscoring can be in effect at the same time. Both turn off automatically at the end of the text string.
TEXT and the TEXTEVAL System Variable Summary Entering -text at the Command prompt displays the same prompts as the TEXT command. Unlike the TEXT command, -TEXT checks the setting of the TEXTEVAL (page 1507) system variable. When the TEXTEVAL system variable is set to 1, AutoLISP® expressions are evaluated when the -TEXT command ends. AutoLISP expressions that are entered using this method must begin with an exclamation point or left parenthesis.
TEXTTOFRONT Brings text, dimensions, and multileaders in front of all other objects in the drawing. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Move/Rotate/Scale tool group (expanded) ➤ Draw Order flyout ➤ Bring Text to Front, Bring Dimensions to Front Menu: Tools ➤ Draw Order ➤ Bring Annotations to Front List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Solids - Edit (expanded) ➤ Thicken Menu: Modify ➤ 3D Operations ➤ Thicken Summary A useful technique for modeling a complex 3D curved solid is to first create a surface and then convert it to a 3D solid by thickening it. Initially, the default thickness value is zero. During a drawing session, the default value for the thickness is the previously entered thickness value.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select objects or : Press Enter to select all objects and viewports or use an object selection method and press Enter A TIFF file is created that contains the objects you select. The file reflects what is displayed on the screen. NOTE When the FILEDIA (page 1334) system variable is set to 0 (Off), command prompts are displayed. See also: Export Raster Files TIME Displays the date and time statistics of a drawing.
Next Automatic Save In (page 1089): 0 days 01:59:15.570 Enter option [Display (page 1089)/On (page 1089)/OFF (page 1089)/Reset (page 1089)]: Enter an option or press Enter Current Time Displays the current date and time to the nearest millisecond using a 24-hour clock. Created Displays the date and time that the current drawing was created. Last Updated Displays the date and time of the latest update of the current drawing. This date and time is initially the drawing creation time.
Summary The Insert Block in a Table Cell dialog box (page 1090) is displayed. See also: Add Text and Blocks to Tables Insert Block in Table Cell Dialog Box Specifies options for inserting a block in a table cell. List of Options The following options are displayed. Name Specifies the block reference to insert. Browse Displays the Select Drawing File dialog box. Select the drawing file to insert as a block reference.
AutoFit Controls if the block reference should be scaled to fit in the select table cell, or if the height and width of the table cell should be adjusted to fit the block reference being inserted. Rotation Angle Specifies a rotation angle for the block. Overall Cell Alignment Specifies alignment for the block in the table cell. The block is middle-, top-, or bottom-aligned with respect to the top and bottom borders of the cell.
See also: Overview of Geometric Tolerances Geometric Tolerance Dialog Box Specifies the symbols and values for a feature control frame. Summary After you select geometric characteristic symbols, the Geometric Tolerance dialog box closes and the following prompt is displayed: Enter tolerance location: Specify a location The feature control frame is placed at the specified location. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Sym Displays the geometric characteristic symbol, which you select from the Symbol dialog box (page 1095). The dialog box is displayed when you select one of the Sym boxes. Tolerance 1 Creates the first tolerance value in the feature control frame. The tolerance value indicates the amount by which the geometric characteristic can deviate from a perfect form. You can insert a diameter symbol before the tolerance value and a material condition symbol after it.
First Box Creates the datum reference value. Second Box Displays the Material Condition dialog box (page 1097), in which you select a modifying symbol. These symbols act as modifiers to the datum reference. The symbol is inserted into the MC box for the primary datum reference in the Geometric Tolerance dialog box. Datum 2 Creates the secondary datum reference in the feature control frame in the same way as the primary datum reference.
Datum Identifier Creates a datum-identifying symbol consisting of a reference letter. A datum is a theoretically exact geometric reference from which you can establish the location and tolerance zones of other features. A point, line, plane, cylinder, or other geometry can serve as a datum. See also: Overview of Geometric Tolerances Symbol Dialog Box Displays the geometric characteristic symbols for location, orientation, form, profile, and runout.
Geometric characteristic symbols Symbol 1096 | Chapter 2 Commands Characteristic Type Concentricity or coaxiality Location Symmetry Location Parallelism Orientation Perpendicularity Orientation Angularity Orientation Cylindricility Form Flatness Form Circularity or roundness Form Straightness Form Profile of a surface Profile Profile of a line Profile
Geometric characteristic symbols Symbol Characteristic Type Circular runout Runout Total runout Runout See also: Overview of Geometric Tolerances Material Condition Dialog Box Specifies a modifying symbol. These symbols act as modifiers to the geometric characteristic and the tolerance value of features that can vary in size. Summary The symbol is inserted into the MC box for the first or second tolerance value in the Geometric Tolerance dialog box (page 1092).
See also: The Tool Sets Palette TOOLSETSCLOSE Closes the Tool Sets palette. See also: The Tool Sets Palette TORUS Creates a donut-shaped 3D solid. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Solids - Create tool group ➤ Solid Primitives flyout ➤ Torus Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Modeling ➤ Torus Summary You can create a torus by specifying the center, then the radius or diameter of the torus, and then the radius or diameter of the tube that surrounds the torus.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify center point or [3P (page 1099)/2P (page 1099)/TTR (page 1099)]: Specify a point (1) or enter an option When you specify the center point, the torus is positioned so that its central axis is parallel to the Z axis of the current user coordinate system (UCS). The torus is parallel to and bisected by the XY plane of the current workplane.
Diameter Defines the diameter of the tube. Diameter Defines the diameter of the torus. ■ Radius (page 1099) ■ Diameter (page 1100) See also: Create a Solid Torus TRANSPARENCY Controls whether background pixels in an image are transparent or opaque. Access Methods Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Image ➤ Transparency List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
TREESTAT Displays information about the drawing's current spatial index. Access Methods Command entry: 'treestat for transparent use Summary The program indexes objects in a region by recording their positions in space. The result is called a spatial index. The spatial index is tree structured and has branching nodes to which objects are attached. The index has two major branches. The paper space branch is called a quad-tree and treats objects as two-dimensional.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Modify tool group ➤ Trim Menu: Modify ➤ Trim Summary To trim objects, select the boundaries. Then press Enter and select the objects that you want to trim. To use all objects as boundaries, press Enter at the first Select Objects prompt. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Current settings: Projection = current, Edge = current Select cutting edges...
Select the objects that define the cutting edges to which you want to trim an object, or press Enter to select all displayed objects as potential cutting edges. TRIM projects the cutting edges and the objects to be trimmed onto the XY plane of the current user coordinate system (UCS). NOTE To select cutting edges that include blocks, you can use only the single selection, Crossing, Fence, and Select All options.
Project Specifies the projection method used when trimming objects. None Specifies no projection. The command trims only objects that intersect with the cutting edge in 3D space. UCS Specifies projection onto the XY plane of the current UCS. The command trims objects that do not intersect with the cutting edge in 3D space. View Specifies projection along the current view direction. The command trims objects that intersect the boundary in the current view.
Edge Determines whether an object is trimmed at another object's extrapolated edge or only to an object that intersects it in 3D space. Extend Extends the cutting edge along its natural path to intersect an object in 3D space. No Extend Specifies that the object is trimmed only at a cutting edge that intersects it in 3D space. NOTE When trimming hatches, do not set Edge to Extend.
U Commands U Reverses the most recent operation. Access Methods Menu: Edit ➤ Undo Shortcut menu: With no command active and no objects selected, right-click in the drawing area and click Undo. Command entry: Cmd-Z Summary You can enter u as many times as you wish, backing up one step at a time, until the drawing is as it was when you began the current editing session. When an operation cannot be undone, the command name is displayed but no action is performed.
Menu: Tools ➤ New UCS Shortcut menu: Right-click the UCS icon and click an option. Summary The UCS is the active coordinate system that establishes the XY plane (work plane) and Z-axis direction for drawing and modeling. Control the UCS origin and orientation to make drawing more convenient as you specify points, enter coordinates, and work with drawing aids, such as Ortho mode and the grid. A UCS can be stored with a viewport if the UCSVP (page 1529) system variable is set to 1 for that viewport.
NOTE If you do not specify a Z coordinate value when entering a coordinate, the current Z value is used. TIP You can also select and drag the UCS icon origin grip directly to a new location, or choose Move Origin Only from the origin grip menu. Face TIP You can also select and drag the UCS icon (or choose Move And Align from the origin grip menu) to dynamically align the UCS with faces. Dynamically aligns the UCS to a face on a 3D object.
Save Saves the current UCS to a specified name. Name Specifies the name for the UCS definition. Delete Removes the specified UCS definition from the list of saved definitions. If you delete a UCS definition that is currently active, the UCS stays in place but is listed as NO NAME. ?—List UCS Definitions Lists saved UCS definitions showing the origin and X, Y, and Z axes for each saved UCS definition relative to the current UCS. Enter an asterisk to list all UCS definitions.
World Aligns the UCS with the world coordinate system (WCS). TIP You can also click the UCS icon and choose World from the origin grip menu. X, Y, Z Rotates the current UCS about a specified axis. Point your right thumb in the positive direction of the X axis and curl your fingers. Your fingers indicate the positive rotation direction about the axis. Point your right thumb in the positive direction of the Y axis and curl your fingers. Your fingers indicate the positive rotation direction about the axis.
Point your right thumb in the positive direction of the Z axis and curl your fingers. Your fingers indicate the positive rotation direction about the axis. You can define any UCS by specifying an origin and one or more rotations around the X, Y, or Z axis. Z Axis Aligns the UCS to a specified positive Z axis. The UCS origin is moved to the first point and its positive Z axis passes through the second point.
Object Aligns the Z axis tangent to the endpoint that is nearest to the specified point. The positive Z axis points away from the object. Apply Applies the current UCS setting to a specified viewport or all active viewports when other viewports have a different UCS saved in the viewport. (UCSVP (page 1529) system variable). Viewport Applies the current UCS to the specified viewport and ends the UCS command. All Applies the current UCS to all active viewports.
Summary The UCS icon indicates the location and orientation of the current UCS. You can manipulate the UCS icon using grips. This is controlled by the UCSSELECTMODE (page 1528) system variable. NOTE If the location of the UCS origin is not visible in a viewport, the UCS icon is displayed in the lower-left corner of the viewport instead. Different coordinate system icons are displayed in paper space and model space.
On Displays the UCS icon. Off Turns off display of the UCS icon. All Applies changes to the icon in all active viewports. Otherwise, UCSICON affects only the current viewport. No Origin Displays the icon at the lower-left corner of the viewport regardless of the location of the UCS origin. Origin Displays the icon at the origin (0,0,0) of the current UCS. If the origin is out of view, it is displayed at the lower-left corner of the viewport.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Style Specifies display of either the 2D or the 3D UCS icon and its appearance. 2D Displays a 2D icon without a representation of the Z axis. 3D Displays a 3D icon. Line Width Controls the line width of the UCS icon if the 3D UCS icon is selected. Preview Displays a preview of the UCS icon in model space. Size Controls the size of the UCS icon as a percentage of viewport size. The default value is 50, and the valid range is from 5 to 95.
Color Controls the colors of the UCS icon in model space viewports and in layout tabs. Model Space Icon Color Controls the color of the UCS icon in model space viewports. Layout Tab Icon Color Controls the UCS icon color in layout tabs. Apply Single Color Applies the selected Model space icon color to all axes of the 2D UCS icon. See also: Control the Display of the User Coordinate System Icon UCSMAN Manages UCS definitions.
Summary Lists, renames, and restores user coordinate system (UCS) definitions, and controls UCS and UCS icon settings for viewports. List of Tabs The UCS dialog box includes the following tabs: ■ Named (page 1117) ■ Orthographic (page 1118) ■ Settings (page 1119) Named Tab (UCS Dialog Box) Lists UCS definitions and sets the current UCS. Current UCS Displays the name of the current UCS. If the UCS has not been saved and named, it is listed as UNNAMED.
systems for the active viewport during the current editing session, a Previous entry is next. You can step back through these coordinate systems by selecting Previous and Set Current repeatedly. To add a UCS name to this list, use the Save option of the UCS (page 1106) command. Delete (-) Deletes a named UCS. You cannot delete the World or Previous UCS. Options Manages the selected UCS in the dialog box. Set Current Restores the selected coordinate system. Rename Renames a customized UCS.
■ Depth. Specifies the distance between the XY plane of the orthographic UCS and a parallel plane that passes through the origin of the coordinate system specified by the UCSBASE (page 1525) system variable. The parallel plane of the UCSBASE coordinate system can be an XY, YZ, or XZ plane. NOTE You can specify the depth or a new origin for the selected orthographic UCS. See Depth option. Relative To Specifies the base coordinate system for defining the orthographic UCSs.
Icon Specifies the UCS icon display settings for the current viewport. On Displays the UCS icon in the current viewport. Display at UCS Origin Point Displays the UCS icon at the origin of the current coordinate system in the current viewport. If this option is cleared, or if the origin of the coordinate system is not visible in the viewport, the UCS icon is displayed at the lower-left corner of the viewport.
Saves the coordinate system setting with the viewport (UCSVP (page 1529) system variable). If this option is cleared, the viewport reflects the UCS of the viewport that is current. Update View to Plan When UCS Is Changed Restores Plan view when the coordinate system in the viewport is changed. (UCSFOLLOW (page 1526) system variable) See also: Work with the User Coordinate System (UCS) Orthographic UCS Depth Dialog Box Specifies the depth for an orthographic UCS.
Access Methods Shortcut menu: On the Named or Orthographic tab, click Options ➤ Details. Summary By default, the origin and the values for the X, Y, and Z axes are calculated relative to the world coordinate system. List of Options The following options are displayed. Name Displays the name of the current named UCS. Origin Displays the UCS origin relative to the UCS selected in Relative To. X Axis Displays the values for the X axis relative to the UCS selected in Relative To.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: PDF Underlay visor ➤ Underlay Layers Shortcut menu: Select an underlay. Right-click in the drawing area and choose View PDF Layers. Summary The Underlay Layers dialog box (page 1123) is displayed. See also: Control the Display of Layers in a PDF Underlay Underlay Layers Dialog Box Controls the display of layers in a PDF underlay. List of Options The following options are available in this dialog box.
Reference Name Select the reference whose layers you want to manage. Layer List Visible Displays the current visibility state for each layer in the selected underlay. When a layer is on it is visible and available for plotting. When a layer is off, it is invisible and not plotted. Click in this column to toggle the current visibility for the layer listed in the Name column. Name Displays the names of all the available layers in the selected underlay.
ObjectARX application commands that are registered by acedRegCmd can be accessed by preceding the command name with a period (.), followed by the command's group name, followed by another period (.). For example, the MTEXT command can be accessed with .acad_mtext.mtext. To determine command names and groups of an ObjectARX application, use the ARX (page 111) command, and choose the Commands option to see a listing of all currently loaded ObjectARX commands and their group names.
UNDO Auto is not available if the Control option has turned off or limited the UNDO feature. Control Limits or turns off UNDO. All Turns on the full UNDO command. None Turns off the U and UNDO commands and discards any UNDO command information saved earlier in the editing session. The Undo button on the Standard toolbar is unavailable. The Auto, Begin, and Mark options are not available when None or One is in effect.
You can place as many marks as necessary. Back moves back one mark at a time, removing the mark. If no mark is found, Back displays the following prompt: This will undo everything. OK? : Enteryornor press Enter Enter y to undo all commands entered in the current session. Enter n to ignore the Back option. When you use the Number option to undo multiple actions, UNDO stops if it encounters a mark.
If a group contains sub-groups, you are prompted to Accept to ungroup the current selection or choose Next to cycle through the groups in the selection set. See also: Edit Groups UNION Combines selected 3D solids, surfaces, or 2D regions by addition. Access Methods Button Ribbon: Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Solids - Edit tool group ➤ Booleans flyout ➤ Union Summary You can combine two or more 3D solids, surfaces, or 2D regions into a single, composite 3D solid, surface, or region.
Using the Union Command with Surfaces Although you can use the UNION command with surfaces, it will cause the surface to lose associativity. Instead, it is recommended that you use the surface editing commands: ■ SURFBLEND (page 1047) ■ SURFFILLET (page 1051) ■ SURFPATCH (page 1056) Using the Union Command with Solids and Regions The selection set can contain objects that lie in any number of arbitrary planes. For mixed object types, selection sets are divided into subsets that are joined separately.
Select objects Select the 3D solids, surfaces, or regions to be combined. See also: Create Composite Objects UNISOLATEOBJECTS Displays previously hidden objects. Access Methods Menu: Tools ➤ Isolate ➤ End Object Isolation Shortcut menu: Right-click in the drawing area and click Isolate ➤ End Object Isolation. Summary Displays objects previously hidden with the ISOLATEOBJECTS (page 534) or HIDEOBJECTS (page 509) command.
If you enter -units at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page 1134). See also: Determine the Units of Measurement Drawing Units Dialog Box Controls the displayed precision and format for coordinates and angles. List of Options The following options are displayed. Length Specifies the current unit of measurement and the precision for the current units. Type Sets the current format for units of measure. The values include Architectural, Decimal, Engineering, Fractional, and Scientific.
Architectural formats produce feet-and-inches displays and assume that each drawing unit represents one inch. The other formats can represent any real-world unit. Precision Sets the number of decimal places or fractional size displayed for linear measurements. Angle Specifies the current angle format and the precision for the current angle display. Type Sets the current angle format. Precision Sets the precision for the current angle display.
NOTE In order to create and use photometric lights, a unit other than Generic must be specified from the list of options. If Insertion Scale is set to Unitless, a warning message is displayed informing you that the rendered output might not be as expected. Insertion Scale Controls the unit of measurement for blocks and drawings that are inserted into the current drawing. A block or a drawing that is created with units that are different from the units specified with this option is scaled when inserted.
-UNITS Controls coordinate and angle display formats and precision. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Report formats: (Examples) 1. Scientific 1.55E+01 2. Decimal 15.50 3. Engineering 1'-3.50" 4. Architectural 1'-3 1/2" 5.
The default direction for 0 degrees is to the east quadrant, or 3 o'clock. The default direction for positive angular measurement is counterclockwise. Measure angles clockwise? [Yes/No] : Enter y or n or press Enter See also: Determine the Units of Measurement UPDATEFIELD Manually updates fields in selected objects in the drawing.
Summary The UPDATETHUMBNAIL (page 1533) system variable controls how the thumbnail previews are updated. The UPDATETHUMBSNOW command updates the following: ■ Layout and model space view thumbnails in the Project Manager ■ Quick View images See also: Switch Between Open Drawings UPLOADTOWS Uploads the current drawing file to AutoCAD WS.
Login to AutoCAD WS Dialog Box Allows you to log in to AutoCAD WS and upload the current drawing file. List of Options The following options are displayed. Email Enter the e-mail address associated with your AutoCAD WS account. First Time User? Create an Account Launches your default Web browser and displays the Create an AutoCAD WS Account page on www.autocadws.com. Password Enter the password for your account.
See also: Use AutoCAD WS for Drawing File Collaboration Upload Complete Dialog Box Displays the current status of the drawing being uploaded to AutoCAD WS. List of Options The following options are displayed. User Name Displays the user name of the account currently logged in. Logout Logs the current user out and displays the Login to AutoCAD WS dialog box (page 1137). Upload Status Displays the current status of the drawing being uploaded: Upload Successful, Upload Failed, or Uploading.
V Commands VIEW Saves and restores named model space views, layout views, and preset views. Summary The options are displayed at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page 1139). If you enter -view at the Command prompt, the options are displayed at the Command prompt as well. NOTE The VIEW command cannot be used transparently. See also: Save and Restore Views -VIEW List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
The view orientation of the specified orthographic view is based on the UCSBASE (page 1525) system variable, which is set to the world coordinate system by default. When one of the orthographic views is restored, the program zooms to the extents in the current viewport. Restore Restores the view you specify to the current viewport. If a UCS setting was saved with the view, it is also restored. The center point and magnification of the saved view are also restored.
UCS Determines whether the current UCS and elevation settings are saved when a view is saved. (UCSVIEW (page 1529) system variable) Visual Style Sets or updates a visual style for a view. Window Saves a portion of the current display as a view. Restoring such a view may display objects outside the window you specified because the shape of the window may differ from that of the viewport in which you are restoring the view.
List of Options The following options are displayed. View Specifies what is displayed. You can also right-click in the details area and click View Errors Only or View All to change this setting. All Displays information about all completed print and publish jobs and sheets within those jobs. Errors Lists errors that have occurred as jobs were printed or published. Copy to Clipboard Copies all highlighted text to the Clipboard. Details Area Lists details of completed print and publish jobs.
See also: Overview of Plotting VIEWRES Sets the resolution for objects in the current viewport. Summary The model is regenerated. VIEWRES controls the appearance of circles, arcs, splines, and arced polylines using short vectors. The greater the number of vectors, the smoother the appearance of the circle or arc. For example, if you create a very small circle and then zoom in, it might appear to be a polygon.
VISUALSTYLES (-VISUALSTYLES) Creates and modifies visual styles from the command line. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter an option [set Current (page 1144)/Saveas (page 1144)/Rename (page 1144)/Delete (page 1144)/? (page 1144)]: Set Current These options are the same as the options in VSCURRENT (page 1158). Save As Saves the visual style with the name you specify. NOTE You must be in model space to save a visual style.
Summary You can either select an existing object to designate as the new boundary, or specify the points of a new boundary. The new boundary does not clip the old boundary, it redefines it. TIP Use the CLIP (page 201) command to clip any type of referenced file: images, external references, viewports, and PDF underlays. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Clipping Object Specifies an object to act as a clipping boundary.
In the Model layout, the VPLAYER command has two options. Enter an option [Newfrz (page 1148)/Vpvisdflt (page 1148)]: ?—List Frozen Layers Displays the names of frozen layers in a selected viewport. Color Changes the color associated with a layer. True Color Specifies a true color to use for the selected object. Color Book Specifies a color from a loaded color book to use for the selected object. All Applies the changes in all viewports. Select Applies the changes in selected viewports.
Pstyle Sets the plot style assigned to a layer. This option is not available if you are using color-dependent plot styles in the current drawing (the PSTYLEPOLICY (page 1451) system variable is set to 1). See Use Plot Styles to Control Plotted Objects in the User’s Guide. ■ All (page 1146) ■ Select (page 1146) ■ Current (page 1146) ■ Except Current (page 1146) Transparency Changes the transparency level associated with a layer.
■ Select (page 1146) ■ Current (page 1146) ■ Except Current (page 1146) Newfrz (New Freeze) Creates new layers that are frozen in all viewports. Vpvisdflt (Viewport Visibility Default) Thaws or freezes the specified layers in subsequently created viewports. See also: Freeze Specified Layers in a Layout Viewport VPMAX Expands the current layout viewport for editing.
Access Methods Toolbar: Status bar ➤ Minimize Viewport Pointing device: Viewport Control menu (+) ➤ Restore Layout Shortcut menu: Select a named layout viewport to maximize. Right-click and click Minimize Viewport. Pointing device: Double-click outside of the maximized viewport. Summary The center point and magnification are returned to the settings that were in effect before the viewport was maximized.
Rotate Specifies a new viewing direction using two angles. ■ Enter angle in XY plane from X axis. The first angle is specified with respect to the X axis, in the XY plane. ■ Enter angle from XY plane. The second angle is specified up or down from the XY plane. Compass and Axis Tripod Displays a compass and axis tripod, which you use to define a viewing direction in the viewport. The compass is a two-dimensional representation of a globe.
As you move the crosshairs, the axis tripod rotates to conform to the viewing direction indicated on the compass. To select a viewing direction, move your pointing device to a location on the globe and click. See also: Define a 3D View with Coordinate Values or Angles VPORTS Creates multiple viewports in model space or paper space.
List of Options The following options are displayed. New Viewports Tab—Model Space (Viewports Dialog Box) New Name Specifies a name for the new model space viewport configuration. If you do not enter a name, the viewport configuration is applied but not saved. If a viewport configuration is not saved, it cannot be used in a layout. Standard Viewports Lists and sets the standard viewport configurations, including CURRENT, which is the current configuration.
■ Current Viewport: Applies the viewport configuration to the current viewport only. Setup Specifies either a 2D or a 3D setup. When you select 2D, the new viewport configuration is initially created with the current view in all of the viewports. When you select 3D, a set of standard orthogonal 3D views is applied to the viewports in the configuration. Change View To Replaces the view in the selected viewport with the view you select from the list.
New Viewports Tab—Layouts (Viewports Dialog Box) Standard Viewports Displays a list of standard viewport configurations and configures layout viewports. Preview Displays a preview of the viewport configuration you select and the default views assigned to each individual viewport in the configuration. Viewport Spacing Specifies the spacing you want to apply between the layout viewports you are configuring. Setup Specifies either a 2D or a 3D setup.
-VPORTS - Model Space Viewports Creates multiple viewports in model space. Summary The number and layout of active viewports and their associated settings are called viewport configurations. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter an option [Save (page 1155)/Restore (page 1155)/Delete (page 1155)/Join (page 1155)/Single (page 1155)/? (page 1156)/2 (page 1156)/3 (page 1156)/4 (page 1156)] <3>: Enter an option Save Saves the current viewport configuration using a specified name.
?—List Viewport Configurations Displays the identification numbers and screen positions of the active viewports. The lower-left and upper-right corners of the viewport define its location. For these corners, values between 0.0,0.0 (for the lower-left corner of the drawing area) and 1.0,1.0 (for the upper-right corner) are used. The current viewport is listed first. 2 Divides the current viewport in half. 3 Divides the current viewport into three viewports.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify corner of viewport or [ON (page 1157)/OFF (page 1157)/Fit (page 1157)/Shadeplot (page 1157)/Lock (page 1157)/Object (page 1157)/Polygonal (page 1157)/Restore (page 1157)/LAyer (page 1157)/2 (page 1157)/3 (page 1158)/4 (page 1158)] : Specify a point or enter an option On Turns on a viewport, making it active and making its objects visible. Off Turns off a viewport.
3 Divides the current viewport into three viewports. Horizontal and Vertical split the area into thirds. The other options create one large viewport in half the available area and two smaller ones in the other half. Above, Below, Left, and Right specify where the larger viewport is placed. 4 Divides the current viewport into four viewports of equal size. See also: Create and Modify Layout Viewports VSCURRENT Sets the visual style in the current viewport.
1159)/Shaded (page 1159)/shaded with Edges (page 1159)/shades of Gray (page 1159)/SKetchy (page 1159)/X-ray (page 1159)/Other (page 1159)] <2dwireframe>: NOTE To display lighting from point lights, distant lights, spotlights, or the sun, set the visual style to Realistic, Conceptual, or a custom visual style with shaded objects. 2D Wireframe Displays the objects using lines and curves to represent the boundaries. Raster images, linetypes, and lineweights are visible.
VSSAVE Saves a visual style. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Save current visual style as or [?] Enter a name or enter ? to list all the visual styles in the drawing. NOTE You must be in model space to save a visual style. If you enter a name that is already in use for a visual style, you can either replace the existing visual style or enter a different name.
See also: Create Drawing Files for Use as Blocks Write Block Dialog Box Saves objects or converts a block to a file. Summary The Write Block dialog box displays different default settings depending on whether nothing is selected, a single block is selected, or objects other than blocks are selected.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Save Location Specifies the new name and location of the file and the units of measurement to be used when the block is inserted. File Name and Path Specifies a file name and path where the block or objects will be saved. Browse Displays a standard file selection dialog box (page 723). Preview Displays a preview of the objects selected to be written to a drawing file.
Deletes the selected objects from the current drawing after saving them as a file. Base Point Specifies a base point for the block. The default value is 0,0,0. Pick Point Temporarily closes the dialog box so that you can specify an insertion base point in the current drawing. X Specifies the X coordinate value for the base point. Y Specifies the Y coordinate value for the base point. Z Specifies the Z coordinate value for the base point.
After the file is created, the selected objects are deleted from the drawing. You can use OOPS (page 722) to restore the objects. In the new drawing, the world coordinate system (WCS) is set parallel to the user coordinate system (UCS). List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter name of output file: Enter name of existing block or [= (block=output file)/* (whole drawing)] : Existing Block Writes that block to a file.
Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Lights tool group (expanded) ➤ Weblight List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
■ Foot-candle (symbol: fc) is the American unit of illuminance. Lm/ft^2 Enter f to specify the perceived power in a luminous flux value. If you enter i, you can specify the intensity of the light based on an illuminance value. The illuminance value can be specified in either lux or foot-candles. Enter d to specify a distance to use to calculate illuminance. Color Specify the color of the light based on a color name or a Kelvin temperature. Enter ? to display a list of color names.
Specify the shape of the shadow by entering s and then the dimensions of the shape. (For example, the radius of the sphere or the length and width of a rectangle.) Specify the sample size by entering a. Specify the visibility of the shape by for the shadow by entering v. Filter Color Controls the color of the light. True Color Specifies a True Color. Enter in the format R,G,B (red, green, blue). Index Specifies an ACI (AutoCAD Color Index) color. HSL Specifies an HSL (hue, saturation, luminance) color.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify first corner or [Center (page 1168)]: Specify a point or enter c for center Specify other corner or [Cube (page 1169)/Length (page 1169)]: Specify the other corner of the wedge or enteran option If the other corner of the wedge is specified with a Z value that differs from the first corner, then no height prompt is displayed.
Length Creates a wedge with length, width, and height values you specify. The length corresponds to the X axis, the width to the Y axis, and the height to the Z axis. If you pick a point to specify the length, you also specify the rotation in the XY plane. Cube Creates a wedge with sides of equal length. Length Creates a wedge with length, width, and height values you specify. The length corresponds to the X axis, the width to the Y axis, and the height to the Z axis.
See also: Create a Solid Wedge WHOHAS Displays ownership information for opened drawing files. Summary You can use WHOHAS to track which users have certain drawing files open. After you select a file, the ownership information is displayed at the Command prompt. The information includes the current user's computer name, login ID, and full name (if available) and the date and time the drawing file was opened.
Summary Creates a polygonal area that masks underlying objects with the current background color. The wipeout area is bounded by a frame that you can turn on for editing and turn off for plotting. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify first point (page 1171) or [Frames (page 1171)/Polyline (page 1171)] . First Point Determines the polygonal boundary of the wipeout object from a series of points.
X Commands XATTACH Inserts DWG files as an external reference (xref). Access Methods Menu: Insert ➤ DWG Reference Summary When you attach a drawing file as an xref, you link that referenced drawing to the current drawing. Any changes to the referenced drawing are displayed in the current drawing when it is opened or reloaded. The Select Reference File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box (page 723)) is displayed.
Summary If you attach a drawing that contains an attached xref, the attached xref appears in the current drawing. You can select multiple DWG files to attach. Like blocks, attached xrefs can be nested. If another person is currently editing the xref, the attached drawing is based on the most recently saved version. List of Options The following options are displayed. Name Identifies the DWG you have selected to attach.
Insertion Point Specify On-Screen Allows you to input at the Command prompt or the pointing device. X Sets the X coordinate value. Y Sets the Y coordinate value. Z Sets the Z coordinate value. Scale Specify On-screen Allows you to input at the Command prompt or the pointing device. X Sets the X scale factor. Y Sets the Y scale factor. Z Sets the Z scale factor. Uniform Scale Sets the Y and X scale factors as the same as Z.
■ Saved Path. Displays the path that is saved with the drawing when the external reference is attached. The path is dependent upon the Path Type setting. See also: Attach Drawing References (Xrefs) External Reference Visor Displays options for attaching external references. Summary The External Reference visor is displayed when you select an external reference. List of Options The following options are displayed.
See also: Attach Drawing References (Xrefs) XBIND Binds one or more definitions of named objects in an xref to the current drawing. Access Methods Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ External Reference ➤ Bind Summary The Bind External Definitions dialog box (page 1176) is displayed. If you enter -xbind at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page 1178). NOTE The Bind option of XREF binds the xref file. Use XBIND for individual dependent definitions.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Xrefs Lists the xrefs currently attached to the drawing. Selecting an xref (double-clicking) displays the named object definitions in the attached xref. Definitions to Bind Lists the xref-dependent named object definitions to bind to the host drawing. Add Moves the named object definitions selected in the Xrefs list into the Definitions to Bind list.
-XBIND Binds one or more definitions of named objects in an xref to the current drawing. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter symbol type to bind [Block/Dimstyle/LAyer/LType/Style]: Enter an option Depending on the option, you are prompted for a xref-dependent named object (symbol) such as a block, dimension style, layer, linetype, or text style.
Shortcut menu: Select an xref. Right-click in the drawing area and click Clip Xref. Summary The clipping boundary determines the portion of an xref or block instance that is hidden, either outside or inside the boundary. The visibility of the clipping boundary is controlled by the XCLIPFRAME (page 1572) system variable. TIP Use the CLIP (page 201) command to clip any type of referenced file: images, external references, viewports, and PDF underlays. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Use this option when you want to modify the current clipping boundary using PEDIT (page 779) and then redefine the clipping boundary with the new polyline. To see the entire xref while redefining the boundary, use the Off option. New Boundary Defines a rectangular or polygonal clipping boundary, or generates a polygonal clipping boundary from a polyline. Select Polyline Defines the boundary with the selected polyline.
Summary With the XEDGES command, you can create wireframe geometry by extracting all the edges from the following objects: ■ 3D solids ■ 3D solid history subobjects ■ Meshes ■ Regions ■ Surfaces ■ Subobjects (edges and faces) Press and hold Ctrl to select faces, edges and component objects, repeating if necessary. Objects such as lines, arcs, splines, or 3D polylines are created along the edges of the selected objects or subobjects.
Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Open Shapes tool group (expanded) ➤ Construction Line Menu: Draw ➤ Construction Line Summary Lines that extend to infinity, such as xlines, can be used to create construction and reference lines, and for trimming boundaries. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify a point (page 1182) or [Hor (page 1182)/Ver (page 1183)/Ang (page 1183)/Bisect (page 1183)/Offset (page 1184).
Ver Creates a vertical xline passing through a specified point. The xline is created parallel to the Y axis. Ang Creates an xline at a specified angle. Angle of Xline Specifies the angle at which to place the line. Reference Specifies the angle from a selected reference line. The angle is measured counterclockwise from the reference line. Bisect Creates an xline that passes through the selected angle vertex and bisects the angle between the first and second line.
Offset Creates an xline parallel to another object. Offset Distance Specifies the distance the xline is offset from the selected object. Through Creates an xline offset from a line and passing through a specified point. See also: Draw Construction Lines (and Rays) XOPEN Opens a selected drawing reference (xref) in a new window. Summary Opens a selected drawing reference in a separate window for editing.
Individually Applies changes to the selected objects one at a time. The following prompt is displayed for each object. All Sets the color, linetype, lineweight, and layer of the component objects after you explode them. The prompts associated with the Color, Linetype, Lineweight, and Layer options are displayed. Color Sets the color of the objects after you explode them. ■ Enter bylayer to inherit the color of the exploded object's layer. ■ Enter byblock to inherit the color of the exploded object.
See also: Disassemble a Block Reference (Explode) XREF Starts the EXTERNALREFERENCES command. Summary The Reference Manager palette (page 418) is displayed. If you enter -xref at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page 1186). See also: Attach and Detach Referenced Drawings ERHIGHLIGHT (page 1322) -XREF Attach and manage external referenced drawings (xrefs). List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Path Displays and edits the path name associated with a particular DWG reference. This option is useful if you change the location of or rename the drawing file associated with the xref. Unload Unloads the selected DWG references. A marker is left in place of the xref so that it can be reloaded later. Reload Reloads one or more DWG references. This option reloads and displays the most recently saved version of that drawing.
PScale Sets the scale factor for the X, Y, and Z axes to control the display of the xref as it is dragged into position. PX, PY, and PZ Sets the X, Y, and Z axes to control the display of the xref as it is dragged into position. PRotate Sets the rotation angle of the xref as it is dragged into position. See also: Attach and Detach Referenced Drawings Z Commands ZOOM Increases or decreases the magnification of the view in the current viewport.
Specify corner of window, enter a scale factor (nX or nXP), or [All (page 1189)/Center (page 1189)/Dynamic (page 1189)/Extents (page 1190)/Previous (page 1190)/Scale (page 1190)/Window (page 1191)/Object (page 1191)] All Zooms to display all visible objects and visual aids. Adjusts the magnification of the drawing area to accommodate the extents of all visible objects in the drawing, or visual aids such as the grid limits (the LIMITS (page 575) command), whichever is larger.
■ To change the size of the view box, click, resize it, and click again to accept the new size of the view box. ■ To pan with the view box, drag it to the location you want and press Enter. Extents Zooms to display the maximum extents of all objects. The extents of each object in the model are calculated and used to determine how the model should fill the window. Previous Zooms to display the previous view. You can restore up to 10 previous views.
For example, entering .5x causes each object to be displayed at half its current size on the screen. Entering .5xp displays model space at half the scale of paper space units. You can create a layout with each viewport displaying objects at a different scale. Enter a value to specify the scale relative to the grid limits of the drawing. (This option is rarely used.) For example, entering 2 displays objects at twice the size they would appear if you were zoomed to the limits of the drawing.
Holding down the pick button at the midpoint of the window and moving vertically to the top of the window zooms in to 100%. Conversely, holding the pick button down at the midpoint of the window and moving vertically to the bottom of the window zooms out by 100%. When you reach the zoom-in limit, the plus sign in the cursor disappears, indicating that you can no longer zoom in. When you reach the zoom-out limit, the minus sign in the cursor disappears, indicating that you can no longer zoom out.
Zoom Object Zooms to display one or more selected objects as large as possible and in the center of the drawing area. Zoom Original Restores the original view. Zoom Extents Zooms to display the drawing extents.
1194
Command Modifiers 3 Overview of Command Modifiers You can use command modifiers to help you locate points or select objects while a command is in progress. Use the Coordinate Filter, Direct Distance Entry, From, MTP, and Tracking command modifiers at any prompt that requires point specification. Use the Selection Mode command modifiers at any prompt that requires object selection.
See also: Combine Coordinate Values (Coordinate Filters) Direct Distance Entry (Command Modifier) Locates the next point at a specified distance in the direction of your cursor Command entry: At a prompt to locate a point, enter a numeric value With direct distance entry, you can quickly specify a point relative to the last point you entered. At any prompt for a point location, you move the cursor first to specify the direction, and then enter a numeric distance.
NOTE You cannot use this method during dragging in commands such as MOVE and COPY. Specifying an absolute coordinate, either by keyboard entry or with a pointing device, cancels the FROM command. See also: Offset from Temporary Reference Points MTP (Command Modifier) Locates the midpoint between two points. Command entry: At a prompt to locate a point, enter mtp The midpoint between two points (MTP) command modifier can be used with running object snaps or object snap overrides.
specifies a distance in the direction of the current location of your cursor. Coordinate filters (page 1195) combine X, Y, and Z values from different points into a single point. Relative coordinate entry locates a point relative to the last point entered. You can also access tracking by holding down SHIFT and right-clicking to display the object snap shortcut menu. See also: Track to Offset Point Locations (Tracking) Object Snaps (Command Modifier) Specifies a precise point at a location on an object.
Use Running Object Snaps Using the OSNAP (page 747) or DSETTINGS (page 368) commands, you can specify a set of running object snaps. Running object snaps are one or more object snaps that remain in effect as you work. ■ To turn running object snaps on and off, click the OSNAP button on the status bar or press F3. ■ Press TAB to cycle through the object snap possibilities before you specify the point. ■ To turn off running object snaps for the next point only, specify the None object snap.
1200
System Variables 4 Overview of System Variables AutoCAD® stores the values for its operating environment and some of its commands in system variables. You can examine any system variable and change any writable system variable directly at the command prompt by entering the system variable name or by using the SETVAR command or the AutoLISP® getvar and setvar functions.
1 Disables all 3D object snaps ZNON 2 Snaps to a vertex or a control vertex ZVER 4 Snaps to the midpoint on a face edge ZMID 8 Snaps to the center of a face ZCEN 16 Snaps to a spline or surface knot ZKNO 32 Snaps to a perpendicular face (planar faces only) ZPER 64 Snaps to an object nearest to a face ZNEA 126 Turns on all 3D object snaps To specify more than one object snap, enter the sum or their values. For example, entering 6 specifies the vertex (2) and midpoint (4) object snaps.
1 Use line-of-sight 3D selection precedence for selecting 3D solids and surfaces. Also, a defining object associated with a surface is given selection precedence with this setting. 3DSELECTIONMODE has no effect when selecting 3D solids if they are displayed as 2D or 3D wireframes. See also: Select Objects Individually A System Variables ACADLSPASDOC Controls whether the acad.lsp file is loaded into every drawing or just the first drawing opened in a session.
See also: Set Up the Drawing Area ACADVER Stores the AutoCAD version number. (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:Varies This variable differs from the DXF file $ACADVER header variable, which contains the drawing database level number. See also: Customize the Drawing Environment ACISOUTVER Obsolete This system variable has been removed. The ACIS output version is controlled by the product when exporting a drawing to a SAT file with ACISOUT or EXPORT.
The value is the sum of the following: 0 No attribute mode selected 1 Invisible 2 Constant 4 Verify 8 Preset 16 Lock position in block 32 Multiple lines See also: Define Block Attributes ANGBASE Sets the base angle to 0 with respect to the current UCS. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.0000 See also: Create Angular Dimensions ANGDIR Sets the direction of positive angles.
Angle values are measured from angle 0 relative to the orientation of the current UCS. 0 Counterclockwise 1 Clockwise See also: Create Angular Dimensions ANNOALLVISIBLE Hides or displays annotative objects that do not support the current annotation scale.
Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:-4 When the value is negative, the autoscale functionality is turned off, but the settings are maintained: 0 Newly set annotation scale is not added to annotative objects. 1 Adds the newly set annotation scale to annotative objects that support the current scale except for those on layers that are turned off, frozen, locked or that are set to Viewport > Freeze.
0 Annotation monitor off. -1 Annotation monitor off. -2 Annotation monitor off. However, automatically turns on (sets ANNOMONITOR to 2), when a model documentation edit or update event occurs. See also: Associative Dimensions Overview of Leader Objects ANNOTATIVEDWG Specifies whether or not the drawing will behave as an annotative block when inserted into another drawing.
Initial value:0 The aperture box is displayed in the center of the crosshairs when you snap to an object. 0 Off 1 On See also: Set Visual Aids for Object Snaps (AutoSnap) APERTURE Sets the display size for the object snap target box, in pixels. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:10 This system variable has the same name as a command. Use the SETVAR command to access this system variable. Enter a value (1-50). The higher the number, the larger the target box.
Initial value:14 0 Do not load plug-in applications at any time 1 Display all messages when loading plug-in applications 2 Load plug-in applications at startup 4 Load plug-in applications when a new drawing is opened 8 Load plug-in applications when they appear in the plug-ins folder See also: Install and Uninstall Plug-In Applications AREA Stores the last area computed by the AREA command. (Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:0.
Associative arrays are treated as a single array object, which is helpful when you want to modify spacing, angles, or replace or modify the source object. If an array is non-associative, each copied item is treated as a separate object. Editing one item does not affect the other items. 0 Non-associative 1 Associative See also: Array Objects ARRAYEDITSTATE Indicates whether the drawing is in the array editing state, which is activated while editing an associative array’s source objects.
Initial value:0 0 Rectangular array 1 Path array 2 Polar array See also: Array Objects ATTDIA Controls whether the INSERT command uses a dialog box for attribute value entry. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 0 Issues Command prompts 1 Uses a dialog box See also: Insert Blocks ATTIPE Controls if all formatting options are available with the in-place editor for modifying multiline attributes.
1 Full formatting options with the in-place editor Use the limited formatting options with the in-place editor when modifying multiline attributes for best compatibility with releases prior to AutoCAD 2008. See also: Define Block Attributes ATTMODE Controls display of attributes.
1 Turns on all access methods for creating multiline attributes. See also: Define Block Attributes ATTREQ Controls whether INSERT uses default attribute settings during insertion of blocks. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Assumes the defaults for the values of all attributes 1 Turns on prompts or a dialog box for attribute values, as specified by ATTDIA (page 1212) See also: Insert Blocks AUDITCTL Controls whether AUDIT creates an audit report (ADT) file.
AUNITS Sets units for angles. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 0 Decimal degrees 1 Degrees/minutes/seconds 2 Gradians 3 Radians 4 Surveyor's units See also: Set the Unit Format Conventions AUPREC Sets the display precision for angular units and coordinates. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 However, the internal precision of angular values and and coordinates is always maintained, regardless of the display precision.
AUTOCOMPLETEDELAY Controls the amount of time that elapses before automated keyboard features display at the Command prompt. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.3 The time delay setting in the AUTOCOMPLETEMODE (page 1216) system variable must be turned on for AUTOCOMPLETEDELAY to have an effect. Valid values are real numbers from 0 to 10, which represent seconds.
16 Excludes the display of system variables See also: The Command Line Enter Commands on the Command Line AUTOSNAP Controls the display of the AutoSnap marker, tooltip, and magnet. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:63 Also turns on polar and object snap tracking, and controls the display of polar tracking, object snap tracking, and Ortho mode tooltips. The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values: 0 Turns off the AutoSnap marker, tooltips, and magnet.
B System Variables BACKZ Stores the back clipping plane offset from the target plane for the current viewport, in drawing units. (Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.0000 Meaningful only if clipping is specified in DVIEW (page 389). If there are several cameras, the value is the last back clipping plane that you set current. The distance of the back clipping plane from the camera point can be found by subtracting BACKZ from the camera-to-target distance.
BLIPMODE Controls whether marker blips are visible. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 Obsolete Marker blips have been removed from the product. This system variable has the same name as the BLIPMODE command. Use the SETVAR (page 955) command to access this system variable. 0 Turns off marker blips 1 Turns on marker blips See also: Erase Objects BLOCKEDITLOCK Disallows opening of the Block Editor and editing of block definitions.
BLOCKEDITOR Indicates whether or not the Block Editor is open. (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:0 0 Indicates that the Block Editor is not open 1 Indicates that the Block Editor is open See also: Create and Modify Blocks BTMARKDISPLAY Controls whether or not value set markers are displayed for dynamic block references.
See also: C System Variables CACHEMAXFILES Sets the maximum number of graphics cache files saved in the GraphicsCache folder for the product. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:256 The valid range is from 0 to 65535 files. When the number of graphics cache files reaches the maximum, the oldest files in the cache are automatically deleted. Setting this variable to 0 disables caching entirely and deletes any existing files in the GraphicsCache folder that are not in use by an open drawing file.
CAMERADISPLAY Turns the display of camera objects on or off. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 Camera objects can only be created with the Windows releases of AutoCAD. 0 Camera glyphs are not displayed 1 Camera glyphs are displayed See also: Specify 3D Views CANNOSCALE Sets the name of the current annotation scale for the current space. Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1:1 You can only enter a named scale that exists in the drawing’s named scale list.
See also: Set Annotation Scale CCONSTRAINTFORM Controls whether annotational or dynamic constraints are applied to objects. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 0 Dynamic 1 Annotational When this system variable is set to 0, dynamic constraints are created, by default, when you use the DIMCONSTRAINT (page 289) command. See also: Apply Dimensional Constraints CDATE Stores the current date and time in decimal format.
CECOLOR Sets the color of new objects.
CELTYPE Sets the linetype of new objects. Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value:BYLAYER See also: Set the Current Linetype CELWEIGHT Sets the lineweight of new objects. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:-1 -1 Sets the lineweight to "BYLAYER." -2 Sets the lineweight to "BYBLOCK." -3 Sets the lineweight to "DEFAULT." "DEFAULT" is controlled by the LWDEFAULT (page 1404) system variable.
Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 CENTERMT does not apply to stretching multiline text by using the ruler in the In-Place Text Editor.
The transparency level for new hatch objects is controlled by the HPTRANSPARENCY system variable. See also: Display and Change the Properties of Objects CHAMFERA Sets the first chamfer distance when CHAMMODE is set to 0. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.0000 See also: Create Chamfers CHAMFERB Sets the second chamfer distance when CHAMMODE is set to 0. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.0000 See also: Create Chamfers CHAMFERC Sets the chamfer length when CHAMMODE is set to 1.
CHAMFERD Sets the chamfer angle when CHAMMODE is set to 1. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.0000 See also: Create Chamfers CHAMMODE Sets the input method for CHAMFER. Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:0 0 Requires two chamfer distances 1 Requires a chamfer length and an angle See also: Create Chamfers CIRCLERAD Sets the default circle radius. Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:0.0000 A zero indicates no default.
CLASSICKEYS Sets the behavior of the AutoCAD shortcut keys. Type: Switch Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 0 To copy, press Cmd-C 1 To cancel, press Cmd-C See also: Set Interface Options CLAYER Sets the current layer. Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 See also: Change Layer Settings and Layer Properties CLEANSCREENSTATE Indicates whether the clean screen state is on or off.
See also: CLISTATE Indicates whether the Command Line is open or closed. (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:1 0 Closed 1 Open See also: CMATERIAL Sets the material of new objects. Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value:BYLAYER Valid values are BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, and the name of a material in the drawing. See also: Browse Material Library CMDACTIVE Indicates whether an ordinary command, transparent command, script, or dialog box is active.
Initial value:Varies The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values: 0 No active command 1 Ordinary command is active 2 Transparent command is active 4 Script is active 8 Dialog box is active 16 Not used 32 AutoLISP is active (only visible to an ObjectARX-defined command) 64 ObjectARX command is active See also: Enter Commands on the Command Line CMDDIA Controls the display of the In-Place Text Editor for the LEADER and QLEADER commands.
See also: Create and Modify Leaders CMDECHO Controls whether prompts and input are echoed during the AutoLISP command function. Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:1 0 Turns off echoing 1 Turns on echoing See also: AutoLISP CMDINPUTHISTORYMAX Sets the maximum number of previous input values that are stored for a prompt in a command. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:20 Display of the history of user input is controlled by the INPUTHISTORYMODE (page 1372) system variable.
Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:"" For example, LINE'ZOOM indicates that the ZOOM command is being used transparently during the LINE command. This variable is designed for use with programming interfaces such as AutoLISP and DIESEL. The following is an example that demonstrates how to use DIESEL to determine the current state of a system variable from a menu macro.
2 Bottom See also: Modify Multilines CMLSCALE Controls the overall width of a multiline. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1.0000 (imperial) or 20.0000 (metric) A scale factor of 2.0 produces a multiline twice as wide as the style definition. A zero scale factor collapses the multiline into a single line. A negative scale factor flips the order of the offset lines (that is, the smallest or most negative is placed on top when the multiline is drawn from left to right).
Initial value:0 0 Dark 1 Light See also: Interface Themes and Background Color COMPASS Controls whether the 3D compass is on or off in the current viewport. Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:0 0 Turns off the 3D compass 1 Turns on the 3D compass See also: Use 3D Navigation Tools CONSTRAINTBARDISPLAY Controls the display of constraint bars after you apply constraints and when you select geometrically constrained drawings.
NOTE Constraint bars will always be displayed when CONSTRAINTBAR = Showall, even if you set the value of the CONSTRAINTBARDISPLAY system variable to 0. 1 Displays constraint bars for selected objects after applying constraints 2 Temporarily displays constraint bars for the selected geometrically constrained objects 3 Bits 1 and 2 are both turned on See also: Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints CONSTRAINTBARMODE Controls the display of geometrical constraints on constraint bars.
128 Concentric 256 Colinear 512 Symmetric 1024 Equal 2048 Fix For example, set CONSTRAINTBARMODE to 12 (8+4) to display parallel and perpendicular constraints on the constraint bars. Set CONSTRAINTBARMODE to 4095 to display constraint bars for all constraint types. See also: Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints CONSTRAINTINFER Controls whether the geometric constraints are inferred while drawing and editing geometry.
CONSTRAINTNAMEFORMAT Controls the text format for dimensional constraints. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:2 0 Name (for example, Width) 1 Value (for example, 4.0000) 2 Expression (for example, width = 4.0000) NOTE The CONSTRAINTNAMEFORMAT system variable is also applicable to the block constraint parameters in the Block Editor. See also: Apply Dimensional Constraints CONSTRAINTRELAX Indicates whether constraints are enforced or relaxed when editing an object.
CONSTRAINTSOLVEMODE Controls constraint behavior when applying or editing constraints. Type: Bitcode Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Does not retain the size of the geometry when a constraint is applied or modified 1 Retains the size of the geometry when a constraint is applied or modified When the CONSTRAINTSOLVEMODE is set to 0, resizing a constrained line may result in unpredictable behavior.
COPYMODE Controls whether the COPY command repeats automatically. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 0 Sets the COPY command to repeat automatically 1 Sets the COPY command to create a single copy See also: Copy Objects CPLOTSTYLE Controls the current plot style for new objects. Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value:ByColor If the current drawing you are working in is in color-dependent mode, CPLOTSTYLE is read-only and has a value of BYCOLOR.
CPROFILE Displays the name of the current profile. (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value:<> See also: Set Interface Options CROSSINGAREACOLOR Controls the color of the selection area during crossing selection. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:100 The valid range is 1 to 255. The SELECTIONAREA (page 1466) system variable must be on. See also: Customize Object Selection CSHADOW Sets the shadow display property for a 3D object.
2 Receives shadows 3 Ignores shadows See also: Display Backgrounds and Shadows CTAB Returns the name of the current layout in the drawing. Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value:Model Provides a means for the user to determine which layout is active. See also: Set Model Space Viewports CTABLESTYLE Sets the name of the current table style.
Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 1 No subobject culling ■ Rolling over 3D objects highlights all 3D subobjects, including hidden subobjects. ■ Selecting 3D objects by dragging selects all 3D subobjects, including hidden subobjects. Apply subobject culling ■ Rolling over 3D objects highlights only the subobjects that are normal in the current view. ■ Selecting 3D objects by dragging selects only the subobjects that are normal in the current view.
■ Selecting 3D objects by dragging selects only the objects that are normal in the current view. See also: Cycle Through and Filter Subobjects CURSORSIZE Determines the size of the crosshairs as a percentage of the screen size. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:5 Valid settings range from 1 to 100 percent. When set to 100, the crosshairs are full-screen and the ends of the crosshairs are never visible.
D System Variables DATE Stores the current date and time in Modified Julian Date format. (Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:Varies This value is represented as a Modified Julian Date (MJD), which is the Julian day number and decimal fraction of a day in the format: . The Modified Julian Date, conventionally called UT1, is a worldwide scientific standard that assigns day numbers beginning at an essentially arbitrary date and time of 12:00 a.
Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 The system variable can accept the values of On and Off in place of 1 and 0. 0 Disabled 1 Enabled See also: Modify Objects DBMOD Indicates the drawing modification status.
DEFAULTGIZMO Sets the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, or 3D Scale gizmo as the default during subobject selection. Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:0 0 The 3D Move gizmo is displayed by default when an object is selected in a 3D visual style. 1 The 3D Rotate gizmo is displayed by default when an object is selected in a 3D visual style. 2 The 3D Scale gizmo is displayed by default when an object is selected in a 3D visual style.
With the 3D Scale gizmo, you can resize selected objects uniformly, resize them along an X, Y, or Z axis, or resize them along a specified plane. To specify the scale limitations, hover the cursor over the gizmo. Highlight the solid area between the axes for uniform resizing. Highlight the double lines between the axes to specify resizing along a plane. Highlight an axis to specify resizing along an axis. No gizmo is displayed by default when an object is selected in a 3D visual style.
See also: Use the Gizmos DEFAULTLIGHTING Turns on and off default lighting in place of other lighting. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1 Default lighting is provided by a set of distant lights that follow the view direction. When default lighting is on, the sun and other lights do not cast light, even if they are turned on. The setting of this system variable is viewport-specific.
Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1 The default lighting provided in AutoCAD 2006 and earlier releases used one distant light. The new default lighting uses two distant lights to illuminate more of the model and also adjusts ambient light. The setting of this system variable is viewport-specific.
Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value:ByColor When the drawing is opened and PSTYLEPOLICY (page 1451) is set to 1 (color-dependent plot style mode), DEFPLSTYLE is read-only and has a value of “BYCOLOR.” If PSTYLEPOLICY is set to 0 (named plot style mode), DEFPLSTYLE is writable and has a default value of “BYLAYER.” See also: Overview of Plot Styles DELOBJ Controls whether geometry used to create other objects is retained or deleted.
CONVTOSURFACE, CONVTONURBS, and CONVTOMESH commands. This setting also applies to options in commands such as REGION, SPLINE, and ARRAY. The range of non-zero values is present to maintain AutoCAD compatibility. -1 Displays prompts to delete profile curves, including those used with the EXTRUDE, SWEEP, REVOLVE, and LOFT commands. Prompts to remove cross sections used with the LOFT command. The original geometry for CONVTOSOLID, CONVTOSURFACE, and CONVTOMESH commands is removed without prompting.
1 Demand-loads the source application when you open a drawing that contains custom objects. This setting does not demand-load the application when you invoke one of the application's commands. 2 Demand-loads the source application when you invoke one of the application's commands. This setting does not demand-load the application when you open a drawing that contains custom objects.
DIMADEC Controls the number of precision places displayed in angular dimensions. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 -1 Angular dimensions display the number of decimal places specified by DIMDEC (page 1267). 0-8 Specifies the number of decimal places displayed in angular dimensions (independent of DIMDEC) See also: Create Angular Dimensions DIMALT Controls the display of alternate units in dimensions.
Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:2 (imperial) or 3 (metric) If DIMALT is turned on, DIMALTD sets the number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal point in the alternate measurement. See also: Control the Display of Dimension Units DIMALTF Controls the multiplier for alternate units. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:25.4000 (imperial) or 0.
DIMALTTD Sets the number of decimal places for the tolerance values in the alternate units of a dimension. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:2 (imperial) or 3 (metric) See also: Control the Display of Dimension Units DIMALTTZ Controls suppression of zeros in tolerance values.
DIMALTU Sets the units format for alternate units of all dimension substyles except Angular. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:2 1 Scientific 2 Decimal 3 Engineering 4 Architectural (stacked) 5 Fractional (stacked) 6 Architectural 7 Fractional 8 System Format See also: Control the Display of Dimension Units DIMALTZ Controls the suppression of zeros for alternate unit dimension values.
DIMALTZ values 0-3 affect feet-and-inch dimensions only. 0 Suppresses zero feet and precisely zero inches 1 Includes zero feet and precisely zero inches 2 Includes zero feet and suppresses zero inches 3 Includes zero inches and suppresses zero feet 4 Suppresses leading zeros in decimal dimensions (for example, 0.5000 becomes .5000) 8 Suppresses trailing zeros in decimal dimensions (for example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5) 12 Suppresses both leading and trailing zeros (for example, 0.5000 becomes .
DIMAPOST Specifies a text prefix or suffix (or both) to the alternate dimension measurement for all types of dimensions except angular. Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value:"" For instance, if the current units are Architectural, DIMALT (page 1254) is on, DIMALTF (page 1255) is 25.4 (the number of millimeters per inch), DIMALTD (page 1254) is 2, and DIMAPOST is set to "mm", a distance of 10 units would be displayed as 10"[254.00mm].
DIMASSOC Controls the associativity of dimension objects and whether dimensions are exploded. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:2 0 Creates exploded dimensions. There is no association between the various elements of the dimension. The lines, arcs, arrowheads, and text of a dimension are drawn as separate objects. 1 Creates non-associative dimension objects. The elements of the dimension are formed into a single object.
Multiples of the arrowhead size determine whether dimension lines and text should fit between the extension lines. DIMASZ is also used to scale arrowhead blocks if set by DIMBLK (page 1263). DIMASZ has no effect when DIMTSZ (page 1288) is other than zero. See also: Customize Arrowheads DIMATFIT Determines how dimension text and arrows are arranged when space is not sufficient to place both within the extension lines.
Initial value:0 0 Decimal degrees 1 Degrees/minutes/seconds 2 Gradians 3 Radians See also: Create Angular Dimensions DIMAZIN Suppresses zeros for angular dimensions. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 0 Displays all leading and trailing zeros 1 Suppresses leading zeros in decimal dimensions (for example, 0.5000 becomes .5000) 2 Suppresses trailing zeros in decimal dimensions (for example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5) 3 Suppresses leading and trailing zeros (for example, 0.
DIMBLK Sets the arrowhead block displayed at the ends of dimension lines. Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value:"" To return to the default, closed-filled arrowhead display, enter a single period (.). Arrowhead block entries and the names used to select them in the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes are shown below. You can also enter the names of user-defined arrowhead blocks. NOTE Annotative blocks cannot be used as custom arrowheads for dimensions or leaders.
"_OBLIQUE" oblique "_BOXFILLED" box filled "_BOXBLANK" box "_CLOSEDBLANK" closed blank "_DATUMFILLED" datum triangle filled "_DATUMBLANK" datum triangle "_INTEGRAL" integral "_ARCHTICK" architectural tick See also: Customize Arrowheads DIMBLK1 Sets the arrowhead for the first end of the dimension line when DIMSAH is on. Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value:"" To return to the default, closed-filled arrowhead display, enter a single period (.). For a list of arrowheads, see DIMBLK.
DIMBLK2 Sets the arrowhead for the second end of the dimension line when DIMSAH is on. Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value:"" To return to the default, closed-filled arrowhead display, enter a single period (.). For a list of arrowhead entries, see DIMBLK. NOTE Annotative blocks cannot be used as custom arrowheads for dimensions or leaders. See also: Customize Arrowheads DIMCEN Controls drawing of circle or arc center marks and centerlines by the DIMCENTER, DIMDIAMETER, and DIMRADIUS commands.
The size of the center mark is the distance from the center of the circle or arc to the end of the center mark. See also: Create Radial Dimensions DIMCLRD Assigns colors to dimension lines, arrowheads, and dimension leader lines. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 Also controls the color of leader lines created with the LEADER command. Color numbers are displayed in the Color Palette dialog box. For BYBLOCK, enter 0. For BYLAYER, enter 256.
Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 The color can be any valid color number. See also: Control the Appearance of Dimension Text DIMCONSTRAINTICON Displays the lock icon next to the text for dimensional constraints.
The precision is based on the units or angle format you have selected. Specified value is applied to angular dimensions when DIMADEC (page 1254) is set to -1. See also: Control the Display of Dimension Units DIMDLE Sets the distance the dimension line extends beyond the extension line when oblique strokes are drawn instead of arrowheads. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.0000 See also: Control Dimension Lines DIMDLI Controls the spacing of the dimension lines in baseline dimensions.
Saved in: Drawing Initial value:. (imperial) or , (metric) When prompted, enter a single character at the Command prompt. If dimension units is set to Decimal, the DIMDSEP character is used instead of the default decimal point. If DIMDSEP is set to NULL (default value, reset by entering a period), the decimal point is used as the dimension separator. See also: Control the Display of Dimension Units DIMEXE Specifies how far to extend the extension line beyond the dimension line.
Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 0 Horizontal stacking 1 Diagonal stacking 2 Not stacked (for example, 1/2) See also: Control the Display of Fractions DIMFXL Sets the total length of the extension lines starting from the dimension line toward the dimension origin. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1.0000 See also: Control Extension Lines DIMFXLON Controls whether extension lines are set to a fixed length.
DIMGAP Sets the distance around the dimension text when the dimension line breaks to accommodate dimension text. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.0900 (imperial) or 0.6250 (metric) Also sets the gap between annotation and a hook line created with the LEADER command. If you enter a negative value, DIMGAP places a box around the dimension text. DIMGAP is also used as the minimum length for pieces of the dimension line.
DIMJUST Controls the horizontal positioning of dimension text.
DIMLFAC Sets a scale factor for linear dimension measurements. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1.0000 All linear dimension distances, including radii, diameters, and coordinates, are multiplied by DIMLFAC before being converted to dimension text. Positive values of DIMLFAC are applied to dimensions in both model space and paper space; negative values are applied to paper space only. DIMLFAC applies primarily to nonassociative dimensions (DIMASSOC set 0 or 1).
DIMLTEX1 Sets the linetype of the first extension line. Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value:"" The value is BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, or the name of a linetype. See also: Control Extension Lines DIMLTEX2 Sets the linetype of the second extension line. Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value:"" The value is BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, or the name of a linetype. See also: Control Extension Lines DIMLTYPE Sets the linetype of the dimension line.
DIMLUNIT Sets units for all dimension types except Angular. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:2 1 Scientific 2 Decimal 3 Engineering 4 Architectural (always displayed stacked) 5 Fractional (always displayed stacked) 6 System Format See also: Control the Display of Dimension Units DIMLWD Assigns lineweight to dimension lines. Type: Enum Saved in: Drawing Initial value:-2 -3 Default (the LWDEFAULT (page 1404) value) -2 BYBLOCK -1 BYLAYER The integer represents 1/100th of a mm.
See also: Control Dimension Lines DIMLWE Assigns lineweight to extension lines. Type: Enum Saved in: Drawing Initial value:-2 -3 Default (the LWDEFAULT (page 1404) value) -2 BYBLOCK -1 BYLAYER The integer represents 1/100th of a mm. See also: Control Extension Lines DIMPOST Specifies a text prefix or suffix (or both) to the dimension measurement. Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value:None For example, to establish a suffix for millimeters, set DIMPOST to mm; a distance of 19.
See also: Control the Display of Dimension Units DIMRND Rounds all dimensioning distances to the specified value. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.0000 For instance, if DIMRND is set to 0.25, all distances round to the nearest 0.25 unit. If you set DIMRND to 1.0, all distances round to the nearest integer. Note that the number of digits edited after the decimal point depends on the precision set by DIMDEC. DIMRND does not apply to angular dimensions.
DIMSCALE Sets the overall scale factor applied to dimensioning variables that specify sizes, distances, or offsets. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1.0000 Also affects the leader objects with the LEADER command. Use MLEADERSCALE (page 1410) to scale multileader objects created with the MLEADER (page 654) command. 0.0 A reasonable default value is computed based on the scaling between the current model space viewport and paper space.
When turned on, suppresses the display of the dimension line and arrowhead between the first extension line and the text. Off First dimension line is not suppressed On First dimension line is suppressed See also: Control Dimension Lines DIMSD2 Controls suppression of the second dimension line and arrowhead. Type: Switch Saved in: Drawing Initial value:Off When turned on, suppresses the display of the dimension line and arrowhead between the second extension line and the text.
On Extension line is suppressed See also: Control Extension Lines DIMSE2 Suppresses display of the second extension line. Type: Switch Saved in: Drawing Initial value:Off Off Extension line is not suppressed On Extension line is suppressed See also: Control Extension Lines DIMSOXD Suppresses arrowheads if not enough space is available inside the extension lines.
See also: Control Dimension Lines DIMSTYLE Stores the name of the current dimension style. (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value:Standard (imperial) or ISO-25 (metric) This system variable has the same name as a command. Use the SETVAR command to access this system variable. The DIMSTYLE system variable is read-only; to change the current dimension style, use the DIMSTYLE command.
3 Places the dimension text to conform to Japanese Industrial Standards (JIS). 4 Places the dimension text below the dimension line. See also: Control the Location of Dimension Text DIMTDEC Sets the number of decimal places to display in tolerance values for the primary units in a dimension. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:4 (imperial) or 2 (metric) This system variable has no effect unless DIMTOL is set to On. The default for DIMTOL is Off.
DIMTFILL Controls the background of dimension text. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 0 No background 1 The background color of the drawing 2 The background specified by DIMTFILLCLR (page 1283) See also: Control the Appearance of Dimension Text DIMTFILLCLR Sets the color for the text background in dimensions. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 Color numbers are displayed in the Color Palette dialog box. For BYBLOCK, enter 0. For BYLAYER, enter 256.
Initial value:On (imperial) or Off (metric) Off Aligns text with the dimension line On Draws text horizontally See also: Control the Location of Dimension Text DIMTIX Draws text between extension lines. Type: Switch Saved in: Drawing Initial value:Off Off For linear and angular dimensions, dimension text is placed inside the extension lines if there is sufficient room. On Draws dimension text between the extension lines even if it would ordinarily be placed outside those lines.
DIMTM accepts signed values. If DIMTOL is on and DIMTP and DIMTM are set to the same value, a tolerance value is drawn. If DIMTM and DIMTP values differ, the upper tolerance is drawn above the lower, and a plus sign is added to the DIMTP value if it is positive. For DIMTM, the program uses the negative of the value you enter (adding a minus sign if you specify a positive number and a plus sign if you specify a negative number).
For radius and diameter dimensions, a dimension line is drawn inside the circle or arc when the text, arrowheads, and leader are placed outside. Off Does not draw dimension lines between the measured points when arrowheads are placed outside the measured points On Draws dimension lines between the measured points even when arrowheads are placed outside the measured points See also: Fit Dimension Text Within Extension Lines DIMTOH Controls the position of dimension text outside the extension lines.
See also: Display Lateral Tolerances DIMTOLJ Sets the vertical justification for tolerance values relative to the nominal dimension text. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1 (imperial) or 0 (metric) This system variable has no effect unless DIMTOL is set to On. The default for DIMTOL is Off. 0 Bottom 1 Middle 2 Top See also: Display Lateral Tolerances DIMTP Sets the maximum (or upper) tolerance limit for dimension text when DIMTOL or DIMLIM is on.
See also: Set the Scale for Dimensions DIMTSZ Specifies the size of oblique strokes drawn instead of arrowheads for linear, radius, and diameter dimensioning. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.0000 0 Draws arrowheads. >0 Draws oblique strokes instead of arrowheads. The size of the oblique strokes is determined by this value multiplied by the DIMSCALE (page 1278) value. See also: Customize Arrowheads DIMTVP Controls the vertical position of dimension text above or below the dimension line.
DIMTXSTY Specifies the text style of the dimension. Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value:Standard See also: Control the Appearance of Dimension Text DIMTXT Specifies the height of dimension text, unless the current text style has a fixed height. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.1800 (imperial) or 2.5000 (metric) See also: Control the Appearance of Dimension Text DIMTXTDIRECTION Specifies the reading direction of the dimension text.
DIMTZIN Controls the suppression of zeros in tolerance values. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 (imperial) or 8 (metric) Values 0-3 affect feet-and-inch dimensions only. 0 Suppresses zero feet and precisely zero inches 1 Includes zero feet and precisely zero inches 2 Includes zero feet and suppresses zero inches 3 Includes zero inches and suppresses zero feet 4 Suppresses leading zeros in decimal dimensions (for example, 0.5000 becomes .
On Cursor controls both the text position and the dimension line location See also: Control the Location of Dimension Text DIMZIN Controls the suppression of zeros in the primary unit value.
DISPLAYVIEWCUBEIN2D Controls the display of the ViewCube tool when the 2D Wireframe visual style is applied to a viewport. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Off. Do not display the ViewCube tool when the 2D Wireframe visual style is applied 1 On. Display the ViewCube tool when the 2D Wireframe visual style is applied See also: Use ViewCube Tool DISPLAYVIEWCUBEIN3D Controls the display of the ViewCube tool when a 3D visual style is applied to a viewport.
DISPSILH Controls display of silhouette edges of 3D solid objects in a 2D Wireframe or 3D Wireframe visual style. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 0 Off. Do not display silhouette edges 1 On. Display silhouette edges When turned on, DISPSILH also suppresses the mesh displayed when using the HIDE command in the 2D Wireframe visual style. Use the REGEN command to display the results. See also: Control the Display of Edges DISTANCE Stores the distance computed by the DIST command.
This setting affects new mesh boxes that are created with the MESH (page 620) command. See also: Create a Mesh Box DIVMESHBOXLENGTH Sets the number of subdivisions for the length of a mesh box along the X axis. Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value:3 This setting affects new mesh boxes that are created with the MESH (page 620) command.
See also: Create a Mesh Box DIVMESHBOXWIDTH Sets the number of subdivisions for the width of a mesh box along the Y axis. Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value:3 This setting affects new mesh boxes that are created with the MESH (page 620) command. See also: Create a Mesh Box DIVMESHCONEAXIS Sets the number of subdivisions around the perimeter of the mesh cone base.
This setting affects new mesh cones that are created with the MESH (page 620) command. See also: Create a Mesh Cone DIVMESHCONEBASE Sets the number of subdivisions between the perimeter and the center point of the mesh cone base.
This setting affects new mesh cones that are created with the MESH (page 620) command. See also: Create a Mesh Cone DIVMESHCONEHEIGHT Sets the number of subdivisions between the base and the point or top of the mesh cone.
This setting affects new mesh cones that are created with the MESH (page 620) command. See also: Create a Mesh Cone DIVMESHCYLAXIS Sets the number of subdivisions around the perimeter of the mesh cylinder base.
This setting affects new mesh cylinders that are created with the MESH (page 620) command. See also: Create a Mesh Cylinder DIVMESHCYLBASE Sets the number of radial subdivisions from the center of the mesh cylinder base to its perimeter.
This setting affects new mesh cylinders that are created with the MESH (page 620) command. See also: Create a Mesh Cylinder DIVMESHCYLHEIGHT Sets the number of subdivisions between the base and the top of the mesh cylinder. Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value:3 This setting affects new mesh cylinders that are created with the MESH (page 620) command.
Saved in: User-settings Initial value:3 This setting affects new mesh pyramids that are created with the MESH (page 620) command. See also: Create a Mesh Pyramid DIVMESHPYRHEIGHT Sets the number of subdivisions between the base and the top of the mesh pyramid.
This setting affects new mesh pyramids that are created with the MESH (page 620) command. See also: Create a Mesh Pyramid DIVMESHPYRLENGTH Sets the number of subdivisions along each dimension of a mesh pyramid base. Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value:3 This setting affects new mesh pyramids that are created with the MESH (page 620) command. See also: Create a Mesh Pyramid DIVMESHSPHEREAXIS Sets the number of radial subdivisions around the axis endpoint of the mesh sphere.
Initial value:12 This setting affects new mesh spheres that are created with the MESH (page 620) command. See also: Create a Mesh Sphere DIVMESHSPHEREHEIGHT Sets the number of subdivisions between the two axis endpoints of the mesh sphere. Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value:6 This setting affects new mesh spheres that are created with the MESH (page 620) command.
See also: Create a Mesh Sphere DIVMESHTORUSPATH Sets the number of subdivisions in the path that is swept by the profile of a mesh torus. Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value:8 This setting affects new mesh tori that are created with the MESH (page 620) command. See also: Create a Mesh Torus DIVMESHTORUSSECTION Sets the number of subdivisions in the profile that sweeps the path of a mesh torus.
This setting affects new mesh tori that are created with the MESH (page 620) command. See also: Create a Mesh Torus DIVMESHWEDGEBASE Sets the number of subdivisions between the midpoint of the perimeter of triangular dimension of the mesh wedge. Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value:3 This setting affects new mesh wedges that are created with the MESH (page 620) command.
See also: Create a Mesh Wedge DIVMESHWEDGEHEIGHT Sets the number of subdivisions for the height of the mesh wedge along the Z axis. Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value:3 This setting affects new mesh wedges that are created with the MESH (page 620) command. See also: Create a Mesh Wedge DIVMESHWEDGELENGTH Sets the number of subdivisions for the length of a mesh wedge along the X axis.
This setting affects new mesh wedges that are created with the MESH (page 620) command. See also: Create a Mesh Wedge DIVMESHWEDGESLOPE Sets the number of subdivisions in the slope that extends from the apex of the wedge to the edge of the base.
This setting affects new mesh wedges that are created with the MESH (page 620) command. See also: Create a Mesh Wedge DIVMESHWEDGEWIDTH Sets the number of subdivisions for the width of the mesh wedge along the Y axis. Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value:3 This setting affects new mesh wedges that are created with the MESH (page 620) command. See also: Create a Mesh Wedge DONUTID Sets the default for the inside diameter of a donut.
Initial value:0.5000 See also: Draw Donuts DONUTOD Sets the default for the outside diameter of a donut. Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:1.0000 The value must be nonzero. If DONUTID is larger than DONUTOD, the two values are swapped by the next command. See also: Draw Donuts DRAGMODE Controls the display of objects being dragged. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:2 This system variable has the same name as a command. Use the SETVAR command to access this system variable.
See also: Set Up the Drawing Area DRAGP1 When hardware acceleration is used, controls how many vectors the system draws when you drag objects within a 2D viewport before it checks for a new input sample from the mouse. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:5000 A larger number results in more graphical vectors being displayed as objects are dragged. For best performance, it is recommended that you use hardware acceleration rather than software acceleration.
DRAGVS Sets the visual style that is displayed while creating 3D solid and mesh primitives and extruded solids, surfaces, and meshes. Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value:"" You can enter a period (.) to specify the current visual style. DRAGVS can only be set to a visual style that is saved in the drawing. DRAGVS has no effect when the current viewport's visual style is set to 2D Wireframe. The visual style specified for DRAGVS cannot be removed with the PURGE (page 861) command.
2 Turns on draw order inheritance: new objects created from another object using the commands listed above are assigned the draw order of the original object. 3 Provides full draw order display. Turns on the correct draw order of objects, and turns on draw order inheritance. NOTE Full draw order display may slow some editing operations. See also: Control How Overlapping Objects Are Displayed DRSTATE Indicates whether the Files Recovered dialog box is open or closed.
See also: Create Single-Line Text DWGCHECK Checks drawings for potential problems when opening them. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 If a drawing that you try to open has a potential problem, you are warned before the drawing is opened. 1 If a drawing that you try to open has a potential problem, or if it was saved by an application other than one released by Autodesk or based on RealDWG, you are warned before the drawing is opened.
See also: Use Text Fonts for International Work DWGNAME Stores the name of the current drawing. (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:Drawing1.dwg If a new drawing has not been saved yet, DWGNAME defaults to Drawing1.dwg. Additional new drawings are named Drawing2.dwg, Drawing3.dwg, and so on. The location of the saved drawing file is stored in DWGPREFIX (page 1314). See also: Save a Drawing DWGPREFIX Stores the drive and folder prefix for the drawing.
Initial value:0 0 Drawing has not been named 1 Drawing has been named See also: Save a Drawing DYNCONSTRAINTMODE Displays hidden dimensional constraints when constrained objects are selected. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Keeps constraints hidden when an object is selected 1 Displays hidden constraints when dimensionally constrained objects are selected NOTE This system variable takes effect when dynamic constraints are hidden (see DCDISPLAY (page 263)).
The DYNDIVIS system variable must be set to 2, which displays all dynamic dimensions. The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values: 0 None 1 Resulting dimension 2 Length change dimension 4 Absolute angle dimension 8 Angle change dimension 16 Arc radius dimension The DYNMODE (page 1317) system variable turns Dynamic Input features on and off. See also: Use Dynamic Input DYNDIVIS Controls how many dynamic dimensions are displayed during grip stretch editing.
2 All dynamic dimensions, as controlled by the DYNDIGRIP (page 1315) system variable The DYNMODE (page 1317) system variable turns Dynamic Input features on and off. See also: Use Dynamic Input DYNINFOTIPS Controls whether tips are displayed for using Shift and Ctrl when editing with grips. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 When dynamic input is turned on and you select a grip, a tip at the cursor lists the available grip options that you can cycle through using Shift or Ctrl..
When all features are on, the context governs what is displayed. When DYNMODE is set to a negative value, the Dynamic Input features are not turned on, but the setting is stored. Press the Dynamic Input button in the status bar to set DYNMODE to the corresponding positive value.
The DYNMODE (page 1317) system variable turns Dynamic Input features on and off. See also: Use Dynamic Input DYNPIFORMAT Controls whether pointer input uses polar or Cartesian format for coordinates. Type: Switch Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 This setting applies only to a second or next point. 0 Polar 1 Cartesian The DYNMODE (page 1317) system variable turns Dynamic Input features on and off. See also: Use Dynamic Input DYNPIVIS Controls when pointer input is displayed.
The DYNMODE (page 1317) system variable turns Dynamic Input features on and off. See also: Use Dynamic Input DYNPROMPT Controls display of prompts in Dynamic Input tooltips. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Off 1 On The DYNMODE (page 1317) system variable turns Dynamic Input features on and off. When DYNMODE is set to 0 (off), prompts are not displayed regardless of the DYNPROMPT setting.
See also: Use Dynamic Input E System Variables EDGEMODE Controls how the TRIM and EXTEND commands determine cutting and boundary edges. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 0 Uses the selected edge without any extensions 1 Extends or trims the selected object to an imaginary extension of the cutting or boundary edge Lines, arcs, elliptical arcs, rays, and polylines are objects eligible for natural extension.
See also: Overview of the User Coordinate System (UCS) Enter 3D Coordinates ERHIGHLIGHT Controls whether reference names or reference objects are highlighted when their counterparts are selected in the Reference Manager palette or in the drawing window. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Referenced objects are not highlighted. 1 Referenced objects are highlighted.
See also: Overview of AutoLISP ERSTATE Indicates whether the Reference Manager palette is open or closed. (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:Varies 0 Closed 1 Open See also: Attach Drawing References (Xrefs) EXPERT Controls whether certain prompts are issued. Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:0 0 Issues all prompts normally.
3 Suppresses the preceding prompts and those issued by the LINETYPE (page 578) Command prompt (-LINETYPE) if you try to load a linetype that's already loaded or create a new linetype in a file that already defines that linetype. 4 Suppresses the preceding prompts and those issued by UCS (page 1106) Save and VPORTS (page 1151) Save if the name you supply already exists.
EXTMAX Stores the upper-right point of the drawing extents. (Read-only) Type: 3D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value:Varies Expands outward as new objects are drawn; shrinks only with ZOOM All or ZOOM Extents. Reported in world coordinates for the current space. See also: Pan or Zoom a View EXTMIN Stores the lower-left point of the drawing extents. (Read-only) Type: 3D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value:Varies Expands outward as new objects are drawn; shrinks only with ZOOM All or ZOOM Extents.
Initial value:1 0 Uses AutoCAD R14 parameters, which limit names to 31 characters in length. Names can include the letters A to Z, the numerals 0 to 9, and the special characters dollar sign ($), underscore (_), and hyphen (-). 1 Uses AutoCAD 2000 (and later releases) parameters. Names can be up to 255 characters in length, and can include the letters A to Z, the numerals 0 to 9, spaces, and any special characters not used by the operating system and AutoCAD for other purposes.
NOTE The value of this system variable reflects the value for objects with no smoothness. See also: Create Meshes by Conversion FACETERDEVSURFACE Sets how closely the converted mesh object adheres to the original shape of the solid or surface. Type: Real Saved in: User-settings Initial value:0.001 This setting affects mesh that is converted from another object using the MESHSMOOTH (page 640) command.
This setting affects mesh that is converted from another object using the MESHSMOOTH (page 640) command. (For a complete list of objects that can be converted to mesh, see Objects That Can Be Converted to Mesh (page 641).) Permissible values range from 0 to 100, and set the height/width ratio of the face. Use this variable to prevent long, thin faces that can result from cylindrical object conversions. Smaller values result in more, better-formed faces, but can affect performance.
FACETERMAXGRID Sets the maximum number of U and V grid lines for solids and surfaces converted to mesh. Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value:4096 This setting affects mesh that is converted from another object using the MESHSMOOTH (page 640) command. (For a complete list of objects that can be converted to mesh, see Objects That Can Be Converted to Mesh (page 641).) Permissible values range from 0 to 4096.
See also: Create Meshes by Conversion FACETERMINUGRID Sets the minimum number of U grid lines for solids and surfaces that are converted to mesh. Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value:0 This setting affects mesh that is converted from another object using the MESHSMOOTH (page 640) command. (For a complete list of objects that can be converted to mesh, see Objects That Can Be Converted to Mesh (page 641).) Permissible values range from 0 to 1023. Setting 0 (zero) turns off the setting.
Permissible values range from 0 to 1023. Setting 0 (zero) turns off the setting. The value of this system variable cannot exceed the value of FACETERMAXGRID (page 1329)/FACETERMINUGRID (page 1330). NOTE The value of this system variable reflects the value for objects with no smoothness. See also: Create Meshes by Conversion FACETERPRIMITIVEMODE Specifies whether the smoothness settings for objects that are converted to a mesh.
Initial value:1 -1 or any negative number Does not smooth the object after conversion 0 Does not smooth the object after conversion 1 Applies smoothness level 1 after conversion 2 Applies smoothness level 2 after conversion 3 Applies smoothness level 3 after conversion This variable sets the default level of smoothness that is applied to mesh that is created as a result of conversion from another object with the MESHSMOOTH (page 640) command.
Initial value:0 0 Creates an N by 1 mesh for cylindrical and conic solids 1 Creates an N by M mesh for cylindrical and conic solids A setting of 1 increases the density of the mesh to improve the quality of rendered and shaded models. The faceting is visible only in the 2D Wireframe visual style. See also: Create 3D Solid Primitives FACETRES Adjusts the smoothness of shaded and rendered objects and objects with hidden lines removed. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.
1 Fields are displayed with a gray background See also: Update Fields FIELDEVAL Controls how fields are updated. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:31 The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values: 0 Not updated 1 Updated on open 2 Updated on save 4 Updated on plot 8 Not used 16 Updated on regeneration NOTE The Date field is updated by UPDATEFIELD (page 1135), but it is not updated automatically based on the setting of the FIELDEVAL system variable.
Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Does not display dialog boxes. You can still request a file dialog box to appear by entering a tilde (~) in response to the command's prompt. The same is true for AutoLISP and ObjectARX. 1 Displays dialog boxes. However, if a script or AutoLISP/ObjectARX ™ program is active, an ordinary prompt is displayed. See also: Switch Between Dialog Boxes and the Command Line FILLETRAD Stores the current fillet radius for 2D objects.
See also: Fillet a Surface Modify Edges on 3D Objects FILLMODE Specifies whether hatches and fills, 2D solids, and wide polylines are filled in. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1 0 Objects are not filled 1 Objects are filled See also: Control the Display of Polylines, Hatches, Gradient Fills, Lineweights, and Text FONTALT Specifies the alternate font to be used when the specified font file cannot be located. Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value:simplex.
FONTMAP Specifies the font mapping file to be used. Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value:acad.fmp A font mapping file contains one font mapping per line; the original font used in the drawing and the font to be substituted for it are separated by a semicolon (;). For example, to substitute the Times TrueType font for the Roman font, the line in the mapping file would read as follows: romanc.shx;times.
1 Displays and plots the frame. 2 Displays but does not plot the frame. 3 The individual setting varies for all external references in the current drawing (raster images, underlays, clipped xrefs, and wipeout objects all have different frame settings).
FRONTZ Stores the front clipping plane offset from the target plane for the current viewport, in drawing units. (Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.0000 The front clipping and front clip not at eye bitcodes in VIEWMODE (page 1535) are on. The FRONTZ value is the last front clipping plane value set current with the DVIEW command. The distance of the front clipping plane from the camera point is found by subtracting FRONTZ from the camera-to-target distance.
G System Variables GEOMARKERVISIBILITY Controls the visibility of geographic markers. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1 0 Geographic marker is not visible 1 Geographic marker is visible GFANG Specifies the angle of a gradient fill. Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:0 Valid values range from 0 to less than 360 (degrees). Negative values and values equal to or greater than 360 are accepted, but they are converted to the equivalent value between 0 and 360.
Valid values include the following: ■ AutoCAD Color Index (ACI): integer values from 1 to 255, or a color name from the first seven colors ■ True Colors: RGB or HSL values from 000 to 255 in the form "RGB:130,200,240" ■ Color Books: Text from standard color books, guides, or sets, for example "DIC COLOR GUIDE(R)$DIC 43" See also: Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill GFCLR2 Specifies the second color for a two-color gradient fill.
A tint gradient transitions toward white and a shade gradient transitions toward black. Valid values range from 0.0 (darkest) to 1.0 (lightest). See also: Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill GFCLRSTATE Specifies whether a gradient fill uses one color or two colors. Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:0 0 Two-color gradient fill 1 One-color gradient fill See also: Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill GFNAME Specifies the pattern of a gradient fill.
5 Hemispherical 6 Curved 7 Inverted spherical 8 Inverted hemispherical 9 Inverted curved See also: Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill GFSHIFT Specifies whether the pattern in a gradient fill is centered or is shifted up and to the left. Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:0 0 Centered 1 Shifted up and to the left See also: Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill GRIDDISPLAY Controls the display behavior and display limits of the grid.
The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values: 0 Restricts the grid to the area specified by the LIMITS command 1 Does not restrict the grid to the area specified by the LIMITS command 2 Turns on adaptive grid display, which limits the density of the grid when zoomed out 4 If the grid is set to adaptive display and when zoomed in, generates additional, more closely spaced grid lines in the same proportion as the intervals of the major grid lines 8 Changes the grid plane t
GRIDMODE Specifies whether the grid is turned on or off. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1 0 Turns the grid off 1 Turns the grid on See also: Adjust Grid and Grid Snap GRIDSTYLE Controls the style of grid displayed for 2D model space, Block Editor, 3D parallel projection, 3D perspective projection, and Sheet and Layout tabs.
GRIDUNIT Specifies the grid spacing (X and Y) for the current viewport. Type: 2D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.5000,0.5000 (imperial) or 10,10 (metric) To make the grid spacing default to the snap spacing, set GRIDUNIT to 0,0. Changes to GRIDUNIT are not displayed in the grid until the view is regenerated. See also: Adjust Grid and Grid Snap GRIPBLOCK Controls the display of grips in blocks.
See also: Use Object Grips GRIPCONTOUR Controls the color of the grip contour. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:251 The valid range is 1 to 255. See also: Use Object Grips GRIPDYNCOLOR Controls the color of custom grips for dynamic blocks. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:140 The valid range is 1 to 255. See also: Work with Dynamic Blocks in Drawings GRIPHOT Controls the color of selected grips. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:12 The valid range is 1 to 255.
See also: Use Object Grips GRIPHOVER Controls the fill color of an unselected grip when the cursor pauses over it. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:11 The valid range is 1 to 255. See also: Use Object Grips GRIPMULTIFUNCTIONAL Specifies the access methods for multi-functional grip options.
GRIPOBJLIMIT Suppresses the display of grips when the selection set includes more than the specified number of objects. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:100 The valid range is 0 to 32,767. For example, when set to 1, grips are suppressed when more than one object is selected. When set to 0, grips are always displayed. See also: Use Object Grips GRIPS Controls the display of grips on selected objects.
Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:5 The valid range is 1 to 255. See also: Use Object Grips GRIPSUBOBJMODE Controls whether grips are automatically selected (made “hot”) when subobjects are selected. Type: Bitcode Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Does not turn grips hot when subobjects are selected. 1 Turns the face, edge, or vertex grips hot when subobjects of 3D objects (solid, surface, or mesh) are selected.
GRIPTIPS Controls the display of grip tips when the cursor hovers over grips on dynamic blocks and custom objects that support grip tips. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Turns off the display of grip tips. 1 Turns on the display of grip tips. See also: Use Object Grips Choose a Method to Modify Objects GROUPDISPLAYMODE Controls the display and grips on groups, when group selection is on.
GROUPLAYERDELETABLE Controls what happens to the layers referenced by a layer group when the group is deleted. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 0 Layers referenced by a layer group are not removed from the drawing when the group is deleted. 1 You are prompted on how to handle the deletion of layers referenced by the layer group being deleted. When deleting the referenced layers, you will be prompted on how to handle layers that contain objects on them.
2 Layers and layer groups are sorted separately, layer groups appear at the bottom of the Layers list See also: The Layers Palette GTAUTO Controls whether 3D gizmos are automatically displayed when you select objects before you start a command in a viewport with a 3D visual style. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Gizmos are not displayed automatically when you select objects before starting a command. 1 Gizmos are displayed automatically after you create a selection set.
Initial value:0 0 Does not automatically start the 3DMOVE (page 36), 3DROTATE (page 47), or 3DSCALE (page 50) commands when the MOVE (page 674), ROTATE (page 919), or SCALE (page 928) commands are started in a 3D view. 1 Automatically starts the 3DMOVE, 3DROTATE, or 3DSCALE commands when the MOVE, ROTATE, or SCALE commands are started in a 3D view.
H System Variables HALOGAP Specifies a gap to be displayed where an object is hidden by another object. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 The value is specified as a percent of one unit and is independent of the zoom level. HALOGAP is available only in 2D views. In 3D views, the VSHALOGAP (page 1553) system variable is used. See also: Use a Visual Style to Display Your Model HANDLES Reports whether object handles can be accessed by applications.
Initial value:Varies See also: Set Up the Drawing Area Application Tab (Application Preferences Dialog Box) (page 738) HIDEPRECISION Controls the accuracy of hides and shades. Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:0 Hides can be calculated in double precision or single precision. Setting HIDEPRECISION to 1 produces more accurate hides by using double precision, but this setting also uses more memory and can affect performance, especially when hiding solids.
See also: Shade a Model and Use Edge Effects HIGHLIGHT Controls object highlighting; does not affect objects selected with grips. Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:1 0 Turns off object selection highlighting 1 Turns on object selection highlighting See also: Customize Object Selection HPANG Sets the angle for new hatch patterns. Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:0.
Initial value:0 0 Nonannotative 1 Annotative See also: Overview of Scaling Annotations HPASSOC Controls whether hatches and fills are associative. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Hatches and fills are not associated with their defining boundary objects 1 Hatches and fills are associated with their defining boundary objects and are updated when the boundary objects change See also: Specify Hatch and Fill Areas HPBACKGROUNDCOLOR Controls the background color for hatch patterns.
■ True Colors: RGB or HSL values from 000 to 255 in the form "RGB:130,200,240" ■ Color Books: Text from standard color books, guides, or sets, for example "DIC COLOR GUIDE(R)$DIC 43" See also: Set Property Overrides for Hatches and Fills HPBOUND Controls the object type created by HATCH and BOUNDARY. Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:1 0 Creates a region 1 Creates a polyline A polyline or region object is created only if the HPBOUNDRETAIN system variable is turned on.
See also: Specify Hatch and Fill Areas HPCOLOR Sets a default color for new hatches. Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value:use current Valid values include the following: ■ “.
1 Hatch and Gradient dialog box is displayed for HATCH and GRADIENT. See also: Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills HPDOUBLE Specifies hatch pattern doubling for user-defined patterns. Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:0 Doubling specifies a second set of lines drawn at 90 degrees to the original lines. 0 Turns off hatch pattern doubling 1 Turns on hatch pattern doubling See also: Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill HPDRAWORDER Controls the draw order of hatches and fills.
2 Bring to front. The hatch or fill is brought to the front of all other objects. 3 Send behind boundary. The hatch or fill is sent behind the hatch’s boundary objects. 4 Bring in front of boundary. The hatch or fill is brought in front of the hatch’s boundary objects. See also: Set Property Overrides for Hatches and Fills HPGAPTOL Treats a set of objects that almost enclose an area as a closed hatch boundary. Type: Real Saved in: Registry Initial value:0.
1 The hatch origin is taken from the source hatch object See also: Modify Hatch Alignment, Scale, and Rotation HPISLANDDETECTION Controls how islands within the hatch boundary are treated. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1 0 Normal. Hatches islands within islands. 1 Outer. Hatches only areas outside of islands. 2 Ignore. Hatches everything within the boundaries. An island is an enclosed area within the area to be hatched.
See also: Specify Hatch and Fill Areas HPLAYER Specifies a default layer for new hatches and fills. Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value:use current Values other than the “.” (use current) value override the current layer (CELAYER). See also: Set Property Overrides for Hatches and Fills HPMAXAREAS Sets the maximum number of enclosed areas that a single hatch object can have and still automatically switch between solid and pattern hatches during zoom operations.
Valid values are from 100 to10,000,000. See also: Control the Scale of Hatch Patterns HPNAME Sets the default hatch pattern name. Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:ANSI31 (imperial) or ANGLE (metric) Valid names can contain up to 34 characters without spaces. The value "" indicates that there is no default. Enter a period (.) to reset HPNAME to the default value.
Type: 2D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.0000,0.0000 See also: Control the Hatch Origin Point HPORIGINMODE Controls how the default hatch origin point is determined.
Type: Switch Saved in: User-settings Initial value:0 0 or OFF No preview 1 or ON Quick preview See also: Specify Hatch and Fill Areas HPQUICKPREVTIMEOUT Sets the maximum time for a hatch preview to generate before the preview is automatically cancelled. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:2 If the specified duration is reached, and the preview is not complete, the preview is cancelled, but the command remains active. The duration is measured in seconds. Valid values range from 1 to 300.
See also: Control the Scale of Hatch Patterns HPSEPARATE Controls whether a single hatch object or separate hatch objects are created when operating on several closed boundaries. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 0 A single hatch object is created 1 Separate hatch objects are created See also: Specify Hatch and Fill Areas HPSPACE Sets the hatch pattern line spacing for user-defined patterns. Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:1.
Valid values include “use current” (or “.”), ByLayer, ByBlock, and integer values from 0 to 90. The higher the value, the more transparent the hatch. Values other than “use current” or “.” override the current transparency (CETRANSPARENCY (page 1226)). Changing this value does not affect existing hatch objects. See also: Set Property Overrides for Hatches and Fills I System Variables ICONSIZE Controls the size of the icons displayed on the Tool Sets palette and status bar.
The FRAME (page 1337) system variable overrides the IMAGEFRAME setting. Use the IMAGEFRAME system variable after the FRAME system variable to reset the image frame settings. 0 The image frame is not diplayed or plotted. The frame temporarily reappears during selection preview or object selection. 1 Displays and plots the image frame. 2 Displays but does not plot the image frame.
Initial value:1 0 Implied faces cannot be detected. 1 Implied faces can be detected. An implied face is a closed area that creates a boundary by intersecting or overlapping a face on a 3D solid object. This variable affects the ability to use implied faces when you press Ctrl-Shift-E and drag the area inside the boundary to create an extrusion dynamically. This variable must be set to 1 if you want to select and modify implied faces.
INETLOCATION Stores the Internet location used by the BROWSER command. Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value:http://www.autodesk.com See also: Get Started with Internet Access INPUTHISTORYMODE Controls the content and location of the user input history. Type: Bitcode Saved in: Registry Initial value:15 The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values: 0 No history of recent input is displayed.
INSBASE Stores the insertion base point set by BASE, which gets expressed as a UCS coordinate for the current space. Type: 3D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.0000,0.0000,0.0000 See also: Insert Blocks INSNAME Sets a default block name for the INSERT command. Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:"" The name must conform to symbol naming conventions. Returns "" if no default is set. Enter a period (.) to set no default.
1 Inches 2 Feet 3 Miles 4 Millimeters 5 Centimeters 6 Meters 7 Kilometers 8 Microinches 9 Mils 10 Yards 11 Angstroms 12 Nanometers 13 Microns 14 Decimeters 15 Dekameters 16 Hectometers 17 Gigameters 18 Astronomical Units 1374 | Chapter 4 System Variables
19 Light Years 20 Parsecs See also: Insert Blocks INSUNITSDEFSOURCE Sets source content units value when INSUNITS is set to 0. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 Valid range is 0 to 20.
10 Yards 11 Angstroms 12 Nanometers 13 Microns 14 Decimeters 15 Dekameters 16 Hectometers 17 Gigameters 18 Astronomical Units 19 Light Years 20 Parsecs See also: Insert Blocks INSUNITSDEFTARGET Sets target drawing units value when INSUNITS is set to 0. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 Valid range is 0 to 20.
1 Inches 2 Feet 3 Miles 4 Millimeters 5 Centimeters 6 Meters 7 Kilometers 8 Microinches 9 Mils 10 Yards 11 Angstroms 12 Nanometers 13 Microns 14 Decimeters 15 Dekameters 16 Hectometers 17 Gigameters 18 Astronomical Units I System Variables | 1377
19 Light Years 20 Parsecs See also: Insert Blocks INTELLIGENTUPDATE Controls the graphics refresh rate. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:20 The default value is 20 frames per second. If you encounter problems related to graphics generation or timing, turn off the variable by setting it to 0. INTELLIGENTUPDATE works by suppressing the graphics update until the timer expires. Subsequent updates reset the timer.
RGB:000,000,000 If you have a color book installed, you can specify any colors that are defined in the book. See also: Check 3D Models for Interferences INTERFEREOBJVS Sets the visual style for interference objects. Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value:Realistic INTERFEREOBJVS can only be set to a visual style that is saved in the drawing. The visual style specified for INTERFEREOBJVS cannot be removed with the PURGE (page 861) command.
INTERSECTIONCOLOR Controls the color of polylines at the intersection of 3D surfaces when the visual style is set to 2D Wireframe. Value 0 designates ByBlock, value 256 designates ByLayer, and value 257 designates ByEntity. Values 1-255 designate an AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) color. True Colors and Color Book colors are also available. The INTERSECTIONCOLOR setting is visible only if INTERSECTIONDISPLAY (page 1380) is turned on and if the HIDE (page 507) command is used.
ISAVEBAK controls the creation of a backup file (BAK). In the operating system, copying the file data to create a BAK file for large drawings takes a major portion of the incremental save time. 0 No BAK file is created (even for a full save) 1 A BAK file is created WARNING In some cases (such as a power failure in the middle of a save), it's possible that drawing data can be lost. See also: Set Interface Options ISAVEPERCENT Determines the amount of wasted space tolerated in a drawing file.
Initial value:4 Valid settings range from 0 to 2047. See also: Create Solids L System Variables LARGEOBJECTSUPPORT Controls large object size limit support when you open and save drawings. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 0 Use legacy object size limits from AutoCAD 2009 and prior 1 Use AutoCAD 2010 object size limits See also: Save a Drawing LASTANGLE Stores the end angle of the last arc entered relative to the XY plane of the current UCS for the current space.
LASTPOINT Stores the last point specified, expressed as UCS coordinates for the current space. Type: 3D-point Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:0.0000,0.0000,0.0000 You can reference the last point specified by entering the @ symbol at a point prompt. This is equivalent to entering @0,0,0. See also: Overview of Coordinate Entry LASTPROMPT Stores the last string echoed to the Command prompt.
This value is not affected by the settings of the AUNITS and AUPREC system variables. See also: Specify Units and Unit Formats LAYEREVAL Specifies whether the layer list is evaluated for new layers when added to the drawing or to attached xrefs.
Saved in: User-settings Initial value:1 This system variable also affects whether the new layer notification is displayed or not. 0 Disables the evaluation and notification of new layers 1 Enables the evaluation of new layers on LAYEREVAL settings in DWG file NOTE LAYEREVALCTL overrides the LAYEREVAL (page 1384) and LAYERNOTIFY (page 1386) setvars when LAYEREVALCTL = 0. It acts like a global off (but not a global on).
and offers a choice: “Do you want to delete all dynamic layer group filters now?” 3 When the drawing is opened, displays a message that states the problem and offers to display a dialog box where you can choose which dynamic layer group filters to delete See also: Filter and Sort the List of Layers LAYERMANAGERSTATE Indicates whether the Layers palette is open or closed.
1 Plot 2 Open 4 Load/Reload/Attach for xrefs 8 Restore layer state 16 Save 32 Insert NOTE LAYEREVALCTL (page 1384) overrides the LAYEREVAL (page 1384) and LAYERNOTIFY setvars when LAYEREVALCTL = 0. It acts like a global off (but not a global on). There is no effect even if LAYEREVALCTL is turned on if LAYERNOTIFY = 0 or LAYEREVAL = 0. LAYEREVALCTL must be set to 1 for LAYERNOTIFY and LAYEREVAL to function correctly.
The range for controlling the fading for objects on locked layers is from -90 to 90. 0 Locked layers are not faded >0 When the value is positive, controls the percent of fading up to 90 percent <0 When the value is negative, locked layers are not faded, but the value is saved for switching to that value by changing the sign NOTE The fading value is limited to 90 percent to avoid confusion with layers that are turned off or frozen.
See also: Work on a Named Layout LAYOUTREGENCTL Specifies how the display list is updated in the Model layout and named layouts. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:2 For each layout, the display list is updated either by regenerating the drawing when you switch to that layout or by saving the display list to memory and regenerating only the modified objects when you switch to that layout. Changing the LAYOUTREGENCTL setting can improve performance.
Regardless of the LAYOUTREGENCTL setting, if you redefine a block or undo a layout switch, the drawing is regenerated the first time you switch to any layout that contains saved viewports. See also: Work on a Named Layout LEGACYCTRLPICK Specifies the keys for selection cycling and the behavior for Ctrl-click. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:2 0 Ctrl-click is used to select subobjects (faces, edges, and vertices) on 3D solids, surfaces, and meshes.
Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:50.0000 See also: Define a Perspective Projection (DVIEW) LIGHTGLYPHDISPLAY Turns on and off the display of light glyphs. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1 When this system variable is set to Off, the glyphs that represent lights in the drawing are not displayed. A light glyph is a symbolic representation of a point lights and spotlights.
1 American lighting units (foot-candles) are used and photometric lighting is enabled. 2 International lighting units (lux) are used and photometric lighting is enabled. See also: Standard and Photometric Lighting Workflow LIGHTSINBLOCKS Controls whether lights contained in blocks are used when rendering. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1 By default, this system variable is turned on.
Initial value:0 0 Objects can be created outside the limits 1 Objects cannot be created outside the limits See also: Adjust Grid and Grid Snap LIMMAX Stores the upper-right grid limits for the current space, expressed as world coordinates. Type: 2D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value:12.0000,9.0000 (imperial) or 420.0000,297.0000 (metric) LIMMAX is read-only when paper space is active and the paper background or printable area is displayed.
LINEARBRIGHTNESS Controls the brightness level of the viewport when using default lighting or generic lights. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 Controls the brightness level of the viewport when standard lighting is enabled (LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 0). Valid settings are integers from -10 to 10. The brightness level in photometric lighting can be controlled by the LOGEXPBRIGHTNESS systems variable.
Initial value:Varies by country/region This code appears as a three-letter abbreviation returned by the operating system. See also: Specify Search Paths and File Locations Organize Program and Support Files LOCALROOTPREFIX Stores the full path to the root folder where local customizable files were installed.
LOFTANG2 Sets the draft angle through the last cross section in a loft operation. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:90 The 0 direction is measured outward from the curve on the plane of the curve. The positive direction is measured toward the previous cross section. Valid values include 0 to less than 360. See also: Create a Solid or Surface by Lofting LOFTMAG1 Sets the magnitude of the draft angle through the first cross section in a loft operation. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.
See also: Create a Solid or Surface by Lofting LOFTNORMALS Controls the normals of a lofted object where it passes through cross sections. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1 This setting is ignored when specifying a path or guide curves.
The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values: 1 No twist (minimizes the twist between cross sections) 2 Align direction (aligns the start to end direction of each cross section curve) 4 Simplify (produces simple solids and surfaces, such as a cylinder or plane, instead of spline solids and surfaces) 8 Close (closes the surface or solid between the first and the last cross sections) See also: Create a Solid or Surface by Lofting LOGEXPBRIGHTNESS Controls the brightness le
Controls the contrast level of the viewport when photometric lighting is enabled (LIGHTINGUNITS (page 1391) system variable is set to 1 or 2). Valid range is from 0.0 to 100.0. The contrast level in standard lighting can be controlled by the LINEARCONTRAST (page 1394) systems variable. See also: Standard and Photometric Lighting Workflow LOGEXPDAYLIGHT Controls if the exterior daylight flag is enabled when using photometric lighting.
Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1.0 Controls the mid tones level of the viewport when photometric lighting is enabled (LIGHTINGUNITS (page 1391) system variable is set to 1 or 2). Valid range from 0.01 to 20.0. See also: Standard and Photometric Lighting Workflow LOGEXPPHYSICALSCALE Controls the relative brightness of self-illuminated materials in a photometric environment. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1500.
See also: Set Interface Options LOGFILENAME Specifies the path and name of the command history log file for the current drawing. (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value:Varies The initial value varies depending on the name of the current drawing and the installation folder. See also: Set Interface Options LOGFILEPATH Specifies the path for the command history log files for all drawings in a session.
Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:Varies See also: Open a Drawing LONGITUDE Specifies the longitude of the drawing model in decimal format. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:-122.3940 The default is the longitude of San Francisco, California. The valid range is -180 to +180. Positive values represent east longitudes. This value is affected by the settings of the LUPREC system variable. This value is not affected by the settings of the AUNITS and AUPREC system variables.
LUNITS Sets linear units. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:2 1 Scientific 2 Decimal 3 Engineering 4 Architectural 5 Fractional See also: Set the Unit Format Conventions LUPREC Sets the display precision for linear units and coordinates. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:4 However, the internal precision of distance, area, and volume values, and linear coordinates is always maintained, regardless of the display precision.
LWDEFAULT Sets the value for the default lineweight. Type: Enum Saved in: Registry Initial value:25 The default lineweight can be set to any valid lineweight value in hundredths of millimeters, including: 0, 5, 9, 13, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 53, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 106, 120, 140, 158, 200, and 211. All values must be entered in hundredths of millimeters. (Multiply a value by 2540 to convert values from inches to hundredths of millimeters.
Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Inches 1 Millimeters See also: Display Lineweights M System Variables MATBROWSERSTATE Indicates whether the Materials Browser is open or closed. (Read-only) Type: Switch Saved in: User-settings Initial value:0 0 Materials Browser is closed. 1 Materials Browser is open. See also: Browse Material Library MAXACTVP Sets the maximum number of viewports that can be active at one time in a layout.
Initial value:64 MAXACTVP has no effect on the number of viewports that are plotted. See also: Turn Layout Viewports On or Off MAXSORT Sets the maximum number of symbol names or block names sorted by listing commands. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1000 If the total number of items exceeds this value, no items are sorted. The value of MAXSORT is an integer between 0 and 32767. See also: Work with Blocks MBUTTONPAN Controls the behavior of the middle button or wheel on the pointing device.
MEASUREINIT Controls whether a drawing you start from scratch uses imperial or metric default settings. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:Varies by country/region Specifically, MEASUREINIT controls which hatch pattern and linetype files are used. The Drawing1.dwg that opens when you start the program is a drawing that is started from scratch.
MENUECHO Sets menu echo and prompt control bits. Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:0 The value is the sum of the following: 1 Suppresses echo of menu items (^P in a menu item toggles echoing) 2 Suppresses display of system prompts during menu 4 Disables ^P toggle of menu echoing 8 Displays input/output strings; debugging aid for DIESEL macros See also: Create Macros MENUNAME Stores the customization file name, including the path for the file name.
Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1 0 Creates legacy polygon or polyface mesh when you use REVSURF (page 917), TABSURF (page 1073), RULESURF (page 924), or EDGESURF (page 403) 1 Creates full-featured mesh objects when you use REVSURF, TABSURF, RULESURF, or EDGESURF (recommended) This option does not affect mesh created using the 3DMESH (page 35) and PFACE (page 792) commands. See also: Construct Meshes from Other Objects MIRRHATCH Controls how MIRROR reflects hatch patterns.
Initial value:0 0 Retains text direction 1 Mirrors the text See also: Mirror Objects MLEADERSCALE Sets the overall scale factor applied to multileader objects. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1.0000 Use DIMSCALE (page 1278) to scale leader objects created with the LEADER (page 570) command. 0.0 A reasonable default value is computed based on the scaling between the current model space viewport and paper space.
MSLTSCALE Scales linetypes displayed on the model tab by the annotation scale. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1 0 Linetypes displayed on the Model tab are not scaled by the annotation scale 1 Linetypes displayed on the Model tab are scaled by the annotation scale NOTE MSLTSCALE is set to 0 when you open drawings created in AutoCAD 2007 and earlier. See also: Display Annotative Objects MTEXTCOLUMN Sets the default column setting for an mtext object.
MTEXTFIXED Sets the display size and orientation of multiline text in the In-Place Text Editor. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:2 Changes to this system variable affect the Always Display as WYSIWYG setting of the In-Place Text Editor. 0 or 1 Zooms the drawing to the extents of the multiline text object's bounding box when the text in the In-Place Text Editor is difficult to read (very small or large, or is rotated).
The text string is displayed in the current text size and font. You can enter any string of up to ten letters or numbers or enter a period (.) to display no sample text. See also: Overview of Multiline Text MYDOCUMENTSPREFIX Stores the full path to the Documents folder for the user currently logged on.
See also: Use ViewCube Tool NAVVCUBELOCATION Identifies the corner in a viewport where the ViewCube tool is displayed. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 0 Upper-right 1 Upper-left 2 Lower-left 3 Lower-right See also: Use ViewCube Tool NAVVCUBEOPACITY Controls the opacity of the ViewCube tool when inactive. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:50 Valid values are from 0 to 100 percent.
See also: Use ViewCube Tool NAVVCUBEORIENT Controls whether the ViewCube tool reflects the current UCS or WCS. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 ViewCube tool is oriented to reflect WCS 1 ViewCube tool is oriented to reflect the current UCS See also: Use ViewCube Tool NAVVCUBESIZE Specifies the size of the ViewCube tool.
See also: Use ViewCube Tool NOMUTT Suppresses the message display (muttering) when it wouldn't normally be suppressed. Type: Short Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:0 Displaying messages is the normal mode, but message display is suppressed during scripts, AutoLISP routines, and so on. 0 Resumes normal muttering behavior 1 Suppresses muttering indefinitely See also: Set Interface Options NORTHDIRECTION Specifies the angle of the sun from north. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.
Guidelines for Lighting O System Variables OBJECTISOLATIONMODE Controls whether hidden objects remain hidden between drawing sessions. Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value:0 OJBECTISOLATIONMODE controls whether objects that are hidden using the ISOLATEOBJECTS (page 534) or HIDEOBJECTS (page 509) command remain hidden after saving and reopening the drawing.
See also: Control the Display of Edges OBSCUREDLTYPE Specifies the linetype of obscured lines. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 An obscured line is a hidden line made visible by changing its color and linetype. OBSCUREDLTYPE is available only in 2D views. In 3D views, the VSOBSCUREDLTYPE (page 1560) system variable is used. Obscured linetypes are independent of zoom level, unlike regular linetypes.
7 Double Short Dash 8 Double Medium Dash 9 Double Long Dash 10 Medium Long Dash 11 Sparse Dot See also: Control the Display of Edges OFFSETDIST Sets the default offset distance. Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:-1.
OFFSETGAPTYPE Controls how potential gaps between segments are treated when polylines are offset. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 0 Extends line segments to their projected intersections. 1 Fillets line segments at their projected intersections. The radius of each arc segment is equal to the offset distance. 2 Chamfers line segments at their projected intersections.
ORTHOMODE Constrains cursor movement to the perpendicular.
32 INTersection 64 INSertion 128 PERpendicular 256 TANgent 512 NEArest 1024 Clears all object snaps 2048 APParent Intersection 4096 EXTension 8192 PARallel To specify more than one object snap, enter the sum of their values. For example, entering 3 specifies the Endpoint (bitcode 1) and Midpoint (bitcode 2) object snaps. Entering 16383 specifies all object snaps.
Saved in: Registry Initial value:2 0 Running object snap settings override keyboard coordinate entry 1 Keyboard entry overrides object snap settings 2 Keyboard entry overrides object snap settings except in scripts See also: Set Visual Aids for Object Snaps (AutoSnap) OSNAPNODELEGACY Controls whether the Node object snap can be used to snap to multiline text objects.
Initial value:0 0 Osnap uses the Z-value of the specified point 1 Osnap substitutes the Z-value of the specified point with the elevation (ELEV (page 405)) set for the current UCS See also: Use Object Snaps OSOPTIONS Automatically suppresses object snaps on hatch objects and geometry with negative Z values when using a dynamic UCS.
P System Variables PALETTEICONSTATE Indicates whether palettes are in icon state. (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 0 Palettes are expanded, not as icons 1 Palettes are collapsed as icons and displayed along the left side of the screen 2 Palettes are collapsed as icons and displayed along the right side of the screen See also: Specify the Behavior of Palettes PAPERSPACEVISOR Controls the display of the Layout visor when switching to a named layout.
PAPERUPDATE Controls the display of a warning dialog box when attempting to print a layout with a paper size different from the paper size specified by the default for the plotter configuration file.
The PARAMETERCOPYMODE system variable provides several options for handling these situations. 0 Do not copy any dimensional constraints or constraint parameters. Constraints are removed from copied objects. 1 Copy dimensional constraints and constraint parameters. Always replace expressions with numerical constants. Rename dimensional parameters if there is a naming conflict. 2 Copy dimensional constraints, constraint parameters, and user parameters.
Initial value:1 The FRAME (page 1337) system variable overrides the PDFFRAME setting. Use the PDFFRAME system variable after the FRAME system variable to reset the PDF frame settings. 0 The PDF underlay frame is not displayed or plotted. The frame temporarily reappears during selection preview or object selection. 1 Displays and plots the PDF underlay frame. 2 Displays but does not plot the PDF underlay frame.
PDMODE Controls how point objects are displayed. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 For information about values to enter, see the POINT (page 826) command. See also: Divide an Object into Equal Segments PDSIZE Sets the display size for point objects. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.
The prompt is followed by “Do you want it to turn into one?” Entering y converts the selected object to a polyline. When the prompt is suppressed, the selected object is automatically converted to a polyline. 0 The prompt is displayed 1 The prompt is suppressed See also: Modify Polylines PELLIPSE Controls the ellipse type created with ELLIPSE. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 0 Creates a true ellipse object.
See also: Obtain Area and Mass Properties Information PERSPECTIVE Specifies whether the current viewport displays a perspective view. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:Varies 0 Perspective view turned off 1 Perspective view turned on Perspective views are available only in model space, and only with 3D visual styles. NOTE PERSPECTIVE is set to 0 when the drawing file or DXF file is saved to a file format earlier than AutoCAD 2007.
See also: Define a Perspective Projection (DVIEW) PFACEVMAX Sets the maximum number of vertices per face. (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:4 This system variable affects only legacy polyface meshes such as those created by PFACE (page 792). See also: Create Custom Mesh (Legacy) PICKADD Controls whether subsequent selections replace the current selection set or add to it. Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value:2 0 Turns off PICKADD.
remove objects or subobjects from the set, press SHIFT while selecting. Keeps objects selected after the SELECT (page 949) command ends. See also: Select Multiple Objects PICKAUTO Controls automatic windowing for object selection. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Window selection is disabled. 1 Selects a clicked object or begins a selection window (for either a window or crossing selection) when the cursor is not on an object.
NOTE When PICKBOX is set to 0, selection previewing of objects is not available. See also: Select Objects Individually PICKDRAG Controls the method of drawing a selection window. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:2 0 Create a selection window using two points. Click once to begin a selection window, click again to complete the selection. 1 Create a selection window clicking and dragging. Release the mouse button to complete the selection.
See also: Customize Object Selection PICKSTYLE Controls the use of group selection and associative hatch selection. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 No group selection or associative hatch selection 1 Group selection 2 Associative hatch selection 3 Group selection and associative hatch selection See also: Select Objects in Groups PLATFORM Indicates which platform is in use.
PLINECONVERTMODE Specifies the fit method used in converting splines to polylines. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 0 Polylines are created with linear segments 1 Polylines are created with arc segments See also: Modify Splines PLINEGEN Sets how linetype patterns generate around the vertices of a 2D polyline. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 Does not apply to polylines with tapered segments.
Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 0 Direction of polyline is reversed; order of polyline segment widths is not reversed 1 Order and direction of polyline segments are reversed Polylines are reversed with the REVERSE command. See also: Modify Polylines PLINETYPE Specifies whether optimized 2D polylines are used.
DONUT (page 363), PEDIT (page 779) (when selecting a line or arc), POLYGON (page 832), and SKETCH (page 980) (when SKPOLY (page 1478) is set to 1). See also: Draw Polylines PLINEWID Stores the default polyline width. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.0000 See also: Draw Polylines PLOTOFFSET Controls whether the plot offset is relative to the printable area or to the edge of the paper. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 0 Sets the plot offset relative to the printable area.
Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:2 0 Rotates the effective plotting area so the corner with the Rotation icon aligns with the paper at the lower left for 0, top left for 90, top right for 180, and lower right for 270. X and Y origin offsets are calculated relative to the lower-left corner. 1 Aligns the lower-left corner of the effective plotting area with the lower-left corner of the paper.
See also: Work with Object Properties PLQUIET Controls the display of optional plot-related dialog boxes and nonfatal errors for scripts. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 0 Displays plot dialog boxes and nonfatal errors 1 Logs nonfatal errors and does not display plot-related dialog boxes See also: Switch Between Dialog Boxes and the Command Line POLARADDANG Stores additional angles for polar tracking and polar snap.
POLARANG Sets the polar angle increment. Type: Real Saved in: Registry Initial value:90 Values are 90, 45, 30, 22.5, 18, 15,10, and 5. See also: Use Polar Tracking and PolarSnap POLARDIST Sets the snap increment when the SNAPTYPE is set to 1 (PolarSnap). Type: Real Saved in: Registry Initial value:0.0000 See also: Use Polar Tracking and PolarSnap POLARMODE Controls settings for polar and object snap tracking.
Object snap tracking 0 Track orthogonally only 2 Use polar tracking settings in object snap tracking Use additional polar tracking angles 0 No 4 Yes Acquire object snap tracking points 0 Acquire automatically 8 Press SHIFT to acquire NOTE In a 3D view, a tracking vector parallel to the Z axis of the UCS is also displayed, and the tooltip displays +Z and -Z for the angle depending on the direction along the Z axis.
POPUPS Displays the status of the currently configured display driver. (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:1 0 Does not support dialog boxes and the menu bar 1 Supports these features See also: Set Interface Options PREVIEWCREATIONTRANSPARENCY Controls the transparency of the preview generated while using SURFBLEND, SURFPATCH, SURFFILLET, FILLETEDGE, CHAMFEREDGE, and LOFT.
Initial value:2 0 Dashed lines (the default display for selected objects) 1 Thickened lines 2 Dashed and thickened lines See also: Customize Object Selection PREVIEWFACEEFFECT Specifies the visual effect used for previewing selection of face subobjects. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 No highlight effect for face 1 Highlight face with texture fill See also: Customize Object Selection PREVIEWFILTER Excludes specified object types from selection previewing.
1 Excludes objects on locked layers 2 Excludes objects in xrefs 4 Excludes tables 8 Excludes multiline text objects 16 Excludes hatch objects 32 Excludes objects in groups See also: Customize Object Selection PREVIEWTYPE Controls the view to use for the drawing thumbnail. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 0 Use last saved view 1 Use Home view See also: Save a Drawing PRODUCT Returns the product name.
Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:"AutoCAD" See also: Set Interface Options PROGRAM Returns the program name. (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:"acad" See also: Set Interface Options PROJECTNAME Assigns a project name to the current drawing. Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value:"" Used when an xref, image, or PDF underlay file is not found in its original path.
See also: Set Paths to Referenced Drawings PROJMODE Sets the current Projection mode for trimming or extending. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 True 3D mode (no projection) 1 Project to the XY plane of the current UCS 2 Project to the current view plane See also: Trim or Extend Objects PROPOBJLIMIT Limits the number of objects that can be changed at one time with the Properties Inspector. Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value:25000 The valid range is 0 - 32767.
PROXYGRAPHICS Specifies whether images of proxy objects are saved in the drawing. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1 0 Does not save image with the drawing; a bounding box is displayed instead 1 Saves image with the drawing See also: Work with Custom and Proxy Objects PROXYNOTICE Displays a notice when a proxy is created. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 A proxy is created when you open a drawing containing custom objects created by an application that is not present.
Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Proxy objects are not displayed 1 Graphic images are displayed for all proxy objects 2 Only the bounding box is displayed for all proxy objects See also: Work with Custom and Proxy Objects PROXYWEBSEARCH Specifies how the program checks for object enablers. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 Object enablers allow you to display and use custom objects in drawings even when the ObjectARX application that created them is unavailable.
Initial value:1 0 No special linetype scaling. Linetype dash lengths are based on the drawing units of the space (model or paper) in which the objects were created. Scaled by the global LTSCALE (page 596) factor. 1 Viewport scaling governs linetype scaling. If TILEMODE (page 1511) is set to 0, dash lengths are based on paper space drawing units, even for objects in model space. In this mode, viewports can have varying magnifications, yet display linetypes identically.
PSOLWIDTH Controls the default width for a swept solid object created with the POLYSOLID command. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.2500 (imperial) or 5.0000 (metric) The value reflects the last entered height value when using the POLYSOLID (page 834) command. You cannot enter 0 as the value. See also: Create a Polysolid PSTYLEMODE Indicates whether the current drawing is in a Color-Dependent or Named Plot Style mode.
Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Drawing is set to use named plot styles. The plot style for new objects is set to the default defined in DEFPLSTYLE (page 1250). The plot style for new layers is set to the default defined in DEFLPLSTYLE (page 1250). 1 Drawing is set to use color-dependent plot styles. The plot style for an object is based on the object’s color. See also: Overview of Plot Styles PSVPSCALE Sets the view scale factor for all newly created viewports.
See also: Overview of the User Coordinate System (UCS) Q System Variables QTEXTMODE Controls how text is displayed.
See also: Plot Files to Other Formats RASTERPERCENT Sets the maximum percentage of available virtual memory that is allowed for plotting a raster image. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:20 See also: Plot Files to Other Formats RASTERPREVIEW Controls whether thumbnail preview images are created and saved with the drawing. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 Obsolete. This system variable has been placed with THUMBSAVE.
RASTERTHRESHOLD Specifies a raster threshold in megabytes. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:20 If the plotted raster image exceeds this threshold, the availability of system memory is checked. The plot is aborted if the image is too big for the available memory. See also: Plot Files to Other Formats REBUILD2DCV Sets the number of control vertices when rebuilding a spline. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:6 Valid values are from 2 to 32767.
A curve with a degree of 1 is a straight line and a curve with a degree of 2 has one bend. A Bezier curve has a degree of 3. Higher degrees create more complex curves, but require computations. See also: CVREBUILD (page 249) Rebuild NURBS Surfaces and Curves REBUILD2DOPTION Controls whether to delete the original curve when rebuilding a spline.
Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:3 Valid values are 2 to 11. See also: CVREBUILD (page 249) Rebuild NURBS Surfaces and Curves REBUILDDEGREEV Sets the degree in the V direction when rebuilding a NURBS surface. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:3 Valid values are 2 to 11. See also: CVREBUILD (page 249) Rebuild NURBS Surfaces and Curves REBUILDOPTIONS Controls deletion and trimming options when rebuilding a NURBS surface.
2 The original surface is not deleted and trimmed areas are applied to the rebuilt object. 3 The original surface is deleted and trimmed areas are applied to the rebuilt object. See also: CVREBUILD (page 249) Rebuild NURBS Surfaces and Curves REBUILDU Sets the number of grid lines in the U direction when rebuilding a NURBS surface.
See also: CVREBUILD (page 249) Rebuild NURBS Surfaces and Curves RECOVERAUTO Controls the display of recovery notifications before or after opening a damaged drawing file. Type: Bitcode Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 0 Displays a task dialog to recover damaged files while opening a drawing that needs recovery. The task dialog interrupts any running scripts. 1 Automatically recovers the damaged files, opens the drawing, and displays a task dialog with the information of the recovered files.
See also: Edit Selected Objects in Referenced Drawings and Blocks REGENMODE Controls automatic regeneration of the drawing. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1 0 Turns off the REGENAUTO (page 890) command 1 Turns on the REGENAUTO (page 890) command See also: Control the Display of Polylines, Hatches, Gradient Fills, Lineweights, and Text RE-INIT Reinitializes the acad.pgp file.
See also: Create Command Aliases REMEMBERFOLDERS Controls the default path displayed in standard file selection dialog boxes. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Restores the behavior of AutoCAD 2000 and previous releases. When you start the program by double-clicking a shortcut icon, if a Start In path is specified in the icon properties, that path is used as the default for all standard file selection dialog boxes.
1 Overrides the setting for the DEFAULTLIGHTING system variable. Only user lights are rendered. REPORTERROR Controls whether an error report can be sent to Autodesk if the program closes unexpectedly. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 Error reports help Autodesk diagnose problems with the software. 0 The Error Report message is not displayed, and no report can be sent to Autodesk. 1 The Error Report message is displayed, and an error report can be sent to Autodesk.
See also: Overview of File Organization RTDISPLAY Controls the display of raster images during Realtime ZOOM or PAN. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Displays raster image content 1 Displays outline only See also: Pan or Zoom a View S System Variables SAVEFIDELITY Controls whether the drawing is saved with visual fidelity. Type: Bitcode Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values: 0 Saved without visual fidelity.
See also: Save a Drawing Save with Visual Fidelity for Annotative Objects SAVEFILE Stores the current automatic save file name. (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value:Varies See also: Set Up the Drawing Area SAVEFILEPATH Specifies the path to the directory for all automatic save files for the current session. Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value:Varies You can also change the path in the Application Preferences dialog box.
See also: Obtain General Drawing Information SAVETIME Sets the automatic save interval, in minutes. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:10 0 Turns off automatic saving. >0 Saves the drawing at intervals specified by the nonzero integer automatically The value of SAVETIME is an integer between 0 and 600. The SAVETIME timer starts as soon as you make a change to a drawing. It is reset and restarted by a manual QSAVE (page 872), SAVE (page 926), or SAVEAS (page 926).
SELECTIONANNODISPLAY Controls whether alternate scale representations are temporarily displayed in a dimmed state when an annotative object is selected. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Off 1 On The dimming intensity is controlled by the XFADECTL (page 1574) system variable. See also: Display Annotative Objects SELECTIONAREA Controls the display of effects for selection areas.
SELECTIONAREAOPACITY Controls the transparency of the selection area during window and crossing selection. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:25 The valid range is 0 to 100. The lower the setting, the more transparent the area. A value of 100 makes the area opaque. The SELECTIONAREA (page 1466) system variable must be on. See also: Customize Object Selection SELECTIONCYCLING Turns selection cycling on and off.
Initial value:3 Objects are highlighted when the pickbox cursor rolls over them. This selection previewing indicates that the object would be selected if you clicked. The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values: 0 Off 1 On when no commands are active 2 On when a command prompts for object selection See also: Customize Object Selection SELECTIONPREVIEWLIMIT Limits the number of objects that can display preview highlighting during a window or crossing selection.
Type: Bitcode Saved in: User-settings Initial value:130 The default value is 130. Objects of the same type are considered similar if they are on the same layer, and, for referenced objects, have the same name.
1 Faces shaded, edges drawn in background color 2 Faces not filled, edges in object color 3 Faces in object color, edges in background color See also: Use a Visual Style to Display Your Model SHADEDIF Sets the ratio of diffuse reflective light to ambient light. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:70 The ratio is a percentage of diffuse reflective light when SHADEDGE (page 1469) is set to 0 or 1.
SHORTCUTMENU Controls whether Default, Edit, and Command mode shortcut menus are available in the drawing area. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:11 The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values: 0 Disables all Default, Edit, and Command mode shortcut menus, restoring AutoCAD Release 14 behavior. 1 Enables Default mode shortcut menus. 2 Enables Edit mode shortcut menus. 4 Enables Command mode shortcut menus whenever a command is active.
Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:250 The value is expressed in milliseconds, and the valid range is 100 to 10,000. If the right button is held down for the same or longer duration than the value of this system variable, a shortcut menu is displayed. If the right button is held down for a shorter duration, the result is the same as if you press the Enter or Return key.
Initial value:0 0 Not displayed 1 Displayed See also: The Layers Palette SHOWGROUPS Controls the visibility of layer groups in the Layers list of the Layers palette. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Not displayed 1 Displayed See also: The Layers Palette SHOWHIST Controls the Show History property for solids in a drawing. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1 0 Sets the Show History property to No (read-only) for all solids.
1 Does not override the individual Show History property settings for solids. 2 Displays the history of all solids by overriding the individual Show History property settings for solids. You can view the original objects that were used to create the solid. See also: Display Original Forms of Composite Solids SHOWPAGESETUPFORNEWLAYOUTS Specifies whether the Page Setup Manager is displayed when a new layout is created.
Initial value:1 0 Indicates that there are palettes hidden by the HIDEPALETTES command 1 Indicates that all palettes hidden by the HIDEPALETTES command were restored by the SHOWPALETTES command See also: Control the Drawing Area Interface SHOWUNRECONCILEDLAYERSGROUP Controls the visibility of the dynamic Unreconciled Layers layer group in the Layers palette.
1 Displayed See also: The Layers Palette SHOWXREFGROUPS Controls the visibility of layer groups that are saved in an attached external reference (xref) in the Layers palette. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Not displayed 1 Displayed See also: The Layers Palette SHOWXREFLAYERS Controls the visibility of layers saved in an attached external reference (xref) in the Layers palette.
SHPNAME Sets a default shape name that must conform to symbol- naming conventions. Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:"" If no default is set, it returns "". Enter a period (.) to set no default. See also: Shape Descriptions SIGWARN Controls whether a warning is presented when a file with an attached digital signature is opened. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 If the system variable is on and you open a file with a valid signature, the digital signature status is displayed.
SKPOLY Determines whether the SKETCH command generates lines, polylines, or splines. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 0 Generates lines 1 Generates polylines 2 Generates splines See also: Draw Freehand Sketches SKTOLERANCE Determines how closely the spline fits to the freehand sketch. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.5 Valid values are between 0 and 1. See also: Draw Freehand Sketches SKYSTATUS Determines if the sky illumination is computed at render time.
This has no impact on the viewport illumination or the background. It only makes the sky available as a gathered light source for rendering. 0 Sky off 1 Sky background 2 Sky background and illumination See also: Sun and Sky Simulation SMOOTHMESHCONVERT Sets whether mesh objects that you convert to 3D solids or surfaces are smoothed or faceted, and whether their faces are merged. Type: Bitcode Saved in: User-settings Initial value:0 0 Creates a smooth model. Coplanar faces are optimized, or merged.
SMOOTHMESHGRID Sets the maximum level of smoothness at which the underlying mesh facet grid is displayed on 3D mesh objects.
The initial value of this system variable is adjusted for best performance based on your system configuration. Permissible values are from 108 to 16,000,000. Use this limit to prevent creating extremely dense meshes that might affect program performance. See also: Change Mesh Smoothness Levels SMOOTHMESHMAXLEV Sets the maximum smoothness level for mesh objects. Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value:4 Permissible values are from 1 to 255. The recommended range is 1-5.
SNAPBASE Sets the snap and grid origin point for the current viewport relative to the current UCS. Type: 2D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.0000,0.0000 See also: Adjust Grid and Grid Snap SNAPGRIDLEGACY Controls whether the cursor snaps to the snap grid only when an operation is in progress.
Initial value:0 0 Left 1 Top 2 Right See also: Set Isometric Grid and Snap SNAPMODE Turns the Snap mode on and off. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 0 Snap off 1 Snap on for the current viewport See also: Adjust Grid and Grid Snap SNAPSTYL Sets the snap style for the current viewport.
See also: Adjust Grid and Grid Snap SNAPTYPE Sets the type of snap for the current viewport. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 0 Grid, or standard snap. 1 PolarSnap. Snaps along polar angle increments. Use PolarSnap with polar and object snap tracking. See also: Adjust Grid and Grid Snap SNAPUNIT Sets the snap spacing for the current viewport. Type: 2D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.5000,0.5000 (imperial) or 10.0000,10.
SOLIDCHECK Turns 3D solid validation on and off for the current session. Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:1 0 Off 1 On See also: Clean and Check 3D Solids SOLIDHIST Controls whether new composite solids retain a history of their original components. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1 When set to 1, all subsequently created composite solids retain a history of the original component objects.
SORTENTS Controls object sorting in support of draw order for several operations.
Initial value:1 0 PAN command does not start transparently when the Spacebar is held. 1 PAN command starts transparently after the Spacebar is held for the duration specified in the SPACEPANTIMEOUT system variable. See also: Pan or Zoom a View SPACEPANTIMEOUT Sets the duration that the Spacebar must be held down before the PAN command is started transparently. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:250 Duration is measured in milliseconds. Valid range is 100 to 1000.
See also: Modify Polylines SPLFRAME Controls the display of helixes and smoothed mesh objects. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 0 1 ■ Does not display the control polygon for helixes. ■ Displays smoothed mesh objects if they have been smoothed. ■ Does not display the invisible edges of 3D faces or polyface meshes. ■ Displays the control polygon for helixes. ■ Displays unsmoothed mesh objects, even if they have been smoothed. ■ Displays the edges of 3D faces and polyface meshes.
and then a fit-type curve is applied to those segments. Fit-type curves use arcs as the approximating segments. Using arcs yields a smoother generated curve when few segments are specified, but the curve can take longer to generate. See also: Modify Polylines SPLINETYPE Sets the type of curve generated by the Spline option of the PEDIT command.
NOTE SPLKNOTS always defaults to 0 when AutoCAD starts. See also: Modify Splines SPLMETHOD Stores whether the default method used for the SPLINE command is fit points or control vertices. Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:0 0 Create splines using fit points 1 Create splines using control vertices NOTE SPLMETHOD always defaults to 0 when AutoCAD starts.
See also: Draw Splines SSFOUND Displays the path and file name if a search for a project file is successful. (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:"" SSLOCATE must be set to 1 and the drawing file must be open for a successful search. See also: Publish a Project SSLOCATE Controls whether the project associated with a drawing is located and opened when the drawing is opened.
SSMAUTOOPEN Controls the display behavior of the Project Manager when a drawing associated with a layout is opened. Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value:1 0 Does not open the Project Manager automatically 1 Opens the Project Manager automatically SSMAUTOOPEN and SSLOCATE (page 1491) must both be set to 1 to open a project automatically in the Project Manager.
Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:2 The status data for layouts in the current project includes whether a layout is locked and whether a layout is missing (or found in an unexpected location). This status data can be updated automatically for all layouts.
Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Hides the status bar 1 Shows the status bar See also: The Status Bar SUBOBJSELECTIONMODE Filters whether faces, edges, vertices or solid history subobjects are highlighted when you roll over them. Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:0 In busy 3D environments with many objects, it can be helpful to filter certain subobjects out of the selection highlighting.
When filtering is set for vertices, you cannot select faces, edges, or history subobjects. When filtering is set for edges, you cannot select faces, vertices, or history subobjects. When filtering is set for faces, you cannot select edges, vertices, or history subobjects.
When filtering is set for history subobjects, you can only select the wireframe representations of portions of objects removed during a union, subtract, or intersect operation.
Subobject not eligible for selection See also: Cycle Through and Filter Subobjects LEGACYCTRLPICK (page 1390) SUNSTATUS Turns on and off the lighting effects of the sun in the current viewport. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 Only the lights from sources other than the sun affect the view in the current viewport. 0 Off 1 On See also: Sun and Sky Simulation SUPPRESSALERTS Controls alerts about potential data loss when opening and saving newer drawings in older versions of the product.
By default, an alert displays when a drawing is opened from a more recent version of the product that contains data that might be lost if the drawing is edited and saved. 0 The alert is displayed 1 The alert is suppressed, which might be desirable when running scripts See also: Work with Drawings in Earlier Releases Open a Drawing Save a Drawing SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY Controls whether surfaces maintain a relationship with the objects from which they were created.
SURFACEASSOCIATIVITYDRAG Sets the dragging preview behavior of associative surfaces. Type: Switch Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 Controls the preview behavior of surfaces and any associated surfaces when a selected surface is dragged. Disabling the preview can increase performance. 0 Displays no preview. The display refreshes after dragging is complete. 1 Previews only the movement of the first associated surface. All other associated surfaces do not move until after dragging is complete.
SURFACEMODELINGMODE Controls whether surfaces are created as procedural surfaces or NURBS surfaces. Type: Switch Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:0 0 Creates a procedural surface when creating surfaces. 1 Creates a NURBS surface when creating surfaces. See also: Create Solids and Surfaces from Lines and Curves Create Surfaces SURFTAB1 Sets the number of tabulations to be generated for the RULESURF and TABSURF commands.
See also: Construct Meshes from Other Objects SURFTYPE Controls the type of surface-fitting to be performed by the Smooth option of the PEDIT command. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:6 5 Quadratic B-spline surface 6 Cubic B-spline surface 8 Bezier surface See also: Modify Polylines SURFU Sets the surface density for PEDIT Smooth in the M direction and the U isolines density on surface objects. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:6 Valid values are 0 through 200.
SURFV Sets the surface density for PEDIT Smooth in the N direction and the V isolines density on surface objects. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:6 Valid values are 0 through 200. Meshes are always created with a minimum surface density of 2. See also: Modify Polylines SYSCODEPAGE Indicates the system code page, which is determined by the operating system. (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:Varies To change the code page, see Help for your operating system.
Initial value:1 0 Off 1 On See also: Create and Modify Tables TARGET Stores the location (as a UCS coordinate) of the target point for the current viewport. (Read-only) Type: 3D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.0000,0.0000,0.0000 See also: Overview of Parallel and Perspective Views TBSHOWSHORTCUTS Specifies if shortcut keys are displayed in tooltips.
TDCREATE Stores the local time and date the drawing was created. (Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:Varies See also: Add Identifying Information to Drawings TDINDWG Stores the total editing time, which is the total elapsed time between saves of the current drawing. (Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:Varies The format is: . To compute the number of seconds, multiply the decimal fraction in TDINDWG by 86400 seconds.
See also: Add Identifying Information to Drawings TDUPDATE Stores the local time and date of the last update/save. (Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:Varies See also: Add Identifying Information to Drawings TDUSRTIMER Stores the user-elapsed timer. (Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:Varies See also: Add Identifying Information to Drawings TDUUPDATE Stores the universal time and date of the last update or save.
TEMPOVERRIDES Turns temporary override keys on and off. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 A temporary override key is a key that you can hold down to temporarily turn on or turn off one of the drawing aids that are set in the Drafting Settings dialog box; for example, Ortho mode, object snaps, or Polar mode. 0 Off 1 On See also: Override Object Snap Settings TEMPPREFIX Contains the directory name (if any) configured for placement of temporary files, with a path separator appended.
Saved in: Registry Initial value:2 0 Displays the In-Place Text Editor when creating or editing single-line text. 1 Displays the Edit Text dialog box when editing single-line text. 2 Displays the In-Place Text Editor when creating or editing single-line text. Repeats the command automatically. See also: Change Single-Line Text TEXTEVAL Controls how text strings entered with TEXT (using scripts or AutoLISP) or with -TEXT are evaluated.
TEXTFILL Controls the filling of TrueType fonts while printing. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Displays text as outlines 1 Displays text as filled images See also: Use TrueType Fonts TEXTOUTPUTFILEFORMAT Provides Unicode options for log files.
TEXTQLTY Sets the resolution tessellation fineness of text outlines. Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:50 Sets the resolution tessellation fineness of text outlines for TrueType fonts while plotting and rendering. 0 represents no effort to refine the smoothness of the text; 100 represents a maximum effort to smooth text characters. Lower values decrease resolution and increase plotting speed. Higher values increase resolution and decrease plotting speed.
See also: Overview of Text Styles THICKNESS Sets the current 3D thickness. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.0000 See also: Add 3D Thickness to Objects THUMBSAVE Controls whether thumbnail preview images are created and saved with the drawing.
Saved in: Registry Initial value:3 Whether preview images are saved in drawings is controlled by the THUMBSAVE system variable. 0 64 x 64 1 128 x 128 2 256 x 256 3 512 x 512 4 1024 x 1024 5 1440 x 1440 6 1600 x 1600 7 1920 x 1920 8 2560 x 2560 See also: Open a Drawing Save a Drawing Preview Open Drawings and Layouts TILEMODE Makes the Model tab or the last layout tab current.
1 Makes the Model tab active See also: Set Model Space Viewports TIMEZONE Sets the time zone for the sun in the drawing. Type: Enum Saved in: Drawing Initial value:-8000 The values in the table are expressed as hours and minutes away from Greenwich Mean Time. The geographic location you set also sets the time zone.
-6000 Central America -6001 Central Time (US & Canada) -6002 Guadalajara, Mexico City, Monterrey -6003 Saskatchewan -5000 Eastern Time (US & Canada) -5001 Indiana (East) -5002 Bogota, Lima, Quito -4000 Atlantic Time (Canada) -4001 Caracas, La Paz -4002 Santiago -3300 Newfoundland -3000 Brasilia -3001 Buenos Aires, Georgetown -3002 Greenland -2000 Mid-Atlantic -1000 Azores -1001 Cape Verde Is.
1 Greenwich Mean Time 2 Casablanca, Monrovia +1000 Amsterdam, Berlin, Bern, Rome, Stockholm +1001 Brussels, Madrid, Copenhagen, Paris +1002 Belgrade, Bratislava, Budapest, Ljubljana, Prague +1003 Sarajevo, Skopje, Warsaw, Zagreb +1004 West Central Africa +2000 Athens, Beirut, Istanbul, Minsk +2001 Bucharest +2002 Cairo +2003 Harare, Pretoria +2004 Helsinki, Kyiv, Sofia, Talinn, Vilnius +2005 Jerusalem +3000 Moscow, St.
+4000 Abu Dhabi, Muscat +4001 Baku, Tbilisi, Yerevan +4300 Kabul +5000 Ekaterinburg +5001 Islamabad, Karachi, Tashkent +5300 Chennai, Kolkata, Mumbai, New Delhi +5450 Kathmandu +6000 Almaty, Novosibirsk +6001 Astana, Dhaka +6002 Sri Jayawardenepura +6300 Rangoon +7000 Bangkok, Hanoi, Jakarta +7001 Krasnoyarsk +8000 Beijing, Chongqing, Hong Kong, Urumqi +8001 Kuala Lumpur, Singapore +8002 Taipei +8003 Irkutsk, Ulaan Bataar +8004 Perth T System Variables | 1515
+9000 Osaka, Sapporo, Tokyo +9001 Seoul +9002 Yakutsk +9300 Adelaide +9301 Darwin +10000 Canberra, Melbourne, Sydney +10001 Guam, Port Moresby +10002 Brisbane +10003 Hobart +10004 Vladivostok +11000 Magadan, Solomon Is., New Caledonia +12000 Auckland, Wellington +12001 Fiji, Kamchatka, Marshall Is. +13000 Nuku’alofa See also: Specify Units and Unit Formats TOOLSETSSTATE Indicates whether the Tool Sets palette is open or closed.
Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:1 0 Closed 1 Open See also: The Tool Sets Palette TOOLTIPMERGE Combines drafting tooltips into a single tooltip. Type: Switch Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 0 Off 1 On See also: Set Interface Options TOOLTIPSIZE Sets the display size for drafting tooltips, and for automatic completion text at the Command prompt. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 Valid range is -3 to 6.
See also: Use Dynamic Input TOOLTIPTRANSPARENCY Sets the transparency for drafting tooltips. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 Valid range is 0 to 100. When a value of 0 is used, the drafting tooltip is fully opaque. The greater the value entered, the more transparent the drafting tooltip will appear. See also: Parts of the User Interface TRACKPATH Controls the display of polar and object snap tracking alignment paths.
See also: Use Polar Tracking and PolarSnap TRANSPARENCYDISPLAY Controls whether the object transparency is displayed. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Object transparency is not displayed 1 Object transparency is displayed See also: Control the Display Properties of Certain Objects TREEDEPTH Specifies the maximum depth, that is, the number of times the tree-structured spatial index can divide into branches.
ate for 2D drawings and makes more efficient use of memory without loss of performance NOTE You cannot use TREEDEPTH transparently. See also: Work with Layer and Spatial Indexes TREEMAX Limits memory consumption during drawing regeneration by limiting the number of nodes in the spatial index (oct-tree).
TRIMMODE Controls whether selected edges for chamfers and fillets are trimmed. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Leaves selected edges intact 1 Trims selected edges to the endpoints of chamfer lines and fillet arcs See also: Create Chamfers TSPACEFAC Controls the multiline text line-spacing distance measured as a factor of text height. Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:1.0000 Valid values are 0.25 to 4.0.
At Least adjusts line spacing based on the tallest characters in a line. Exactly uses the specified line spacing, regardless of individual character sizes. 1 At Least 2 Exactly See also: Specify the Line Spacing Within Multiline Text TSTACKALIGN Controls the vertical alignment of stacked text.
See also: Create Stacked Characters Within Multiline Text U System Variables UCS2DDISPLAYSETTING Displays the UCS icon when the 2D Wireframe visual style is current. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Off. The UCS icon is not displayed when the 2D Wireframe visual style is current. 1 On. The UCS icon is displayed when the 2D Wireframe visual style is current. NOTE The UCSICON (page 1112) command must also be set to ON to display the UCS icon.
1 On. The UCS icon is displayed when perspective is turned off and a 3D visual style is current. NOTE The UCSICON (page 1112) command must also be set to ON to display the UCS icon. See also: The UCS Icon Control the Display of the User Coordinate System Icon UCS3DPERPDISPLAYSETTING Displays the UCS icon when perspective view is on and a 3D visual style is current. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Off.
Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:90 Its value must be entered as an angle in degrees (valid values are: 5, 10, 15, 18, 22.5, 30, 45, 90, 180). See also: Work with the User Coordinate System (UCS) UCSBASE Stores the name of the UCS that defines the origin and orientation of orthographic UCS settings. Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value:"" Valid values include any named UCS.
UCSFOLLOW Generates a plan view whenever you change from one UCS to another. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 The UCSFOLLOW setting is saved separately for each viewport. If UCSFOLLOW is on for a particular viewport, a plan view is generated in that viewport whenever you change coordinate systems. Once the new UCS has been established, you can use DVIEW (page 389), PLAN (page 794), VIEW (page 1139), or VPOINT (page 1149) to change the view of the drawing.
The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values: 0 No icon is displayed 1 On; the icon is displayed in the lower-left corner of the current viewport or layout 2 Origin; if the icon is on, the icon is displayed at the UCS origin, if possible The setting of this system variable is viewport and layout specific. See also: Control the Display of the User Coordinate System Icon UCSNAME Stores the name of the current coordinate system for the current viewport in the current space.
See also: Overview of the User Coordinate System (UCS) Assign UCS Definitions to Viewports UCSORTHO Determines whether the related orthographic UCS setting is restored automatically when an orthographic view is restored.
UCSVIEW Determines whether the current UCS is saved with a named view. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Does not save current UCS with a named view 1 Saves current UCS whenever a named view is created See also: Save and Restore Views UCSVP Determines whether the UCS in viewports remains fixed or changes to reflect the UCS of the current viewport. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1 The setting of this system variable is viewport specific.
(Read-only) Type: 3D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1.0000,0.0000,0.0000 The setting of this system variable is viewport specific. See also: Overview of the User Coordinate System (UCS) UCSYDIR Stores the Y direction of the current UCS for the current viewport in the current space. (Read-only) Type: 3D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.0000,1.0000,0.0000 The setting of this system variable is viewport specific.
2 Only one command can be undone 4 Auto is turned on 8 A group is currently active 16 Zoom and pan operations are grouped as a single action 32 Layer property operations are grouped as a single action See also: Correct Mistakes UNDOMARKS Stores the number of marks placed in the UNDO control stream by the Mark option. (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:0 The Mark and Back options are not available if a group is currently active.
By default, the format for displaying measured values differs slightly from the format used for entering them. (You cannot include spaces when entering measured values.
UPDATETHUMBNAIL Controls updating of the thumbnail previews for views and layouts.
USERR1-5 Provides storage and retrieval of real numbers. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.0000 There are five system variables: USERR1, USERR2, USERR3, USERR4, and USERR5. See also: DIESEL Expressions in Macros USERS1-5 Provides storage and retrieval of text string data. Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:"" There are five system variables: USERS1, USERS2, USERS3, USERS4, and USERS5.
See also: Pan or Zoom a View VIEWDIR Stores the viewing direction in the current viewport, expressed in UCS coordinates. (Read-only) Type: 3D-vector Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.0000,0.0000,1.0000 This describes the camera point as a 3D offset from the target point. See also: Change to a View of the XY Plane VIEWMODE Stores the View mode for the current viewport.
16 Front clip not at eye. If on, the front clip distance (FRONTZ (page 1339)) determines the front clipping plane. If off, FRONTZ is ignored, and the front clipping plane is set to pass through the camera point (vectors behind the camera are not displayed). This flag is ignored if the front-clipping bit (2) is off. See also: Save and Restore Views VIEWSIZE Stores the height of the view displayed in the current viewport, measured in drawing units.
VISRETAIN Controls the properties of xref-dependent layers. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1 Controls visibility, color, linetype, lineweight, and plot styles. 0 The layer table, as stored in the reference drawing (xref), takes precedence. Changes made to xref-dependent layers in the current drawing are valid in the current session only and are not saved with the drawing.
VPCOORDDISPLAY Controls whether the current coordinates value of the crosshair cursor are displayed in the lower-right corner of the active viewport. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Off 1 On See also: Parts of the User Interface VPLAYEROVERRIDES Indicates if there are any layers with viewport (VP) property overrides for the current layout viewport.
VPLAYEROVERRIDESMODE Controls whether layer property overrides for layout viewports are displayed and plotted. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Layer property overrides are not displayed in layout viewports or plotted 1 Layer property overrides are displayed in layout viewports and plotted See also: Override Layer Properties in Viewports VPMAXIMIZEDSTATE Indicates whether the viewport is maximized or not.
VPROTATEASSOC Controls whether the view within a viewport is rotated with the viewport when the viewport is rotated. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 When a viewport is rotated, the view inside is not rotated. 1 When a viewport is rotated, the view inside is rotated to match the rotation of the viewport. NOTE After rotating a viewport, VPROTATEASSOC is set to 0 for a new viewport created in the same layout.
VSACURVATURELOW Sets the value at which a surface displays as blue during curvature analysis (ANALYSISCURVATURE (page 61)). Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:-1 The default value for this system variable is -1. See also: ANALYSISOPTIONS (page 63) ANALYSISOPTIONS - Curvature Tab (page 65) VSACURVATURETYPE Controls which type of curvature analysis is used with the (ANALYSISCURVATURE (page 61)).
VSADRAFTANGLEHIGH Sets the value at which a model displays as green during draft analysis (ANALYSISDRAFT (page 62)). Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:3 Draft angle is the angle in degrees between the surface normal and the UCS plane. High value is set by this system variable.
90 Surface is parallel to the construction plane with surface normal facing the same direction as the UCS. See also: ANALYSISOPTIONS (page 63) ANALYSISOPTIONS - Draft Angle Tab (page 66) VSAZEBRACOLOR1 Sets the first color of the zebra stripes displayed during zebra analysis (ANALYSISZEBRA). Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value:RGB: 255, 255, 255 Values 1-255 designate an AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) color. Values for RGB True Color are represented as a comma-separated string of integers 000 to 255.
NOTE When a color book is installed, any colors defined in the book can be used. See also: ANALYSISOPTIONS (page 63) ANALYSISOPTIONS - Zebra Tab (page 64) VSAZEBRADIRECTION Controls whether zebra stripes display horizontally, vertically, or at an angle during zebra analysis (ANALYSISBRA). Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:90 0 Horizontal 90 Vertical NOTE Enter a value between 0 and 90 degrees to set Zebra stripes at an angle.
ANALYSISOPTIONS - Zebra Tab (page 64) VSAZEBRATYPE Sets the type of zebra display when using zebra analysis (ANALYSISZEBRA). Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1 0 Chrome Ball 1 Cylinder See also: ANALYSISOPTIONS (page 63) ANALYSISOPTIONS - Zebra Tab (page 64) VSBACKGROUNDS Controls whether backgrounds are displayed in the visual style applied to the current viewport.
VSEDGECOLOR Sets the color of edges in the visual style in the current viewport. Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value:BYENTITY Value 0 designates ByBlock, value 256 designates ByLayer, and value 257 designates ByEntity. Values 1-255 designate an AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) color. True Colors and Color Book colors are also available. Valid values for True Colors are a string of integers each from 0 to 255 separated by commas and preceded by RGB.
1 Low 2 Medium 3 High NOTE Negative numbers store the value but turn off the effect. Plot styles are not available for objects with the Jitter edge modifier applied. NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style. See also: Control the Display of Edges VSEDGELEX Makes edges on 3D objects extend beyond their intersection for a hand-drawn effect.
NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style. See also: Control the Display of Edges VSEDGEOVERHANG Makes edges on 3D objects extend beyond their intersection for a hand-drawn effect. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:-6 The amount of overhang can be set between 1 and 100 pixels. Negative numbers store the value but turn off the effect.
Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1 isolines displayed facet edges displayed 0 No edges are displayed 1 Isolines are displayed 2 Facet edges are displayed NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.
VSEDGESMOOTH Specifies the angle at which crease edges are displayed. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1 The range is 0 to 180. NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style. See also: Control the Display of Edges VSFACECOLORMODE Controls how the color of faces is calculated.
See also: Shade and Color Faces VSFACEHIGHLIGHT Controls the display of specular highlights on faces without materials in the current viewport. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:-30 The range is -100 to 100. The higher the number, the larger the highlight. Objects with materials attached ignore the setting of VSFACEHIGHLIGHT when VSMATERIALMODE (page 1557) is on. NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable.
NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style. See also: Shade and Color Faces VSFACESTYLE Controls how faces are displayed in the current viewport.
See also: Shade and Color Faces VSHALOGAP Sets the halo gap in the visual style applied to the current viewport. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 The range is 0 to 100. NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.
VSINTERSECTIONCOLOR Specifies the color of intersection polylines in the visual style applied to the current viewport. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:7 The initial value is 7, which is a special value that inverts the color (black or white) based on the background color. Value 0 designates ByBlock, value 256 designates ByLayer, and value 257 designates ByEntity. Values 1-255 designate an AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) color. True Colors and Color Book colors are also available.
NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style. See also: Control the Display of Edges VSINTERSECTIONLTYPE Sets the linetype for intersection lines in the visual style applied to the current viewport. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1 The range is 1 to 11.
11 Sparse Dot NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style. See also: Control the Display of Edges VSISOONTOP Displays isolines on top of shaded objects in the visual style applied to the current viewport.
Initial value:1 0 Faceted. A single color is computed for each face of a surface or 3D solid. 1 Smooth. The colors are computed as a gradient between the vertices of the faces. 2 Smoothest. If the Per-Pixel Lighting setting is turned on in the Manual Performance Tuning dialog box, then the colors are computed for individual pixels. If not, the Smooth setting is used instead. NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable.
NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style. See also: Use a Visual Style to Display Your Model VSMAX Stores the upper-right corner of the current viewport's virtual screen. (Read-only) Type: 3D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value:Varies Expressed as a UCS coordinate.
Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value:255,255,255 The initial value is white. NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style. See also: Shade and Color Faces VSOBSCUREDCOLOR Specifies the color of obscured (hidden) lines in the visual style applied to the current viewport.
Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1 0 Off 1 On NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style. See also: Control the Display of Edges VSOBSCUREDLTYPE Specifies the linetype of obscured (hidden) lines in the visual style applied to the current viewport. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1 The range is 1 to 11.
5 Medium Dash 6 Long Dash 7 Double Short Dash 8 Double Medium Dash 9 Double Long Dash 10 Medium Long Dash 11 Sparse Dot The initial value of VSOBSCUREDLTYPE varies on the current visual style.
Visual Style (VSCURRENT) Initial Value Sketchy 1 Wireframe 1 X-ray 1 Realistic 1 NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style. See also: Control the Display of Edges VSOCCLUDEDCOLOR Specifies the color of occluded (hidden) lines in the visual style applied to the current viewport.
See also: Control the Display of Edges VSOCCLUDEDEDGES Controls whether occluded (hidden) edges are displayed. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1 0 Off 1 On NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.
3 Dotted 4 Short Dash 5 Medium Dash 6 Long Dash 7 Double Short Dash 8 Double Medium Dash 9 Double Long Dash 10 Medium Long Dash 11 Sparse Dot The initial value of VSOCCLUDEDLTYPE varies on the current visual style.
Visual Style (VSCURRENT) Initial Value Shaded 1 Shaded with Edges 2 Shades of Gray 1 Sketchy 1 Wireframe 1 X-ray 1 Realistic 1 NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style. See also: Control the Display of Edges VSSHADOWS Controls whether a visual style displays shadows.
NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style. See also: Display Backgrounds and Shadows VSSILHEDGES Controls display of silhouette edges of solid objects in the visual style applied to the current viewport. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 0 Off 1 On The initial value of VSSILHEDGES depends on the current visual style.
Visual Style (VSCURRENT) Initial Value Shaded 0 Shaded with Edges 1 Shades of Gray 1 Sketchy 1 Wireframe 0 X-ray 0 Realistic 0 NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style. See also: Control the Display of Edges VSSILHWIDTH Specifies the width in pixels of silhouette edges in the current viewport.
See also: Control the Display of Edges VTDURATION Sets the duration of a smooth view transition, in milliseconds. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:750 The valid range is 0 to 5000. See also: Pan or Zoom a View VTENABLE Controls when smooth view transitions are used. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:3 Smooth view transitions can be on or off for panning and zooming, for changes of view angle, or for scripts. The valid range is 0 to 7.
Setting For pan/zoom For rotation For scripts 5 On Off On 6 Off On On 7 On On On See also: Pan or Zoom a View VTFPS Sets the minimum speed of a smooth view transition, in frames per second. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:7 When a smooth view transition cannot maintain this speed, an instant transition is used. The valid range is 1 to 30. See also: Pan or Zoom a View W System Variables WHIPARC Controls whether the display of circles and arcs is smooth.
1 Circles and arcs are smooth, displayed as true circles and arcs See also: Draw Curved Objects WINDOWAREACOLOR Controls the color of the transparent selection area during window selection. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:150 The valid range is 1 to 255. SELECTIONAREA (page 1466) must be on. See also: Customize Object Selection WIPEOUTFRAME Controls the display of frames for wipeout objects.
See also: Create a Blank Area to Cover Objects WORLDUCS Indicates whether the UCS is the same as the WCS. (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:1 0 UCS differs from the WCS 1 UCS matches the WCS See also: Overview of the User Coordinate System (UCS) WORLDVIEW Determines whether input to the DVIEW and VPOINT commands is relative to the WCS (default) or the current UCS.
WRITESTAT Indicates whether a drawing file is read-only or can be revised. (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:1 For developers who need to determine write status through AutoLISP. 0 Cannot write to the drawing 1 Can write to the drawing See also: Overview of AutoLISP X System Variables XCLIPFRAME Determines whether xref clipping boundaries are visible or plotted in the current drawing.
2 The clipped xref frame is displayed but not plotted See also: Update Referenced Drawing Attachments XDWGFADECTL Controls the dimming for all DWG xref objects. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:70 The valid XDWGFADECTL system variable value is between -90 and 90. When XDWGFADECTL is set to a negative value, the Xref Fading feature is not turned on, but the setting is stored. 0 DWG xref objects are not faded. >0 When the value is positive, controls the percent of fading up to 90 percent.
Initial value:1 0 Cannot use in-place reference editing 1 Can use in-place reference editing See also: Update Referenced Drawing Attachments XFADECTL Controls the amount of fading within a reference being edited in place. This setting affects only the objects that are not being edited in the reference. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:50 Valid values are from 0 to 90.
1 Turns on demand-loading. Referenced drawings are kept open and locked. 2 Turns on demand-loading. Copies of referenced drawings are opened and locked; referenced drawings are not locked When XLOADCTL is set to 2, a copy of each referenced drawing file is stored in the folder specified by the XLOADPATH system variable or the temporary files folder (set in the Application Preferences dialog box).
1 Writes log files See also: Track External Reference Operations (Log File) XREFNOTIFY Controls the notification for updated or missing xrefs. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:2 0 or 1 Disables xref notification 2 Enables xref notification and balloon messages. See also: Update Referenced Drawing Attachments XREFSTATE Indicates whether the Reference Manager palette is open or closed, and can be used to toggle the display state of the Reference Manager palette.
XREFTYPE Controls the default reference type when attaching or overlaying an external reference. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 0 Attachment is the default 1 Overlay is the default See also: Nest and Overlay Referenced Drawings Z System Variables ZOOMFACTOR Controls how much the magnification changes when the mouse wheel moves forward or backward. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:60 Accepts an integer between 3 and 100 as a valid value.
Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 0 Moves wheel forward zooms in; moving wheel backwards zooms out. 1 Move wheel forward zooms out; moving wheel backwards zooms in.
Index 3D command 7 3D Edit Bar shortcut menu 30 3D Free Orbit cursor icons 34 3D Move Gizmo shortcut menu 39 3D Object Snap tab (Drafting Settings dialog box) 379 3D Rotate Gizmo shortcut menu 50 3D Scale Gizmo shortcut menu 52 3DALIGN command 19 3DARRAY command 20 3DCONFIG command 22 3DDISTANCE command 25 3DEDITBAR command 25 3DFACE command 31 3DFORBIT command 33 3DMESH command 35 3DMOVE command 36 3DORBIT command 40 3DORBIT shortcut menu 41 3DORBITCTR command 43 3DOSMODE system variable 1202 3DOSNAP comma
ARRAYCLASSIC command ARRAYCLOSE command 91 ARRAYEDIT command 92 ARRAYEDITSTATE system variable 1211 ARRAYPATH command 99 Path Array visor 96 ARRAYPOLAR command 104 Polar Array visor 97 ARRAYRECT command 108 Rectangular Array visor 98 ARRAYTYPE system variable 1212 ARX command 111 associative arrays ATTACH command 112 Attach External Reference dialog box 1173 Attach Image dialog box 515 Attach PDF Underlay dialog box Attachment tab (Leader Settings dialog box) 870 ATTDEF command 112 ATTDIA system variable 12
BROWSER command 163 BSAVE command 163 BSAVEAS command 164 BTMARKDISPLAY system variable 1221 C CACHEMAXFILES system variable CAL command 165 Callout Blocks dialog box 976 CAMERADISPLAY system variable 1222 CANNOSCALE system variable 1222 CANNOSCALEVALUE system variable 1223 CCONSTRAINTFORM system variable 1223 CDATE system variable 1223 CECOLOR system variable 1224 Cell Border Properties dialog box 847 CELTSCALE system variable 1224 CELTYPE system variable 1225 CELWEIGHT system variable 1225 CENTERMT syst
CONSTRAINTINFER system variable 1237 CONSTRAINTNAMEFORMAT system variable 1238 CONSTRAINTRELAX system variable 1238 CONSTRAINTSETTINGS command 219 CONSTRAINTSOLVEMODE system variable 1239 Content palette 223 Content tab (Modify Multileader Style dialog box) 667 CONTENTCLOSE command 226 CONTENTSTATE system variable 1239 CONVERT command 226 CONVTOMESH command 227 CONVTONURBS command 229 CONVTOSOLID command 230 CONVTOSURFACE command 232 Coordinate Filters command modifier 1195 COPY command 235 COPYBASE command
DEFAULTLIGHTINGTYPE system variable 1250 DEFLPLSTYLE system variable 1250 DEFPLSTYLE system variable 1251 DELAY command 273 DELCONSTRAINT command 273 Delete Duplicate Objects dialog box 749 DELOBJ system variable 1252 DEMANDLOAD system variable 1253 dialog boxes suppressing display 3 DIASTAT system variable 1253 DIM and DIM1 commands 274 DIMADEC system variable 1254 DIMALIGNED command 277 DIMALT system variable 1254 DIMALTD system variable 1255 DIMALTF system variable 1255 DIMALTRND system variable 1255 DIM
DIMSD2 system variable 1279 DIMSE1 system variable 1280 DIMSE2 system variable 1280 DIMSOXD system variable 1281 DIMSPACE command 318 DIMSTYLE command about 319 Compare Dimension Styles dialog box 352 Create New Dimension Style dialog box 322 Dimension Style Manager 320 Modify Dimension Style dialog box 323 New Dimension Style dialog box 323 Override Dimension Style dialog box 323 DIMSTYLE system variable 1281 DIMTAD system variable 1282 DIMTDEC system variable 1282 DIMTEDIT command 355 DIMTFAC system varia
DIVMESHWEDGEWIDTH system variable 1308 Document Settings tab (Application Preferences dialog box) 743 DONUT command 363 DONUTID system variable 1309 DONUTOD system variable 1309 Draft Angle Handle 593 Draft Angle tab (Analysis Options dialog box) 66 DRAGMODE command 364 DRAGMODE system variable 1310 DRAGP1 system variable 1310 DRAGP2 system variable 1310 DRAGVS system variable 1311 Drawing Units dialog box 1131 DRAWINGRECOVERY command about 365 Files Recovered dialog box 366 DRAWORDER command 367 DRAWORDERC
FACETERGRIDRATIO system variable 1328 FACETERMAXEDGELENGTH system variable 1328 FACETERMAXGRID system variable 1329 FACETERMESHTYPE system variable 1329 FACETERMINUGRID system variable 1330 FACETERMINVGRID system variable 1331 FACETERPRIMITIVEMODE system variable 1331 FACETERSMOOTHLEV system variable 1332 FACETRATIO system variable 1333 FACETRES system variable 1333 FIELD command 432 Field dialog box 433 FIELDDISPLAY system variable 1334 FIELDEVAL system variable 1334 FILEDIA system variable 1335 Files Reco
GRIPHOVER system variable 1348 GRIPMULTIFUNCTIONAL system variable 1348 GRIPOBJLIMIT system variable 1349 GRIPS system variable 1349 GRIPSIZE system variable 1350 GRIPSUBOBJMODE system variable 1350 GRIPTIPS system variable 1351 GROUP command 199, 471 GROUPDISPLAYMODE system variable 1351 GROUPEDIT command about 473 GROUPLAYERDELETABLE system variable 1352 GROUPSONTOP system variable 1353 GTAUTO system variable 1353 GTDEFAULT system variable 1354 GTLOCATION system variable 1354 H HALOGAP system variable 13
IMAGE command 511 IMAGEADJUST command 513 IMAGEATTACH command about 514 Attach Image dialog box 515 IMAGECLIP command 518 IMAGEFRAME system variable 1370 IMAGEHLT system variable 1370 IMAGEQUALITY command 519 IMPLIEDFACE system variable 1371 IMPORT command 520 Import Page Setups dialog box 764 IMPRINT command 521 In-Place Text Editor about 678 Index Color tab (Select Color dialog box) 206 INDEXCTL system variable 1371 INETLOCATION system variable 1372 INPUTHISTORYMODE system variable 1372 INSBASE system var
LAYFRZ command 558, 559 LAYISO command 560 LAYLCK command 561 LAYLOCKFADECTL system variable 1388 LAYMCUR command 563 LAYOFF command 564 LAYON command 565 LAYOUT command 566 Layout visor 567 Layout visor 567 LAYOUTCREATEVIEWPORT system variable 1389 LAYOUTREGENCTL system variable 1390 LAYTHW command 568 LAYULK command 569 LAYUNISO command 569 LEADER command 570 Leader Format tab (Modify Multileader Style dialog box) 665 Leader Line & Arrow tab (Leader Settings dialog box) 870 Leader Settings dialog box 867
LTSCALE command 596 LTSCALE system variable 1402 LUNITS system variable 1403 LUPREC system variable 1403 LWDEFAULT system variable 1404 LWDISPLAY system variable 1404 LWEIGHT command 597 LWUNITS system variable 1405 M Magnitude Handle 593 Manage Cell Content dialog box 1066 manage content 225 Manage Content Libraries dialog box 225 MASSPROP command 600 MATBROWSERCLOSE command 604 MATBROWSEROPEN command 605 MATBROWSERSTATE system variable 1405 MATCHCELL command 608 MATCHPROP command 609 Material Condition d
Text Editor visor 682 MTEXTCOLUMN system variable 1411 MTEXTFIXED system variable 1412 MTJIGSTRING system variable 1413 MTP command modifier 1197 Multileader Style Manager 662 MULTIPLE command 702 MVIEW command 703 MVSETUP command 706 MYDOCUMENTSPREFIX system variable 1413 N Named UCSs tab (UCS dialog box) 1117 Named Viewports tab (Viewports dialog box) 1153 NAVVCUBE command 711 NAVVCUBEDISPLAY system variable 1414 NAVVCUBELOCATION system variable 1414 NAVVCUBEOPACITY system variable 1415 NAVVCUBEORIENT sy
P Page Setup dialog box 758 Page Setup Manager about 754 Page Setup dialog box 758 PAGESETUP command about 753 Import Page Setups dialog box 764 New Page Setup dialog box 757 Page Setup dialog box 758 Page Setup Manager 754 PAGESETUPEDIT command 765 PALETTEICONOFF command 766 PALETTEICONON command 766 PALETTEICONSTATE system variable 1425 PAN command 767 Pan shortcut menu 768 PAPERSPACEVISOR system variable 1425 PAPERUPDATE system variable 1426 Paragraph dialog box 685 PARAMETERCOPYMODE system variable 1427
Polar Tracking tab (Drafting Settings dialog box) 373 POLARADDANG system variable 1440 POLARANG system variable 1441 POLARDIST system variable 1441 POLARMODE system variable 1442 POLYGON command 832 POLYSIDES system variable 1442 POLYSOLID command 834 POPUPS system variable 1443 PRESSPULL command 838 PREVIEW command 840 PREVIEWCREATIONTRANSPARENCY system variable 1443 PREVIEWEFFECT system variable 1444 PREVIEWFACEEFFECT system variable 1444 PREVIEWFILTER system variable 1445 PREVIEWTYPE system variable 1445
RAY command 877 RE-INIT system variable] 1461 Rebuild Curve dialog box 251 Rebuild Surface dialog box 250 REBUILD2DCV system variable 1455 REBUILD2DDEGREE system variable 1456 REBUILD2DOPTION system variable 1456 REBUILDDEGREEU system variable 1457 REBUILDDEGREEV system variable 1457 REBUILDOPTIONS system variable 1458 REBUILDU system variable 1458 REBUILDV system variable 1459 RECOVER command 878 RECOVERAUTO system variable 1459 RECTANG command 878 Rectangular Array visor 98 REDEFINE command 880 REDO comma
SCALELISTEDIT command about 930 Edit Drawing Scales dialog box 931 SCREENSIZE system variable 1465 SCRIPT command 932 SECTION command 933 Section Settings dialog box 940 SECTIONPLANE command 936 SECTIONPLANEJOG command 938 SECTIONPLANESETTINGS command about 939 New Layer Name dialog box 945 Section Settings dialog box 940 SECTIONPLANETOBLOCK command about 946 Generate Section / Elevation dialog box 947 Select Color dialog box about 205 Color Books tab 211 Index Color tab 206 True Color tab 208 SELECT comman
SKTOLERANCE system variable 1478 SKYSTATUS system variable 1479 SLICE command 981 SMOOTHMESHCONVERT system variable 1479 SMOOTHMESHGRID system variable 1480 SMOOTHMESHMAXFACE system variable 1481 SMOOTHMESHMAXLEV system variable 1481 Snap and Grid tab (Drafting Settings dialog box) 369 SNAP command 987 SNAPANG system variable 1481 SNAPBASE system variable 1482 SNAPGRIDLEGACY system variable SNAPISOPAIR system variable 1483 SNAPMODE system variable 1483 SNAPSTYL system variable 1484 SNAPTYPE system variable
SURFUNTRIM command 1061 SURFV system variable 1502 SWEEP command 1062 Symbol dialog box 1095 Symbols and Arrows tab (New Dimension Style dialog box) 328 SYSCODEPAGE system variable 1502 T Table Cell Format dialog box 1067 TABLE command about 1065 Manage Cell Content dialog box 1066 TABLEDIT command 1072 TABLEEXPORT command 1073 TABLEINDICATOR system variable 1503 TABLESTYLE command Table Cell Format dialog box 1067 TABSURF command 1073 Targa Image Options dialog box 899 TARGET system variable 1503 TARGETPO
TREESTAT command 1101 TRIM command 1102 TRIMMODE system variable 1521 True Color tab (Select Color dialog box) 208 TSPACEFAC system variable 1521 TSPACETYPE system variable 1522 TSTACKALIGN system variable 1522 TSTACKSIZE system variable 1523 U u U command 1106 UCS command 1107 UCS Details dialog box 1122 UCS dialog box 1117 UCS Icon dialog box 1115 UCS2DDISPLAYSETTING system variable 1523 UCS3DPARADISPLAYSETTING system variable 1524 UCS3DPERPDISPLAYSETTING system variable 1524 UCSAXISANG system variable 1
VPCOORDDISPLAY system variable 1538 VPLAYER command 1145 VPLAYEROVERRIDES system variable 1538 VPLAYEROVERRIDESMODE system variable 1539 VPMAX command 1148 VPMAXIMIZEDSTATE system variable 1539 VPMIN command 1149 VPOINT command 1149 VPORTS command 1151 VPROTATEASSOC system variable 1540 VSACURVATUREHIGH system variable 1540 VSACURVATURELOW system variable 1541 VSACURVATURETYPE system variable 1541 VSADRAFTANGLEHIGH system variable 1542 VSADRAFTANGLELOW system variable 1543 VSAZEBRACOLOR1 system variable 154
WINDOWAREACOLOR system variable 1570 wipeout WIPEOUT command 1171 WIPEOUTFRAME system variable WORLDUCS system variable 1571 WORLDVIEW system variable 1571 Write Block dialog box 1161 WRITESTAT system variable 1572 X XATTACH command about 1172 Attach External Reference dialog box 1173 External Reference visor 1175 XBIND command 1176 Xbind dialog box 1177 XCLIP command 1179 XCLIPFRAME system variable 1573 XDWGFADECTL system variable 1573 1600 | Index XEDGES command 1181 XEDIT system variable 1574 XFADECTL
